Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutE-6 Staff Report - Outdoor Learning Space Project NIBCONSENT ITEM E-6 TO: HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE CITY COUNCIL VIA: SERGIO GONZALEZ, CITY MANAGER FROM: NICO DE ANDA-SCAIA, DEPUTY CITY MANAGER DATE: DECEMBER 18, 2023 SUBJECT: APPROVE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE AZUSA CITY LIBRARY - OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CIP PROJECT NO. 2830511084/51023B AND AUTHORIZE STAFF TO SOLICIT A NOTICE OF INVITING BIDS FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES BACKGROUND: In March of 2022, the Azusa City Library was awarded a Targeted State Grant in the amount of $500,000 from the California State Library toward the design and construction of an Outdoor Learning Space project. Grant funds were formally accepted by the Azusa City Council at their meeting of July 18, 2022. Following a Request for Qualifications process, the City entered into a Professional Services Agreement (PSA) with Korn Randolph, Inc. for background review/survey and concept design services on November 3, 2022. Over the following months, different design concepts were considered and revised based on the library’s evolving programmatic needs and the functional restrictions of the facility. On June 19, 2023, the City Council approved a first amendment to the professional services agreement with Korn Randolph, Inc. for phase 2 of project development, to include the development of construction documents, geotechnical testing, bid-process coordination, and construction management services through project completion. The recommended actions will approve the proposed project plans and specifications and authorize staff to solicit bids from qualified contractors to construct the Library Outdoor Learning Space Project. RECOMMENDATIONS: Staff recommends that the City Council take the following actions: Approved City Council December 18, 2023 Notice of Inviting Bids – Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space Project December 18, 2023 Page 2 1) Approve the Plans and Specifications for CIP Project No. 2830511084/51023B; and 2) Authorize staff to solicit a Notice of Inviting Bids for the construction of CIP Project No. 2830511084/51023B Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space Project. ANALYSIS: The Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space Project is now entering the third phase of development and will be funded by a combination of state grant and city funding, with the goal of supporting Library programs and services for the broader Azusa community. The Project concept entails a gated flexible outdoor learning classroom and event space measuring approximately 5,000 square feet that will be situated adjacent and connected to the north-side of the Library. Highlights of the design include outdoor multipurpose programmatic and event space, a sustainable garden, reading nooks, an elevated deck for outdoor performances, and seating areas with views of Veterans Freedom Park and the local mountains. Following Council approval of the Project’s final plans and specifications, staff will solicit a notice of inviting bids for project construction. A tentative project timeline is included below for reference. Anticipated Project Timeline: December 2023 - January 2024 • Bid Process • Mandatory Bid-Walk • Questions & Answers • Bid Review Process February 2024 • Council Approval of Project Budget / Award of Construction Contract • Groundbreaking March - August 2024 • Project Construction • Initial Grant Funds Expended • Project Close-Out August 2024 • Post Construction Review • Project Ribbon Cutting and Grand Opening Notice of Inviting Bids – Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space Project December 18, 2023 Page 2 An initial $500,000 has been funded toward this project through a grant from the California State Library. Staff anticipate total project-related costs will be greater than this amount, and therefore city funding beyond the grant award will be necessary for project completion. Once construction bids have been received, staff will return to Council at a future date with reliable numbers for final project budget approval, and will outline the City’s plans for applying special fund dollars toward overall project costs in order to minimize impacts to the General Fund. FISCAL IMPACT: No fiscal impact associated with the recommended action at this time. As previously mentioned, $500,000 has been funded toward this project through a grant from the California State Library and is included in the FY 2023-2024 Budget under CIP account #2830511084/51023B. Following bid closing and review of construction proposals, staff will return to the City Council for approval of a budget amendment for the remainder of anticipated project costs and assignment of construction services contract. Prepared by: Reviewed by: Nico De Anda-Scaia Leila Hassen Deputy City Manager City Librarian Fiscal Review by: Reviewed and Approved by: Talika M. Johnson Sergio Gonzalez Director of Administrative Services City Manager Attachments: 1) Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications CITY OF AZUSA AZUSA CITY LIBRARY - OUTDOOR LEARING SPACE - 202401LB CCOONNTTRRAACCTT DDOOCCUUMMEENNTTSS Attachment 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. - i - NOTICE INVITING BIDS .................................................................................................................... 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ............................................................................................................ 3 BID FORM ...................................................................................................................................... 11 BID SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................... 11 CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE REGARDING WORKERS’ COMPENSATION ..................................... 15 BID BOND ...................................................................................................................................... 16 DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS .......................................................................................... 18 INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS ........................................................................................ 21 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ......................................................................................................... 28 CONTRACT ..................................................................................................................................... 29 PERFORMANCE BOND .................................................................................................................. 32 PAYMENT BOND............................................................................................................................ 37 GENERAL CONDITIONS .................................................................................................................. 39 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ....................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 79 PLANS AND DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................ 80 NOTICE INVITING BIDS - 1 - CITY OF AZUSA NOTICE INVITING BIDS The City of Azusa (“City”) will receive sealed bids for the Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space Project at the office of the City of Azusa City Clerk no later than January 24, 2024 11:00 am, at which time or thereafter said bids will be opened and read aloud. Bids received after this time will be returned unopened. Bids shall be valid for 60 calendar days after the bid opening date. Bids must be submitted on the City’s Bid Forms. Bidders may obtain a copy of the Contract Documents from the City’s PlanetBids Website located at https://pbsystem.planetbids.com/portal/47476/portal-home Bids must be accompanied by cash, a certified or cashier’s check, or a Bid Bond in favor of the City in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the submitted Total Bid Price. A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Walk will be held at The City of Azusa City Library located at 729 North Dalton Avenue, Azusa CA 91702, on the following day: January 8, 2023 at promptly at 10:00am. Please meet at the north end of the building. Limited parking is available on the street or adjacent park parking lot. Please plan accordingly as late arrivals will not be permitted to join the job-walk. Each and every Bidder MUST attend the Pre-Bid Walk. Prospective bidders MAY visit the Project Site without making. Bids WILL NOT be accepted from any bidder who did not attend the Pre-Bid Conference. Bidder’s questions pertaining to the Bid Documents and the Project shall be submitted to the City by 5:00 pm, January 10, 2024. Responses to Bid Questions provided prior to the deadline, will be posted by the City on January 16, 2024 by 5:00pm. Each bid shall be accompanied by the security referred to in the Contract Documents, the non - collusion affidavit, the list of proposed subcontractors, and all additional documentation required by the Instructions to Bidders. The successful bidder will be required to furnish the City with a Performance Bond equal to 100% of the successful bid, and a Paymen t Bond equal to 100% of the successful bid, prior to execution of the Contract. All bonds are to be secured from a surety that meets all of the State of California bonding requirements, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120, and is admitted by the State of California. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, the successful bidder may substitute certain securities for funds withheld by City to ensure his performance under the Contract. The Director of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the locality in which this work is to be performed for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract which will be awarded to the successful bidder, copies of which are online at http://www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr. A copy of these rates shall be posted by the NOTICE INVITING BIDS - 2 - successful bidder at the job site. The successful bidder and all subcontractor(s) under him, shall comply with all applicable Labor Code provisions, which include, but are not limited to th e payment of not less than the required prevailing rates to all workers employed by them in the execution of the Contract, the employment of apprentices, the hours of labor and the debarment of contractors and subcontractors. Each bidder shall be a licensed contractor pursuant to the Business and Professions Code and shall be licensed in the following appropriate classification(s) of contractor’s license(s), for the work bid upon, and must maintain the license(s) throughout the duration of the Contract: CLASS A - GENERAL ENGINEERING OR CLASS B – GENERAL CONTRACTOR LISCENSE Award of Contract: The City shall award the Contract for the Project to the lowest responsible bidder as determined from the base bid alone by the City. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids or to waive any irregularities or informalities in any bids or in the bidding process. For further information, contact Nico DeAnda-Scaia at (626) 812-5178 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 3 - CITY OF AZUSA INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. AVAILABILITY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bids must be submitted to the City on the Bid Forms which are a part of the Bid Package for the Project. Prospective bidders may obtain one (1) complete set of Contract Documents at no cost. Contract Documents may be obtained from the City at the location(s) and at the time(s) indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Prospective bidders are encouraged to telephone in advance to determine the availability of Contract Documents. Any applicable charges for the Contract Documents are outlined in the Notice Inviting Bids. The City may also make the Contract Documents available for review at one or more plan rooms, as indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Please Note: Prospective bidders who choose to review the Contract Documents at a plan room must contact the City to obtain the required Contract Documents if they decide to submit a bid for the Project. 2. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The City has made copies of the Contract Documents available, as indicated above. Bidders shall be solely responsible for examining the Project Site and the Contract Documents, including any Addenda issued during the bidding period, and for informing itself with respect to local labor availability, means of transportation, necessity for security, laws and codes, local permit requirements, wage scales, local tax structure, contractors’ licensing requirements, availability of required insurance, and other factors that could affect the Work. Bidders are responsible for consulting the standards referenced in the Contract. Failure of Bidder to so examine and inform itself shall be at its sole risk, and no relief for error or omission will be given except as required under State law. 3. INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Discrepancies in, and/or omissions from the Plans, Specifications or other Contract Documents or questions as to their meaning shall be immediately brought to the attention of the City by submission of a written request for an interpretation or correction to the City. Such submission, if any, must be sent via the City of Azusa’s PlanetBids website Questions and Answers option. Any interpretation of the Contract Documents will be made only by written addenda duly issued and posted online on the City of Azusa’s PlanetBids website. The City will not be responsible for any explanations or interpretations provided in any other manner. No person is authorized to make any oral interpretation of any provision in the Contract Documents to any bidder, and no bidder should rely on any such oral interpretation. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 4 - Bids shall include complete compensation for all items that are noted in the Contract Documents as the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. INSPECTION OF SITE; PRE-BID CONFERENCE AND SITE WALK Each prospective bidder is responsible for fully acquainting itself with the conditions of the Project Site (which may include more than one site), as well as those relating to the construction and labor of the Project, to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions which may impact the cost or effort required to complete the Project. To this end, a Pre-Bid Conference and Site Walk will be held on the date(s) and time(s) indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids. 5. ADDENDA The City reserves the right to revise the Contract Documents prior to the bid opening date. Revisions, if any, shall be made by written Addenda. All addenda issued by the City shall be included in the bid and made part of the Contract Documents. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104.5, if the City issues an Addendum which includes material changes to the Project less than 72 hours prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the City will extend the deadline for submission of bids. The City may determine, in its sole discretion, whether an Addendum warrants postponement of the bid submission date. Copies of Addenda will be posted online via the City of Azusa’s Planetbids website. Please Note: Bidders are responsible for ensuring that they have received any and all Addenda. To this end, each bidder should verify the Addendum tab of the City of Azusa’s Planetbids website for any Addenda issued, if any, prior to the bid opening. 6. ALTERNATE BIDS If alternate bid items are called for in the Contract Documents, the lowest bid will be determined on the basis of the base bid only. However, the City may choose to award the contract on the basis of the base bid alone or the base bid and any alternate or combination of alternates. The time required for completion of the alternate bid items has been factored into the Contract duration and no additional Contract time will be awarded for any of the alternate bid items. The City may elect to include one or more of the alternate bid items, or to otherwise remove certain work from the Project scope of work, accordingly each Bidder must ensure that each bid item contains a proportionate share of profit, overhead and other costs or expenses which will be incurred by the Bidder. 7. COMPLETION OF BID FORMS Bids shall only be prepared using copies of the Bid Forms which are included in the Contract Documents. The use of substitute bid forms other than clear and correct photocopies of those provided by the City will not be permitted. Bids shall be executed by an authorized signatory as described in these Instructions to Bidders. In addition, Bidders shall fill in all blank spaces (including inserting “N/A” where applicable) and initial all interlineations, alterations, or INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 5 - erasures to the Bid Forms. Bidders shall neither delete, modify, nor supplement the printed matter on the Bid Forms nor make substitutions thereon. USE OF BLACK OR BLUE INK, INDELIBLE PENCIL OR A TYPEWRITER IS REQUIRED. Deviations in the bid form may result in the bid being deemed non-responsive. 8. MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS Each Bidder shall submit its Bid in strict conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unauthorized additions, modifications, revisions, conditions, limitations, exclusions or provisions attached to a Bid may render it non-responsive and may cause its rejection. Bidders shall neither delete, modify, nor supplement the printed matter on the Bid Forms, nor make substitutions thereon. Oral, telephonic and electronic modifications will not be considered, unless the Notice Inviting Bids authorizes the submission of electronic bids and modifications thereto and such modifications are made in accordance with the Notice Inviting Bids. 9. DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS Pursuant to State law, the Bidders must designate the name and location of each subcontractor who will perform work or render services for the Bidder in an amount that exceeds one-half of one percent (1/2%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price, as well as the portion of work each such subcontractor will perform on the form provided herein by the City. No additional time will be provided to bidders to submit any of the requested information in the Designation of Subcontractor form. 10. LICENSING REQUIREMENTS Pursuant to Section 7028.15 of the Business and Professions Code and Section 3300 of the Public Contract Code, all bidders must possess proper licenses for performance o f this Contract. Subcontractors must possess the appropriate licenses for each specialty subcontracted. Pursuant to Section 7028.5 of the Business and Professions Code, the City shall consider any bid submitted by a contractor not currently licensed in accordance with state law and pursuant to the requirements found in the Contract Documents to be nonresponsive, and the City shall reject the Bid. The City shall have the right to request, and Bidders shall provide within five (5) calendar days, evidence satisfactory to the City of all valid license(s) currently held by that Bidder and each of the Bidder’s subcontractors, before awarding the Contract. 11. SIGNING OF BIDS All Bids submitted shall be executed by the Bidder or its authorized representative. Bidders may be asked to provide evidence in the form of an authenticated resolution of its Board of Directors or a Power of Attorney evidencing the capacity of the person signing the Bid to bind the Bidder to each Bid and to any Contract arising therefrom. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 6 - If a Bidder is a joint venture or partnership, it may be asked to submit an authenticated Power of Attorney executed by each joint venturer or partner appointing and designating one of the joint venturers or partners as a management sponsor to execute the Bid on behalf of Bidder. Only that joint venturer or partner shall execute the Bid. The Power of Attorney shall also: (1) authorize that particular joint venturer or partner to act for and bind Bidder in all matters relating to the Bid; and (2) provide that each venturer or partner shall be jointly and severally liable for any and all of the duties and obligations of Bidder assumed under the Bid and under any Contract arising therefrom. The Bid shall be executed by the designated joint venturer or partner on behalf of the joint venture or partnership in its legal name. 12. BID GUARANTEE (BOND) Each bid shall be accompanied by: (a) cash; (b) a certified check made payable to the City; (c) a cashier’s check made payable to the City; or (d) a bid bond payable to the City executed by the bidder as principal and surety as obligor in an amount not less than 10% of the maximum amount of the bid. Personal sureties and unregistered surety companies are unacceptable. The surety insurer shall be California admitted surety insurer, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120. The cash, check or bid bond shall be given as a guarantee that the bidder shall execute the Contract if it be awarded to the bidder , shall provide the payment and performance bonds and insurance certificates and endorsements as required herein within ten (10) calendar days after notification of the award of the Contract to the bidder . Failure to provide the required documents may result in forfeiture of the bidder’s bid deposit or bond to the City and the City may award the Contract to the next lowest responsible bidder, or may call for new bids. 13. SUBMISSION OF SEALED BIDS Once the Bid and supporting documents have been completed and signed as set forth herein, they shall be placed, along with the Bid Guarantee and other required materials in an envelope, sealed, addressed and delivered or mailed, postage prepaid to the City at the place and to the attention of the person indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids. No oral or telephonic bids will be considered. No forms transmitted via the internet, e-mail, facsimile, or any other electronic means will be considered unless specifically authorized by City as provided herein . The envelope shall also contain the following in the lower left-hand corner thereof: Bid of (Bidder’s Name) for the AZUSA CITY LIBRARY OUTDOOR LEARING SPACE Only where expressly permitted in the Notice Inviting Bids, may Bidders submit their bids via electronic transmission pursuant to Public Contract Code Sections 1600 and 1601. The acceptable method(s) of electronic transmission shall be stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. City reserves the right to not accept electronically transmitted bids where not speci fically authorized in the Notice Inviting Bids, and may reject any bid not strictly complying with City’s designated methods for delivery. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 7 - 14. DELIVERY AND OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be received by the City at the address shown in the Notice Inviting Bids up to the date and time shown therein. The City will leave unopened any Bid received after the specified date and time, and any such unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder. It is the Bidder’s sole responsibility to ensure that its Bid is received as specified. Bids may be submitted earlier than the dates(s) and time(s) indicated. Bids will be opened at the date and time stated in the Notice Inviting Bids, and the amount of each Bid will be read aloud and recorded. All Bidders may, if they desire, att end the opening of Bids. The City may in its sole discretion, elect to postpone the opening of the submitted Bids. City reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid. In the event of a discrepancy between the written amount of the Bid Price and the numerical amount of the Bid Price, the written amount shall govern. 15. WITHDRAWAL OF BID Prior to bid opening, a Bid may be withdrawn by the Bidder only by means of a written request signed by the Bidder or its properly authorized representative. 16. BASIS OF AWARD; BALANCED BIDS The City shall award the Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid. The City may reject any Bid which, in its opinion when compared to other bids received o r to the City’s internal estimates, does not accurately reflect the cost to perform the Work. The City may reject as non-responsive any bid which unevenly weights or allocates costs, including but not limited to overhead and profit to one or more particular bid items. 17. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS; INTEREST IN MORE THAN ONE BID No bidder shall be allowed to make, submit or be interested in more than one bid. However, a person, firm, corporation or other entity that has submitted a subproposal to a bidder, o r that has quoted prices of materials to a bidder, is not thereby disqualified from submitting a subproposal or quoting prices to other bidders submitting a bid to the City. No person, firm, corporation, or other entity may submit subproposal to a bidder, or quote prices of materials to a bidder, when also submitting a prime bid on the same Project. 18. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The successful bidder shall procure the insurance in the form and in the amount specified in the Contract Documents. 19. AWARD PROCESS Once all Bids are opened and reviewed to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, the City Council may award the contract. The apparent successful Bidder should begin INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 8 - to prepare the following documents: (1) the Performance Bond; (2) the Payment Bond; and (3) the required insurance certificates and endorsements. Once the City notifies the Bidder of the award, the Bidder will have ten (10) consecutive calendar days from the date of this notification to execute the Contract and supply the City with all of the required documents and certifications. Regardless whether the Bidder supplies the required documents and certifications in a timely manner, the Contract time will begin to run ten (10) calendar days from the date of the notification. Once the City receives all of the properly drafted and executed documents and certifications from the Bidder, the City shall issue a Notice to Proceed to that Bidder. 20. FILING OF BID PROTESTS Bidders may file a “protest” of a Bid with the City’s Deputy City Manager. In order for a Bidder’s protest to be considered valid, the protest must: A. Be filed in writing within five (5) calendar days after the bid opening date; B. Clearly identify the specific irregularity or accusation; C. Clearly identify the specific City staff determination or recommendation being protested; D. Specify, in detail, the grounds of the protest and the facts supporting the protest; and E. Include all relevant, supporting documentation with the protest at time of filing. If the protest does not comply with each of these requirements, it will be rejected as invalid. If the protest is valid, the City’s Deputy City Manager, or other designated City staff member, shall review the basis of the protest and all relevant information. The Deputy City Manager will provide a written decision to the protestor. The protestor may then appeal the decision of the Deputy City Manager to the City Manager. 21. WORKERS COMPENSATION Each bidder shall submit the Contractor’s Certificate Regarding Workers’ Compensation form. 22. SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITY The Contract Documents call for monthly progress payments based upon the percentage of the work completed. The City will retain ten percent (10%) of each progress payment as provided by the Contract Documents. At the request and expense of the successful Bidder, the City will substitute securities for the amount so retained in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 22300. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 9 - 23. PREVAILING WAGES The City has obtained from the Director of the Department of Industrial Rela tions the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the locality in which this work is to be performed for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract. These rates are on file and available online at http://www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr. Bidders are advised that a copy of these rates must be posted by the successful Bidder at the job site(s). 24. DEBARMENT OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS In accordance with the provisions of the Labor Code, contractors or subcontractors may not perform work on a public works project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a public project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or Section 1777.7 of the Labor Code. Any contract on a public works project entered into between a contractor and a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public works contract. Any public money that is paid to a debarred subcontractor by the Contractor for the Project shal l be returned to the City. The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a debarred subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the Project. 25. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND REQUIREMENTS Within the time specified in the Contract Documents, the Bidder to whom a Contract is awarded shall deliver to the City four identical counterparts of the Performance Bond and Payment Bond in the form supplied by the City and included in the Contract Documents. Failure to do so may, in the sole discretion of City, result in the forfeiture of the Bid Guarantee. The surety supplying the bond must be an admitted surety insurer, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120, authorized to do business as such in the State of California a nd satisfactory to the City. The Performance Bond and the Payment Bond shall be for one hundred percent (100%) of the Total Bid Price. 26. REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTIONS The successful bidder shall comply with the substitution request provisions set forth in the Special Conditions, including any deadlines for substitution requests which may occur prior to the bid opening date. 27. SALES AND OTHER APPLICABLE TAXES, PERMITS, LICENSES AND FEES Contractor and its subcontractors performing work under this Contract will be required to pay California sales tax and other applicable taxes, and to pay for permits, licenses and fees required by the agencies with authority in the jurisdiction in which the work will be located, unless otherwise expressly provided by the Contract Documents. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 10 - 28. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT As required herein the Bidder to whom an award is made shall execute the Contract in the amount determined by the Contract Documents. The City may require appropriate evidence that the persons executing the Contract are duly empowered to do so. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SCHEDULE - 11 - BID FORM NAME OF BIDDER: The undersigned, hereby declare that we have carefully examined the location of the proposed Work, and have read and examined the Contract Documents, including all p lans, specifications, and all addenda, if any, for the following Project: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space We hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and services, and to discharge all duties and obligations necessary and required to perform and complete the Project for the following TOTAL BID PRICE: BID SCHEDULE NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT OF MEASURE EST. QTY. UNIT PRICE ITEM COST 1. Initial Mobilization LS 1 2. Demolition, Including Diversion of Waste Recycling LS 1 3. Storm Drainage LS 1 4. Site Grading LS 1 5. Final Clean-up LS 1 6. 90 Day Landscape Maintenance LS 1 7. Cast in Place Conc Wall LS 1 8. Stone Wall LS 1 9. Concrete Paving LS 1 10. Sealing of all Conc and Stone/Masonry LS 1 11. Landscape Boulders LS 1 12. Decomposed Granite Surfacing LS 1 13. Steel Fences LS 1 14. Pedestrian Gate EA 2 BID SCHEDULE - 12 - 15. Stacking, Accordion Gates EA 2 16. Wood Deck/Steps LS 1 17. Steel Fascia Trim at Wood Deck Edges and Step Risers LS 1 18. Low Voltage lighting LS 1 19. String Lighting incl. Support Cable and Hardware LS 1 20. Posts For String Lights LS 1 21. Linear Light at Deck Edge/Steps LS 1 22. Outdoor Electrical Outlets LS 1 23. New Irrigation Controller, incl. Cellular Subscription and New Cabinet LS 1 24. New Irrigation mainline, valves and emission devices LS 1 25. Planting Installation (except lawn), include steel edging at planter beds LS 1 26. Mulch LS 1 27. New Lawn, incl. Patching the Park Lawn LS 1 In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the item cost set forth for a unit basis item, the unit price shall prevail and, shall be utilized as the basis for determining the lowest responsive, responsible bidder. However, if the amount set forth as a unit price is ambiguous, unintelligible or uncertain for any cause, or is omitted, or is the same amount as the entry in the “Item Cost” column, then the amount set forth in the “Item Cost” column for the item shall prevail and shall be divided by the estimated quantity for the item and the price thus obtained shall be the unit price. Final payment shall be determined by the Engineer from measured quantities of work performed based upon the unit price. TOTAL BID PRICE (BASED ON BID SCHEDULE TOTAL OF UNIT PRICES): $ ________________________________________ Total Bid Price in Numbers __________________________________________________________________________ BID SCHEDULE - 13 - Total Bid Price in Written Form In case of discrepancy between the written price and the numerical price, the written price shall prevail. The undersigned agrees that this Bid Form constitutes a firm offer to the City which cannot be withdrawn for the number of calendar days indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids from and after the bid opening, or until a Contract for the Work is fully executed by the City and a third party, whichever is earlier. If the Contract Documents specify alternate bid items, the following Alternate Bid amounts shall be added to or deducted from the Total Bid Price entered above (please check the appropriate box), at the City’s sole option. The City can choose to include one or more of the Alternate Bids in the Project. If any of the Alternate Bids are selected by the City, the resulting amount shall be added to or deducted from the Total Bid Price for the Project. The City may select one or more of the Alternate Bids at the below stated Bid Price up to sixty (60) days following award of the Contract. The City can award/select Alternate Bid items at any time(s). ALTERNATE BIDS BID PRICE (IN WRITTEN FORM) BID PRICE (IN NUMBERS) ALTERNATE #1 X Add  Deduct WATER FEATURE ALTERNATE #2 X Add  Deduct RETRACTABLE CANOPY (INCLUDING SUPPORT CABLES)-MANUAL ALTERNATE #3 X Add  Deduct IRRIGATION MODIFICATIONS – VETERANS FREEDOM PARK ALTERNATE #4  Add  Deduct The Contract duration shall commence on the date stated in the City’s Notice to Proceed, and shall be completed by the Contractor in the time specified in the Contract Documents. In no case shall the Contractor commence construction prior to the date stated in the City’s Notice to Proceed. Bidder certifies that it is licensed in accordance with the law providing for the registration of Contractors, License No. _________, Expiration Date _______, class of license _____. If the bidder is a joint venture, each member of the joint venture must include the above information. BID SCHEDULE - 14 - The undersigned acknowledges receipt, understanding and full consideration of the following addenda to the Contract Documents. Addenda No. _______________________ Addenda No. _______________________ Addenda No. _______________________ 1. Attached is the required bid security in the amount of not less than 10% of the Total Bid Price. 2. Attached is the fully executed Non-Collusion Affidavit form. 3. Attached is the completed Designation of Subcontractors form. 4. Attached is the completed Bidder Information Form. 5. Attached is the completed Contractor’s Certificate Regarding Workers’ Compensation form. I hereby certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California, that all of the information submitted in connection with this Bid and all of the representations made herein are true and correct. Name of Bidder Signature Name and Title Dated CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE REGARDING WORKERS’ COMPENSATION - 15 - CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE REGARDING WORKERS’ COMPENSATION I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self -insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this Contract. Name of Bidder Signature Name Title Dated BID BOND - 16 - BID BOND The makers of this bond are, _____________________________ ______________________________________________, as Principal, and _______________ ___________________________________________, as Surety and are held and firmly bound unto the City of Azusa, hereinafter called the City, in the penal sum of TEN PERCENT (10%) OF THE TOTAL BID PRICE of the Principal submitted to CITY for the work described below, for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated ____________ , 20 ____, for Azusa City Library – Outdoor Learning Space. If the Principal does not withdraw its bid within the time specified in the Contract Documents; and if the Principal is awarded the Contract and provide s all documents to the City as required by the Contract Documents; then this obligation shall be null and void. Otherwise, this bond will remain in full force and effect. Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents shall in affect its obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such changes. In the event a lawsuit is brought upon this bond by the City and judgment is recovered, the Surety shall pay all litigation expenses incurred by the City in such suit, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, court costs, expert witness fees and expenses. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bound parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this _______ day of ________________, 20____, the name and corporate seal of each corporation. (Corporate Seal) Principal By Title (Corporate Seal) Surety By Attorney-in-Fact (Attach Attorney-in-Fact Certificate) Title BID BOND - 17 - STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF On before me, _______________________ (here insert name and title of the officer), personally appeared ______ , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of th e State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature __________________________________ (Seal) NOTE: A copy of the Power-of-Attorney to local representatives of the bonding company must be attached hereto. DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS - 18 - DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS In compliance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, each bidder shall set forth below: (a) the name and the location of the place of business and (b) the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the work in an amount in excess of one -half of one percent (1/2%) of the Contractor’s Total Bid Price. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the work involves streets and highways, then the Contractor shall list each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to Contractor in or about the work in an amoun t in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2%) of the Contractor’s Total Bid Price or $10,000, whichever is greater. No additional time shall be granted to provide the below requested information. If no subcontractor is specified, for a portion of the work, or if more than one subcontractor is specified for the same portion of Work, to be performed under the Contract in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2%) of the Contractor’s Total Bid Price or $10,000, whichever is greater if the work involves street s or highways, then the Contractor shall be deemed to have agreed that it is fully qualified to perform that Work, and that it shall perform that portion itself. Portion of Work Subcontractor Location of Business DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS - 19 - Portion of Work Subcontractor Location of Business DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS - 20 - Portion of Work Subcontractor Location of Business Name of Bidder Signature Name and Title Dated INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS - 21 - INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS A. INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER [**Indicate not applicable (“N/A”) where appropriate.**] NOTE: Where Bidder is a joint venture, pages shall be duplicated and information provided for all parties to the joint venture. 1.0 Name of Bidder: ___________________________________________ 2.0 Type, if Entity: ___________________________________________ 3.0 Bidder Address: ___________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Facsimile Number Telephone Number 4.0 How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business as a Contractor? ______________________________ 5.0 How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business under its present name? ________________________ 5.1 Under what other or former names has Bidder’s organization operated?:_______________________________________________ 6.0 If Bidder’s organization is a corporation, answer the following: 6.1 Date of Incorporation: ________________________________ 6.2 State of Incorporation: ________________________________ 6.3 President’s Name: ________________________________ 6.4 Vice-President’s Name(s): ________________________________ ________________________________ 6.5 Secretary’s Name: ________________________________ 6.6 Treasurer’s Name: ________________________________ INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS - 22 - 7.0 If an individual or a partnership, answer the following: 7.1 Date of Organization: ______________________________________ 7.2 Name and address of all partners (state whether general or limited partnership): ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 8.0 If other than a corporation or partnership, describ e organization and name principals: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 9.0 List other states in which Bidder’s organization is legally qualified to do business. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 10.0 What type of work does the Bidder normally perform with its own forces? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 11.0 Has Bidder ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? If so, note when, where, and why: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 12.0 Within the last five years, has any officer or partner of Bidder’s organization ever been an officer or partner of another organization when it failed to complete a contract? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS - 23 - 14.0 List Trade References: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 15.0 List Bank References (Bank and Branch Address): ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 16.0 Name of Bonding Company and Name and Address of Agent: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS - 24 - B. LIST OF CURRENT PROJECTS (Backlog) [**Duplicate Page if needed for listing additional current projects.**] Project Description of Bidder’s Work Completion Date Cost of Bidder’s Work INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS - 25 - C. LIST OF COMPLETED PROJECTS - LAST THREE YEARS [**Duplicate Page if needed for listing additional completed projects.**] Please include only those projects which are similar enough to demonstrate Bidder’s ability to perform the required Work. Project Client Description of Bidder’s Work Period of Performance Cost of Bidder’s Work INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS - 26 - D. EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS QUESTIONNAIRE Personnel: The Bidder shall identify the key personnel to be assigned to this project in a management, construction supervision or engineering capacity. 1. List each person’s job title, name and percent of time to be allocated to this project: 2. Summarize each person’s specialized education: 3. List each person’s years of construction experience relevant to the project: 4. Summarize such experience: Bidder agrees that personnel named in this Bid will remain on this Project until completion of all relevant Work, unless substituted by personnel of equivalent experience and qualifications approved in advance by the City. INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS - 27 - Additional Bidder’s Statements: If the Bidder feels that there is additional information which has not been included in the questionnaire above, and which would contribute to the qualification review, it may add that information in a statement here or on an attached sheet, appropriately marked: E. VERIFICATION AND EXECUTION These Bid Forms shall be executed only by a duly authorized official of the Bidder: I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing information is true and correct: Name of Bidder Signature Name Title Dated NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT - 28 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT I, , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is of ______________________ the party making the attached bid; that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awardin g the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof , or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid. I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct. Name of Bidder Signature Name Title Dated CONTRACT - 29 - CONTRACT THIS CONTRACT is made this _____ day of _________, 200__, in the County of Los Angeles, State of California, by and between the City of Azusa, hereinafter called City, and ______________________________, hereinafter called Contractor. The City and the Contractor for the considerations stated herein agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. SCOPE OF WORK. The Contractor shall perform all Work within the time stipulated in the Contract and shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, utility services, and transportation to complete all of the Work required in strict compliance with the Contract Documents as specified in Article 5 below for the following Project: AZUSA CITY LIBRARY – OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE The Contractor and its surety shall be liable to the City for any damages arising as a result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with this obligation. ARTICLE 2. TIME FOR COMPLETION. The Work shall be commenced immediately following award and execution of the contract. The Contractor shall complete all Work required by the Contract Documents within ONE-HUNDRED AND FIFTY calendar days from the commencement date. By its signature hereunder, Contractor agrees the time for completion set forth above is adequate and reasonable to complete the Work. Due to grant funding constraints, bidder should have the capacity and schedule to begin work immediately. Ground breaking, construction commencement and first invoicing must occur no later than March 1, 2024. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT PRICE. The City shall pay to the Contractor as full compensation for the performance of the Contract, subject to any additions or deductions as provided in the Contract Documents, and including all applicable taxes and costs, the sum of ____________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________________________). Payment shall be made as set forth in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 4. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. In accordance with Government Code section 53069.85, it is agreed that the Contractor will pay the City the sum of $500 for each and every calendar day of delay beyond the time prescribed in the Contract Documents for finishing the Work, as Liquidated Damages and not as a penalty or forfeiture. In the event this is not paid, the Contractor agrees the City may deduct that amount from any money due or that may become due the Contractor under the Contract. This Article does not exclude recovery of oth er damages specified in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 5. COMPONENT PARTS OF THE CONTRACT. The “Contract Documents” include the following: CONTRACT - 30 - Notice Inviting Bids Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Contractor’s Certificate Regarding Workers’ Compensation Bid Bond Designation of Subcontractors Information Required of Bidders Non-Collusion Affidavit form Contract Performance Bond Payment Bond General Conditions Special Conditions Technical Specifications Addenda Plans and Drawings Approved and fully executed change orders Any other documents contained in or incorporated into the Contract The Contactor shall complete the Work in strict accordance with all of the Contract Documents. All of the Contract Documents are intended to be complementary. Work required b y one of the Contract Documents and not by others shall be done as if required by all. This Contract shall supersede any prior agreement of the parties. ARTICLE 6. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW. Each and every provision of law required to be included in these Contract Documents shall be deemed to be included in these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the California Labor Code applicable to this Project. ARTICLE 7. INDEMNIFICATION. Contractor shall provide indemnification as set forth in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 8. PREVAILING WAGES. Contractor shall be required to pay the prevailing rate of wages in accordance with the Labor Code which such rates may be obtained online at http//www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr. and which must be posted at the job site. ARTICLE 9. DECLARATION OF POLITICAL CONTRIBUTIONS. Consultant shall, throughout the term of this Agreement, submit to City an annual statement in writing declaring any political contributions of money, in-kind services, or loan made to any member of the city council within the previous twelve-month period by the Consultant and all of Consultant's employees, including any employee(s) that Consultant intends to assign to perform the Services described in this Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Contract has been duly executed by the above-named CONTRACT - 31 - parties, on the day and year above written. [NAME OF CONTRACTOR] By _________________________________ Name and Title: ______________________ License No. ___________________________ CITY OF AZUSA By______________________________ PERFORMANCE BOND - 32 - PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT WHEREAS, ___________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “City”) has awarded to ____________________, (hereinafter referred to as the “C ontractor”) _______________________ an agreement for ______________________________ (hereinafter referred to as the “Project”). WHEREAS, the work to be performed by the Contractor is more particularly set forth in the Contract Documents for the Project dated ________________, (hereinafter referred to as “Contract Documents”), the terms and conditions of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference; and WHEREAS, the Contractor is required by said Contract Documents to perform the terms thereof and to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said Contract Documents. NOW, THEREFORE, we, _______________, the undersigned Contractor and _____________________________________________ as Surety, a corporation organized and duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of California, are held and firmly bound unto the City in the sum of ___________________________ DOLLARS, ($____________), said sum being not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total amount of the Contract, for which amount well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that, if the Contractor, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on its part , to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their intent and meaning; and shall faithfully fulfill all obligations including the one-year guarantee of all materials and workmanship; and shall indemnify and save harmless the City, its officers and agents, as stipulated in said Contract Documents, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount specified therefore, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by City in enforcing such obligation. As a condition precedent to the satisfactory completion of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the above obligation shall hold good for a period of one (1) year after the acceptance of the work by City, during which time if Contractor shall fail to make full, complete, and satisfactory repair and replacements and totally protect the City from loss or damage resulting from or caused by defective materials or faulty PERFORMANCE BOND - 33 - workmanship. The obligations of Surety hereunder shall continue so long as any obligation of Contractor remains. Nothing herein shall limit the City’s rights or the Contractor or Surety’s obligations under the Contract, law or equity, including, but not limited to, California Code of Civil Procedure section 337.15. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by the City to be, in default under the Contract Documents, the Surety shall remedy the default pursuant to the Contract Documents, or shall promptly, at the City’s option: (1) Take over and complete the Project in accordance with all terms and conditions in the Contract Documents; or (2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Project in accordance with all terms and conditions in the Contract Documents and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, arrange for a Contract between such bidder, the Surety and the City, and make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion of the Project, less the balance of the contract price, including other costs and damages for which Surety may be liable. The term “balance of the contract price” as used in this paragraph shall mean the total amount payable to Contractor by the City under the Contract and any modification thereto, less any amount previously paid by the City to the Contractor and any other set offs pursuant to the Contract Documents. (3) Permit the City to complete the Project in any manner consistent with California law and make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion of the Project, less the balan ce of the contract price, including other costs and damages for which Surety may be liable. The term “balance of the contract price” as used in this paragraph shall mean the total amount payable to Contractor by the City under the Contract and any modification thereto, less any amount previously paid by the City to the Contractor and any other set offs pursuant to the Contract Documents. Surety expressly agrees that the City may reject any contractor or subcontractor which may be proposed by Surety in fulfillment of its obligations in the event of default by the Contractor. Surety shall not utilize Contractor in completing the Project nor shall Surety accept a bid from Contractor for completion of the Project if the CITY, when declaring the Contractor in default, notifies Surety of the City’s objection to Contractor’s further participation in the completion of the Project. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Project to be performed thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Project. PERFORMANCE BOND - 34 - [Remainder of Page Left Intentionally Blank.] PERFORMANCE BOND - 35 - IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this _______ day of ______________, 200___. _________________________________________ CONTRACTOR/PRINCIPAL _________________________________________ Name By_______________________________________ SURETY: By: ______________________________________ Attorney-In-Fact The rate of premium on this bond is ____________ per thousand. The total amount of premium charges, $_______________________________. (The above must be filled in by corporate attorney.) THIS IS A REQUIRED FORM Any claims under this bond may be addressed to: (Name and Address of Surety) ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ (Name and Address of Agent or ___________________________________________ Representative for service of process in California, if different ___________________________________________ from above) ___________________________________________ (Telephone number of Surety and ___________________________________________ Agent or Representative for service of process in California PERFORMANCE BOND - 36 - STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF On before me, (here insert name and title of the officer), personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the sa me in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature __________________________________ (Seal) NOTE: A copy of the Power-of-Attorney to local representatives of the bonding company must be attached hereto. PAYMENT BOND - 37 - PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS That WHEREAS, the City of Azusa (hereinafter designated as the “City”), by action taken or a resolution passed ___________ , 20____ has awarded to ________________ hereinafter designated as the “Principal,” a contract for the work described as follows: ____________________________________________________________________________ (the “Project”); and WHEREAS, said Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection with said contract; providing that if said Principal or any of its Subcontractors shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender, equipment, or other supplies used in, upon, for or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of said Principal and its Subcontractors with respect to such work or labor the Surety on this bond will pay for the same to the extent hereinafter set forth. NOW THEREFORE, we, the Principal and __________________________ as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City in the penal sum of ______________ Dollars ($___________) lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if said Principal, his or its subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall fail to pay any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the Civil Code, fail to pay for any materials, provisions or other supplies, used in, upon, for or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor thereon of any kind, or amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under the contract, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department or Franchise Tax Board from the wages of employees of the contractor and his subcontractors pursuant to Section 18663 of the Revenue and Taxation Code, with respect to such work and labor the Surety or Sureties will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum herein above specified, and also, in case suit is brought upon this bond, all litigation expenses incurred by the City in such suit, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, court costs, expert witness fees and investigation expenses. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the Civil Code so as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. It is further stipulated and agreed that the Surety on this bond shall not be exonerated or released from the obligation of this bond by any change, extension of time for performance, addition, alteration or modification in, to, or of any contract, plans, specifications, or agreement pertaining or relating to any scheme or work of improvement herein above described, or pertaining or relating to the furnishing of labor, materials, or equipment therefore, nor by any change or modification of any terms of payment or extension of the time for any payment pertaining or relating to any scheme or work of improvement herein above described, nor by any rescission or attempted rescission or attempted rescission of the contract, agreement or bond, nor by any conditions precedent or subsequent in the bond attempting to limit the right PAYMENT BOND - 38 - of recovery of claimants otherwise entitled to recover under any such contract or agreement or under the bond, nor by any fraud practiced by any person other than the claimant seeking to recover on the bond and that this bond be construed most strongly against the Surety and in favor of all persons for whose benefit such bond is given, and under no circumstances shall Surety be released from liability to those for whose benefit such bond has been given, by reason of any breach of contract between the owner or City and original contractor or on the part of any obligee named in such bond, but the sole conditions of recovery sha ll be that claimant is a person described in Section 3110 or 3112 of the Civil Code, and has not been paid the full amount of his claim and that Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, addition, alteration or modification herein mentioned. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, two (2) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed unoriginal thereof, have been duly executed by the Principal and Surety above named, on the _____ day of ______________________ 20___ the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed b its undersigned representative pursuant to authority of its governing body. (Corporate Seal of Principal, if corporation) Principal (Property Name of Contractor) By (Signature of Contractor) (Seal of Surety) Surety By Attorney in Fact (Attached Attorney-In-Fact Certificate and Required Acknowledgements) *Note: Appropriate Notarial Acknowledgments of Execution by Contractor and +surety and a power of Attorney MUST BE ATTACHED. GENERAL CONDITIONS 39 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1. DEFINITIONS a. Acceptable, Acceptance or words of similar import shall be understood to be the acceptance of the Engineer and/or the City . b. Act of God an Act of God is an earthquake of magnitude 3.5 on the Richter scale and tidal waves. c. Approval means written authorization by Engineer and/or City . d. Contract Documents includes all documents as stated in the Contract. e. City and Contractor are those stated in the Contract. The terms City and Owner may be used interchangeably. f. Day shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically designated. g. Engineer shall mean the City Engineer, or his or her designee, of the City of Azusa, acting either directly or through properly authorized agents, such as agents acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. Also sometimes referred to as the “City’s Representative” or “Representative” in the Contract Documents. h. Equal, Equivalent, Satisfactory, Directed, Designated, Selected, As Required and similar words shall mean the written approval, selection, satisfaction, direction, or similar action of the Engineer and/or City. i. Indicated, Shown, Detailed, Noted, Scheduled or words of similar meaning shall mean that reference is made to the drawings, unless otherwise noted. It shall be understood that the direction, designation, selection, or similar import of the Engineer and/or City is intended, unless stated otherwise. j. Install means the complete installation of any item, equipment or material. k. Material shall include machinery, equipment, manufactured articles, or construction such as form work, fasteners, etc., and any other classes of material to be furnished in connection with the Contract. All materials shall be new unless specified otherwise. l. Perform shall mean that the Contractor, at Contractor’s expense, shall take all actions necessary to complete The Work, including furnishing of necessary labor, tools, and equipment, and providing and installing Materials that are indicated, specified, or required to complete such performance. m. Project is The Work planned by City as provided in the Contract Documents. GENERAL CONDITIONS 40 n. Provide shall include provide complete in place, that is furnish, install, test and make ready for use. o. Recyclable Waste Materials shall mean materials removed from the Project site which are required to be diverted to a recycling center rather than an area landfill. Recyclable Waste Materials include asphalt, concrete, brick, concrete block, and rock. p. Specifications means that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the work. Except for Sections 1-9 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (“Greenbook”), 2021 Edition, which are specifically excluded from incorporation into these Contract Documents, the Work shall be done in accordance with the Greenbook, including all current supplements, addenda, and revisions thereof. In the case of conflict between the Greenbook and the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall prevail. q. The Work means the entire improvement planned by the City pursuant to the Contract Documents. r. Work means labor, equipment and materials incorporated in, or to be incorporated in the construction covered by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by all. b. Interpretations. The Contract Documents are intended to be fully cooperative and to be complementary. If Contractor observes that any documents are in conflict, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing. In case of conflicts between the Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. Change Orders or Work Change Directives 2. Addenda 3. Special Provisions (or Special Conditions) 4. Technical Specifications 5. Plans (Contract Drawings) 6. Contract 7. General Conditions 8. Instructions to Bidders 9. Notice Inviting Bids 10. Contractor’s Bid Forms 11. Greenbook 12. Standard Plans 13. Reference Documents GENERAL CONDITIONS 41 With reference to the Drawings, the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. Figures govern over scaled dimensions 2. Detail drawings govern over general drawings 3. Addenda or Change Order drawings govern over Contract Drawings 4. Contract Drawings govern over Standard Drawings 5. Contract Drawings govern over Shop Drawings c. Conflicts in Contract Documents. Notwithstanding the orders of precedence established above, in the event of conflicts, the higher or more restrictive standard shall always apply. d. Organization of Contract Documents. Organization of the Contract Documents into divisions, sections, and articles, and arrangement of drawings sh all not control the Contractor in dividing The Work among subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTS DOCUMENTS: COPIES & MAINTENANCE Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, a copy of the Contract Documents. Additional copies may be obtained at cost of reproduction. Contractor shall maintain a clean, undamaged set of Contract Documents at the Project site. ARTICLE 4. DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS a. Examination of Contract Documents. Before commencing any portion of The Work, Contractor shall again carefully examine all applicable Contract Documents , the Project site and other information given to Contractor as to materials and methods of construction and other Project requirements. Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any potential error, inconsistency, ambiguity, conflict or lack of detail or explanation. If Contractor performs, permits, or causes the performance of any Work which is in error, inconsistent or ambiguous, or not sufficiently detailed or explained, Contractor shall bear any and all resulting costs, including, without limitation, the cost of correction. In no case shall the Contractor or any subcontractor proceed with Work if uncertain as to the applicable requirements. b. Additional Instructions. After notification of any error, inconsistency, ambiguity, conflict or lack of detail or explanation, the Engineer will provide any required additional instructions, by means of drawings or other written direction, necessary for proper execution of Work. c. Quality of Parts, Construction and Finish. All parts of The Work shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds and the Contractor must use all diligence to inform itself GENERAL CONDITIONS 42 fully as to the required construction and finish. In no case shall Contractor proceed with The Work without obtaining first from the Engineer such Approval as may be necessary for the proper performance of Work. d. Contractor’s Variation from Contract Document Requirements. If it is found that the Contractor has varied from the requirements of the Contract Documents including the requirement to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations , the Engineer may at any time, before or after completion of the Work, order the improper Work removed, remade or replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. ARTICLE 5. EXISTENCE OF UTILITIES AT THE WORK SITE a. The City has endeavored to determine the existence of utilities at the Project site from the records of the owners of known utilities in the vicinity of the Project. The positions of these utilities as derived from such records are shown on the Plans. b. No excavations were made to verify the locations shown for underground utilities. The service connections to these utilities are not shown on the plans. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the exact location of all service connections. The Contractor shall make its own investigations, including exploratory excavations, to determine the locations and type of service connections, prior to commencing Work which could result in damage to such utilities. The Contractor shall immediately notify the City in writing of any utility discovered in a different position than shown on the Plans or which is not shown on the Plans. c. All water meters, water valves, fire hydrants, electrical utility vaults, telephone vaults, gas utility valves, and other subsurface structures shall be relocated or adjusted to final grade by the Contractor. Locations of existing utilities shown on the Plans are approximate and may not be complete. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating its Work with all utility companies during the construction of The Work. d. Notwithstanding the above, pursuant to Section 4215 of the Government Code, the City has the responsibility to identify, with reasonable accuracy, main or trunkline facilities on the plans and specifications. In the event that main or trunkline utility facilities are not identified with reasonable accuracy in the plans and specifications made a part of the invitation for bids, City shall assume the responsibility for their timely removal, relocation, or protection. e. Contractor, except in an emergency, shall contact the appropriate regional notification center, Southern California Underground Service Alert at 1-800-227-2600 at least two working days prior to commencing any excavation if the excavation will be performed in an area which is known, or reasonably should be known, to contain subsurface installations other than the underground facilities owned or operated by the City, and obtain an inquiry identification number from that notification center. No excavation shall be commenced or carried out by the Contractor unless such an inquiry GENERAL CONDITIONS 43 identification number has been assigned to the Contractor or any subcontractor of the Contractor and the City has been given the identification number by the Contractor. ARTICLE 6. SCHEDULE a. Estimated Schedule. Within fourteen (14) days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall prepare a Project schedule and shall submit this to the Engineer for Approval. The receipt or Approval of any schedules by the Engineer or the City shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is fully responsible to determine and provide for any and all staffing and resources at levels which allow for good quality and timely completion of the Project. Contractor’s failure to incorporate all elements of Work required for the performance of the Contract or any inaccuracy in the schedule shall not excuse the Contractor from performing all Work required for a completed Project within the specified Contract time period. If the required schedule is not received by the time the first payment under the Contract is due, Contractor shall not be paid until the schedule is received, reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. b. Schedule Contents. The schedule shall allow enough time for inclement weather. The schedule shall indicate the beginning and completion dates of all phases of constr uction; critical path for all critical, sequential time related activities; and “float time” for all “slack” or “gaps” in the non-critical activities. The schedule shall clearly identify all staffing and other resources which in the Contractor’s judgment are needed to complete the Project within the time specified for completion. Schedule duration shall match the Contract time. Schedules indicating early completion will be rejected. c. Schedule Updates. Contractor shall continuously update its construction schedule. Contractor shall submit an updated and accurate construction schedule to the Engineer whenever requested to do so by Engineer and with each progress payment request. The Engineer may withhold progress payments or other amounts due under the Contract Documents if Contractor fails to submit an updated and accurate construction schedule. ARTICLE 7. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 3400(b) the City may make a finding that is described in the invitation for bids that designates certain products, things, or services by specific brand or trade name. b. Unless specifically designated in the Contract Documents, whenever any material, process, or article is indicated or specified by grade, patent, or proprietary name or by name of manufacturer, such Specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating the description of the material, process or article desired and shall be deemed to be followed by the words “or equal.” Contractor may, unless otherwise stated, offer for substitution any material, process or article which shall be substantially GENERAL CONDITIONS 44 equal or better in every respect to that so indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. However, the City may have adopted certain uniform standards for certain materials, processes and articles. c. Contractor shall submit requests, together with substantiating data, for substitution of any “or equal” material, process or article no later than thirty-five (35) days after award of the Contract. To facilitate the construction schedule and sequencing, some requests may need to be submitted before thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract. Provisions regarding submission of “or equal” requests shall not in any way authorize an extension of time for performance of this Contract. If a proposed “or equal” substitution request is rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for providing the specified material, process or article. The burden of proof as to the equality of any material, process or article shall rest with the Contractor. The City has the complete and sole discretion to determine if a material, process or article is an “or equal” material, process or article that may be substituted. d. Data required to substantiate requests for substitutions of an “or equal” material, process or article data shall include a signed affidavit from the Contractor stating that, and describing how, the substituted “or equal” material, process or article is equivalent to that specified in every way except as listed on the affidavit. Substantiating data shall include any and all illustrations, specifications, and other relevant data including catalog information which describes the requested substituted “or equal” material, process or article, and substantiates that it is an “or equal” to the materi al, process or article. The substantiating data must also include information regarding the durability and lifecycle cost of the requested substituted “or equal” material, process or article. Failure to submit all the required substantiating data, includ ing the signed affidavit, to the City in a timely fashion will result in the rejection of the proposed substitution. e. The Contractor shall bear all of the City’s costs associated with the review of substitution requests. f. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs related to a substituted “or equal” material, process or article. g. Contractor is directed to the Special Conditions (if any) to review any findings made pursuant to Public Contract Code section 3400. ARTICLE 8. SHOP DRAWINGS a. Contractor shall check and verify all field measurements and shall submit with such promptness as to provide adequate time for review and cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, subcontractor, or worker on the Project, six (6) copies of all shop or setting drawings, calculations, schedules, and materials list, and all other provisions required by the Contract. Contractor shall sign all submittals affirming that submittals have been reviewed and approved by Contractor prior to submission to GENERAL CONDITIONS 45 Engineer. Each signed submittal shall affirm that the submittal meets all the requirements of the Contract Documents except as specifically and clearly noted and listed on the cover sheet of the submittal. b. Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer, and file with the Engineer six (6) corrected copies each, and furnish such other copies as may be needed for completion of the Work. Engineer’s approval of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor has, in writing, called Engineer’s attention to such deviations at time of submission and has secured the Engineer’s written Approval. Engineer’s Approval of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors in shop drawings. ARTICLE 9. SUBMITTALS a. Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for approval, prior to purchasing or commencing any Work, a log of all samples, material lists and certifications, mix designs, schedules, and other submittals, as required in the specifications. The log shall indicate whether samples will be provided in accordance with other provisions of this Contract. b. Contractor will provide samples and submittals, together with catalogs and supporting data required by the Engineer, to the Engineer within a reasonable time period to provide for adequate review and avoid delays in the Work. c. These requirements shall not authorize any extension of time for performance of this Contract. Engineer will check and approve such samples, but only for conformance with design concept of work and for compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. Work shall be in accordance with approved samples and submittals. ARTICLE 10. MATERIALS a. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, water, lights, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary constructions of every nature, and all other services and facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute and complete this Contract within specified time. b. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and the best of their respective kinds and grades as noted and/or specified, and workmanship shall be of good quality. c. Materials shall be furnished in ample quantities and at such times as to ensure uninterrupted progress of The Work and shall be stored properly and protected as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for damage or loss by weather or other causes to materials or Work. GENERAL CONDITIONS 46 d. No materials, supplies, or equipment for Work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. Contractor warrants good title to all material, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the work and agrees upon completion of all work to deliver the Project, to the City free from any claims, liens, or charges. e. Materials shall be stored on the Project site in such manner so as not to interfere with any operations of the City or any independent contractor. ARTICLE 11. CONTRACTOR’S SUPERVISION Contractor shall continuously keep at the Project site a competent and experienced full-time Project superintendent approved by the City. Superintendent must be able to proficiently speak, read and write in English. Contractor shall continuously provide efficient supervision of the Project. ARTICLE 12. WORKERS a. Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees. Contractor shall not employ on the Project any unfit person or any one not skilled in the Work assigned to him or her. b. Any person in the employ of the Contractor whom the City may deem incompetent or unfit shall be dismissed from The Work and shall not be employed on this Project except with the written Approval of the City. ARTICLE 13. SUBCONTRACTORS a. Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor to the terms of the Contract Documents as far as such terms are applicable to subcontractor’s portion of The Work. Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of its subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by its subcontractors, as Contractor is for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by Contractor. Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the City. b. The City reserves the right to Approve all subcontractors. The City’s Approval of any subcontractor under this Contract shall not in any way relieve Contractor of its obligations in the Contract Documents. c. Prior to substituting any subcontractor listed in the Bid Forms, Contractor must comply with the requirements of the Subletting and Subcontra cting Fair Practices Act pursuant to California Public Contract Code section 4100 et seq. GENERAL CONDITIONS 47 ARTICLE 14. PERMITS AND LICENSES Permits and licenses necessary for prosecution of The Work shall be secured and paid for by Contractor, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. a. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits and licenses required for The Work, including excavation permit and for plumbing, mechanical and electrical work and for operations in or over public streets or right of way under jurisdiction of public agencies other than the City. b. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all off-site inspection of the Work related to permits and licenses, including certification, required by the specifications, drawings, or by governing authorities, except for such off-site inspections delineated as the City's responsibility pursuant to the Contract Documents. c. Before Acceptance of the Project, the Contractor shall submit all licenses, permits, certificates of inspection and required approvals to the City. ARTICLE 15. UTILITY USAGE a. All temporary utilities, including but not limited to electricity, water, gas, and telephone, used on the Work shall be furnished and paid for by Contractor. Contractor shall Provide necessary temporary distribution systems, including meters, if necessary, from distribution points to points on The Work where the utility is needed. Upon completion of The Work, Contractor shall remove all temporary distribution systems. b. Contractor shall provide necessary and adequate utilities and pay all costs for water, electricity, gas, oil, and sewer charges required for completion of the Project. c. All permanent meters Installed shall be listed in the Contractor’s name until Project Acceptance. d. If the Contract is for construction in existing facilities, Contractor may, with prior written Approval of the City, use the City’s existing utilities by compensating the City for utilities used by Contractor. ARTICLE 16. INSPECTION FEES FOR PERMANENT UTILITIES All inspection fees and other municipal charges for permanent utilities including, but not limited to, sewer, electrical, phone, gas, water, and irrigation shall be paid for by the City. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the payment of such fees, but inspection fees and other municipal fees relating to permanent utilities shall be paid by the City. Contractor may either request reimbursement from the City for such fees, or shall be responsible for arranging and coordination with City for the payment of such fees. GENERAL CONDITIONS 48 ARTICLE 17. TRENCHES a. Trenches Five Feet or More in Depth. The Contractor shall submit to the City, in advance of excavation, a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of any trench or trenches five feet or more in depth. If the plan varies from shoring system standards, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer. The plan shall not be less effective than the shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions of the Construction Safety Orders, as defined in the California Code of Regulations. b. Excavations Deeper than Four Feet. If work under this Contract involves digging trenches or other excavation that extends deeper than four feet below the surface, Contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify the City, in writing, of any: 1) Material that the Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. 2) Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated. 3) Unknown physical conditions at the site of an y unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract. The City shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do so materially differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in Contractor’s cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of The Work, shall issue a change order under the procedures described in the Contract Documents. In the event that a dispute arises between the City and the Contractor as to whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of The Work, the Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the Contract, but shall proceed with all Work to be performed under the Contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the parties. ARTICLE 18. DIVERSION OF RECYCLABLE WASTE MATERIALS In compliance with the applicable City’s waste reduction and recycling efforts, Contractor shall divert all Recyclable Waste Materials to appropriate recycling centers. Contractor will be GENERAL CONDITIONS 49 required to submit weight tickets and written proof of diversion with its monthly progress payment requests. Contractor shall complete and execute any certification forms required by City or other applicable agencies to document Contractor’s compliance with these diversion requirements. All costs incurred for these waste diversion efforts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. ARTICLE 19. REMOVAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Should Contractor encounter material reasonably believed to be polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic wastes and hazardous materials which have not been rendered harmless at the Project site, the Contractor shall immediately stop work at the affected Project site and shall report the condition to the City in writing. The City shall contract for any services required to directly remove and/or abate PCBs and other toxic wastes and hazardous materials, if required by the Project site(s), and shall not require the Contractor to subcontract for such services. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the City and Contractor. ARTICLE 20. SANITARY FACILITIES Contractor shall provide sanitary temporary toilet buildings for the use of all workers. All toilets shall comply with local codes and ordinances. Toilets shall be kept supplied with toilet paper and shall have workable door fasteners. Toilets shall be serviced no less than once weekly and shall be present in a quantity of not less than 1 per 20 workers as required by CAL-OSHA regulation. The toilets shall be maintained in a sanitary condition at all times. Use of toilet facilities in The Work under construction shall not be permitted. Any other Sanitary Facilities required by CAL-OSHA shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. ARTICLE 21. AIR POLLUTION CONTROL Contractor shall comply with all air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and statutes. All containers of paint, thinner, curing compound, solvent or liquid asphalt shall be l abeled to indicate that the contents fully comply with the applicable material requirements. ARTICLE 22. COMPLIANCE WITH STATE STORM WATER PERMIT a. Contractor shall be required to comply with all conditions of the State Water Resources Control Board (“State Water Board”) National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System General Permit for Waste Discharge Requirements for Discharges of Storm Water Runoff Associated with Construction Activity (“Permit”) for all construction activity which results in the disturbance of in excess of one acre of total land area or which is part of a larger common area of development or sale. Contractor shall be responsible for filing the Notice of Intent and for obtaining the Permit. Contractor shall be solely responsible for preparing and implementing a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (“SWPPP”) prior to initiating Work. In bidding on this Contract, it shall be Contractor’s responsibility to evaluate the cost of procuring the Permit and preparing the SWPPP as GENERAL CONDITIONS 50 well as complying with the SWPPP and any necessary revision to the SWPPP. Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the State Water Resources Control Board. Contractor shall include all costs of compliance with specified requirements in the Contract amount. b. Contractor shall be responsible for procuring, implementing and complying with the provisions of the Permit and the SWPPP, including the standard provisions, monitoring and reporting requirements as required by the Permit. Contractor shall provide copies of all reports and monitoring information to the Engineer. c. Contractor shall comply with the lawful requirements of any applicable municipality, the City, drainage district, and other local agencies regarding discharges of storm water to separate storm drain system or other watercourses under their jurisdiction, including applicable requirements in municipal storm water management programs. d. Storm, surface, nuisance, or other waters may be encountered at various times during construction of The Work. Therefore, the Contractor, by submitting a Bid, hereby acknowledges that it has investigated the risk arising from such waters, has prepared its Bid accordingly, and assumes any and all risks and liabilities arising therefrom. e. Failure to comply with the Permit is in violation of federal and state law. Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless City, its officials, officers, agents, employees and authorized volunteers from and against any and all claims, demands, losses or liabilities of any kind or nature which Cit y, its officials, officers, agents, employees and authorized volunteers may sustain or incur for noncompliance with the Permit arising out of or in connection with the Project, except for liability resulting from the sole established negligence, willful misconduct or active negligence of the City, its officials, officers, agents, employees or authorized volunteers. City may seek damages from Contractor for delay in completing the Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, caused by Contractor’s failure to comply with the Permit. ARTICLE 23. CLEANING UP a. Contractor at all times shall keep premises free from debris such as waste, rubbish, and excess materials and equipment. Contractor shall not store debris under, in, or about the premises. Upon completion of Work, Contractor shall clean the interior and exterior of the building or improvement including fixtures, equipment, walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, window sills and ledges, horizontal projections, and any areas where debris has collected so surfaces are free from foreign material or discoloration. Contractor shall clean and polish all glass, plumbing fixtures, and finish hardware and similar finish surfaces and equipment and contractor shall also remove temporary fencing, barricades, planking and construction toilet and similar temporary facilities from site. Contractor shall also clean all buildings, asphalt and concrete areas to the degree necessary to remove oil, grease, fuel, or other stains caused by Contractor operations or equipment. GENERAL CONDITIONS 51 b. Contractor shall fully clean up the site at the completion of The Work. If the Contractor fails to immediately clean up at the completion of The Work, the City may do so and the cost of such clean up shall be charged back to the Contractor. ARTICLE 24. LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING All field engineering required for laying out The Work and establishing grades for earthwork operations shall be furnished by the Contractor at its expense. Layout shall be done by a registered civil engineer Approved by the Engineer. Any required “as-built” drawings of the Work shall be prepared by the registered civil engineer. ARTICLE 25. EXCESSIVE NOISE a. The Contractor shall use only such equipment on the work and in such state of repair so that the emission of sound therefrom is within the noise tolerance level of that equipment as established by CAL-OSHA. b. The Contractor shall comply with the most restrictive of the following: (1) local sound control and noise level rules, regulations and ordinances and (2) the requirements contained in these Contract Documents, including hours of operation requirements. No internal combustion engine shall be operated on the Project without a muffler of the type recommended by the manufacturer. Should any muffler or other control device sustain damage or be determined to be ineffective or defective, the Contractor shall promptly remove the equipment and shall not return said equipment to the job until the device is repaired or replaced. Said noise and vibration level requirements shall apply to all equipment on the job or related to the job, including but not limited to, trucks, transit mixers or transit equipment that may or may not be owned by the Contractor. ARTICLE 26. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS a. If the Contract Documents, the Engineer, or any instructions, laws, ordinances, or public authority require any part of The Work to be tested or Approved, Contractor shall provide the Engineer at least two (2) working days notice of its readiness for observation or inspection. If inspection is by a public authority other than the City, Contractor shall promptly inform the City of the date fixed for such inspection. Required certificates of inspection (or similar) shall be secured by Contractor. Costs for City testing and City inspection shall be paid by the City. Costs of tests for Work found not to be in compliance shall be paid by the Contractor. b. If any Work is done or covered up without the required testing or approval, the Contractor shall uncover or deconstruct the Work, and the Work shall be redone after completion of the testing at the Contractor’s cost in compliance with the Contract Documents. GENERAL CONDITIONS 52 c. Where inspection and testing are to be conducted by an independent laboratory or agency, materials or samples of materials to be inspected or tested shall be selected by such laboratory or agency, or by the City, and not by Contractor. All tests or inspections of materials shall be made in accordance with the commonly recognized standards of national organizations. d. In advance of manufacture of materials to be supplied by Contractor which must be tested or inspected, Contractor shall notify the City so that the City may arrange for testing at the source of supply. Any materials which have not satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection shall not be incorporated into The Work. e. If the manufacture of materials to be inspected or tested will occur in a plant or location outside the geographic limits of City, the Contractor shall pay for any excessive or unusual costs associated with such testing or inspection, including but not limited to excessive travel time, standby time and required lodging. f. Reexamination of Work may be ordered by the City. If so ordered, Work must be uncovered or deconstructed by Contractor. If Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the City shall pay the costs of reexamination and reconstruction. If such work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay all costs. ARTICLE 27. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY a. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of The Work. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of all materials delivered and Work performed until completion and final Acceptance by the City. All Work shall be solely at the Contractor’s risk. Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property from settlement or loss of lateral support as necessary. Contractor shall comply with all applicable safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the Pr oject site where Work is being performed. Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by field conditions and progress of work, all necessary safeguards, signs, barriers, lights, and watchmen for protection of workers and the pub lic, and shall post danger signs warning against hazards created in the course of construction. b. In an emergency affecting safety of life or of work or of adjoining property, Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Engineer, is her eby permitted to act to prevent such threatened loss or injury; and Contractor shall so act, without appeal, if so authorized or instructed by the Engineer or the City. Any compensation claimed by Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined by and agreed upon by the City and the Contractor. GENERAL CONDITIONS 53 c. Contractor shall provide such heat, covering, and enclosures as are necessary to protect all Work, materials, equipment, appliances, and tools against damage by weather conditions. d. Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect existing sidewalks, curbs, pavements, utilities, and other adjoining property and structures, and to avoid damage thereto, and Contractor shall repair any damage thereto caused by The Work operations. Contractor shall: 1) Enclose the working area with a substantial barricade, and arrange work to cause minimum amount of inconvenience and danger to the public. 2) Provide substantial barricades around any shrubs or trees indicated to be preserved. 3) Deliver materials to the Project site over a route designated by the Engineer. 4) Provide any and all dust control required and follow the Applicable air quality regulations as appropriate. If the Contractor does not comply, the City shall have the immediate authority to provide dust control and deduct the cost from payments to the Contractor. 5) Confine Contractor’s apparatus, the storage of materials, and the operations of its workers to limits required by law, ordinances, permits, or directions of the Engineer. Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the Project site with its materials. 6) Take care to prevent disturbing or covering any survey markers, monuments, or other devices marking property boundaries or corners. If such markers are disturbed by accident, they shall be replaced by an approved civil engineer or land surveyor, at no cost to the City. 7) Ensure that existing facilities, fences and other structures are all adequately protected and that, upon completion of all Work, all facilities that may have been damaged are restored to a condition acceptable to the City. 8) Preserve and protect from injury all buildings, pole lines and all direction, warning and mileage signs that have been placed within the right-of-way. 9) At the completion of work each day, leave the Project site in a clean, safe condition. 10) Comply with any stage construction and traffic handling plans. Access to residences and businesses shall be maintained at all times. GENERAL CONDITIONS 54 These precautionary measures will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. Full compensation for the Work involved in the preservation of life, safety and property as above specified shall be considered as included in the prices paid for the various contract items of Work, and no additional allowance will be made therefor. e. Should damage to persons or property occur as a result of The Work, Contractor shall be responsible for proper investigation, documentation, including video or photography, to adequately memorialize and make a record of what transpired. The City shall be entitled to inspect and copy any such documentation, video, or photographs. ARTICLE 28. CONTRACTORS MEANS AND METHODS Contractor is solely responsible for the means and methods utilized to Perform The Work. In no case shall the Contractor’s means and methods deviate from commonly used industry standards. ARTICLE 29. INSPECTOR’S FIELD OFFICE a. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the inspector’s field office. The Office shall be a substantial waterproof construction with adequate natural light and ventilation by means of stock design windows. Door shall have a key type lock or padlock clasp. The office shall have heating and air conditioning and shall be equipped with a telephone, a telephone answering machine, and a fax machine at Contractor’s expense. b. A table satisfactory for the study of plans and two chairs shall be Provided by Contractor. Contractor shall Provide and pay for adequate electric lights, local telephone service, and adequate heat and air conditioning for the field office until authorized removal. ARTICLE 30. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES The City shall designate representatives, who shall have the right to be present at the Project site at all times. The City may designate an inspector who shall have the right to observe all of the Contractor’s Work. The inspector is not authorized to make changes in the Contract Documents. The inspector shall not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to carry out The Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities for such access. ARTICLE 31. HOURS OF WORK a. Eight (8) hours of work shall constitute a legal day’s work. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall forfeit, as penalty to the City, twenty-five dollars ($25) for each worker employed in the execution of Work by the Contractor or any subcontractor for each day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than eight (8) GENERAL CONDITIONS 55 hours in any one day and forty (40) hours in any week in violation of the provisions of the Labor Code, and in particular, Section 1810 to Section 1815, except as provided in Labor Code Section 1815. b. Work shall be accomplished on a regularly scheduled eight (8) hour per day work shift basis, Monday through Friday, between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. c. It shall be unlawful for any person to operate, permit, use, or cause to operate any of the following at the Project site, other than between the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, with no Work allowed on City-observed holidays, unless otherwise Approved by the Engineer: 1) Powered Vehicles 2) Construction Equipment 3) Loading and Unloading Vehicles 4) Domestic Power Tool. ARTICLE 32. PAYROLL RECORDS a. Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1776, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall maintain weekly certified payroll records showing the name, address, social security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours paid each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker or other employee employed in connection with the work. Contractor shall certify under penalty of perjury that records maintained and submitted by Contractor are true and accurate. Contractor shall also require subcontractor(s) to certify weekly payroll records under penalty of perjury. b. The payroll records described herein shall be certified and submitted by the Contractor at a time designated by the City. The Contractor shall also provide the following: 1) A certified copy of the employee’s payroll records shall be made available for inspection or furnished to such employee or his or her authorized representative on request. 2) A certified copy of all payroll records described herein shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request of the Department of Industrial Relations (“DIR”). c. The certified payroll records shall be on forms provided by the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement (“DLSE”) of the DIR or shall contain the same information as the forms provided by the DLSE. GENERAL CONDITIONS 56 d. Any copy of records made available for inspection and furnished upon request to the public shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure of an individual’s name, address, and social security number. The name and address of the Contractor or any subcontractor shall not be marked or obliter ated. e. In the event of noncompliance with the requirements of this Section, the Contractor shall have ten (10) days in which to comply subsequent to receipt of written notice specifying any item or actions necessary to ensure compliance with this section. Should noncompliance still be evident after such ten (10) day period, the Contractor shall, as a penalty to the City, forfeit Twenty-five Dollars ($25.00) for each day, or portion thereof, for each worker until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the DIR, such penalties shall be withheld from contract payments. ARTICLE 33. PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES a. The Contractor is aware of the requirements of Labor Code Sections 1720 et seq. and 1770 et seq., as well as California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 16000 et seq. (“Prevailing Wage Laws”), which require the payment of prevailing wage rates and the performance of other requirements on certain “public works” and “maintenance” projects. Since this Project involves an applicable “pub lic works” or “maintenance” project, as defined by the Prevailing Wage Laws, and since the total compensation is $1,000 or more, Contractor agrees to fully comply with such Prevailing Wage Laws. The Contractor shall obtain a copy of the prevailing rates of per diem wages at the commencement of this Agreement from the website of the Division of Labor Statistics and Research of the Department of Industrial Relations located at www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr/. In the alternative, the Contractor may view a copy of the prevailing rates of per diem wages at the City. Contractor shall make copies of the prevailing rates of per diem wages for each craft, classification or type of worker needed to perform work on the Project available to interested parties upon request, and shall post copies at the Contractor’s principal place of business and at the Project site. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its elected officials, officers, employees and agents free and harmless from any claims, liabilities, costs, penalties or intere st arising out of any failure or allege failure to comply with the Prevailing Wage Laws. b. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City not more than fifty dollars ($50) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the stipulated prevailing wage rate for any work done by him, or by any subcontract under him, in violation of the provisions of the Labor Code. The difference between such stipulated prevailing wage rate and the amount paid to each worker for each calendar day or portion thereof for which each worker was paid less than the stipulated prevailing wage rate shall be paid to each worker by the Contractor. c. Contractor shall post, at appropriate conspicuous points on the Project site, a schedule showing all determined general prevailing wage rates and all authorized deductions, if any, from unpaid wages actually earned. GENERAL CONDITIONS 57 ARTICLE 34. EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES The Contractor’s attention is directed to the provisions of Sections 1777.5, 1777.6, and 1777.7 of the Labor Code concerning employment of apprentices by the Contractor or any subcontractor. The Contractor shall obtain a certificate of apprenticeship before employing any apprentice pursuant to Section 1777.5, 1777.6, and 1777.7 of the Labor Code. Inform ation relative to apprenticeship standards, wage schedules, and other requirements may be obtained from the Director of Industrial Relations, the Administrator of Apprenticeships, San Francisco, California, or from the Division of Apprenticeship Standards and its branch offices. ARTICLE 35. NONDISCRIMINATION/EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1735 and other applicable provisions of law, the Contractor and its subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age, political affiliation, marital status, or handicap on this Project. The Contractor will take affirmative action to insure that employees are treated during employment or training without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age, political affiliation, marital status, or handicap. ARTICLE 36. LABOR/EMPLOYMENT SAFETY The Contractor shall maintain emergency first aid treatment for his employees which complies with the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. § 651 et seq.), and California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations Division 1, Department of Industrial Relations, Chapter 4. ARTICLE 37. WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE The Contractor shall Provide, during the life of this Contract, workers’ compensation insurance for all of the employees engaged in Work under this Contract, on or at the Project site, and, in case any of sublet Work, the Contractor shall require the subcontractor similarly to provide workers’ compensation insurance for all the latter’s employees as prescribed by State law. Any class of employee or employees not covered by a subcontractor’s insurance shall be covered by the Contractor’s insurance. In case any class of employees engaged in work under this Contract, on or at the Project site, is not protected under the Workers’ Compensation Statutes, the Contractor shall provide or shall cause a subcontractor to provide, adequate insurance coverage for the protection of such employees not otherwise protected. The Contractor is required to secure payment of compensation to his employees in accordance with the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code. The Contractor shall file with the City certificates of his insurance protecting workers. Company or companies providing insurance coverage shall be acceptable to the City, if in the form and coverage as set forth in the Contract Documents. GENERAL CONDITIONS 58 ARTICLE 38. EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE Contractor shall provide during the life of this Contract, Employer’s Liability Insurance, including Occupational Disease, in the amount of, at least, one million dollars ($1,000,000.00) per person per accident. Contractor shall provide City with a certificate of Employer’s Liability Insurance. Such insurance shall comply with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The policy shall be endorsed, if applicable, to provide a Borrowed Servant/Alternate Employer Endorsement and contain a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City. ARTICLE 39. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE a. Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract and for such other period as may be required herein, at its sole expense, Commercial General Liability insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises liability, contractual liability, products/completed operations if applicable, personal and advertising injury – which may arise from or out of Contractor’s operations, use, and management of the Project site, or the performance of its obligations hereunder. Policy limits shall not be less th an $1,000,000 per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage. If Commercial General Liability Insurance or other form with a general aggregate limit is used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit. b. Such policy shall comply with all the requirements of this Article. The limits set forth herein shall apply separately to each insured against whom claims are made or suits are brought, except with respect to the limits of liability. Further the limits set forth herein shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor from liability in excess of such coverage, nor shall it limit Contractor’s indemnification obligations to the City, and shall not preclude the City from taking such other actions available to the City under other provisions of the Contract Documents or law. c. Contractor shall make certain that any and all subcontractors hired by Contractor are insured in accordance with this Contract. If any subcontractor’s coverage does not comply with the foregoing provisions, Contractor shall indemnify and hold the City harmless from any damage, loss, cost, or expense, including attorneys’ fees, incurred by the City as a result thereof. d. All general liability policies provided pursuant to the provisions of this Article shall comply with the provisions of the Contract Documents. e. All general liability policies shall be written to apply to all bodily injury, including death, property damage, personal injury, owned and non -owned equipment, blanket contractual liability, completed operations liability, explosion, collapse, under-ground excavation, removal of lateral support, and other covered loss, however occasioned, occurring during the policy term, and shall specifically insure the performance by Contractor of that part of the indemnification contained in these General Conditions, GENERAL CONDITIONS 59 relating to liability for injury to or death of persons and damage to property. If the coverage contains one or more aggregate limits, a minimum of 50% of any such aggregate limit must remain available at all times; if over 50% of any aggregate limit has been paid or reserved, the City may require additional coverage to be purchased by Contractor to restore the required limits. Contractor may combine primary, umbrella, and as broad as possible excess liability coverage to achieve the total limits indicated above. Any umbrella or excess liability policy shall include the additional insured endorsement described in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 40. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Contractor shall take out and maintain at all times during the term of this Contract Automobile Liability Insurance in the amount of, at least, one million dollars ($1,000,000). Such insurance shall provide coverage for bodily injury and property damage including coverage for non-owned and hired vehicles, in a form and with insurance companies acceptable to the City. Such insurance shall comply with the provisions of Article 30 below. ARTICLE 41. BUILDER’S RISK [“ALL RISK”] a. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain or cause to be maintained Builder’s Risk [ “All Risk”] extended coverage insurance on all work, material, equipment, appliances, tools, and structures which are a part of the Contract and subject to loss or damage by fire, and vandalism and malicious mischief, in an amount to cover 100% of the replacement cost. The City accepts no responsibility until the Contract is formally accepted by the Governing Board for the work. The Contractor is required to file with the City a certificate evidencing fire insurance coverage. b. Provide insurance coverage on completed value form, all-risk or special causes of loss coverage. 1) Insurance policies shall be so conditioned as to cover the performance of any extra work performed under the Contract. 2) Coverage shall include all materials stored on site and in transit. 3) Coverage shall include Contractor’s tools and equipment. 4) Insurance shall include boiler, machinery and material hoist coverage. c. Such insurance shall comply with the provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 42. FORM AND PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE a. Any insurance carrier providing insurance coverage required by the Contract Documents shall be admitted to and authorized to do business in the State of California unless waived, in writing, by the City Risk Manager. Carrier(s) shall have an A.M. Best rating of GENERAL CONDITIONS 60 not less than an A:VIII. Insurance deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared by the Contractor, and such deductibles and retentions shall have the prior written consent from the City. At the election of the City the Contractor shall either 1) reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions, or 2) procure a bond which guarantees payment of losses and related investigations, claims administration, and defense costs and expenses. b. Contractor shall cause its insurance carrier(s) to furnish the City with either 1) a properly executed original Certificates(s) of Insurance and certified original copies of Endorsements effecting coverage as required herein, or 2) if requested to do so in writing by the City Risk Manager, provide original Certified copies of policies including all Endorsements and all attachments thereto, showing such insurance is in full force and effect. The City, its Director’s and officers, employees, agents or representatives are named as Additional Insureds and Provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of those parties. Further, said Certificates(s) and policies of insurance shall contain the covenant of the insurance carrier(s) that shall provide no less than thirty (30) days written notice be given to the City prior to any material modification or cancellation of such insurance. In the event of a material modification or cancellation of coverage, the City may terminate or Stop Work pursuant to the Contract Documents , unless the City receives, prior to such effective date, another properly executed original Certificate of Insurance and original copies of endorsements or certified original policies , including all endorsements and attachments thereto evidencing coverages set forth herein and the insurance required herein is in full force and effect. Contractor shall not take possession, or use the Project site, or commence operations under this Agreement until the City has been furnished original Certificate(s) of Insurance and certified original copies of Endorsements or policies of insurance including all Endorsements and any and all other attachments as required in this Section. The original Endorsements for each policy and the Certificate of Insurance shall be signed by an individual authorized by the insurance carrier to do so on its behalf. c. It is understood and agreed to by the parties hereto and the insurance company(s), that the Certificate(s) of Insurance and policies shall so covenant and shall be construed as primary, and the City’s insurance and/or deductibles and/or self-insured retentions or self-insured programs shall not be construed as contributory. d. The City reserves the right to adjust the monetary limits of insurance coverage’s during the term of this Contract including any extension thereof-if in the City’s reasonable judgment, the amount or type of insurance carried by the Contractor becomes inadequate. e. Contractor shall pass down the insurance obligations contained herein to all tiers of sub- contractors working under this Contract. GENERAL CONDITIONS 61 ARTICLE 43. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES a. Time for Completion/Liquidated Damages. Work shall be commenced within ten (10) days of the date stated in the City’s Notice to Proceed and shall be completed by Contractor in the time specified in the Contract Documents. The City is under no obligation to consider early completion of the Project; and the Contract completion date shall not be amended by the City’s receipt or acceptance of the Contractor’s proposed earlier completion date. Furthermore, Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, receive additional compensation from the City (including but not limited to indirect, general, administrative or other forms of overhead costs) for the period between the time of earlier completion proposed by the Contractor and the Contract completion date. If The Work is not completed as stated in the Contract Documents, it is understood that the City will suffer damage. In accordance with Government Code section 53069.85, being impractical and infeasible to determine the amount of actual damage, it is agreed that Contractor shall pay to the City as fixed and liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum stipulated in the Contract for each day of delay until The Work is fully completed. Contractor and its surety shall be liable for any liquidated damages. Any money due or to become due the Contractor may be retained to cover liquidated damages. b. Inclement Weather. Contractor shall abide the Engineer’s determination of what constitutes inclement weather. Time extensions for inclement weather shall only be granted when the Work stopped during inclement weather is on the critical path of the Project schedule. c. Extension of Time. Contractor shall not be charged liquidated damages because of any delays in completion of The Work due to unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of Contractor (or its subcontractors or suppliers). Contractor shall within five (5) Days of identifying any such delay notify the City in writing of causes of delay. The City shall ascertain the facts and extent of delay and grant extension of time for completing The Work when, in its judgment, the facts justify such an extension. Time extensions to the Project shall be requested by the Contractor as they occur and without delay. No delay claims shall be permitted unless the event or occurrence delays the completion of the Project beyond the Contract completion date. d. No Damages for Reasonable Delay. The City’s liability to Contractor for delays for which the City is responsible shall be limited to only an extension of time unless such delays were unreasonable under the circumstances. In no case shall the City be liable for any costs which are borne by the Contractor in the regular course of business, including, but not limited to, home office overhead and other ongoing costs. Damages caused by unreasonable City delay, including delays caused by items that are the responsibility of the City pursuant to Government Code section 4215, shall be based on actual costs only, no proportions or formulas shall be used to calculate any delay damages. GENERAL CONDITIONS 62 ARTICLE 44. COST BREAKDOWN AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES Contractor shall furnish on forms Approved by the City: a. Within ten (10) Days of award of the Contract a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the Contract price; b. A monthly itemized estimate of Work done for the purpose of making progress payments. In order for the City to consider and evaluate each progress payment application, the Contractor shall submit a detailed measurement of Work performed and a progress estimate of the value thereof before the tenth (10th) Day of the following month. c. Contractor shall submit, with each of its payment requests, an adjusted list of actual quantities, verified by the Engineer, for unit price items listed, if any, in the Bid Form. d. Following the City’s Acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the City a written statement of the final quantities of unit price items for inclusion in the final payment request. e. The City shall have the right to adjust any estimate of quantity and to subsequently correct any error made in any estimate for payment. Contractor shall certify under penalty of perjury, that all cost breakdowns and periodic estimates accurately reflect the Work on the Project. ARTICLE 45. MOBILIZATION a. When a bid item is included in the Bid Form for mobilization, the costs of Work in advance of construction operations and not directly attributable to any specific bid item will be included in the progress estimate (“Initial Mobilization”). When no bid item is provided for “Initial Mobilization,” payment for such costs will be deemed to be included in the other items of The Work. b. Payment for Initial Mobilization based on the lump sum provided in the Bid Form, which shall constitute full compensation for all such Work. No payment for Initial Mobilization will be made until all of the listed items have been completed to the satisfactio n of the Engineer. The scope of the Work included under Initial Mobilization shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following principal items: 1. Obtaining and paying for all bonds, insurance, and permits. 2. Moving on to the Project site of all Contractor’s plant and equipment required for first month’s operations. 3. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. GENERAL CONDITIONS 63 4. Establishing fire protection system. 5. Developing and installing a construction water supply. 6. Providing and maintaining the field office trailers for the Contractor and the Engineer, complete, with all specified furnishings and utility services including telephones, telephone appurtenances, computer and printer, and copying machine. 7. Providing on-site communication facilities for the Owner and the Engineer, including telephones, radio pagers, and fax machines. 8. Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified per Cal-OSHA and these Contract Documents. 9. Furnishing, installing, and maintaining all storage buildings or sheds required for temporary storage of products, equipment, or materials that have not yet been installed in the Work. All such storage shall meet manufacturer’s specified storage requirements, and the specific provisions of the specifications, including temperature and humidity control, if recommended by the manufacturer, and for all security. 10. Arranging for and erection of Contractor’s work and storage yard. 11. Posting all OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs per Cal- OSHA. 12. Full-time presence of Contractor’s superintendent at the job site as required herein. 13. Submittal of Construction Schedule as required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 46. PAYMENTS a. The City shall make monthly progress payments following receipt of undisputed and properly submitted payment requests. Contractor shall be paid a sum equal to ninety percent (90%) of the value of Work performed up to the last day of the previous month, less the aggregate of previous payments. b. The Contractor shall, after the full completion of The Work, submit a final payment application. All prior progress estimates shall be subject to correction in the final estimate and payment. c. Unless otherwise required by law, the final payment of ten percent (10%) of the value of the Work, if unencumbered, shall be paid no later than sixty (60) Days after the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion. GENERAL CONDITIONS 64 d. Acceptance by Contractor of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims against the City arising from this Contract. e. Payments to the Contractor shall not be construed to be an acceptance of any defective work or improper materials, or to relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. f. The Contractor shall submit with each payment request the Contractor’s conditional waiver of lien for the entire amount covered by such payment request, as well as a valid unconditional waiver of lien from the Contractor and all subcontractors and materialmen for all work and materials included in any prior invoices. Waivers of lien shall be in the forms prescribed by California Civil Code Section 3262. Prior to final payment by the City, the Contractor shall submit a final waiver of lien for the Contractor’s work, together with releases of lien from any subcontractor or materialmen. ARTICLE 47. PAYMENTS WITHHELD AND BACKCHARGES In addition to amounts which the City may retain under other provisions of the Contract Documents the City may withhold payments due to Contractor as may be necessary to cover: a. Stop Notice Claims. b. Defective work not remedied. c. Failure of Contractor to make proper payments to its subcontractors or suppliers. d. Completion of the Contract if there exists a reasonable doubt that the work can be completed for balance then unpaid. e. Damage to another contractor or third party. f. Amounts which may be due the City for claims against Contractor. g. Failure of Contractor to keep the record (“as-built”) drawings up to date. h. Failure to provide updates on the construction schedule. i. Site clean up. j. Failure of the Contractor to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. k. Liquated damages. l. Legally permitted penalties. GENERAL CONDITIONS 65 Upon completion of the Contract, the City will reduce the final Contract amount to reflect costs charged to the Contractor, backcharges or payments withheld pursuant to the Contract Documents. GENERAL CONDITIONS 66 ARTICLE 48. CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK a. Change Order Work. 1) The City, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract amount and Contract time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including any adjustment in the Contract amount or the Contract time, and the full and final settlement of all costs (direct, indirect and overhead) related to the Work authorized by the Change Order. 2) All claims for additional compensation to the Contractor shall be presented in writing before the expense is incurred and will be adjusted as provided herein. No work shall be allowed to lag pending such adjustment, but shall be promptly executed as directed, even if a dispute arises. No claim will be considered after the work in question has been done unless a written contract change order has been issued or a timely written notice of claim has been made by Contractor. Contractor shall not be entitled to claim or bring suit for damages, whether for loss of profits or otherwise, on account of any decrease or omission of any item or portion of Work to be done. Whenever any change is made as provided for herein, such change shall be considered and treated as thou gh originally included in the Contract, and shall be subject to all terms, conditions and provisions of the original Contract. 3) Owner Initiated Change. The Contractor must submit a complete cost proposal, including any change in the Contract time, within seven (7) Days after receipt of a scope of a proposed change order, unless the City requests that proposals be submitted in less than seven (7) Days. 4) Contractor Initiated Change. The Contractor must give written notice of a proposed change order required for compliance with the Contract Documents within seven (7) Days of discovery of the facts giving rise to the proposed change order. 5) Whenever possible, any changes to the Contract amount shall be in a lump sum mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the City. 6) Price quotations from the Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficiently detailed supporting documentation to permit verification by the City. GENERAL CONDITIONS 67 7) If the Contractor fails to submit the cost proposal within the seven (7) Day period (or as requested), the City has the right to order the Contractor in writing to commence the work immediately on a force account basis and/or issue a lump sum change to the contract price in accordance with the City’s estimate of cost. If the change is issued based on the City estimate, the Contractor will waive its right to dispute the action unless within fifteen (15) Days following completion of the added/deleted work, the Contractor presents written proof that the City’s estimate was in error. 8) Estimates for lump sum quotations and accounting for cost-plus-percentage work shall be limited to direct expenditures necessitated specifically by the subject extra work, and shall be segregated as follows: (a) Labor. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages prevailing locally for each craft or type of worker at the time the extra work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes and insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs resulting from Federal, State or local laws, as well as assessment or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. The use of a labor classification which would increase the extra work cost will not be permitted unless the contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. (b) Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight and delivery. Materials cost shall be based upon supplier or manufacturer’s invoice. If invoices or other satisfactory evidence of cost are not furnished within fifteen (15) Days of delivery, then the Engineer shall determine the materials cost, at its sole discretion. (c) Tool and Equipment Use. No payment will be made for the use of small tools, tools which have a replacement value of $1,000 or less. Regardless of ownership, the rates to be used in determining equipment use costs shall not exceed listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies, or distributors, at the time the work is performed. (d) Overhead, Profit and Other Charges. The mark-up for overhead (including supervision) and profit on work added to the Contract shall be according to the following: i. “Net Cost” is defined as consisting of costs of labor, materials and tools and equipment only excluding overhead and profit. The GENERAL CONDITIONS 68 costs of applicable insurance and bond premium will be reimbursed to the Contractor and subcontractors at cost only, without mark-up. ii. For Work performed by the Contractor’s forces the added cost for overhead and profit shall not exceed fifteen (15%) percent of the Net Cost of the Work. iii. For Work performed by a subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall not exceed fifteen (15%) percent of the Net Cost of the Work to which the Contractor may add five (5%) percent of the subcontractor’s Net Cost. iv. For Work performed by a sub-subcontractor the added cost for overhead and profit shall not exceed fifteen (15 %) percent of the Net Cost for Work to which the subcontractor and general contractor may each add an additional five (5 %) percent of the Net Cost of the lower tier subcontractor. iv. No additional mark up will be allowed for lower tier subcontractors, and in no case shall the added cost for overhead and profit payable by City exceed twenty-five (25%) percent of the Net Cost as defined herein. 9) For added or deducted Work by subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish to the City the subcontractor’s signed detailed estimate of the cost of labor, material and equipment, including the subcontractor markup for overhead and profit. The same requirement shall apply to sub-subcontractors. 10) For added or deducted work furnished by a vendor or supplier, the Contractor shall furnish to the City a detailed estimate or quotation of the cost to the Contractor, signed by such vendor or supplier. 11) Any change in The Work involving both additions and deletions shall indicate a net total cost, including subcontracts and materials. Allowance for overhead and profit, as specified herein, shall be applied if the net total cost is an extra; overhead and profit allowances shall not be applied if the net total cost is a credit. The estimated cost of deductions shall be based on labor and material prices on the date the Contract was executed. 12) Contractor shall not reserve a right to assert impact costs, extended job site costs, extended overhead, constructive acceleration and/or actual acceleration beyond what is stated in the change order for work. No claims shall be allowed for impact, extended overhead costs, constructive acceleration and/or actual acceleration due to a multiplicity of changes and/or clarifications. The GENERAL CONDITIONS 69 Contractor may not change or modify the City’s change order form in an attempt to reserve additional rights. 13) If the City disagrees with the proposal submitted by Contractor, it will notify the Contractor and the City will provide its opinion of the appropriate price and/or time extension. If the Contractor agrees with the City, a change order will be issued by the City. If no agreement can be reached, the City shall have the right to issue a unilateral change order setting forth its determination of the reasonable additions or savings in costs and time attributable to the extra or deleted work. Such determination shall become final and binding if the Contractor fails to submit a claim in writing to the City within fifteen (15) Days of the issuance of the unilateral change order, disputing the terms of the unilateral change order. 14) No dispute, disagreement or failure of the parties to reach agreement on the terms of the change order shall relieve the Contractor from the obligation to proceed with performance of the work, including extra work, promptly and expeditiously. 15) Any alterations, extensions of time, extra work or any other changes may be made without securing consent of the Contractor’s surety or sureties. ARTICLE 49. OCCUPANCY The City reserves the right to occupy or utilize any portion of The Work at any time before completion, and such occupancy or use shall not constitute Acceptance of any part of Work covered by this Contract. This use shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibilities under the Contract. ARTICLE 50. INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall defend (with counsel of City’s choosing), indemnify and hold the City, its officials, officers, agents, employees, and representatives free and harmless from any and all claims, demands, causes of action, costs, expenses, liabilities, losses, damages or injuries, in law or equity, regardless of whether the allegations are false, fraudulent, or groundless, to property or persons, including wrongful death, to the extent arising out of or incident to any acts, omissions or willful misconduct of Contractor, its officials, officers, employees, agents, consultants and contractors arising out of or in connection with the performance of the Work or this Contract, including claims made by subcontractors for nonpayment, including without limitation the payment of all consequential damages and attorneys fees and other related costs and expenses. Contractor shall defend, at Contractor’s own cost, expense and risk, with counsel of City’s choosing, any and all such aforesaid suits, actions or other legal proceedings of every kind that may be brought or instituted against City, its officials, officers, agents, employees and representatives. To the extent of its liability, Contractor shall pay and satisfy any judgment, award or decree that may be rendered against City, its officials, officers, GENERAL CONDITIONS 70 employees, agents, employees and representatives, in any such suit, action or other legal proceeding. Contractor shall reimburse City, its officials, officers, agents, employees and representatives for any and all legal expenses and costs incurred by each of them in connection therewith or in enforcing the indemnity herein provided. The only limitations on this provision shall be those imposed by Civil Code Section 2782. ARTICLE 51. RECORD (“AS BUILT”) DRAWINGS a. Contractor shall prepare and maintain a complete set of record drawings (herein referred to as “as-builts”) and shall require each trade to prepare its own as-builts. The as-builts must show the entire site for each major trade, including but not limited to water, sewer, electrical, data, telephone, cable, fire alarm, gas and plumbing. Contractor shall mark the as-builts to show the actual installation where the installation varies from the Work as originally shown. Contractor shall mark whichever drawings are most capable of showing conditions fully and where shop drawings are used, Contractor must record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the contract drawings. Contractor shall give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Contractor shall use colors to distinguish variations in separate categories of The Work. b. Contractor shall note related change order numbers where applicable. Contractor shall organize as-builts into manageable sets, bound with durable paper cover sheets and shall print suitable title, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. Contractor to also provide an electronic version of the as-builts. The suitability of the as-builts will be determined by the Engineer. ARTICLE 52. RESOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CLAIMS a. In accordance with Public Contract Code Sections 20104 et seq. and other applicable law, public works claims of $375,000 or less which arise between the Contractor and the City shall be resolved under the following the statutory procedure unless the City has elected to resolve the dispute pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 10240 et seq. b. All Claims: All claims shall be submitted in writing and accompanied by substantiating documentation. Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment unless other notice requirements are provided in the contract. "Claim" means a separate demand by the claimant for (1) a time extension, (2) payment of money or damages arising from work done by or on behalf of the claimant and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the claimant is not otherwise entitled, or (3) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the City. c. Claims Under $50,000. The City shall respond in writing to the claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or, the City may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses or claims the City may have. If additional information is needed thereafter, it shall be GENERAL CONDITIONS 71 provided upon mutual agreement of the City and the claimant. The City's written response shall be submitted 15 days after receiving the additional do cumentation, or within the same period of time taken by the claimant to produce the additional information, whichever is greater. d. Claims over $50,000 but less than or equal to $375,000. The City shall respond in writing within 60 days of receipt, or, may request in writing within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documents supporting the claim or relating to defenses or claims the City may have against the claimant. If additional information is needed thereafter, it shall be provided pursuant to mutual agreement between the City and the claimant. The City's response shall be submitted within 30 days after receipt of the further documents, or within the same period of time taken by the claimant to produce the additional information or documents, whichever is greater. The Contractor shall make these records and documents available at all reasonable times, without any direct charge. e. The Contractor will submit the claim justification in the following format: 1) Summary of claim merit and price, and Contract clause pursuant to which the claim is made. 2) List of documents relating to claim (a) Specifications (b) Drawings (c) Clarifications (Requests for Information) (d) Schedules (e) Other 3) Chronology of events and correspondence 4) Analysis of claim merit 5) Analysis of claim cost 6) Analysis of time impact analysis in CPM format 7) Cover letter and certification of validity of the claim f. If the claimant disputes the City's response, or if the City fails to respond within the statutory time period(s), the claimant may so notify the City within 15 days of the receipt of the response or the failure to respond, and demand an informal conference to GENERAL CONDITIONS 72 meet and confer for settlement. Upon such demand, the City shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 Days. g. If following the meet and confer conference, the claim or any portion thereof remains in dispute, the claimant may file a claim pursuant to Government Code 900 et seq. and Government Code 910 et seq. For purposes of those provisions, the time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits the written claim until the time the claim is denied, including any time utilized for the meet and confer conference. h. Submission of a claim, properly certified, with all required supporting documentation, and written rejection or denial of all or part of the claim by City, is a condition precedent to any action, proceeding, litigation, suit, general conditions claim, or demand for arbitration by Contractor. ARTICLE 53. CITY’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT a. Termination for Cause: The City may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, serve written notice upon Contractor of its intention to terminate this Contract if the Contractor: (i) refuses or fails to prosecute The Work or any part thereof with such diligence as will ensure its completion within the time required; (ii) fails to complete The Work within the required time; (iii) should file a bankruptcy petition or be adjudged a bankrupt; (iv) should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; (v) should have a receiver appointed; (vi) should persistently or repeatedly refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials to complete the work; (vii) should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for material or labor; (viii) persistently disregard laws, ordinances, other requirements or instructions of the City; or (ix) should violate any of the provisions of the Contract Documents. The notice of intent to terminate shall contain the reasons for such intention to terminate. Unless within ten (10) Days after the service of such notice, such condition shall cease or satisfactory arrangements (acceptable to the City) for the required correction are made, this Contract shall be termin ated. In such case, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Project has been finished. The City may take over and complete The Work by any method it may deem appropriate. Contractor and its surety shall be liable to th e City for any excess costs or other damages incurred by the City to complete the Project. If the City takes over The Work, the City may, without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing The Work such materials, appliances, plant, and other property belonging to the Contractor as may be on the Project site. b. Termination For Convenience: The City may terminate performance of The Work in whole or, in part, if the City determines that a termination is in the City's interest. GENERAL CONDITIONS 73 The Contractor shall terminate all or any part of The Work upon delivery to the Contractor of a Notice of Termination specifying that the termination is for the convenience of the City, the extent of termination, and the effective date of such termination. After receipt of Notice of Termination, and except as directed by the City, the Contractor shall, regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting any amounts due under this Termination for Convenience clause, immediately proceed with the following obligations: 1) Stop Work as specified in the Notice. 2) Complete any Work specified in the Notice of Termination in a least cost/shortest time manner while still maintaining the quality called for under the Contract Documents. 3) Leave the property upon which the Contractor was working and upon which the facility (or facilities) forming the basis of the Contract Documents is situated in a safe and sanitary manner such that it does not pose any threat to the public health or safety. 4) Terminate all subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the portions of The Work terminated. 5) Place no further subcontracts or orders, except as necessary to complete the remaining portion of The Work. 6) Submit to the City, within ten (10) Days from the effective date of the Notice of Termination, all of the documentation called for by the Contract Documents to substantiate all costs incurred by the Contractor for labor, materials and equipment through the Effective Date of the Notice of Termination. Any documentation substantiating costs incurred by the Contractor solely as a result of the City's exercise of its right to terminate this Contract pursuant to this clause, which costs the Contractor is authorized under the Contract Documents to incur, shall: (i) be submitted to and received by the City no later than thirty (30) Days after the Effective Date of the Notice of Termination; (ii) describe the costs incurred with particularity; and (iii) be conspicuously identified as "Termination Costs Occasioned by the City's Termination for Convenience." 7) These provisions are in addition to and not in limitation of any other rights or remedies available to the City. GENERAL CONDITIONS 74 c. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article, when immediate action is necessary to protect life and safety or to reduce significant exposure or liability, the City may immediately order Contractor to cease Work on the Project until such safety or liability issues are addressed to the satisfaction of the City or the Contract is terminated. ARTICLE 54. WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE a. Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract shall be new unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents; and that all Work conforms to the Contract Document requirements and is free of any defect whether performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor or supplier. b. Unless otherwise stated, all warranty periods shall begin upon the filing of the Notice of Completion. Unless otherwise stated, the warranty period shall be for one year. c. The Contractor shall remedy at its expense any damage to City-owned or controlled real or personal property. d. Contractor shall furnish the City with all warranty and guarantee documents prior to final Acceptance of the Project by the City. e. The City shall notify the Contractor, in writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of any failure, defect, or damage. The Contractor shall within ten (10) Days after being notified commence and perform with due diligence all necessary Work. If the Contractor fails to promptly remedy any defect, or damage; the county shall have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy the defect, or damage at the Contractor’s expense. f. In the event of any emergency constituting an immediate hazard to health, safety, property, or licensees, when caused by Work of the Contractor not in accordance with the Contract requirements, the City may undertake at Contractor’s expense, and without prior notice, all Work necessary to correct such condition. g. With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from s ubcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers for Work performed and Materials furnished under this Contract, the Contractor shall: 1) Obtain for City all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice; 2) Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of the City; and 3) Enforce all warranties for the benefit of the City, unless otherwise directed in writing by the City. This Article shall not limit the City’s rights under this Contract or with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes, or fraud. The City specifically reserves all rights related to defective work, GENERAL CONDITIONS 75 including but not limited to the defect claims pursuant to California Code of Civil Procedure Section 337.15. ARTICLE 55. DOCUMENT RETENTION & EXAMINATION a. In accordance with Government Code Section 8546.7, records of both the City and the Contractor shall be subject to examination and audit by the State Auditor General for a period of three (3) years after final payment. b. Contractor shall make available to the City any of the Contractor’s other documents related to the Project immediately upon request of the City. c. In addition to the State Auditor rights above, the City shall have the right to examine and audit all books, estimates, records, contracts, documents, bid documents, subcontracts, and other data of the Contractor (including computations and projections) related to negotiating, pricing, or performing the modification in order to evaluate the accuracy and completeness of the cost or pricing data at no additional cost to the City, for a period of four (4) years after final payment. ARTICLE 56. SOILS INVESTIGATIONS When a soils investigation report for the Project site is available, such report shall not be a part of the Contract Documents. Any information obtained from such report as t o subsurface soil condition, or to elevations of existing grades or elevations of underlying rock, is approximate only and is not guaranteed. Contractor acknowledges that any soils investigation report (including any borings) was prepared for purposes of design only and Contractor is required to examine the site before submitting its bid and must make whatever tests it deems appropriate to determine the underground condition of the soil. ARTICLE 57. SEPARATE CONTRACTS a. The City reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Work or on the Project site. Contractor shall permit other contractors reasonable access and storage of their materials and execution of their work and shall properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs. b. To ensure proper execution of its subsequent Work, Contractor shall immediately inspect work already in place and shall at once report to the Engineer any problems with the work in place or discrepancies with the Contract Documents. c. Contractor shall ascertain to its own satisfaction the scope of the Project and nature of any other contracts that have been or may be awarded by the City in prosecution of the Project to the end that Contractor may perform this Contract in the light of such other contracts, if any. Nothing herein contained shall be interpreted as granting to Contractor exclusive occupancy at site of the Project. Contractor shall not cause any unnecessary hindrance or delay to any other contractor working on the Project. If GENERAL CONDITIONS 76 simultaneous execution of any contract for the Project is likely to cause interference with performance of some other contract or contracts, the Engineer shall decide which Contractor shall cease Work temporarily and which contractor shall continue or whether work can be coordinated so that contractors may proceed simultaneously. The City shall not be responsible for any damages suffered or for extra costs incurred by Contractor resulting directly or indirectly from award, performance, or attempted performance of any other contract or contracts on the Project site. ARTICLE 58. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF All notices shall be in writing and either served by personal delivery or mailed to the other party as designated in the Bid Forms. Written notice to the Contractor shall be addressed to Contractor’s principal place of business unless Contractor designates another address in writing for service of notice. Notice to City shall be addressed to the City as designated in the Notice Inviting Bids unless City designates another address in writing for service of notice. Notice shall be effective upon receipt or five (5) Days after being sent by first class mail, whichever is earlier. Notice given by facsimile shall not be effective unless acknowledged in writing by the receiving party. ARTICLE 59. NOTICE OF THIRD PARTY CLAIMS Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 9201, the City shall provide Contractor with timely notification of the receipt of any third-party claim relating to the Contract. ARTICLE 60. STATE LICENSE BOARD NOTICE. Contractors are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractors’ State License Board which has jurisdiction to investigate complaints against contractors if a complaint regarding a patent act or omission is filed within four (4) years of the date of the alleged violation. A complaint regarding a latent act or omission pertaining to structural defects must be filed within ten (10) years of the date of the alleged violation. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors’ State License Board, P.O. Box 26000, Sacramento, California 95826. ARTICLE 61. INTEGRATION a. Oral Modifications Ineffective. No oral order, objection, direction, claim or notice by any party or person shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations contained in the Contract Documents. b. Contract Documents Represent Entire Contract. The Contract Documents represent the entire agreement of the City and Contractor. GENERAL CONDITIONS 77 ARTICLE 62. ASSIGNMENT Contractor shall not assign, transfer, convey, sublet, or otherwise dispose of this Contract or any part thereof including any claims, without prior written consent of the City. Any assignment without the written consent of the City shall be void. Any assignment of money due or to become due under this Contract shall be subject to a prior lien for services rendered or Material supplied for performance of Work called for under the Contract Documents in favor of all persons, firms, or corporations rendering such services or supplying such Materials to the extent that claims are filed pursuant to the Civil Code, the Code of Ci vil Procedure or the Government Code. ARTICLE 63. CHANGE IN NAME AND NATURE OF CONTRACTOR’S LEGAL ENTITY Should a change be contemplated in the name or nature of the Contractor’s legal entity, the Contractor shall first notify the City in order that proper steps may b e taken to have the change reflected on the Contract. ARTICLE 64. ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST ACTIONS Pursuant to Section 7103.5 of the Public Contract Code, in entering into a public works contract or subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a publ ic works contract, Contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the City all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Section 15) or under the Cartwright Act (chapter 2 (commencing with Section 16700) of part 2 of division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from the purchase of goods, services, or materials pursuant to this Contract or any subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the City makes final payment to the Contractor, without further acknowledgment by the parties. ARTICLE 65. PROHIBITED INTERESTS No City official or representative who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the City to negotiate, supervise, make, accept, or approve, or to take part in negotiating, supervising, making, accepting or approving any engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with construction of the project, shall be or become directly or indirectly interested financially in the Contract. ARTICLE 66. LAWS AND REGULATIONS a. Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on conduct of work as indicated and specified. If Contractor observes that drawings and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided for in this Contract for changes in work. If Contractor performs any work knowing it to GENERAL CONDITIONS 78 be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. b. Contractor shall be responsible for familiarity with the Americans with Disabilities Act (“ADA”) (42 U.S.C. § 12101 et seq.). The Work will be performed in compliance with ADA regulations. ARTICLE 67. PATENT FEES OR ROYALTIES. The Contractor shall include in its bid amount the patent fees or royalties on any patented article or process furnished or used in the Work. Contractor shall assume all liability and responsibility arising from the use of any patented, or allegedly patented, materials, equipment, devices or processes used in or incorporated with The Work, and shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the City, its officials, officers, agents, employees and representatives from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, damages, losses, costs and expenses, of whatsoever kind or nature, arising from such use. ARTICLE 68. OWNERSHIP OF DRAWING All Contract Documents furnished by the City are City property. They are not to be used by Contractor or any subcontractor on other work nor shall Contractor claim any right to such documents. With exception of one complete set of Contract Documents, all documents shall be returned to the City on request at completion of The Work. ARTICLE 69. NOTICE OF TAXABLE POSSESSORY INTEREST In accordance with Revenue and Taxation Code Section 107.6, the Contract Documents may create a possessory interest subject to personal property taxation for which Contractor will be responsible. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 79 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS [ATTACHED] PLANS AND DRAWINGS 80 PLANS AND DRAWINGS [ATTACHED] GENERAL CONDITIONS -i- PROJECT MANUAL BID SET Azusa City Library - Outdoor Learning Space 729 North Dalton Avenue Azusa, CA 91702 PREPARED FOR: CITY OF AZUSA 213 East Foothill Blvd. Azusa, CA 91702 PREPARED BY: KORN RANDPOLPH INC. 609 East Green St. Pasadena, CA 91101 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0001-1 SECTION 00 0001 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE SECTION 00 0107 SEALS PAGE DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY SECTION 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01 5639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 03 CONCRETE SECTION 03 1000 CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03 2000 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 3523 EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 MASONRY SECTION 04 2200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 8280 STONEWORK DIVISION 05 METALS SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0001-2 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13 1200 FOUNTAINS DIVISION 22 PLUMBING SECTION 22 1113 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING SECTION 31 1200 DEMOLITION SECTION 31 2000 EARTH MOVING DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 32 1313 SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 32 1540 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING SECTION 32 8400 IRRIGATION SECTION 32 9300 PLANTING DIVISION 33 UTILITIES SECTION 33 4100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0101-1 DOCUMENT 00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 1.1 PROJECT MANUAL A. Project Name: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space B. Owner's Name: The City of Azusa C. City/Sate: Azusa, CA D. Landscape Architect: Korn Randolph, Inc. E. Landscape Architect's Contact Information: 609 East Green Street Pasadena, CA 91101 626-564-0259 www.kornrandolph.com END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SEALS PAGE 00 0107-1 DOCUMENT 000107 SEALS PAGE 1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD A. Landscape Architect: 1. Korn Randolph, Inc. 609 E Green Street Pasadena CA 91101 B. Civil, Structural and Electrical Engineer: 1. Breen Design Group 1983 W 190th Street, Suite 200 Torrance CA 90504 END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUMMARY 01 1000-1 SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Access to site. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. 8. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space. 1. Project Location: 729 N Dalton Ave, Azusa CA 91702. B. Owner: City of Azusa. C. Landscape Architect: Korn Randolph, Inc. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Install an approximmately 50’ by 100’ landscaped outdoor patio space at the north side of the Azusa City Library. Access to the patio will be primarily through an existing door on the north wall of the Library. The patio space will be enclosed by metal fencing with a section of accordian folding panels that slide open for access to Veterans Freedom Park, and two pedestrian gates with panic hardware for safe exit from the patio. The patio consists of low stone walls, a wood Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUMMARY 01 1000-2 deck and concrete paving. B. Type of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Landscape Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work on site to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUMMARY 01 1000-3 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500-1 SECTION 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500-2 Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500-3 g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-1 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. C. Shop drawing and product data submittals shall be transmitted to Landscape Architect in electronic (PDF) format, a website service designed specifically for transmitting submittals between construction team members. D. The intent of electronic submittals is to expedite the construction process by reducing paperwork, improving information flow, and decreasing turnaround time. E. The electronic submittal process is not intended for color samples, color charts, or physical material samples. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Landscape Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not Require Landscape Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Landscape Landscape Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Landscape Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Landscape Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-2 1. Landscape Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Landscape Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Landscape Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Landscape Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Landscape Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Landscape Architect. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-3 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Landscape Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. e. Insert required information. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Landscape Architect. F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Landscape Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-4 I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Landscape Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project. a. Landscape Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Landscape Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit electronic copy of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit electronic copy of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Landscape Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Complete for each product type. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-5 g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Landscape Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Landscape Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Landscape Architect will return one copy(ies). c. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Landscape Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-6 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Landscape Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit sets of Samples. Landscape Architect and Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Submit product schedule in the following format: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-7 a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Landscape Architect will return two copies. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Contract G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in The Contract. H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements." I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures." J. L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Landscape Architects and owners, and other information specified. K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements." S. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-8 before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. T. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. V. Submittal Preparation - Contractor may use any or all of the following options: 1. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide electronic (PDF) submittals to Contractor via the project website. 2. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to General Contractor who electronically scans and converts to PDF format. 3. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to Scanning Service which electronically scans and converts to PDF format. W. Contractor shall review and apply electronic stamp certifying that the submittal complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents including verification of manufacturer / product, dimensions and coordination of information with other parts of the work. X. Contractor shall transmit each submittal to Landscape Architect using the project website. Y. Landscape Architect / Engineer review comments will be made available on the project website for downloading. Contractor will receive email notice of completed review. Z. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors and suppliers is the responsibility of the Contractor. AA. Submit electronic copies of reviewed submittals at project closeout for record purposes in accordance with Closeout Submittals requirements. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Landscape Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-9 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COSTS A. The cost of project website, such as submittal Exchange services will be paid in full by the Owner. B. At Contractor’s option, training is available from Submittal Exchange regarding use of website and PDF submittals. Contact Submittal Exchange at 1-800-714-0024. C. Internet Service and Equipment Requirements: 1. Email address and Internet access at Contractor’s main office. 2. Adobe Acrobat (www.adobe.com), Bluebeam PDF Revu (www.bluebeam.com), or other similar PDF review software for applying electronic stamps and comments. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Landscape Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.3 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Landscape Architect and Construction Manager will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Landscape Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Landscape Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C. Informational Submittals: Landscape Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Landscape Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-10 E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100-1 SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100-2 F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100-3 a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100-4 performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager. 2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100-5 4. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination ofsubstrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100-6 D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100-7 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, as indicated in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows: PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-1 SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's representatives, Landscape Architect, Project Engineers, General Contractor ’s subcontractors, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-2 Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines . 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, [6 feet] [8 feet] high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Sanitary Facilities. B. Staging area 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-3 A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove drainiage lawfully. 1. Connect to municipal systems as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Landscape Architect schedules Substantial Completion. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-4 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated and required. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 4. Remove any grafitti as it occurs. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Dispose of all waste in a legal manner. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing trees, vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing." D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 5639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-5 F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-6 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. Maintain site litter free at all times. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639-1 SECTION 01 5639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of protection-zone fencing. C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. B. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. C. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA, licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located, current member of ASCA, or registered Consulting Arborist as designated by ASCA. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639-2 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials. B. Topsoil: Stockpiled topsoil from location shown on Drawings. C. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood , free from deleterious materials. D. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high-density extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch maximum opening in pattern and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized-steel posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart. High-visibility orange color, nonfading. 2. Height of Fencing: 4 feet. 3. Gates: Swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639-3 construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside protection zones and other areas indicated with 6-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks. 3.2 PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing at the dripline of the tree or as directed on plans or in the field at the pre-construction meeting, in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. 1. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support and protection for the paving acceptable to Architect. 2. Access Gates: Install where one per zone. B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations. D. Maintain protection-zone fencing i n good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." B. Trenching near Existing Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut or prune any tree roots without the consent and approval of the City of Azusa Arborist or Representative. C. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. 3.4 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction only with the approval of the City of Azusa Arborist or Representative. Once approved, prune roots as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently covered with soil. 3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639-4 4. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. Prune roots only with the approval of the City. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. Prune roots only with the approval of the City. 3.5 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Only Prune branches with the approval of the City of Azusa Arborist.Prune branches as follows: 1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by city of Azusa arborist. 2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1). 3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. B. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site. 3.6 REGRADING A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. B. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. C. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.8 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 5639-5 2. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 3. Perform repairs within 24 hours. 4. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-1 SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-2 permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Construction Manager's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-3 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-4 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first . 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated copy. b. PDF electronic file. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated copy. c. Three Insert number paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies. 1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-5 allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-6 and Controls." Prepare written report. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-1 SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. B. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-2 B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: DWG DXF DGN, Version , Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. 6. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-3 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file paper copy scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file paper copy scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file paper copy scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-1 SECTION 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Landscape Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-2 A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-3 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems and equipment not part of a system. 1. Landscape Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900-4 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format acceptable to Landscape Architect. C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. D. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 1 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Design and construction of formwork for concrete. 2. Setting in forms, all anchor bolts, metal inserts, sleeves, etc., embedded in concrete. 3. Miscellaneous concrete work, including but not limited to areaways, cast-in-place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks, equipment bases, and other items as shown or required to complete all Work. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Formwork for site concrete work, Section 03 30 00. 2. Furnishing and placing reinforcing for cast-in-place concrete, Section 03 20 00. 3. Furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing of cast-in-place concrete, Section 03 30 00. 4. Placing of embedded anchor bolts and inserts, Section 03 30 00. 5. Screeds for slabs, Section 03 30 00. 6. Screeds for insulating concrete, Section 03 30 00. 7. Screeds for composite insulating concrete, Section 03 30 00. 1.02 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following latest edition of the references, codes and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Latest edition of references and codes adopted by the Governing Agency shall apply. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) – ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) – ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete Buildings.” 3. Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials - ACI 117. 4. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete - ACI 318. 5. International Building Code with State of California Amendments (CBC). 6. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) Grading and Dressing Rules No. 17. 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Unexposed Finish: A general-use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed concrete concealed from view after completion of construction. B. Exposed Finish: A general-use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any). Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 2 1.04 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: A. Formwork Design Requirements: Formwork products and execution specified herein are for finish surface quality only. 1. Design, layout and construction of formwork shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Design and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to California Building Code (CBC) requirements and ACI 318. 3. Resulting concrete shall conform to shapes, lines and dimensions indicated and required. 4. Tolerances for concrete shall be as specified in ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 318 and ACI 347, unless otherwise specified or indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Timing: Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing form pattern layouts of all exposed exterior and interior concrete dimensioned to precisely locate grooves, form panel jointing, and similar features. Review and approval will not include form strength and adequacy. C. Record Document: Keep an accurate record of the dates of removal of forms, form shores and reshores, and furnish copies to the Architect. D. Submit product data for all proprietary items to be used on project. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Construct forms according to ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", and conforming to tolerances specified in ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings", as applicable, unless exceeded by code requirements or otherwise indicated or specified. B. Prior to construction of formwork for concrete beams and slabs above grade, Contractor shall conduct a meeting at the site to determine and define all cambers required for the project. The Architect, Structural Engineer of record, Contractor and Contractor's formwork installer shall be in attendance at this meeting. C. Formwork Designer's Qualifications: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, designer of formwork shall be a Civil or Structural Engineer registered to practice in the State of California. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to formwork construction requirements of the California Building Code (CBC) as amended and adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordination: Coordinate Work specified in this Section with other Sections which require placement of embedded products and provision of openings and recesses. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from the Architect before proceeding. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 3 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials for forms in timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress. B. Store materials by methods that prevent damage and permit ready access for inspection and identification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Form lumber: WCLIB "Construction" grade or better, WWPA No. 1 or better, or equal. B. Form plywood: PS-1, Group I, Exterior Grade B-B Plyform or better, minimum 5-ply and 3/4" thick for exposed locations and not less than 5/8" thick for unexposed locations, grade marked, not mill oiled, Plywood having medium or high density overlay is acceptable. C. Coated form plywood: For exposed painted concrete, plastic overlaid plywood of grade specified above, factory coated with a form coating and release agent equal to "Noxcrete". D. Tube forms: Burke "SmoothTube", Sonoco "Seamless Sonotubes", Alton Building Products "Sleek Seamless Standard Wall", or equal, type leaving no marks in concrete, 1 -piece lengths for full required heights. E. Joist forms: Approved steel or molded plastic types as required. F. Special forms: For exposed integrally-colored concrete, plywood as above with high density overlay, plywood with integral structural hardboard facing or fibrous glass reinforced plastic facing, or approved equal producing specified finish. G. Hardboard: For curved surfaces, tempered hardboard, Masonite Corp., or equal. H. Lumber: Douglas fir or douglas fir-larch, grade appropriate for intended use, sound and undamaged straight edges, solid knots. I. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Wood molding at plywood or lumber forms; rigid plastic at steel, fiberglass and plastic forms. J. Embedded Nailers: Clear all heart redwood or pressure preservative-treated (PPT) douglas fir, edges reverse beveled to key into concrete. K. Form ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, or equal, not leaving metal within 1-1/2" of concrete surface leaving no hole larger than 1”. L. Form coating: Non-staining clear coating free from oil, silicone, wax, not grain-raising, "Formshield" by A.C. Horn, Inc., "Release" by Burke Concrete Accessories, or "Cast -Off" by Sonneborn Building Products. Where form liners are used, provide form coatings recommended by form liner manufacturer. Form coating shall comply with applicable air quality regulations for volatile organic compounds (VOC’s). Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 4 M. Form liner: Rigid or resilient type by L.M. Scofield, Labrado Forms, Symons, Greenstreak, or equal, types shown or directed, matching approved Sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP: A. Rigidly construct forms to prevent mortar leakage, sagging, displacement or bulging between studs. Use clean, sound, approved form material, coated with specified materials only, not oil. Provide backing on all plywood joints. B. Sides of all footings and grade beams shall be formed, unless permission is obtained to place concrete directly against earth. Where this permission is granted, the footing or grade beam dimension shall be increased 3". Remove formwork prior to backfilling operations. 3.02 FORM ERECTION AND REMOVAL: A. Conform to ACI 301, 2007 CBC Section 1906A, and ACI 347 except as exceeded by the requirements of Code, regulatory agencies, or herein. B. Formwork Bracing and Shoring: Provide bracing and shores to ensure stability of formwork and accommodate all construction loads. Use form ties of sufficient strength and sufficient quantities to prevent formwork spreading. Maintain principal shores to support concrete until minimum required strength is achieved. C. Construction: Coat forms with the specified resin coating, not form oil. Construct forms to exact shapes, sizes, lines, and dimensions required to obtain level, plumb, and straight surfaces. Provide openings, offsets, keys, reglets, anchorages, recesses, moldings, chamfers, blocking, screeds, drips, bulkheads, and all other required features. Make forms easily removable without hammering or prying against concrete. Space forms apart with metal spreaders. Construct forms to accurate alignment, location and grades, and provide against sagging, leakage of concrete mortar, or displacement occurring during and after placing of concre te. Coordinate installation of inserts and anchors in forms according to Shop Drawings and requirements for work of other sections. D. Camber: Place suitable jacks, wedges, or similar means to induce camber and to correct settlement in forms before and during concrete placing. Camber shall be as determined in pre- installation meeting specified above. In general, formwork shall be capable of accommodating camber of 1/8" per 10' of span plus 1/4". E. Corners and Angles: Provide 3/4" by 3/4" beveled chamfer strips for all exposed concrete corners and angles unless otherwise indicated. Form concealed concrete corners and angles square unless otherwise indicated. F. Reglets and Rebates: Form required reglets and rebates to receive frames, flashing, and other equipment. Obtain required dimensions, details, and precise positions for work to be installed under other sections and form concrete accordingly. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 5 G. Form Joints: Fill joints to produce smooth surfaces, intersections, and arrises. Use polymer foam or equivalent fillers at joints and where forms abut or overlap existing concrete to prevent leakage of mortar. H. Recesses, Drips, and Profiles: Provide smooth milled wood or preformed rubber or plastic shapes of types shown and required. I. Cleanouts and Cleaning: Provide temporary openings in all wall forms and other vertical forms for cleaning and inspection. Clean forms and surfaces to receive concrete prior to placing. J. Screeds: Set screeds and establish level for tops of concrete slabs and leveling for finish surfaces. Shape surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. Provide cradle, pad or base type screed supports for concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarders. K. Form Cleaning, General: Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection and placement proceeds. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to concrete placement. L. Formwork Reuse: Do not reuse wood and plywood forming materials which contact concrete, except as follows: 1. High density plywood may be cleaned and reused for exposed concrete. 2. Unfaced plywood may be reused for concealed concrete. 3. Steel and fiberglass forming materials may be cleaned and reused. M. Patching and Repairs: Patch tie holes with sheet metal patches and restore forms to like new condition prior to reuse. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. N. Form Removal: Do not remove concrete forms until concrete attains sufficient strength to support its own weight and all superimposed loads as determine by testing field cured concrete cylinders, but not sooner than specified in ACI 347, paragraph 3.6.2.3 or CBC Section 1906A.2. Load supporting forms may be removed when concrete has attained 75 percent of required 28 day compressive strength but no sooner than 3 days, provided construction is reshored. Vertical formwork for cast-in-place concrete walls may be removed no sooner than 1 day following concrete placement, provided that contractor can demonstrate that no sloughing or sagging of concrete will occur. 1. Reshore structural members as specified below because of design requirements or construction conditions to permit successive construction. 2. Remove formwork progressively so unbalanced loads are not imposed on the structure. 3. Avoid damage concrete surfaces during form removal. 4. Remove or snap off metal spreader ties inside wall surface. Cut nails and form ties off flush and leave surfaces level and clean. 5. Store reusable forms for exposed architectural concrete to prevent damage to contact surfaces. 6. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete surface coloration. O. Reshoring: 1. Minimum reshoring shall be as per the requirements of ACI 347.Reshoring of not less than half the full required shoring shall be added under last placed floo r over which full shoring is to be placed for the next floor above. Leave reshoring in place for at least 7 days after the floor above is placed, but in no case remove reshoring until next concrete Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 6 placing has attained a compressive strength equal to 66% of that required for the 28 day age as determined by control test cylinders specified hereinafter. 2. Record: Maintain a form and shoring removal record. 3. Contractor shall submit shoring/reshoring plans and calculations for review and approval. Calculations and plans shall be stamped and signed by a licensed civil or structural engineer in the State of California. Reshoring loads to the lower floors shall be consistent with the design loads specified in the construction documents and with the acquired strength of the lower floors based on the time they have been allowed to cure before being loaded. P. Shoring for Tributary Loads: Set temporary shoring for structural steel beams supporting cast -in- place concrete slabs. Such shoring is not required where beams are partially or totally encased with concrete nor for steel beams supporting concrete or masonry walls resting on the beams. 3.03 FORMWORK TOLERANCES: A. Deflection: Limit deflection of forming surfaces from concrete pressure to L/240. B. Finish Lines: Position formwork to maintain hardened concrete finish lines within following permissible deviations. 1. Variation from Plumb: In 10'-0" 1/4 inch In any story or 20'-0" 3/8 inch In 40'-0" or more 3/4 inch 2. Variation from Level or Grades Indicated In 10'-0" 1/4 inch In any bay or 20'-0" maximum 3/8 inch In 40'-0" or more 3/4 inch 3. Cross-Sectional Dimensions Minus 1/4 inch Plus 1/2 inch C. Building Lines: Variation of linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls and partitions: 1. In any bay or 10'-0" maximum 1/2 inch 2. In 40'-0" or more 1 inch D. Slab Openings: Variations in size and location of sleeves and slab openings shall not exceed 1/4 inch. 3.04 SURVEY AND ADJUSTMENT: A. Check forms before and during placement of concrete, using an instrument, and make corrections as work proceeds. 3.05 EMBEDDED PIPING AND ROUGH HARDWARE: A. Comply with 2007 CBC Section 1906A.3. Where work of other sections require openings for passage of pipes, conduits, ducts, and other inserts in the concrete, obtain all dimensions and Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 7 other information. All necessary pipe sleeves, anchors, or other required inserts shall be accurately installed as part of the work of other sections, according to following requirements. B. Openings: Size and locate formed openings, depressions, recesses and chases to accommodate products to be applied to, built into and pass through concrete Work. Coordinate size, location and placement of inserts, embedded products, openin gs and recesses with Work specified in other Sections. C. Anchors and Other Devices: Set and build into concrete formwork anchorage devices and other embedded products required for Work to be attached to or supported by concrete elements. D. Locating Embedded Products and Openings: Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and templates to set embedded products. E. Conduits or Pipes: Locate so as not to reduce strength of concrete. In no case place pipes, other than conduits, in a slab 4-1/2" thick or less. Conduit buried in a concrete slab shall not have an outside diameter greater than 1/3 the slab thickness nor be placed below the bottom reinforcing steel or over top reinforcing steel. Space conduit a minimum of 5 diameters apart. F. Sleeves: Pipe sleeves may pass through slabs or walls if not exposed to rusting or other deterioration and are of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel. Provide sleeves of diameter large enough to pass any hub or coupling on pipe, including any insulation. G. Conduits: Conduits may be embedded in walls only if the outside diameter does not exceed 1/3 the wall thickness, are spaced no closer than 3 diameters on centers, and do not impair the strength of the structure. H. Clusters of Conduits: 1. Clusters of conduits embedded in a concrete slab shall not exceed 6 conduits per cluster and each conduit per cluster shall be individually spaced as per the above requirements. Conduit clusters exceeding this requirement shall be reviewed and approved by the Structural Engineer of Record and DSA prior to the installation of the conduits. 2. If more than one conduit cluster is required in a specific area of the slab, routing and spacing of the clusters shall be reviewed and approved by the structural engineer of record and DSA prior to the installation of the conduits. 3. At no time shall the quantity and routing of clusters of conduits impair the strength of the concrete construction. 3.06 PATCHING: A. Schedule: Patch forming and tie holes immediately after form removal. B. Cleaning: Clean surface of all loose materials and soiling. C. Patching: Patch all holes and depressions with grouting gun and grout mix of one part cement and 2-1/2 parts mortar sand 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspection: Obtain inspection and approval of forms per 2007 CBC Table 1704A.4 Item 11 before placing structural concrete. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE FORM WORK 31 1000 - 8 END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 1 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Reinforcing mesh for cast-in-place concrete. 3. Reinforcing Bars for masonry. 4. Accessories, including but not limited to, chairs and tie wires. 5. Miscellaneous concrete work, including but not limited to areaways, cast-in-place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks, equipment bases, and other items as shown or required to complete all Work. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Formwork: Formwork for cast-in-place concrete; provisions for access for reinforcement Work, Section 03 10 00. 2. Cast in Place Concrete: Provisions for protection of reinforcement during concrete placement, Section 03 30 00. 1.02 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards are hereby made a part of this Section shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Latest edition of references and codes adopted by the Governing Agency shall apply. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements. A. Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings – ACI 301. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) – ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) – 315, “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures”. D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice. E. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. F. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature G. American Welding Society (AWS) – AWS D1.4, D1.12 “Structural Welding Code.” H. International Building Code with State of California amendments. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 2 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Timing: Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit including complete layouts, sections, and details for congested conditions, typical bending diagrams and offsets, splice leng ths and locations, proposed layout where vertical and horizontal bars intersect, and wherever welding is proposed, detailed to conform to AWS and CBC requirements. After approval of initial submission, subsequent submittals may be waived. C. Product Data: 1. Reinforcement supporting and spacing devices at exposed concrete only, to demonstrate non-corroding and non-staining characteristics. 2. Adhesive compounds. D. Certifications: If steel is to be welded, submit certifications signed by AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) of prequalified welding procedures, qualifications of welding procedures unless prequalified, qualification of welding operators, and qualification of welders. E. Chemical Analysis: Provide for bars to be welded, in accordance with CBC Table 1704A.4, 1903A.4 and ACI 318 3.5.2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Source Quality Control: Refer to Section 01 40 00 for general requirements and to following paragraphs for specific procedures. Testing Laboratory shall perform following conformance testing, shall select test samples of bars, ties, and stirrups from the material at the site or from place of distribution, each sampling including at least two 18" long pieces, and perform the following tests in accordance with CBC Section 1916A.2, ASTM 615 and ASTM A706. 1. Identified Bars: If samples are obtained from bundles as delivered from the mill, identified as to heat number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with Identification Certificate so as to be readily identified, perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of bars. Submit mill reports when samples are selected. 2. Unidentified Bars: When positive identification of reinforcing bars cannot be made and when random samples are obtained, perform tests for each 2.5 tons or fraction thereof, one tensile and one bend test from each size of bars. B. Qualification of Welds, Welding Operators, and Welders: Comply with applicable Building Code standard. Perform welding procedure qualification, except for prequalified procedures, as required by AWS D1.4, prior to executing any welding of reinforcing steel. 1. Only AWS Certified Welding Inspectors shall be used for tests and qualifications associated with welding of reinforcing steel. 2. Only AWS qualified welders or welding operators shall perform welding of reinforcing steel. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 3 C. Welding of reinforcing shall be in conformance with AWS & CBC. Do not weld reinforcing without approval of the structural engineer. D. Install reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318, CRSI & CBC. E. Coordination: Coordinate Work specified in this Section with other Sections which require placement of embedded products and provision of openings and recesses. If form work is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect (Structural Engineer) before proceeding 1.05 MARKING AND SHIPPING: A. Bundle bars, tag with identification, and transport and store so as not to damage any material. Use metal tags indicating size, length and other marking shown on placement drawings. Maintain tags after bundles are broken. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIAL: A. Provide and install an additional 2% of the total rebar quantity for the project in addition to the quantities shown on drawings. This additional steel shall be installed during construction, in sizes and locations as directed. Provide unit price for purpose of adjusting contract price to reflect quantity of extra material actually used. All unused material shall be credited to the owner based upon the agreed unit prices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. B. Reinforcing bars for welding: ASTM A706, Grade 60. C. Welded steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM A185 or A497 as indicated on the structural drawings. D. Shear studs: 1. Low carbon steel, C1015 in accordance with ASTM-A108. 2. Yield strength – 50,000 psi minimum. 3. Tensile strength – 60,000 psi minimum. 4. Elongation in 2” – 20% minimum. 5. Reduction of area – 50% minimum. E. Rails: Low carbon steel, type 44W. Shear studs shall be attached to rails by arc welding. F. Studwelding method in accordance with AWS D1.1. G. Tie wire: ASTM A82, Annealed copper-bearing steel, 16 gauge minimum. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 4 H. Chairs and similar support items: 1. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports and Spacers: Wire-bar-type devices, complying with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Provide size and shape as required for strength and support of reinforcement during reinforcement installation and concrete placement. a. Supports at Slab on Grade: Provide devices with load-bearing pads or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs, to prevent puncture of vapor retarder or provide precast concrete block bar supports of equal or greater strength to specified concrete. b. Corrosion Resistance: i. Provide plastic coated, plastic-tipped (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel types at exposed-to-view concrete surfaces. ii. Provide only stainless steel (CRSI Class 2) at exterior exposed surfaces to be painted. I. Welding electrodes: AWS D1.4, Table 5.1 and 5.5 low hydrogen electrodes, E9018 for Grade 60 steel, E70XX Series for grade 40 steel. J. Mechanical Couplers or Splice Devices: Lenton, Barlock, Cadweld. 2.02 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING BARS: Do not fabricate reinforcing bars until reinforcing bar shop drawings have been reviewed for g eneral conformance by the Architect. A. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction for fabrication of reinforcing steel. B. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are subject to rejection. Use only tested and approved bar materials. C. Welding: Use only ASTM 706 steel where welding is proposed. Perform welding, where shown or approved, by the direct electric arc process in accordance with AWS D1.4 using specified low - hydrogen electrodes. Preheat 6" each side of joint. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is prohibited. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of all loose scale and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and chip burned edges before placing welds. When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds found defective with chisel and replace with proper welding. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with Code. No welds shall be made at bends in reinforcing bars. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4. D. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize fully completed reinforcing assemblies in accordance with ASTM A123 where indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 5 3.01 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING: A. Provide additional reinforcing bars at wall and slab openings as required. Before placin g bars, and again before concrete is placed, clean bars of loose mill scale, oil, or any other coating that might destroy or reduce bond. B. Securing in Place: Accurately place bars and wire tie in precise position where bars cross. Bend ends of wire ties away from the forms. Wire tie bars to corners of ties and stirrups. Support bars according to the current edition of "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports" of Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, using approved accessories and chairs. Place pr ecast concrete cubes with embedded wire ties to support reinforcing steel bars in concrete placed on grade and in footings. Use care not to damage vapor barriers where they occur. C. Coordination: Locate reinforcement to accommodate embedded products and f ormed openings and recesses. D. Clearances: Maintain minimum clear distances between reinforcing bars and face of concrete as indicated on plans or directed. E. Splices: Do not splice reinforcing bars at the points of maximum stress except where indicated. Lap splices as shown or required to develop the full strength or stress of bars. Stagger splices in horizontal wall bars at least 24" longitudinally in alternate bars and opposite faces. F. Splice Devices: 1. Type and manufacture, noted on drawings. If substitution is requested, Contractor shall supply manufacturer calculations, supporting data and ICC ER reports showing proposed substitution conforms to requirements indicated and supplied. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Splice in a manner developing at least 125% of the yielding strength of the bar. G. Slab on Grade Reinforcement: Do not displace or damage vapor retarder at slab on grade. H. Wire Fabric Placement: Place fabric in sheets as long as practical, lapping adjoining pieces at least one full mesh plus 2”, 9”, or 1.5ld, whichever is greater and tie with 16 gage wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Extend fabric to within 1 -inch of edge at slabs on grade. Cut mesh at expansion joints and full depth control joints. I. Dowels: Secure tie dowels in place before depositing concrete. Provide No. 3 bars for securing dowels where no other reinforcement is provided J. Field Welding of Bars: As specified for fabrication. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 6 K. Maintaining Bars In Position: Take adequate precautions to assure that reinforcing position and spacing is maintained during placement of concrete. L. Adjustment and Inspection: Do not bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner injurious to material. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on Drawings and reviewed shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to corrosion or other cause. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Supervision: Perform work to this section under the supervision of a capable superintendent. B. Inspection: Obtain inspection and approval of reinforcing before concrete is placed. C. Welding Inspection. Whether welding is done in the shop or at the site, perform welding of reinforcing bars under inspection of the Testing Laboratory Welding Inspector. A ll reinforcing welding shall have continuous inspection. D. Notify structural engineer approximately 48 hours prior to completion of placement. 3.03 CORRECTIONS DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. Corrections During Concrete Placement: Maintain reinforcing steel workers during placement of concrete for resetting reinforcement displaced by runways, workers and other causes. 3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK: . Defective Reinforcement Work: The following shall be considered defective and may be or dered to be removed and reconstructed at no change in Contract Time or Sum. 1. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on Drawings. 2. Bars injured due to bending or straightening. 3. Bars heated or bent. 4. Reinforcement not placed in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. 5. Rusty or oily bars. 6. Bars exposed in surface of concrete. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes: 1. Furnishing, placing, patching, and initial curing of cast-in-place concrete unless otherwise specified. 2. Grout and drypack, except as otherwise specified. 3. Placing of embedded anchor bolts and inserts. 4. Vapor barrier under interior floor slabs on grade. 5. Finishing and final curing of cast-in-place concrete. 6. Waterstops including testing. 7. Miscellaneous concrete work, including but not limited to areaways, cast-in-place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks, equipment bases, and other items as shown or required to complete all Work. 8. Slurry concrete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Preparation and grading of earth subgrade under concrete, Section 31 22 00. 2. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Concrete for pedestrian and vehicular traffic, Section 32 13 00. 3. Furnishing, erection, and removal of forms, Section 03 10 00. 4. Furnishing and placing reinforcing for cast-in-place concrete, Section 03 20 00. 1.02 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards are hereby made a part of this Section work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Latest edition of references Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 2 and codes adopted by the Governing Agency shall apply. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements. A. ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. B. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. C. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. D. ACI 302.1 – Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. E. ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. F. ACI 304.2 Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. G. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting. H. ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting. I. ACI 308 – Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete. J. ACI 309 Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. K. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. L. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. M. ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. N. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Bars. O. NRMA Concrete Plant Standards and Truck Mixer and Agitator Standards. P. CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars. Q. “Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion” (Guideline No. 03730) International Concrete Repair Institute. R. “Guide for Selecting Application Methods for Repair of Concrete Surfaces” (“Guideline No. 03731) International Concrete Repair Institute. S. International Building Code with State of California Amendments (CBC). Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 3 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for structural concrete and concrete slabs showing dimensioned locations, types of construction and expansion joints, and method of keying. Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of submittals. C. Mix Designs: Submit mix designs for review and approval. Allow a minimum of two weeks for review of submittals. Also refer to Section 1.05. D. Product Data: Proprietary admixtures, curing compounds, hardeners and sealers. 1. Indicate compatibility of curing compounds and floor sealer with bond breaker for tilt-up concrete and finish materials to be applied to concrete. 2. Indicate compatibility of curing compounds, hardeners and sealers with materials used for installation of applied flooring E. Product Data: Submit the coloring admix manufacturer's technical data for products, methods, and color control procedures. F. Certificates: Certify that materials meet requirements of paragraph "Quality Assurance". G. Delivery Tickets: With each transit truck, provide delivery ticket, signed by an authorized representative of the batch plant, containing all information required by ASTM C94, as well as time batched, type and brand of cement, cement content, maximum size of aggregate and total water content. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Compliance with Regulations: All materials shall comply with the current rules and regulations of the local air quality management district, with the rules regarding volatile organic compounds, and with FDA rules and regulations for dangerous substances in construction products. B. Concrete Manufacturer: Furnish concrete from licensed commercial ready-mix concrete plants conforming to ASTM C94 and approved by Building Official. Requirements herein govern when exceeding ASTM C94. C. Allowable Tolerances: Construct concrete conforming to the tolerances specified in ACI 117 "Recommended Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials", as applicable, unless exceeded by requirements of regulatory agencies or otherwise indicated or specif ied. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4 D. Testing Agency Services: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to conduct tests and perform other services specified for quality control during construction. E. Source Quality Control: Refer to the following paragraphs for specific procedures. Concrete materials which, by previous tests or actual service, have shown conformance may be used without testing when so approved by the Architect and Building Official. Testing Laboratory shall perform following conformance testing. 1. Portland Cement: Furnish Certificate of Compliance in accordance with 2007 CBC Section 1916.1 and acceptable to Architect and Building Official, showing conformance with requirements specified; otherwise, the Testing Laboratory shall test each 250 barrels of cement in accordance with ASTM C150. 2. Aggregate For Normal Weight Concrete: Test the aggregate before and after concrete mix is designed and whenever character of aggregate varies or source of material is changed. Include a sieve analysis. Obtain samples of aggregates at the dry batching or ready-mix concrete plant in accordance with ASTM D75 and perform tests for the properties listed in the following table: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 5 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Physical Properties, units Test Method Minimum values Sieve analysis ASTM C136 Per ASTM C33 Sectopm 6 for fine aggregate and Table 2 for coarse aggregate. Organic impurities ASTM C40 Fine aggregate not darker than reference standard color Soundness ASTM C88 Loss after 5 cycles not more than 8 percent of coarse aggregate, nor more than 10 percent of fine aggregate Abrasion ASTM C131 For coarse aggregate weight loss not more than 10.5 percent after 100 revolutions, 42 percent after 500 revolutions Deleterious materials ASTM C33 Per ASTM C33 Table 1 for fine aggregate and Table 3 for coarse aggregate Materials finer than No. 200 sieve ASTM C117 Not over 1 percent for gravel, 1.5 percent for crushed aggregate Reactivity potential ASTM C227, C289, C342 Ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity not to exceed 1.0. See 2007 CBC Section 1903.3 Sand equivalent ASTM D2419 California sand equivalent values operating range not below 71 percent Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 6 F. Color Control for Integrally-Colored Concrete: Coloring admix and color control procedures of the L. M. Scofield Company, Los Angeles, California, or of Admixtures, Inc., Irwindale, California are specified to establish the standard of quality for all integrally colored concrete. Color admix manufacturer shall furnish the services of his technical representatives equipped with wet -batch color control test devices at ready-mix plant and site as required to assure concrete of uniform color matching approved Samples, at no extra cost. 1.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS: Testing Laboratory shall design concrete mixes for concrete requiring 28 -day compressive strength exceeding 2,500 psi. Contractor shall bear all costs for concrete mix designs. All mix designs shall be signed and sealed by a Civil Engineer registered in the State of California. A. Strength Requirements: Design mixes for structural concrete for minimum 28 -day compressive strengths required by Drawings and Specifications. All mix designs for structural concrete shall be proportioned in accordance with Section 3.9 of ACI 301. If trial batches are used, t he trial batch strength for each mix shall exceed indicated or specified strength by an amount based on the standard deviations of strength test records according to ACI 318 -05 Section 5.3.2 B. Normal Weight Concrete Mix Designs: Design all mixes for workability and durability of concrete. Control the mixes in accordance with 2007 CBC Section 1905A.1.1, ACI 211.1, “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete”, and ACI 318-05, Chapter 4. Make adjustments in cement content required for concrete strengths at Contractor's expense and do not exceed 0.50 absolute water-cement or cement plus flyash ratio by weight. Do not use calcium chloride or any admix containing such material. Admixtures containing a material releasing nitrates in solution are limited to 0.06 percent by weight for the chloride ion. C. Maximum Aggregate Sizes: Not exceeding 3/4 of minimum clear space between bars and between bars and forms, nor larger than 1/5 of least dimensions between the forms. Design the mixes with 3/4" maximum size, except maximum 1-1/2" size for foundations and maximum 3/8" size at congested reinforcing or thin sections, when approved by the Architect. D. Air Content: All formed normal weight concrete shall contain an air -entraining agent producing air content of 3.5% to 6.5% by volume and adjusted for weather conditions. All interior slabs shall have a maximum air content of 3 percent. E. Pumped Concrete: Design concrete mixes specifically for pump placing with dry loose volume of fine aggregates not more than 47 percent of total aggregates. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 7 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver all materials in timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. B. Store materials by methods that prevent damage and permit ready access for inspection and identification. C. Runoff: Prevent run off of water contaminated by construction agents and chemicals from soiling existing surfaces and from contaminating existing and future landscape areas. 1.07 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS: A. Do not place concrete during rain or adverse weather conditions without means to p revent all damage. Conform to requirements specified hereinafter whenever concrete placement is required during cold or hot weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali, or Type V when in contact with soils. Do not change brand or source without prior approval. B. White Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I, from one approved source. Use for integrally - colored concrete. C. Aggregates: 1. Standard weight aggregates: ASTM C33-03, from approved pits, free from vegetable matter and of opaline, feldspar, or siliceous magnesiu m substances; all washed, clean, hard, fine- grained sound crushed rock or gravel; not over 5 percent by weight of flat, thin, elongated, friable, or laminated pieces (pieces having major dimension over 5 times average dimension) or more than 2 percent by weight of shale or cherty material. 2. Lightweight aggregates: ASTM C330-05, Ridgelite, Rocklite, or equal, approved kiln expanded shale having fire sealed surface, coarse aggregate not produced by crushing, dry loose weight maximum 38 pcf, maximum 3/4” size, vacuum or thermally fully saturated for pumped concrete. The absolute volume of coarse aggregate in concrete mix not exceeding 8.8 cubic feet. Option: Approved pumice with pea gravel mix. D. Admixtures: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 8 1. Chemical (Water Reducing) Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A, D, or E. Only one brand. When used, are subject to approval of Architect, and must reduce the mixing water at least 10 percent without entraining air in excess of 2 percent by volume. If the water reducing agent entrains more than 2 percent air, the water reduction shall be at least 12 percent, but in no case shall the water reducing agent entrain air in excess of 4 percent. 2. Air-entraining admix: ASTM C260. 3. Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class F or C Fly Ash, 100 pounds maximum per cubic yard, containing 1 percent or less carbon. Fly ash shall not be used in excess of 20 percent by weight of total cement quantity. 4. Super-Plasticizers (High Range Water Reducers): ASTM C494, Type F or G. Master Builders "Rheobuild", Euclid "Eucon 37" or equal, capable of produci ng concrete which can be placed at 6-8 inch slump without segregation, capable of maintaining slump within 2" of that initially mixed for 90 minutes, and of maintaining concrete temperature within 2 degrees F. from time of batching for 90 minutes minimum. 5. Color Admixture: L.M. Scofield Company "Chromix", "Colorfull Concrete Color" by Admixtures, Inc., Irwindale, Calif., both standard and retarder types as required for the field placing conditions, or prior approved equal. E. Water: From potable domestic source. F. Curing Materials: 1. Curing, Hardening and Sealing Materials, General: Provide materials suitable for concrete finish and not detrimental to materials to be applied to concrete. Materials shall be compatible with concrete admixtures, shall be recommended by manufacturer for intended use and shall comply with applicable air quality requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 2. Liquid Curing compound: ASTM C309, Type I, Class B, W.R. Meadows 1100 Series, Master Builders "Masterkure-N-Seal W", or equal, complying with Rule 1113 of the South Coast Air Quality Management District and Federal Air Quality Regulation 40 CFR 52.254. 3. Curing sheet: ASTM C171, non-staining white types. 4. Curing, Hardening and Dustproofing Compound: Sonneborn Sonosil, water-based inorganic silicate-base compound, to cure, harden and dustproof concrete, VOC-compliant. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 9 5. Surface Hardening and Dustproofing Compound: Sonneborn Lapidolith concrete hardening compound, chemically-active solution which interacts with free lime in concrete to form dense, impervious wearing surface, VOC-compliant. G. Vapor barrier: ASTM D2103, polyethylene sheeting, clear, 10 mil thickness, impact strength greater than 70 grams per mil, 10' minimum width. Provide minimum 2" wide waterproof plastic self-adhering tape for sealing edges and ends of sheeting. Material shall be Rufco 400 by Raven Industries, Moistop by Fortifiber Corp, Nervastral Barrier by Rubber and Plastics Compound Co., or Vinyl Water Barrier by B.F. Goodrich Corp. or H. Vapor barrier: Griffolyn T105, white, 7 ply, high density polyethylene and nylon yarn laminate, manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., P.O. Box 750250, Houston TX 77275 (800) 231 -6074, FAX (713) 947-2053. The material shall have a reinforced non-woven grid suspended in a permanently flexible adhesive media. The material shall have tear strength of not less than 25 pounds when tested according to ASTM D2582. Tape for joining sheets, repairing punctures, and for bonding vapor barrier to projections through the membrane shall be dou ble sided "Fab Tape or single sided, pressure sensitive "Griff Tape" as applicable. (for lighter weight, use T-65, 3 ply tear strength 15 pounds) I. Non-shrink grout: Conform to Corps of Engineers CRC-C 621, ASTM C1107 and as follows: 6. Metallic for concealed areas: Master Builders "Embeco 885", or equal, non-gas-forming and free of oxidizing catalysts and inorganic accelerators, used as dry or damp pack, or mixed to a 20-second flow, without segregation or bleeding at any temperature between 45 degrees F and 100 degrees F. Working time 30 minutes or more. 7. Non-metallic for exposed areas: Master Builders "Masterflow 928", or Euclid "Euco Hi -Flow Grout". with same characteristics as specified for concealed areas. 8. Epoxy grout where indicated: Multi-component, premeasured, fast-curing combination of thermosetting resins and inert fillers, Master Builders "Masterflow 648CP Plus", Sikadur 42 Industrial Group-Pak by Sika Chemical Corporation, or Euclid "Euco High Strength Grout". J. Drypack: Field mixture of 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate mixed to a damp consistency such that a ball molded in the hands will stick together and hold its shape. At Contractor's option, the specified admixture may be added for increased workability at lower water/cement ratio. In lieu of field mixing, Contractor may use factory mixed drypack material, Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 10 such as Master Builders "Set Grout" or Euclid "Euco Dry Pack Grout". K. Waterstops: Williams Product Inc. "Efficiency Waterstops", Gates Rubber Co. "Kwik-Seal Waterstops", Electrovert Inc. "Durojoints" or "Duroseal", or approved equal, neoprene or polyvinyl chloride types shown, joints per manufacturer's directions. For walls, flat ribbed type, minimum 6" width by 3/8" thick at center with minimum 7 ribs each side of each flange. For slabs, ribbed center bulb type, minimum 9" wide by 3/8" thick next to bulb, minimum 9 ribs on each side of each flange, bulb minimum 1/2" ID and 7/8" OD. L. Expansion Joint Filler: Asphalt impregnated fiber or non extruding foam type, conforming to ASTM D1751 and D1752, W.R. Meadows “Sealtight”, or equal. M. Construction Joint Materials: "Key-Kold" or "Kwik-Joint", of profiles indicated. N. Bonding Agent: "Weld-Crete", manufactured by Larsen Products Co., P.O. Box 2127, Rockville, MD 20852, Master Builders "Concresive", or equal. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Furnish ready-mixed concrete from an approved commercial off-site plant. Conform to ASTM C94, except materials, testing, and mix designs as specified herein. Use transit mixer trucks equipped with automatic devices for recording number of revolutions of drum. Comply with 2007 CBC Section 1905 B. Admixtures: All approved admixtures shall be introduced into the concrete at the batch plant. Field additions are not acceptable. C. Slump: Adjust quantity of water so concrete at point and time of placing does not exceed the following slumps when tested according to ASTM C143. Use the minimum water necessary for workability required by part of structure being cast. SLUMP AND WATER/CEMENT RATIOS Part of Structure Maximum Slump Inches* Maximum Water- Cement Ratio Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 11 Footings, foundation walls, and mass concrete, not reinforced 4 0.45 Slabs on grade, reinforced and non-reinforced 4 0.45 Reinforced concrete over 8" thick 4 0.5 Reinforced concrete 8" or less thick 4 0.45 All other concrete 4 0.5 *If super-plasticizers are used, slumps may be 6"-8" for all concrete, with water-cement ratio unchanged or lower than slumps without admixture. 2.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COLORED CONCRETE: A. Cement for the entire project shall be same type and brand, and from the same mill. Aggregate, both fine and coarse, shall be supplied from one source. Mix design shall remain con stant for all colored concrete. Slump shall not exceed 4". B. Mixers transporting concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to loading colored concrete. C. Pigments shall be added to mix at the plant, and shall be measured accurately. The mixer shall be operated at charging speed for 5 to 10 minutes while color is being a dded. 2.04 SLURRY CONCRETE: A. Slurry concrete shall conform to requirements of this section for regular concrete, except that testing will not be required. Slurring concrete shall contain not less than 2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Aggregate may be material selected from excavation, free from organic matter, or imported fill, conforming to the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent passing 1-1/2" 100 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 12 1" 80 - 100 3/4" 60 - 100 3/8" 50 - 100 No. 4 40 - 80 No. 100 10 - 40 B. Water shall be added to produce a fluid, workable mix that will flow and can be pumped without segregation of aggregate. Materials shall be mechanically mixed until the cement and water are thoroughly dispersed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PLACING: A. Remove all free water from forms before concrete is deposited. Remove hardened concrete, debris, and foreign materials from interior surfaces of forms, exposed reinforcing, and from surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment. B. Wetting: Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up cra cks. Wet other materials sufficiently to reduce adsorption and to help maintain concrete workability. C. Earth Subgrade: Dampen 24 hours before placing concrete, but do not muddy. Re -roll where necessary for smoothness and remove loose material. D. Gravel Fill: Recompact disturbed gravel and bring to correct elevation. E. Sand Beds or Subslab Drainage Fill: Recompact disturbed material and bring to correct elevation. F. Vapor Barrier: Install under interior floor slabs on grade. Lap joints 6" in the direction of concrete spreading and tape seal. Seal the joints at walls and around penetrations with tape. Cover barrier with 2" layer of clean damp sand. G. Screeds: Set screeds at walls and maximum 8-foot centers between. Set to provide level floor. Check with an instrument level, transit, or laser during placing operation to maintain level floor. H. Screeds Over Vapor Barrier: Use weighted pad or cradle type screeds and do not drive stakes Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 13 through the vapor barrier. Check with an instrument level, transit, or laser. I. Expansion Joint Filler: Install where slabs abut buildings and elsewhere as indicated. Install full depth of concrete with top level with finished surface of concrete. 3.02 CONCRETE PLACING: A. Conveying and Placing: Comply with ACI 304. Do not place concrete until the reinforcing steel, embedded items, forms, or metal decking have been approved. Do not use aluminum tubes or any aluminum equipment for pumping concrete, nor allow concrete to free fall from its point of release at mixer, hoppers, tremies, or conveying equipment more than 5 feet for concealed concrete and 3 feet for exposed concrete. Deposit concrete in 18” maximum lifts within 90 minutes after water is first added to the batch and so that the surface is kept level throughout, a minimum being permitted to flow from one portion to another. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of materials. 1. Where new concrete is placed against or on old or existing concrete, apply bonding agent to properly prepared surface of old concrete prior to p lacement of new concrete. Prepare surface in accordance with ICRI. 2. Exception: When using super-plasticizers, the free fall, horizontal layer thickness and time limitations may be doubled. B. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can b e properly consolidated, but in no event greater than 24 inches. 1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse aggregates. 3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. C. Protection: Ensure that reinforcement, embedded products, joint fillers and joint devices are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Joints In Concrete: Locate construction joints only where approved, and obtain prior approval for points of stoppage of any pour. Clean and roughen the surface of construction joints by removing the entire surface and exposing 1/4" amplitude of clean aggregate solidly embedded in Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 14 mortar matrix by sandblasting, chipping, use of an approved surface retarder, or equal. Water and keep hardened concrete wet for not less than 24 hours and slush with Portland cement slurry just before placing joining concrete. Cover horizontal surfaces of existing or previously placed and hardened concrete with a 2" thick layer of fresh concrete less 50% of coarse aggregate just before balance of concrete is placed. E. Vertical Elements: Stop placement of concrete in walls and columns 1 -1/2" below bottom of beams or supported slabs. Stop placement at sills and heads of wall op enings in the same manner. Allow concrete in vertical elements to be in place at least 2 hours and until vertical settlement has ceased before placing concrete for floor framing. F. Compacting: Compact each layer of the concrete as placed with mechanical vibrators or equivalent equipment. Transmit vibration directly to concrete and in no case through the forms unless approved. Accomplish thorough compaction. Supplement by rodding or spading by hand adjacent to forms. Compact concrete into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Recompact deep sections with congestion due to reinforcing steel as required. G. Operation of Vibrators: Do not horizontally transport concrete in forms with vibrators nor allow vibrators to contact forms or reinforcing. Push vibrators vertically into the prece ding layers that are still plastic and slowly withdraw, producing maximum obtainable density in concrete without creating voids or segregation. In no case disturb concrete that has partially set. Vibrate at intervals not exceeding two-thirds the effective visible vibration diameter of the submerged vibrator. Avoid excessive vibration that causes segregation. Use and type of vibrators shall conform to ACI 309 "Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete". H. Correction of Segregation: Before placing next layer of concrete, and at the top of last placement for vertical elements, remove concrete containing excess water or fine aggregate or showing deficiency of coarse aggregate and fill the space with compacted concrete of correct proportions. I. Waterproof Membranes: Perform work adjacent to waterproof membranes to prevent damage to membranes. Arrange work so that membrane is left unprotected for minimum period of time, as approved. Prior to placing concrete, inspect the membrane and arrange for repair to all damage which may have occurred. J. Concrete Encased Columns: Clean columns as specified for cleaning other steel in contact with concrete. When concrete is not carried to structure above, stop concrete perpendicular to column axis at the same elevation on all parts of all columns in the space. Float top neatly to Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 15 column. K. Slabs: 1. Float Finish: Place, consolidate, strike off and level concrete slab to proper elevation. Use highway straightedge, bull float or darby. Remove all bleed water. After the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation, and water sheen has disappeared, the surface shall be floated, at least twice, to a uniform sandy texture. Remainder of finishing operations shall be as specified in Section 03345 for each type of surface. 2. On-Grade Slabs: Place with maximum 40-foot edge dimension. Generally locate joints on column lines, exact locations as directed or approved. 3. On-Grade Slab Construction and Contraction Joints: Use types as indicated at column lines intermediate locations. 4. Expansion Joints: Conform to details and approved submittal. Provide expansion joint filler finished flush with slab surface except for those joints shown to be sealed with sea lant. Conform to Section 07920 where sealant sealed joints are shown or specified, including the polymer joint filler, backing, and bond breaker. 5. Control Joints: Provide for concrete slabs as indicated. At Contractor's option, "Soff-Cut" saw may be used to depth of 1-1/4" immediately providing spalling or undercutting of the concrete does not occur, and in no case shall slab reinforcement be cut or damaged. Conventional saws shall be used as soon as possible without dislodging aggregate to 1/4 slab thickness. Complete sawing of joints within 12 hours after finishin g is completed. If early sawing causes undercutting or washing of the concrete, delay the sawing operation and repair the damaged areas. The saw cut shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the true joint alignment. Discontinue sawing if a crack develops ahead of a saw cut. Immediately after each joint is sawed, thoroughly clean the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface. Respray surfaces treated with curing compound which are damaged during the sawing operations as soon as the water disappears. Protect joints in a manner to prevent the curing compound from entering the joints. 3.03 COLD WEATHER PROVISIONS: A. Conform to ACI 306 and the following requirements. B. Normal Concrete: When the temperature is below 40 degrees F. the temperature of the Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 16 concrete placed in the forms shall be at least 60 degrees F. When the temperature is below 30 degrees F. the temperature of the concrete as mixed shall be 65 degrees F. In all cases, when the daily average temperature is below 40 degrees F. the concrete shall be kept at 55 degrees F. for the 72 hours and then allowed to drop uniformly to the air temperature over the next 24 hours. 1. Concrete temperature shall be measured by placing a thermometer 2" from the top of the concrete being placed. C. Air-entrained concrete shall be kept at the above temperature for 27 hours and above freezing for an additional 72 hours. D. No calcium chloride shall be used to accelerate hardening of concrete. Contractor to certify that any additive used does not contain calcium chloride. E. If low temperature accelerating admixture is proposed, adjust concrete mix as required and obtain approval of Architect. F. All concrete materials, reinforcement, forming materials and ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free of frost. G. The covering or other protection used in connection with the curing shall remain in place and intact for at least 24 hours. H. The work shall be protected from the elements, flowing water, and defacements of any n ature during the construction operations. I. Conform to the provisions of A.C.I. 306, Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting, except as modified herein. 3.04 HOT WEATHER PROVISIONS: A. Conform to ACI 305 and the following requirements. B. Take extra care to reduce the temperature of the concrete being placed, and to pr event rapid drying of newly placed concrete. When the outdoor ambient temperature is more than 90 degrees F., shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing, and start curing as s oon as the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit it without damage. Using retarding admixture at 85F or higher. C. Concrete placement temperatures shall be controlled by the Contractor and shall not be limited to 1. Shading and cooling the aggregate; Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 17 2. Avoiding use of hot cement; 3. Cooling mixing water by additions of ice; 4. Insulating water supply lines and tanks; and 5. Insulating mixer drums or cooling them with sprays or wet burlap. D. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas exceeding 1/4-inch height. E. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. 1. Grout cleaned finish: Apply to surfaces indicated after all contiguous surfaces are accessible; do not clean as work progresses. a. Prepare grout using 1 part Portland cement, 1-1/2 parts fine sand, and enough water to produce a mixture with consistency of thick paint. Achieve grout color matching concrete surface color by blending normal and white Portland cements. b. Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture evenly by brush or spray. Scrub surface immediately after grout application to fill minor air bubbles, using cork float or stone, and remove excess grout while it is still plastic. After initial drying, rub surface vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for not less than 36 hours. 2. 2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specifically indicated 3.05 FINISHING SLABS: A. Interior Floor and Exterior Slab Finishes and Tolerances, General: See SCHEDULE in Section 3.17 of this specification for finishes. Achieve flat, level planes except where slopes or grades are indicated. Tolerances shall be in accordance with FF (flatness) and FL (levelness) as defined in ACI 117. B. Finishing Operations, General: Do not directly apply water to sla b surface or dust with cement. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1. C. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 18 D. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. E. Final floating: Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. 1. Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. 2. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. F. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. 1. Apply first troweling with power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand trowels. 2. Wait between trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not over -trowel. 3. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it. Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance specified. 4. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through final floor covering system. G. Finishes: 1. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces ex posed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile on mortar bed, and paint or another thin film-finish coating system. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 2. Trowel and Burnished Finish: In warehouse storage and materials handling areas, at exposed concrete floor slab, trowel finish as specified above with burnishing in compliance with Class 5 requirements according to Table 3.14.2(a) of ACI 301, without topping. 3. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply a non-slip broom finish to troweled finish at exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishi ng, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. H. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 19 tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent conc rete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the Architect (Structural Engineer). 3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1-inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and c ut out holes not over 1-inch in diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to Architect (Structural Engineer) while bonding compound is still active: a. Dry-pack mix: One part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough water as required for handling and placing. b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely 3.06 CONCRETE CURING AND SEALING: A. Curing, General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Use curing method compatible with applied finishes, waterproofing and other coatings. When coatings or waterproofing are to be applied to concrete or when c oncrete is intended to remain exposed, use moist curing (sheet) method only. See Schedule at end of this Section. 1. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before a nd during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. 2. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days, or as recommended by manufacturer. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 20 3. Apply curing compounds after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. 4. Apply sealer hardener compounds as scheduled at end of this Section. B. Application of Liquid and Dust-On Agents: Apply agents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Curing, Floors and Slabs: Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Floor slabs to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic tile or stone tile: Curing compound or moist cure. 2. Floor slabs to receive adhesively-applied resilient flooring or carpet: Moist cure [or curing, hardening and dustproofing compound (compatible with flooring adhesives).]. Coordinate moist curing with flooring application requirements and provide sealer as necessary to avoid detrimental affect of dusting. 3. Floor slabs to receive waterproof membrane or thinset ceramic tile: Moist cure only. 4. Floor slabs to remain exposed and receive only light traffic (electrical rooms and equipment rooms): Curing, hardening and dustproofing compound or moist cure. If moist cure, apply one coat of surface hardening and dustproofing compound as specified for other exposed floor slabs. 5. Floor slabs to remain exposed and receive normal pedestrian and light vehicle traffic: Moist cure. Apply specified sealers or surface hardening compound as scheduled at end of this Section. 6. Equipment pads and bases: Match surrounding floor. 3.07 PATCHING FORMED CONCRETE: A. Remove fins, projections, and offsets. Cut out rock pockets, honeycomb, and all other defects to sound concrete, with edges of cuts straight and back -beveled. Dampen cut-outs and edges, and scrub with neat Portland cement slurry just before patching, or an apply approved epoxy concrete adhesive. B. Saturate form tie holes with water and fill voids and patches with flush smooth -finished mortar of same mix as concrete (less coarse aggregate), cure, and dry. 3.08 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 21 A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of Work specified in other Sections, after such Work is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or r equired to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.09 GROUTING AND DRYPACKING: A. Install as indicated or required. Where grouting and drypacking is part of the work of other sections, it shall conform to the following requirements, as applicable. B. Drypacking: Mix materials thoroughly with minimum amount of water. Pre-saturate surfaces to receive dry pack for 24-hours prior to placement, install drypack by forcing and rodding to fill voids and provide complete bearing under plates. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and cure with damp burlap or liquid curing compound. C. Non-Shrink Grouting: 1. Mixing: Mix the approved non-shrink grout material with sufficient water per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Application: Surfaces to receive the non-shrink grout shall be clean, and shall be pre- saturated thoroughly 24-hours before placing the mortar. Before grouting, surfaces to be in contact shall be roughened and cleaned thoroughly, all loose particles shall be removed and the surface flushed thoroughly with neat cement grout immediately before the grouting mortar is placed. Place fluid grout from one side only and puddle, chain, or pump for complete filling of voids; do not remove the dams or forms until grout attains initial set. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, and cure as recommended by grout manufacturer. 3.010 SITE CONCRETE WORK: A. Use bituminous type joint filler. Cure all concrete for at least 10 days with liquid curing compound or sheet material except as otherwise specified. Construct all site concrete of 2,000 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 22 psi concrete unless otherwise indicated or specified. Provide reinforcing bars or mesh only where indicated. Conform to requirements specified hereinbefore for slab finishing and curing as applicable. B. Concrete Curbs: Provide 1/2" thick expansion joints, at beginning and at end of curves, intersections, and 20-foot intervals between, set plumb, square, and to same profile as the curbs. Edge curb tops to 1/2" radius and vertical joints to 1/4" radius. Apply smooth finish followed by fine hair brush finish. C. Concrete Gutters: Provide 1/2" thick expansion joints as above for curbs and apply a light broom finish with a 3" wide steel trowel finish at flow line. D. Combination Curb and Gutter: As above for curbs and gutters, including expansion joints, 3" troweled flow line at base of curb. E. Concrete Walks: Provide 1/2" expansion joints as specified for curbs and where walks abut rigid structures, aligned with joints in curbs where adjoining, and apply light broom finish perpendicular to traffic direction. Score walks as shown or directed. F. Control Joints: Provide sawed joints for concrete walks and exterior concrete pavement as indicated. Use "Zip Strip" as distributed by S.C.A. Construction Supply, Santa Fe Springs, Calif., or equal only where specifically indicated. Install tops of the joints flush with the concrete surface and depth of joint a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of slab. 3.011 OFF-SITE CONCRETE WORK: A. Provide new concrete items where indicated, and replace existing items damaged by Contractor's operations. Secure and pay for required permits, insp ections, engineering, and surveying. 3.012 SLURRY CONCRETE: A. Slurry concrete shall be used as fill or backfill where indicated, and wherever excavations are carried below design depths without approval. Slurry concrete shall be placed within 1 hour after mixing, and shall be placed in manner that will prevent voids in, or segregation of, the concrete. B. Backfilling over slurry concrete shall not be done less than 4 hours after placing. 3.013 INSTALLATION OF WATERSTOPS: A. Heat fuse waterstop joints and connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 23 including heating tools and devices. Run waterstops continuous in joints, following offsets and angles in joints until spliced to waterstops at intersecting joints, completely sealing the structure. Align and center waterstops in joints unless otherwise indicated. B. Tie flanges to reinforcing with 18 gage wire ties spaced at maximum 18" intervals. Test all waterstops, including splices, intersections, and welds, with approved holiday spark detector before concrete is placed. 3.014 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Level of Floors: Continuously monitor concrete placing to maintain level floor by use of an instrument level, transit, or laser B. Delivery tickets: Have available copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C94 for eac h load of concrete delivered to site. Include on the tickets the additional information specified in the ASTM document. C. Continuous Inspection: Construct structural concrete exceeding 2,500 psi compressive strength under continuous inspection of Inspector. Obtain inspection and approval of forms and reinforcing by Building Department as required and by the Inspector before placing structural concrete. D. Testing of Concrete: Testing Laboratory shall perform following tests. Samples for testing shall be obtained in accordance with ASTM C172, and shall be taken from as close to point of placement as possible. 1. Compressive Strength Tests: Cast one set of four or more cylinders from each day's placing and each 150 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, or not less than once for each 2,000 square feet of surface area for slabs and walls, of each strength of structural concrete. Date cylinders, assign record number, and tag showing the location from which sample was taken. Also record slump test result of sample. Do not make more than two series of tests from any one location or batch of concrete. 2. Slump Tests: Make slump test for each set of test cylinders. 3. Test Cylinders: Samples will be made in accordance with ASTM C172. Cast cylinders according to ASTM C31; 24 hours later, store cylinders under moist curing conditions at about 70 degrees F. Test according to ASTM C39; one at 7 and two at 28 day ages. The remaining cylinder(s) shall be kept in reserve in case tests are unsatisfactory. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 24 4. Control Test Cylinders: Cast a set of two or more cylinders for each day's placing of concrete for slabs supported on shoring. Place test cylinders on slabs represented by cylinders and cure the same as slabs. Test cylinders to determine proper times for removal of shores and reshoring. A strength test shall be the average of the compressive strengths of 2 cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days. 5. Shrinkage Test: Cast 4" by 4" by 11" long bars with 10" effective gauge length, cured for 7 days in moist room and as specified in ASTM C157. Make measurements at 7-day intervals to 35 day age. Allowable shrinkage shall not exceed 0.45% after period of 35 days. E. Core Tests: comply with 2007 CBC Section 1905.6.5. If tests show the compressive strength of any concrete falls below the required minimum, additional testing of concrete which unsatisfactory tests represent may be required. Make core tests according to ASTM C42. Fill core holes with drypack concrete of strength required for concrete. Contra ctor shall bear cost of tests for below-strength concrete even if such tests indicate concrete has attained required minimum compressive strength, and all costs for required corrections. F. Field Certifications: For all concrete, provide signed copy of batch plant's certificate stating quantity of each material, amount of water, admixtures, departure time and date accompanying each load of materials or concrete. G. Local Flatness/Levelness Tests: When and if directed by Owner, concrete floor flatness and levelness shall be tested in conformance to ACI 117 for Face Floor Profile Numbers (FF and FL designations) specified. 1. Tests will be made by an independent testing and inspection agency selected and paid by Owner. 2. Floor flatness and levelness measurements will be determined by a continuous recording differential profileograph. 3. On each newly placed and finished floor, testing and reporting will be as follows: a. Within 16 hours of completion of final troweling operation, floor tolerance measurements will commence. b. Within 18 hours of completion of final troweling operation, Contractor will be provided with written notice of acceptance or rejection of floor slab. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 25 c. Within 24 hours of completion of final troweling operation, Owner's testing and inspection agency will mark floor areas to indicate defective areas which require corrective Work. d. Within 3 working days of completion of final troweling operation, measurements of overall grade tolerance will be made and the results provided to Contractor not later than 7 working days from date of completion of final troweling. e. Weekends and holidays shall be excluded in computing time from completion of final troweling operation. Example: Final troweling operation completed at 5:00pm Thursday; notice of acceptance or rejection due 11:00 am Friday. Example: Final troweling operation completed at 5:00pm Friday; notice of acceptance or rejection due 11:00 am Monday. 4. Correction of Flatness and Levelness Defects: Flatness and levelness defects in co ncrete floors shall be corrected by grinding or by removal and replacement of defective floor slab. Filling of low areas will not be accepted for concrete floors to remain exposed. Correction of defects shall be made before application of floor hardening compounds. 5. Re-inspection: All areas requiring corrective Work will be measured in a timely manner by Owner's testing and inspection agency after completion of corrective Work. Report of measurements will be made to Contractor within 24 hours of completi on of inspection. 6. Cost of Re-inspection: Costs of inspection of corrective Work shall be paid by Contractor. Owner will deduct such costs from Contractor's next Application for Payment. If re- inspection of corrective Work occurs after 2 working days following completion of final troweling operation at final floor segment, costs of inspection of corrective Work shall include all costs for maintaining Owner's testing and inspection agency on site. 7. Certification of Tolerance Compliance: Owner's testing and inspection agency will provide final report certifying tolerances within 10 working days of completion of concrete floors, including any corrective Work. 3.015 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 26 A. Defective Concrete: The following concrete will be deemed to be defective, and sh all be removed promptly from the job site. 1. Concrete which is not formed as indicated, is not true to intended alignment, is not plumb or level where so intended, is not true to intended grades and levels; 2. Has voids or honeycomb that have been cut, resurfaced, or filled, unless with the approval of the Architect; 3. Has sawdust, shavings, wood, or embedded debris; 4. Does not conform fully to provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Repairs and Replacements: 1. Where defective concrete is found after removal of the forms, cut out the defective concrete, if necessary, and make the surfaces match adjacent surfaces. 2. Work uneven surfaces and angles of concrete to a surface matching adjacent concrete surfaces. 3.016 PROTECTION: A. Protection: Protect concrete from marring and damage due to weather and construction activities. 1. Protective measures shall include providing temporary coverings, as specified in Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and prohibiting all non-essential construction activities, including cleaning and maintenance of construction equipment. 2. In particular, protect concrete floor slabs from oil, paint and other products which might penetrate and degrade concrete surface Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 27 3.017 FLOOR AND SLAB CURING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE: LOCATION Finishing Curing and Sealing Interior floor slabs-on-grade. Trowel and burnish finish, FF35/FL25. Moist cure only; do not use curing compound. Apply floor sealer / hardener [before moist cure as specified in Section 03360] [after curing is completed and floor cleaned.] Re-apply, after cleaning, in preparation for Substantial Completion review. Exterior slabs, pedestrian traffic, exposed concrete finish. Smooth trowel finish, FF25/FL20, with medium broom texture, sloped to drain. Apply curing and sealing compound or moist cure, followed by cleaning and application of sealing compound. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 2200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Steel reinforcing bars. 3. Masonry-cell insulation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform construction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. 3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 2 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 2150 psi. 2. Density Classification: Medium weight unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. b. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Dixie Type SKosmortar Type N. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY c. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Velvet. d. Holcim (US) Inc.; White Mortamix Masonry Cement. e. Lafarge North America Inc.; Trinity White Masonry Cement. f. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement. g. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement. F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement or Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. H. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime masonry cement or and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color. 2) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. 3) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond Portland & Lime. 4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement. 2. Colored Masonry Cement: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. 2) Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Richcolor Masonry Cement. 3) Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment-in-Color. 4) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. 5) Lafarge North America Inc.; U.S. Cement Custom Color Masonry Cement. 6) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement. 7) National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement. I. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 4 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. J. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. K. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar unless otherwise indicated. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 5 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement mortar cement mortar. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Decorative CMUs. b. Pre-faced CMUs. E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Decorative CMUs. b. Pre-faced CMUs. F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 6 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less - than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 7 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.4 INSTALLATION - VENEER STONE A. Do not begin installation until backing structure is plumb, bearing surfaces are level and substrates are clean and properly prepared. B. Coordinate placement of reinforcement, anchors and accessories, flashings and other moisture control products supplied by other sections. C. Clean all built-in items of loose rust, ice, mud, or other foreign matter before incorporating into the wall. All ferrous metal built into the wall shall be primed or galvanized. D. If required, provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain bracing in place until building structure provides permanent support. E. Install veneer stone and mortar in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures. F. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension(s). Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. G. Anchoring: Tie stone to backing as required by the applicable Building Code. As a minimum tie stone to backing with metal ties as follows: 1. Provide minimum one tie per 2 square feet of wall surface area. 2. Maximum spacing between adjacent ties shall be 16 inches (406 mm) vertically and 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3. Ties shall be imbedded in horizontal joints to a 2 inch (51 mm) minimum depth. 4. Provide additional ties at openings within 12 inches (305 mm) of opening. H. Joining Work: Where fresh masonry joints partially set masonry. 1. Remove loose stone and mortar. 2. Clean and lightly wet surface of set masonry. 3. To avoid a horizontal run of masonry rack back 1/2 inch(12.5 mm) the length of stone in each course. 4. Toothing is not permitted. I. Joints: 1. Lay stone with an approximate 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) to 1” mortar joint, as stone allows. 2. Tool joints when "thumb-print" hard with a round jointer slightly larger than the width of the joint. 3. Trowel-point or concave tool exterior joints below grade. 4. Flush cut joints to be finished with a soft brush only. 5. Retempering or mortar is not permitted. 6. Use non-corrosive stone shims as required to maintain uniform joint thickness. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 8 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY J. Control and Expansion Joints: Keep joints open and free of debris. Coordinate control joint in accordance with Section 32-1373 for sealant performance. K. Sealant Recesses: Provide open joint 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide, where masonry meets doors, windows and other exterior openings. Coordinate sealant joints in accordance with Section 32-1373 for sealant performance. L. Cutting And Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and other penetrations and adjacent materials M. Lay out wall to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings. Use the string line and stakes to mark off any straight portions and marking paint to draw out any curves. N. Level the base course of stone by placing the first layer of stone on the base. Check for level front to back and side to side and adjust accordingly with the large mallet. O. Stack the second course on top of the base course. Do not line up the seams between the stones from one course to the other. Select stones that fit well with those on either side. Proper fit of stones, and thereby the most desirable finished product, shal l be achieved by trimming and shaping stones using a mason hammer and chisels. Shim the stones as required to eliminate wobbling. P. Each course should be set back at least 3/4 inch to allow the wall to lean back into the ground that it will be retaining. Shim the backs of the stones to eliminate wobbling. Overall batter of the wall shall be 1 inch horizontal for each 1 foot of vertical height. Q. Finish the top of the wall with well fitted stones matched to the wall configuration. 3.5 PARGING A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch. B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.7 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil -contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space 04 22 00 - 9 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STONEWORK 04 8280-1 SECTION 04 8280 STONEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Division 1 applies to this Section. Provide stone masonry, complete. B. Work included: 1. Stone wall. C. Related Work: 1. CIP Concrete foundations and CMU walls to receive veneer stone. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Materials and Work shall conform to the latest edition of the reference standards and specifications listed below and specified herein, and applicable codes and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The following specifications, codes, publications, and standards listed below, and later referred to by basic designation only, form a part of this Section to the extent specified: B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement 2. C144 Aggregate for Masonry mortar. 3. C150 Portland Cement. 4. C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 3300 for procedures. Obtain approval of required submittals prior to production or manufacture of stone. B. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Name and location of proposed stone quarries. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STONEWORK 04 8280-2 2. Mortar specifications. 3. Manufacturer’s technical literature and recommendations for each stone cleaner, sealer, and coating proposed for use, including preparation and application instructions. 4. Manufacturer’s printed directions for mortar and for waterproofing. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for following items, plus such other as Architect may require: 1. Stone Wall: Based on field measurements, show typical section, elevation and plan views of each wall, include method of anchoring stones to wall, as required. D. Samples: Submit Samples accordingly showing range in quality, color, texture, and finish that will occur. Label Samples with full identification. Prepare and submit following: 1. Veneer Stones showing full range of sizes to be used. E. Mock Up: A 36” long section of shall be installed on site as a mock up. The Approved mock-up shall be protected in place until the work is completed. The Mock-up may remain as part of the finished work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stone Anchorage System: 1. The Contractor is responsible for engineering the stone anchorage system to prevent shifting. B. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Employ a stone manufacturer having not less than 5 years continuous operation in manufacturing stone materials of the required types. Obtain Owner’s approval of manufacturer’s qualifications prior to bidding; obtain such approval for each manufacturer if more than one manufacturer is involved. Submit Samples and data as the Owner may require. C. Qualifications of Subcontractor: Stone manufacturer shall install Work of this Section, or the proposed Stone Subcontractor/Mason shall have not less than five years experience and shall be able to demonstrate 5 or more successfully completed projects of size, type, and complexity equivalent to that required in this Section. Obtain Owner’s approval of Subcontractor’s qualifications prior to bidding. 1. Evidence: For Owner’s consideration in determining the qualifications of proposed stone manufacturers, submit evidence satisfactory to Owner that all proposed stone manufacturers have: a. Project history meeting requirements specified above; b. Plant capacity and equipment adequate to produce stone products required for the Work in accordance with Progress Schedule and without delay in preparation of all submittals; c. Automated stone honing equipment capable of production of stone meeting the finish quality requirements specified in the required quantities and within the required time; d. Financial responsibility to meet the contracted obligations; and e. The proved ability to intelligently compose and arrange the stone pieces on each area in a manner that takes into consideration natural variations in the stone materials, and sensitivity to the design Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STONEWORK 04 8280-3 concept for the stone surfaces to produce a harmonious blend of the stones. 2. Restriction On Sub-contracting: All Work of this Section shall be manufactured and installed by an Owner- approved stone manufacturer or approved Stone Subcontractor Mason only. Sub-contracting any Work of this Section, or the “buy-out” of material or services other than the purchase of stone materials from acceptable quarries and materials required for the installation of the stone with attendant delivery and handling services, will not be permitted. D. Stone Finish Quality: Stone surfaces showing “checker-boarding” (varying levels of sheen from stone panel to stone panel) and any stone surfaces showing “wheel” or fabrication marks other than required saw marks will be rejected and required replacements provided by Contractor with no extra cost to Owner. E. Supervision: Perform Work of this Section under supervision of a capable specialist superintendent. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Carefully load and pack stone for shipment, using special care to prevent damage in transit. Do not use any material that could cause discoloration or staining for blocking, packing, or strapping. At site, store material under cover and on protective pads or timbers, securing from theft and vandalism. B. Stone, stored or otherwise, at the site shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility until the Work is completed and accepted by the Owner. 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Prior to preparation of Shop Drawings, verify at the site the actual dimensions of each surface or area to receive stone. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Conform to Section 01790. Warranty all Work of the Section against defective materials, workmanship, and installation for 10 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIC MATERIALS 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali, non-staining. Masonry cement and plastic Portland cement are not permitted. Use only one brand. Use white cement where grey cement will stain stone. 2. Hydrated lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Mortar bed sand: ASTM C144, at least 4% passing No. 100 sieve, uniformly graded from fine to coarse. 4. Joint sand: ASTM C144, washed kiln-dried white silica sand, all passing No. 30 sieve. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STONEWORK 04 8280-4 5. Mortar bed admix: Sika Suconem Red Label or Anti-Hydro. 6. Color pigment: Pure ground mineral oxides, non-fading, alkali and lime proof, factory packaged, ASTM C979. 7. Reinforced mesh: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric except shall be hot-dip galvanized, 4x4W1.4x W1.4 size and gage, or equivalent galvanized wire fabric of equal or greater total steel cross-sectional area. 8. Water: From domestic potable source. 2.2 STONE AND RELATED MATERIALS A. Provide stone materials conforming to approved submittals, the Drawings, and as specified, including sizes, thickness, and finishes, all matching approved Samples. Provide precision sized units with stone edges factory prepared for anchors where and anchored installation is required. Obtain stone from Southwest Boulder & Stone. B. Exterior Anchors: Stainless steel of minimum 12 gage. C. Spacers: Polyvinyl chloride strops, stainless steel, or equivalent, not subject to damage by water or alkali in mortar or grout. D. Sealant: Install Stealth Shield by Brickform. E. Epoxy Adhesive: Non-yellowing, non-staining type supplied or recommended by stone manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Report to Landscape Architect conditions that interfere with or prevent correct installation of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation in affected areas until adverse conditions are eliminated or corrected; this does not relieve Contractor from the responsibility for proper preparation of surfaces. Obtain actual site measurements and verify actual site conditions prior to fabrication of stone. 3.2 STONE INSTALLATION A. Conform to approved submittals. Perform drilling as required for the Work of other trades neatly and accurately. Do not install stone units having defects of any kind on the exposed faces or edges; patching or sticking is not permitted. Provide stone as required for correct installations, doweled and full bonded with epoxy adhesive. B. Anchoring: Secure each piece of stone with anchors according to approved submittals. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STONEWORK 04 8280-5 3.3 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Clean stone with cleaner, rinse, and dry. After cleaning, seal stone with water repellant and graffiti resistant coating. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect stone until project is complete. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-1 SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder/Fabricator Qualifications: 15 years experience. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. If possible, design metal fabrications so that they do not have to fit other construction. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Tubing, Plate and Bars: Cold-rolled Steel 2.02 ALUMINUM A. 6061 Aluminum tube, bar and rods or better. 2.03 FASTENERS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-2 A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Aluminum Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Exterior Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Uncoated Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where exposed. 4. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 5. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads . C. Hinges 1. Heavy duty and appropriate for the application, with grease fittings. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop-assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Furnish components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Gate Accessories as indicated on the plans. 2.06 FINISHES - STEEL A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC -SP6, or as recommended by finish coating manufacturer. 2. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 3. Powdercoat Steel Assemblies as indicated on the plans. 2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-3 C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m). E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Furnish setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components as indicated on drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-4 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas to match Powder Coat finish 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2 mil (0.05 mm) dry film thickness. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Parapet plywood sheathing. 3. Wood grounds, shims, nailers, and blocking. 4. Miscellaneous plywood backing, backboards and underlayment B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 2. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 3. Division 07 Sections pertaining to Roofing Systems and Sheet Metal Flashings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except th at lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 2. Preservatives shall be arsenic- and chromium-free, copper-based wood preservatives, as applicable. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2 3. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 4. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 5. For fire-retardant-treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener -holding capacities of treated materials. C. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with performance requirements indicated. D. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). 3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3 C. Forest Stewarship Council (FSC): All lumber, where and when available, shall be Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified and all such products shall bear the FSC identification stamp. D. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps appli ed to ends or back of each piece. E. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber, Construction or No. 2 grade or better. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2- inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and simi lar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers , and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. 2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4 appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having juris diction. 1. Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior for wood exposed to weather. B. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.04 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated. B. Other Framing: Provide the following grades and species: 1. Grade: No. 2. 2. Species: Spruce-pine-fir south; NELMA. 3. Species: Douglas fir-larch north; NLGA. 4. Species: Hem-fir north; NLGA. 5. Species: Spruce-pine-fir north; NLGA. 6. Species: Southern pine; SPIB. 7. Species: Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 8. Species: Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 9. Species: Douglas fir south; WWPA. 10. Species: Any species above. 2.05 BOARDS A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following: 1. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum. 2. Species and Grade: Hem-fir, C & Btr per WCLIB rules or C Select per NLGA or WWPA rules. B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and of following species and grade: 1. Species and Grade: Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common per NELMA rules. 2. Species and Grade: Northern species, No. 3 Common or Standard per NLGA rules. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5 3. Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine, No. 2 per SPIB rules. 4. Species and Grade: Hem-fir, Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA rules. 5. Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir, Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA rules. 6. Species and Grade: Western woods, Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA rules. 7. Species and Grade: Any species above. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items are no t specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species. 2.07 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Shelving: Provide 1-inch nominal-thickness boards of species and grade indicated above for exposed boards. B. Shelf Cleats: Provide 1-by-4-inch nominal-size boards of species and grade indicated above for exposed boards. C. Clothes Rods: Provide 1-1/2-inch-diameter clear, kiln-dried hardwood rods. 2.08 WOOD-BASED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS A. Miscellaneous Concealed Panels: APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1, span rating to suit framing in each location. B. Plywood Underlayment: Underlayment B-C Exterior with fully sanded face, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch. C. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: A-D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch. D. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant-treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch thick. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 6 2.09 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. Equal products from other manufacturers shall be acceptable as outlined in the provisions of Division 01 requirements. 1. Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated or required, flat washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recogn ized standards. F. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. G. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. H. Coordinate all installation components integral to roofing systems and exterior sheet metal flashings, including the shop drawings, to provide for a complete and compatible installation for all final assemblies. 3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Cut and shape to required size. Coordinate locations with other work involved. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 7 B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions of above-referenced guide. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2013-1 SECTION 06 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior wood deck and steps. 2. Exterior wood trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1063 "Exterior Rough Carpentry" for elevated decks including stairs. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. B. Samples: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Compliance Certificates: 1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp. 2. For preservative-treated wood that is not marked with treatment-quality mark. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. 1. Exterior trim, boards. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2013-2 B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": 1. Exterior trim, boards. C. Lumber: DOC PS 20. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. a. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. E. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18 percent respectively. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 3. Application: All exterior lumber and plywood. 2.3 EXTERIOR TRIM A. Lumber Trim, boards: 1. As indicated in the plans. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face fastening is required. 2. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For attaching Deck Boards, provide a hidden clip system compatible with the framing Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2013-3 system and finish deck boards. B. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting." 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.3 TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat-grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners. END OF SECTION 06 2013 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-1 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joint sealants for exterior isolation joints. 2. Joint backup materials and accessories. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint sealant, sealant primer and joint backup material indicated; manufacturer’s technical data, tested physical, performance properties and installation instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Three color charts showing manufacturer’s complete range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: Three strips of cured sealants 1/2-inch (13 mm) diameter by 6-inch (150 mm).in size for each color of joint sealant required. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranties: Sample of manufacturer’s and installer’s warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage installers trained or qualified by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from the same manufacturer. C. Mockups: Install joint sealant in mockups required by other portions of the Contract Documents that are indicated to receive specified joint sealants in accordance with installation methods specified in this section D. Preinstallation Conference: Convene conference at Project site 3 weeks before start of work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in original undamaged packaging, within temperature limits recommended by manufacturer; protect from direct sunlight. B. Remove and replace sealants that cannot be installed within their stated shelf life. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not been removed from joint substrates. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-2 1.07 WARRANTY A. Installer’s Warranty: Provide installer’s standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this section within the specified warranty period commencing at date of Substantial Completion. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard material warranty commencing at date of Substantial Completion. 1. Polyurethane Joint Sealants: 5 years. 2. Silicone Joint Sealants: 20 years. C. Specified warranties exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding the sealant manufacturer’s written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes (lightening, hurricane, tornado, fire, etc.) exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Design is based on products manufactured by Pecora Corporation; 165 Wambold Road, Harleysville, PA 19438; Toll Free Tel: 800-523-6688; Tel: 215-723-6051; Fax: 215-721-0286; Email: techservices@pecora.com; Web: http://www.pecora.com. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and accessory materials that are compatible with one another and with Project joint substrates. B. VOC Content of Sealant and Primers: Provide joint sealants and sealant primers that comply with SCAQMD Rule 1168 for VOC content. 2.03 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Sealant #1: Multicomponent, Nonsag, Chemically-curing, Traffic Grade, Polyurethane Sealant: 1. Compliance: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, NT, I, M, A, O. 2. Properties: a. Shore A Hardness: 45 to 50 per ASTM C 661. b. Elongation: 250 to 300 percent per ASTM D 412. c. Tensile Strength: 150 to 200 psi (1.03 to 1.37 MPa) per ASTM D 412. 3. Performance: a. Dynamic movement capability of plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent per ASTM C 719. b. Capable of continuous immersion in liquids when tested in per ASTM C 1247. 4. Sustainability: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-3 a. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 14 g/L (base), 104 g/L (activator), per ASTM D 3960. b. Total Volatile Organic Compound (TVOC) Emissions: Less than 2 microgram (0.002 milligram)/cu. m), per CDPH v1.1. 5. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s complete range 6. Product: DynaTred. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Cleaners: Non-corrosive, non-staining cleaners recommended by manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials for Project substrates and sealant backings. B. Primer: Joint sealant primer recommended by joint sealant manufacturer to promote sealant adhesion and, as determined by results of preconstruction field adhesion testing. C. Sealant Backup Materials: Nonstaining, flexible, compressible cylindrical material approved by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated based on field experience and laboratory adhesion and compatibility testing: 1. Compliance: ASTM C 1330 for following types: a. Type C closed-cell polyethylene backer rod. b. Type O open-cell polyurethane or soft reticulated polyethylene backer rod. c. Type B bi-cellular combination backer rod with open- and closed-cell skin. 2. Size: Oversized 25 to 33 percent greater than joint width. D. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape, approved by sealant manufacturer. E. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. F. Sand: To match concrete sand. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints and joint surfaces to receive sealants. Notify Architect if conditions are not acceptable. B. Verify joint dimensions are as indicated on Drawings. C. Verify that joints in concrete and masonry that are to receive rigid joint sealant have cured minimum 28 days. D. Do not begin surface preparation or sealant application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accordance with joint sealant manufacturer’s instructions. B. Existing Joint Sealants: Cut away old and failed joint sealants as close as possible to the joint edge. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-4 C. Remove joint sealants, sealant residue, sealant-backing materials, coatings, water repellants, waterproofing, laitance, form release agents, oil, grease, and other bond-inhibiting substances from joint surfaces to the depth that new sealant backings and joint sealants will be installed. Remove contaminants to expose sound, clean joint substrate materials. D. Clean joint surfaces by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Porous Substrates: Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed tile or glass-reinforced concrete by brushing, grinding or mechanical abrading. 2. Non-porous Substrates: Clean metal, glass and other non-porous surfaces using razor knife, followed by solvent wipe. 3. Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) Substrates: Remove contaminants using method recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Use of abrasive cleaning methods is not permitted. E. Remove frost, dust, loose particles and other foreign materials from joint substrates by vacuuming or blowing out with oil-free compressed air; make as many passes as required to result in clean joints. F. Remove rust, mill scale and deteriorated coatings from ferrous metals by wire brush, grinding or sandblasting. G. Joint Priming: Apply joint sealant primer to sides of joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. H. Apply masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant primer or joint sealants with adjoining surfaces. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply joint-sealants per ASTM C 1193 and joint sealant manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install joint sealant backings to support sealant during application and t o achieve recommended joint depth and proportions. C. Completely fill joints with sealant and ensure full contact of sealant to sides of joints. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges or sags. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool seal ants to form smooth, uniform beads. Tool joints to concave profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. G. Apply sand evenly along the joint prior to curing. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces as application progresses using cleaning materials recommended by joint sealant manufacturer. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-5 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed joint sealants from damage until fully cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Weather Seal Joints in Vertical and Non-traffic-bearing Horizontal Surfaces: 1. Control and Expansion Joints in Cast-in-Place and Precast Concrete: Sealant #01. 2. Control and Expansion Joints in Masonry: Sealant #01. 3. Joints between Cast-in-Place Concrete, Precast Concrete and Masonry: Sealant #01. 4. Control, Expansion and Aesthetic Joints in Porous Stone: Sealant #01. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-1 SECTION 13 1200 FOUNTAINS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fountain electrical control system. 2. Fountain submersible lighting system. 3. Filtration and water treatment system. 4. Drain, water makeup, and overflow equipment and controls. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Include list of materials and equipment. b. Show equipment space layout with mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, and conduit. c. Include pipe elevations and dimensions, pipe center lines, required clearances, and fountain fitting locations. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive data and performance characteristics for mechanical and electrical equipment and fountain fittings. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates of Compliance: Installer’s certification that system was installed in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and applicable codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fountain Equipment Supplier Qualifications: Minimum 20 years experience in work of this Section including design and furnishing of fountains of similar scope and complexity to specified project. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-2 B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this Section. 2. Successful completion of minimum of 5 projects of similar scope and complexity within past [5] years. C. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Convene at site 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this Section. 2. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Contractor, Construction Manager, installer, and related trades. 3. Review and discuss: Plumbing and electrical requirements, equipment locations, project conditions, scheduling, and protection after completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. As Indicated on Plans. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 FOUNTAIN EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Schedule on Drawings. B. Fountain Electrical Control System: 1. Include control panel, water level and PLC controller, time switches, relays, motor starters, grounding system, PLC if required, and other circuits and accessories as required. 2. Provide UL. Listed components. 3. Conduit and fittings: PVC. 4. Wire: Stranded copper. C. Fountain Submersible Lighting System: Include light fixtures, accessories, and control as indicated on Plans. D. Filtration and Water Treatment System: Include filter media, accessories, and controls as indicated on plans. E. Drain, Water Makeup and Overflow Equipment: Include controls as indicated on Plans. 2.3 PIPING MATERIALS A. Pipe and Fittings: Identify pipe with manufacturer, material, class or type, and pressure rating. B. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type K, rigid, with soldered or threaded joints as indicated. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-3 2. Fittings: Wrought copper or cast bronze, ASTM B75. 3. Solder: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony. C. PVC Pipe and Fittings: 1. Schedule 40 and 80 piping: ASTM D1784 or D1785. 2. Schedule 160 piping: ASTM D2241. 3. Cement: ASTM D2564. 2.4 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS A. Conduit: 1. Within fountain basin and stub-ups through fountain floors or walls: Brass. 2. Within equipment rooms or exposed to ultraviolet: UV rated PVC painted. 3. Buried or completely encased in concrete: PVC. B. Wire: 1. Copper, 600 volt insulation, stranded for wire larger than 8 AWG, stranded for smaller wire. Do not use wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 2. Provide THHN, direct burial, or submerged type as indicated. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners, Rods, Hangers, Supports, Inserts, and Anchor Bolts: Type best suited to application. B. Provide special tools required for proper operation and maintenance of equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install fountain system in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Conceal piping unless otherwise indicated. Arrange exposed piping in neat, straight lines parallel or perpendicular to other construction. B. Cut pipe to fit without forcing or bending. Remove burs and rough edges. C. Install piping without loops and traps. D. Make provisions for thermal expansion and contraction of piping. E. Seal open pipe ends during construction; prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and water. F. Provide flanges or unions to allow for removal and reinstallation of equipment without cutting. G. Valves: 1. Arrange valves to provide isolation and regulating control throughout system. 2. Install butterfly valves on suction lines for isolation purposes only. Use eccentric reducers to prevent trapping air in line. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-4 3. Install check valves to close against pressure. 4. Do not install valve stems below horizontal line. 5. Install backflow preventers on water supply lines. 6. Provide butterfly, gate, globe, ball, plug, or other infinitely adjustable valves in discharge lines. H. Install P-traps on drains when required by Code. I. Underground Piping: 1. Trench for underground piping to provide sufficient slope and adequate space to allow for pipe installation. 2. Install thrust blocks on pipe 3 inches in diameter and larger at directional changes, reducer fittings, and line terminations. 3. Backfill in maximum 6 inch lifts; compact each lift. J. Pipe: 1. Provide flanges or unions to allow for removal and reinstallation of equipment and accessories without cutting, welding, or soldering. 2. Provide discharge piping for air vent, solenoid, and relief valves. Extend to nearest drain. 3. Cut pipe to size and work into place without springing or forcing. 4. Temporarily close openings in piping to prevent entrance of foreign matter. 5. Cut pipe and tubing ends square. Remove rough edges and burrs. 6. Use close or short nipples only where required to satisfy dimensional constraints. 7. Make changes in pipe size using reduced fittings. Use bushings only where indicated. 8. Unless otherwise indicated make connections to equipment and accessories using threaded for sizes 3 inch and smaller and flanged for sizes 4 inches and larger. 9. Arrange exposed piping straight, parallel, and perpendicular to structure walls. 10. Where two or more pipes are installed in parallel, allow sufficient space for required installation, painting, and application of insulation. K. Pipe Joints: 1. Threaded steel or brass pipe: a. Cut threads accurately, with thread axis coinciding with pipe axis, and maximum of two threads showing beyond fitting. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-5 b. Make joints using Teflon tape. 2. Soldered copper pipe: a. Use drawn temper tubing. b. Clean surfaces to be joined of oil, grease, rust, and oxides. After cleaning and before assembly or heating, apply flux to each joint surface and spread evenly. Apply heat using oxyacetylene torch. c. Provide valves with unions for removal of valve without cutting or torching. d. Provide dielectric unions at points of connection to ferrous piping. 3. Flared copper tubing: a. Use annealed tubing. b. Cut end using tubing cutter. Ream and clean. c. Slide fitting over end. Flare tubing using standard flaring tool. 4. PVC pipe: a. Bevel pipe ends using coarse file or beveling tool. b. Clean surfaces to be joined of loose dirt and moisture. c. Apply primer to contact surfaces of pipe and fitting. d. Apply solvent cement around perimeter of pipe end to width slightly more than equivalent socket depth of fitting. Apply light coating around entire depth of socket surface. Apply second liberal coating onto pipe end. e. Immediately after cementing, insert pipe into fitting to full socket depth while rotating pipe or fitting one-quarter turn. Hold joint for at least 15 seconds after joining. f. Do not disturb joint for minimum one hour after joining. g. Do not solvent weld pipe when ambient air temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F, nor during precipitation. L. Pipe Protection: 1. Copper or brass piping encased in concrete: Wrap exterior with one layer of pipe wrap at half lap. 2. Copper or brass piping underground: a. Clean and prepare pipe exterior in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Coat exterior with two coats of coal tar mastic to total thickness of 8 to 10 mils. Allow 12 hours drying time between applications. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-6 M. Penetrations: 1. Make penetrations only at locations indicated unless otherwise approved. 2. Provide metal or plastic sleeves or core-drilled holes for penetrations in concrete. 3. Perform core drilling for pipe penetrations only at approved locations. 4. Provide waterstop or membrane clamp for pipes and sleeves penetrating exterior concrete. 5. Seal sleeves passing through interior walls with foam sealant unless otherwise indicated. 6. Seal sleeves passing through exterior walls with resilient seal and foam sealant unless otherwise indicated. N. Flushing: 1. Before fountain system is placed in operation, flush fountain system piping with water; remove foreign matter and debris in piping. 2. Completely drain piping and equipment. Re-flush until water runs clean. 3. Fill system to required capacity with clean water. 4. Circulate water throughout system for one hour using display pump. Install startup screens to prevent equipment clogging and damage. 5. Drain, fill, and circulate until water remains clear. O. Housekeeping Pads: Place floor-mounted equipment on masonry housekeeping pads., 4 inches high with chamfered edges except where otherwise indicated. P. Supporting Devices: 1. Install rods, hangers, and supports for piping. 2. Provide additional hangers or supports at valves, strainers, and elsewhere where required to properly support additional pipe loadings. 3. Where several pipes occur at same elevation use trapeze type hangers. 4. Provide copper-plated hangers where hangers are in direct contact with copper piping. 5. Strap hangers not permitted. 6. Do not support pipe loads on equipment, other pipes, or ducts.. 7. Independently support basket strainers larger than 3 inches. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ELECTRICAL A. Install wiring in sealed conduits. B. Conceal conduit unless otherwise indicated. Arrange exposed conduit in neat, straight lines parallel or perpendicular to other construction. C. Cut conduit to fit without forcing or bending. Remove burs and rough edges. D. Bend conduit to prevent damage and reduction of inside diameter. Do not place more than two 90 degree bends on single runs between accessible points. E. Install dielectric fittings on connections between dissimilar conduit types and seal with dielectric thread compound. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-7 F. Seal open conduit ends to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and water. G. Do not use threadless connectors for conduit. H. Provide bushings where conduit enters boxes or fittings. I. Provide accessible covers at junctions, bends, and offsets on exposed conduit runs. J. Do not use threadless couplings or connectors on conduit in wet locations or where buried. Make joints using tapered pipe threads sealed with Teflon tape of sealant. K. Install conduit entering control panels at bottom of panel. L. Underwater Junction Boxes: 1. Fill boxes with approved potting compound. 2. Prior to installing potting compound, make final connections and perform required testing. M. Wiring: 1. Remove moisture and debris from conduit prior to installation of wiring. 2. Do not install damaged wiring. 3. Make connections to equipment susceptible to vibration or noise using flexible watertight conduit. 4. Use THWN stranded wire in conduits between fountain and control panel. 5. Neatly group and distribute wiring. 6. Use stranded copper wiring between with waterproof insulation between underwater equipment and control panels. N. Seal conduits after wiring installation. O. Cover conduit exposed to moisture with watertight plastic and make joints using watertight fittings. 3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide permanently engraved metal nameplate for each piece of equipment identifying manufacturer, type, size, capacity, horsepower, and other characteristics. B. Provide valve tag for each valve providing information to correlate valve with outlet or fitting served. C. Install nameplates for gages and control device panels as indicated. Attach using stainless steel screws. D. Provide flow direction arrow pipe bands on system piping. 3.5 PAINTING A. Clean exposed equipment and piping of loose and foreign matter prior to painting. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-8 B. Mask off finished parts and nameplates. C. Paint exposed equipment and piping including galvanized surfaces within equipment space: 1. Pretreatment for bare ferrous parts: Sandblast or treat with oil penetrant. 2. Apply one coat primer to previously painted and retreated equipment and piping with one coat rust inhibiting primer. 3. Apply two coats epoxy enamel, color to be selected from full list of manufacturer’s options. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: 1. Provide temporary piping, pumps, and gages required to conduct tests. 2. Conduct tests before concealment of work and before coatings, wraps, and insulations are applied. 3. Replace or repair components showing leakage. Repeat test until criteria are met. 4. Do not subject components to test pressures greater than pressure rating of item. 5. Vent air from piping being tested. 6. Underground piping: a. Pressurize piping In accordance with pipe manufacturers' instructions, excluding drain system, to 75 psi prior to backfilling. Spot backfilling to anchor piping may be done prior to pressurizing. b. Leave piping pressurized until backfilling, grading, planting, and concrete work in area of piping is completed. c. Pressure underground drain piping beneath equipment space to 15 psi until backfilling and concrete work in area is completed. 7. Test as follows: a. Conduct each test for minimum continuous duration of eight hours. b. Hydrostatically pressure test storm and sanitary drain piping at 15 psi. c. Hydrostatically pressure test other piping and equipment at 75 psi. d. Strike solder joints using soft-face hammer while under pressure. e. Log pressure readings for required tests at beginning and end of each test and on each working day between. Note location and cause of any failures and method of repair. f. Notify Architect prior to beginning testing. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FOUNTAINS 13 1200-9 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Make adjustments required for proper operation of system. Use manufacturer's factory technicians where adjustments cannot be accomplished by Contractor's personnel. B. After installation, align pumps connected to motors by means of flexible couplings to within tolerance limits recommended by equipment and coupling manufacturers. C. Prior to placing rotating equipment in service for operation or testing, lubricate using lubricants recommended by manufacturer. 3.8 30-DAY OPERATING PERIOD A. Demonstrate thirty day, fully automated, uninterrupted daily operation of 8 to 16 hours prior to final acceptance of system. B. Supervise operation of equipment and be responsible for proper operation. C. Make adjustments and replace components as required to ensure proper operation. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance of fountain system to Owner. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-1 Section 22 1113 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping and specialties for combined potable and fire protection water service outside the building. B. This Section includes piping and specialties for potable and fire protection water service outside the building. C. This Section does not include tapping of utility company water main. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. “Earth Moving” Section for trench excavation and backfill. 2. Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” Section for potable and fire protection piping inside the building. 3. “Fire Suppression” Section for fire alarm systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and rubber materials 1. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Combined Potable Water and Fire Protection Water Service: 160 psig (1100 kPa). 2. Potable Water Service: 160 psig (1100 kPa). 3. Fire Protection Water Service: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 4. Fire Protection Water Service, Downstream from Fire Department Connections: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Pipe and fittings. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-2 3. Valves. 4. Fire department connections. C. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: For alarm devices. D. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations. E. Record Drawings: At Project closeout of installed water-service piping according to Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures”. F. Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3. G. Purging and Disinfecting Reports: As specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. Include data for the following: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Valves. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water-service piping specialties and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to "Substitution Procedures" Section. B. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. C. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable water -service piping. Include materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for materials for potable water. E. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire protection water service piping. Include materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. F. Comply with NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances," for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision. G. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated devices. H. Provide listing, approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping and specialties made to specified standards. I. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated specialties and devices specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-3 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 1. Do not remove end protectors, unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew -point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary. C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records and/or pothole as necessary to verify existing utility locations. Contact utility locating service for area where Project is located. B. Verify that it is possible to install water service piping to comply with original design and referenced standards. C. Site Information: Reports on subsurface condition investigations made during design of Project are available for informational purposes only; data in reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions between soil borings. Owner assumes no responsibility for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information. D. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner’s written permission. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-4 A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. B. Coordinate piping materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements with building water distribution piping. C. Coordinate piping materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements with building fire - protection water piping. D. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Tapping Sleeves and Valves: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. c. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. d. United States Pipe & Foundry Co. 2. Gate Valves: a. American AVK Co. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. d. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. e. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. f. Nibco, Inc. 3. Indicator Posts and Indicator Gate Valves: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. c. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa) d. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. e. Nibco, Inc. 4. Wet-Barrel, Post Fire Hydrants: a. American AVK Co. b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. c. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Corona) d. James Jones, Co. 5. Backflow Preventers: a. Ames Co., Inc. b. CMB Industries; Febco Div. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 6. Fire Department Connections: a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. b. Fire-End and Croker Corp. c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-5 e. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div. 7. Alarm Devices: a. Gamewell Co. b. Pittway Corp.; System Sensor Div. c. Potter Electric Signal Co. d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.2 PIPES AND TUBES A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated, with cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C104. 1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. C. Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated, with cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C104. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Include gland, rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts according to AWWA C111. D. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with marking "NSF-pw" according to NSF 14, Schedule 40. E. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with marking "NSF-pw" according to NSF 14, Schedule 80. F. PVC Plastic, Fire-Service Pipe: UL 1285 and AWWA C900. Include elastomeric seal according to ASTM F 477. G. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) and ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B0 seamless water tube, annealed temper. 2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact type. Include cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C104 and rubber compression gaskets according to AWWA C111. C. Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron; or AWWA C153, ductile- iron, compact type. Include cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C104 and glands, rubber gaskets, and bolts and nuts according to AWWA C111. D. Ductile-Iron, Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, with cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C104 or epoxy, interior coating according to AWWA C550. Include gaskets and bolts and nuts. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-6 E. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125, unless otherwise indicated. F. PVC Plastic, Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40. G. PVC Plastic, Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80. H. PVC Plastic Fittings: UL 1285 and AWWA C907, Class 150. Include elastomeric seals according to ASTM F 477. I. Ductile-Iron Fittings for PVC Pipe: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact type; push-on- or mechanical-joint type. Include dimensions matching PVC pipe, cement- mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C104, and rubber compression gaskets according to AWWA C111. J. Copper Fittings: 1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, Wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless steel grip ring and EPDM O-Ring seal in each end. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Ductile-Iron Piping: The following materials apply: C. Primers for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM F 656. E. Copper Pipe: The following materials apply: 1. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32 Alloy Sn95, Alloy Sn94, or Alloy E, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 2. Brazing Filler Metal: AWS A5.8 BCuP Series. F. Pipe Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of pipes to be joined. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), malleable iron; or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. 5. Finish: Enamel paint. G. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain weld -neck end types and matching piping system materials. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-7 2. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material isolating dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 4. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 1. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 2. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 2.6 CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT 1. Standards: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 2. Form: Sheet or tube. 3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness, or high density, crosslaminate PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness. 4. Color: Black or Natural 2.7 GATE VALVES A. Non-rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves, 3-Inch NPS (DN80) and Larger: AWWA C509, gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. Include 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum working-pressure design, interior coating according to AWWA C550, mechanical-joint ends. B. Non-rising-Stem Gate Valves, 4-Inch NPS (DN100) and Larger: UL 262, FM approved and AWWA C500, gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, inside screw, 200-psig (1200-kPa) working pressure, interior coating according to AWWA C550, and mechanical-joint ends. Provide with flanged ends for pit installation. C. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box with top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve. 1. Provide steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Include tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket-fitting valve-operating nut. After installation of valve box cover and after installation of adjacent paving, if any, covers shall be sandblasted or wire brushed as necessary and painted with bituminous black paint, unless another color is required by the Architect. D. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of bury of valve. Include supervisory switch. Posts above and including connection to riser shall be sandblasted, if necessary, after installation and painted red, unless another color is required by the Architect. E. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and bolts and nuts. Use sleeve and valve compatible with tapping machine. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-8 1. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron, 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Sleeve may have mechanical-joint ends with rubber gaskets or sealing rings in sleeve body. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and of outlet flange required for branch connection. 2.8 GATE VALVES A. Description: Cast-iron body, compression-type valve, opening against pressure and closing with pressure, 6-inch (DN150) mechanical-joint inlet, and 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working-pressure design. Hydrants shall be per the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast -iron caps with steel chains. C. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) point to flat. Shall be pursuant to AWWA C503. Size and shape of operating nuts and threads on hose and pumper connections shall match those on existing hydrants at the site, if any. D. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or counterclockwise. E. Exterior Finish: Red or yellow alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless another color is required by the Architect. Entire hydrant above and including connection to riser shall be sandblasted, if necessary, after installation and re-painted. F. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: UL 246, FM-approved, two 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and one 4-1/2-inch NPS (DN115) outlets, 6-inch NPS (DN150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with 6-inch NPS (DN150) mechanical-joint inlet. G. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C503, two 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and one 4-1/2-inch NPS (DN115) outlets, 6-inch NPS (DN150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with 6-inch NPS (DN150) mechanical-joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. H. Where indicated as "traffic type", hydrant shall have breakable features as defined in AWWA C503. The traffic type hydrant shall have special couplings joining upper and lower sections of hydrant barrel and upper and lower sections of hydrant stem. This type of hydrant shall be especially designed to have the special couplings break from a force not less than that which would be imposed by a moving vehicle; hydrant shall operate properly under normal conditions. 2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast -brass body, with thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include 6-in., 250# silent check valve, lugged caps, gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-inch- (460-mm-) high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate. 1. Connections: Two 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) inlets and 4-inch NPS 4 (DN100) outlet. 2. Connections: Two 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) inlets and 6-inch NPS 6 (DN150) outlet. 3. Connections: Three 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) inlets and 6-inch NPS 6 (DN150) outlet. 4. Connections: Four 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) inlets and 6-inch NPS 6 (DN150) outlet. 5. Connections: Six 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) inlets and 6-inch NPS 6 (DN150) outlet. 6. Connections: Six 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) inlets and 8-inch NPS 8 (DN200) outlet. 7. Inlet Alignment: Inline, horizontal. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-9 8. Inlet Alignment: Square. 9. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated. 10. Finish Including Sleeve: Rough chrome-plated. 11. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished brass. 12. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 13. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR." 14. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "STANDPIPE." 2.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. General: Manufactured backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss indicated. B. Working Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. C. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. D. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged ends. E. Interior Lining: AWWA C550, epoxy coating for backflow preventers with cast -iron or steel body. F. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. G. Strainer on inlet if strainer is indicated. H. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet. Units attached to rough - bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze. I. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air- gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. J. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventer: AWWA C511, with OS gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air- gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. K. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, with valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (34 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. L. Double-Check-Valve Assembly: AWWA C510, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. 1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (34 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. M. Double-Check-Valve Assembly: UL 312, FM approved. Assembly has two UL 312, FM-approved, iron- body, 175-psig (1200-kPa) working-pressure, flanged-end check valves, with two UL 262, FM-approved, iron-body, OS&Y, flanged, 175-psig (1200-kPa) working-pressure gate valves. 1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (34 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-10 N. Antisiphon, Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, with valves, spring-loaded check valve, and spring-loaded floating disc. Include test cocks and atmospheric vent for continuous -pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (34 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. O. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM approved or UL listed, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves, test cocks, and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer, for continuous- pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. P. Double-Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1048, FM approved or UL listed, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include 2 positive-seating check valves and test cocks, and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and double-check backflow preventer, for continuous-pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (34 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. 2.11 ANCHORAGES A. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel. B. Rods: ASTM A 575, steel. C. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197 (ASTM A 197M), malleable iron. D. Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel. E. Cast-Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron. F. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psig (20.7 MPa). 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. 2.12 ALARM DEVICES A. Description: UL 753, FM approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment. 2.13 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to "Earth Moving" Section for underground warning tape materials. B. Arrange for warning tapes made of solid blue film with continuously printed black -letter caption "CAUTION--WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." C. Arrange for detectable warning tapes made of solid blue film with metallic core and continuously printed black-letter caption "CAUTION--WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-11 D. Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved, plastic-laminate label at least 1 by 3 inches (25 by 75 mm), with caption "CAUTION--THIS STRUCTURE HAS NONMETALLIC WATER-SERVICE PIPING," for installation on main electrical meter panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Refer to "Earth Moving" Section for excavation, trenching, and backfilling. B. Refer to "Asphalt Paving" Section for cutting and patching of existing paving. C. Refer to "Concrete Paving" Section for cutting and patching of paving. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications: 1. Potable Water-Service Piping: Use the following: a. 1/4- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN90): PVC plastic, ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 pipe; PVC plastic, Schedule 40, socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. b. 1/4- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN90): PVC plastic, ASTM D 1785 Schedule 80 pipe; PVC plastic, Schedule 80, socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. c. 4- to 8-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN200): PVC plastic, AWWA C900 Class 150, fire-service pipe; PVC plastic fittings; and elastomeric seal joints. d. 1/4- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS (DN20 to DN90): Copper tube, Type K (Type A); copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. 2. Fire-Protection Water-Service Piping: Use the following: a. 4- to 8-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN200): Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push- on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints. b. 4- to 8-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN200): Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints. c. 4- to 8-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN200): PVC plastic, AWWA C900 Class 150, fire-service pipe; PVC plastic fittings; and elastomeric seal joints. d. 4- to 8-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN200): PVC plastic, AWWA C900 Class 200, fire-service pipe; ductile-iron fittings for PVC plastic pipe; and gasketed joints. e. 10- and 12-Inch NPS (DN250 and DN300): Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints. f. 10- and 12-Inch NPS (DN250 and DN300): Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile- iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints. g. 10- and 12-Inch NPS (DN250 and DN300): PVC plastic, Class 150, fire-service pipe; ductile- iron fittings for PVC plastic pipe; and gasketed joints. B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-12 1. Underground Valves, 3-Inch NPS 3 (DN80) and larger: AWWA, cast-iron, gate valves, non-rising stem, with valve box. 2. Underground Valves, 4-Inch NPS 4 (DN100) and Larger: UL/FM, cast-iron, gate valves, non-rising stem, with indicator post. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints: According to AWWA C600. B. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service Piping: According to UL 194 and AWWA C600. C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges and install gaskets. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening. Use lubricant on bolt threads. D. PVC Piping, Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions. E. PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: According to ASTM D 2672 and ASTM D 2855. Handle cleaner, primer, and solvent cement according to ASTM F 402. F. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, OD, and system working pressure. Refer to "Piping Systems - Common Requirements" Article below for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 3.5 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for piping-system common requirements. 3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. B. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in "Mechanical” Section. C. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. D. Anchor service-entry piping to building wall. 3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main with size and in location as indicated according to requirements of water utility. B. Make connections larger than 2-inch NPS 2 (DN50) with tapping machine according to the following: 1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with AWWA C600. Install valve with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-13 4. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping. C. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-protection water-service piping materials and installation. D. Install ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600. 1. Encase piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 2. Install encasement per manufacturer's written instructions. Close seams and overlaps in the polyethylene tubes with polyethylene compatible adhesive tape. The tape shall be approximately two inches wide and shall have the ability to bond securely to a me tal surface and the polyethylene material. Repair all rips, tears and other damage with suitable adhesive tape. E. Install AWWA PVC plastic pipe according to AWWA M23 and ASTM F645. F. Install AWWA PVC plastic pipe according to AWWA M23 and ASTM F645. 1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches (900 mm) cover over top. 2. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches (300 mm) additional cover. 3. If trenching before rough grading is completed would result in a lesser depth of cover than specified above, then trenching for water piping installation shall not be done until the specified minimum cover depth can be effected. If construction traffic will be allowed to pass over completed water piping installations prior to finish paving, then a protective pavement blanket at least equivalent to the final pavement and base thickness shall be constructed within the vehicle access area for a minimum distance of three feet on either side of the pipe. As an alternative to the temporary pavement blanket, the water pipe shall be installed at a minimum of two (2) feet deeper than specified within construction traffic areas. 4. See Paragraph 3.12.F of the “Earth Moving” Section for concrete encasement where depth of cover will be less than 2.5 feet for existing or finish grade, whichever is lower. G. Install piping under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both. 3.8 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Potable-Water Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Potable-Water Piping: According to AWWA M23. 3. Fire-Service Piping: According to NFPA 24. B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for 3-inch NPS (DN80) and larger underground installation. Use non-rising-stem UL/FM gate valves for installation with indicator posts. B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install underground valves with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. C. UL/FMG-Type Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install underground valves and valves in pits with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-14 3.10 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position. B. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Provide for drainage. C. AWWA-Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17. D. UL/FM-Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24. 3.11 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS A. Rough-in piping and specialties for water-meter installation according to utility company's written instructions and requirements. 3.12 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to plumbing and health department authorities having jurisdiction. B. Do not install reduced-pressure-principle type in pit. C. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer. D. Support backflow preventers, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. 3.13 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated. B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains. 3.14 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with curb boxes do not require supervision. B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position. 1. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS&Y gate-valve yoke. 2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post. C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows: 1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post. D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch. E. Connect alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Refer to Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for wiring and devices not specified in this Section. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING Section 221113-15 3.15 IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back -filling of trench for underground water-service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping. B. Attach nonmetallic piping label permanently to main electrical meter panel. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits. C. Prepare reports for testing activities. 3.17 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below: a. Comply with NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 1) Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. 3) Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system. 4) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. B. Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting activities. C. Perform disinfection as directed in the procedures of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00-1 SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior light fixtures. 2. Power transformers. 3. Mounting accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each Luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Bollard: Direct Burial Installation Detail. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with local codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings . 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIXTURES AND MOUNTING ACCESSORIES A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. C. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling a ccidentally during relamping and when secured in Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00-2 operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. E. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. F. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. G. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. H. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's finish applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. I. Concrete Foundations: Cast in place. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." If exposed, Concrete shall match adjacent paving. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install per Manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. C. Alignment: Align foundations for optimum directional alignment of luminaires. D. Concrete Foundations: Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." If exposed, Concrete shall match adjacent paving in color, mix, and finish. E. Take care to protect Fixture during installation. 3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Conduits: Install as indicated on plans. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground fixtures as required by manufacturer and local codes. END OF SECTION 265600 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1 Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protection of existing trees indicated to remain. 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Removing above-grade improvements. 6. Removing below-grade improvements. B. Related Sections: 1. “Temporary Facilities and Controls” Section for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 2. “Execution” Section for field engineering and surveying. 3. “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” and “Sustainable Design Requirements” Section for additional LEED requirements. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. The full width of pavements damaged due to construction access and other construction - related activities shall be replaced with a structural section (pavement and base) at least equal to the adjacent existing section. 3. Protect existing utility lines indicated to remain. Notify Owner immediately of any damage to or encounter with an unknown existing utility line. Immediately repair damage to existing utility lines. C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, ANY skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. 1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2 2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 4. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by arborist. D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner prior to award of contract. 1. Extent of work on adjacent property is indicated on Drawings. E. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated or directed. F. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion - and sedimentation-control measures are in place. G. Soil stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist. 1.4 EXISTING SERVICES A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before commencing Work. B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this Work. C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NONE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots. 1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 2. Unless specifically designated to remain, strip the upper two inches (minimum) of soil containing vegetation and root growth within the Limits of Work shown on the Drawings. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 3 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. 2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. Limit height of stockpiles to 72 inches. 3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer and compact in accordance with the requirements specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” to make the new surface conform with the existing adjacent surface of the ground. 4. Trim trees, designated to be left standing within the cleared areas, of dead branches 1 -1/2 inches or more in diameter; and trim all branches to heights and in a manner as indicated. Neatly cut limbs and branches to be trimmed close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Paint cuts more than 1-1/4 inches in diameter with specified tree-wound paint. D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction are included under this Section. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property. C. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other project work. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMOLITION 31 12 00 - 1 SECTION 31 12 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of buildings. 2. Demolition and removal of structures. 3. Demolition and removal of site improvements. 4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. 5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. "Cutting and Patching" Section for cutting and patching procedures for demolition operations. 2. Division 1 Section "Schedules and Reports" Section for demolition schedule requirements. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" Section for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures for demolition operations. 4. “Contract Closeout" Section for record document requirements. 5. "Selective Demolition" Section for partial demolition of a building or structure undergoing alterations and for the removal, salvage, or reuse of materials in new construction. 6. "Tree Protection and Trimming" Section for protecting trees remaining on-site. 7. "Site Clearing" Section for site clearing and removing above- and below-grade improvements. 8. "Earth Moving” Section for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area. C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMOLITION 31 12 00 - 2 B. Historical items indicated remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner. C. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered during demolition, remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner. 1. Cooperate with Owner's archaeologist or historical adviser. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Proposed dust-control measures. C. Proposed noise-control measures. D. Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Dates for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged. F. Inventory of items to be removed by Owner. G. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. H. Record drawings at Project closeout according to "Contract Closeout” Section. 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. I. Landfill records for record purposes indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with pre-installation conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of Work. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMOLITION 31 12 00 - 3 B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the course of this Contract. If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner. 1. Asbestos will be removed by Owner before start of Work. D. Asbestos: Asbestos is present in the building or structure to be demolished. A report on the presence of asbestos is on file for review and use. Examine the report to become aware of locations where asbestos is present. 1. Asbestos abatement is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb asbestos or any material suspected of containing asbestos except under the procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in "Earth Moving” Section. 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in a structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during demolition. E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMOLITION 31 12 00 - 4 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities. a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. B. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities serving structures to be demolished before start of demolition work, when requested by Contractor. C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving structures to be demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. D. Utility Requirements: Refer to “Electrical” and “Mechanical” Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with demolition operations. B. Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and during demolition operations. C. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. D. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around demolition area. 1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. E. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of buildings to be demolished and adjacent buildings to remain. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. 3.4 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. B. Explosives: Do not bring explosives to the site or use explosives without written consent of Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Such written consent will not relieve Contractor of total responsibility for injury to people or for damage to property due to blasting operations. Perform required blasting in compliance with governing regulations. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMOLITION 31 12 00 - 5 3.5 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1. Do not create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution, when using water. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent buildings and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of demolition. 3.6 DEMOLITION A. Building Demolition: Demolish buildings completely and remove from the site. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Locate demolition equipment throughout the building and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 2. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On -site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 3. Small buildings may be removed intact when permitted by Architect and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 5. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 6. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain. 7. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants. B. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction, as follows: 1. Remove below-grade construction, including foundation walls, to at least 12 inches (300 mm) below grade. 2. Remove below-grade construction, including foundation walls and footings, to the depths indicated. 3. Completely remove below-grade construction, including foundation walls and footings. 4. Break up and remove below-grade concrete slabs, unless indicated to remain. 5. Break up below-grade concrete slabs into sections no larger than 24 inches (600 mm) square and leave in place. C. Filling Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of buildings and pavements with soil materials according to requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." D. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition operations. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space DEMOLITION 31 12 00 - 6 B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Burning: Burning of demolished materials will be permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, providing required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished. D. Disposal: Dispose of demolished materials at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. E. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 1 Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing and grading sub-grades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping. 2. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade. 3. Base course for walks and pavements. 4. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 5. Excavating and backfilling for underground utilities and appurtenances outs ide building lines. 6. Infiltration Facilities B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, topsoil removal, and tree protection. 2. "Foundation Drainage Systems" for footings, underslab, and wall drainage. 3. "Landscape Work" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting. 4. "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete encasings, cradles, and appurtenances for utility systems. 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATION A. Perform all work in accordance with applicable provisions of "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", latest edition. Unless otherwise noted, mention herein of section numbers refers to sections of the Reference Specification. Where Reference Specification refers to "Agency", substitute the word "Owner". Where Reference Specification refers to "Engineer", substitute the word "Architect". Where Reference Specification is in conflict with these Specifications, these Specifications shall govern. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation: Consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations a nd the re-use or disposal of materials removed. B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below aggregate base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations. D. Base Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and surface pavement in a paving system. E. Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Unauthorized Excavation: Consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well a s remedial work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 2 G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. H. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. I. Compaction: Any method of mechanically stabilizing a material by increasing its d ensity at a controlled moisture condition. "Degree of Compaction" is expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density obtained by the test procedure described in ASTM D 1557 for general soil types abbreviated in this Specification as "___ percent of maximum dry density". J. Hard Material: Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of "rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal. K. Lift: A layer or course of soil placed on top of previously prepared or placed soil in a fill or embankment. L. Unsatisfactory Material: Soil or other material identified as having insufficient strength or stability to carry intended loads without excessive consolidation or loss of stability. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Sp ecification Sections. 1. Location of borrow materials. B. Photographs or video tape of existing adjacent structures and site improvements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: District will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Owner, Architect, consultants, Geotechnical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 3 A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide a minimum 48-hours' notice to the Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active. C. Groundwater elevations that may be indicated are those existing at the time that subsu rface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent groundwater elevations at the time of construction. D. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Base Material: Shall conform to crushed aggregate base or fine-gradation crushed miscellaneous base in accordance with section 200-2.2 or 200-2.4, respectively, of the Reference Specification, and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM Test Met hod D 1557. F. Engineered Fill: Well graded granular soil with an expansion index less than 20 and free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. G. Bedding Material: Shall be base materials with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve; or clean sand classified in accordance with ASTM D 2487. H. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve. J. Sand: ASTM C33, fine aggregate. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 4 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick minimum, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 2'-6" deep. 1. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: a. Green: Sewer systems, incl. storm drain. C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard non-woven pervious geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon or polyester fibers, or a combination. 1. Provide filter fabrics that meet or exceed the listed minimum physical properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and the referenced standard test method in parentheses: a. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632): 120 lb. b. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4751): #70 U.S. Standard sieve. c. Permeability (ASTM D 4491): 150 gallons per minute per sq. ft. D. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Manufacturer's standard non-woven needle punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation greater than 50 percent, complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm sieve maximum, ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second minimum, ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours’ exposure, ASTM D 4355. E. Separation Geotextile: Manufacturer's standard woven geotextile, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent, complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve maximum, ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second minimum, ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours’ exposure, ASTM D 4355. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Tree protection is specified in the "Site Clearing” Section. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 5 D. Prepare subgrade and place base materials in accordance with sections 301-1.2 and 301-2, respectively, of the Reference Specification. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. General: Shall be to the contours and dimensions indicated. Keep excavations free from water and debris while construction is in progress. Notify the District immediately in writing where it becomes necessary to remove hard, soft, weak, or wet material to a depth greater than indicated. Unl ess otherwise indicated, concrete placed below grade will be formed and excavations shall allow fo r placement and removal of forms. Side cuts shall be cribbed and shored as required. B. Explosives: Do not use explosives. C. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered. 3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. B. Unshored Temporary Excavations: Unshored temporary excavations may be sloped back at 1 to 1 (horizontal to vertical) or flatter. Where sloped embankments are used, the tops of the slopes should be barricaded to prevent vehicles and storage loads within seven feet of the tops of the slopes. If the temporary construction slopes will be maintained during the rainy season, construct berms along the tops of the slopes where necessary to prevent run-off water from entering the excavation and eroding the slope faces. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades . 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of any known utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, use hand or light equipment excavation. Start hand or light equipment excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines and other existing work affected by the excavation work of this Section until approval for backfill is granted by the geotechnical engineer. Immediately report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction to the Owner. B. Where unidentified existing utilities are encountered, determine whether these are active or abandoned. Remove interfering portions of abandoned utilities and cap or plug open ends of pipe to remain. The cap or plug must seal the opening in such a manner that would permit remaining portions of the utility to be reactivated. Notify Owner for instructions on utilities which are determined to be Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 6 active. Do not proceed without instructions, except to correct an immediate hazard or emergency condition. Relocation work performed on an active utility without obtaining prior approval from Owner shall be done at the Contractor's expense and liability. C. In areas where compacted backfill has been placed, additional consolidation may occur after completion due to changes in moisture content and surcharge. Utility connections crossing this backfill, and improvements adjoining the building at the backfill line shall be installed taking into account this additional consolidation, or sufficient time shall be scheduled between backfilling operations and such improvements to allow this consolidation to take place. Damage to utilities or other improvements due to Contractor's negligence in regard to this paragraph shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. D. Protect newly backfilled areas and adjacent structures, slopes, or grades from traffic, erosion settlement, and any other damage. Repair and re-establish damaged or eroded grades and slopes and restore surface construction prior to acceptance. E. Cutting Pavement, Curbs, and Gutters: Saw cut with neat, parallel, straight lines one foot wider than trench width on each side of trenches and one foot beyond each edge of pits. If an existing pavement joint or cracked area is within two feet outside of a designated sawcut line shown on the Drawings, removal and resurfacing shall be to that joint, and/or shall include the crack or cracked area, unless otherwise approved by Architect. F. Contractor shall pothole at all identifiable crossings of existing utilities prior to any trenching operations and provide Architect with a survey of the top elevations (and bottom elevations, if applicable), of possible interferences so that an evaluation of necessary adjustments to the current profile or alignment may be made. Additionally, Architect shall be given the opportunity to view possible conflicts in the field prior to providing revised designs. G. Storm drains and sewers shall be to the depths indicated. Where settlements greater than the tolerance allowed herein for grading occur in trenches and pits due to improper compaction, excavate to the depth necessary to rectify the problem, then backfill and compact the excavation as specified herein and restore the surface to the required elevation. H. Keep excavations free from water while construction is in progress. I. Notify the Owner immediately in writing if it becomes necessary to remove rock or hard, unstable, or otherwise unsatisfactory material to a depth greater than indicated. Excavate large rock, boulders, and other unyielding material to an overdepth at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe, conduit, duct and appurtenances, unless otherwise indicated or specified. Over-excavate soft, weak, or wet excavations to an overdepth at least 12 inches below the bottom of the pipe, conduit, duct or appurtenances unless otherwise indicated or specified. J. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. K. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit . Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, except where sloping of sides is allowed. Sides of trenches shall not be sloped from the bottom of the trench up to the elevation of the top of the pipe. See plans for detail. L. At the option of the Contractor, the excavations may be cut to an overdept h of not less than 4 inches and refilled to required grade as specified. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 7 M. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and bar rels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench has been graded. Dimension of bell holes shall be as required for properly making the particular type of joint to ensure that the bell does not bear on the bottom of the excavation. 3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. When Architect determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract provisions for changes in Work. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, r ain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Architect. 3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Architect. B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by the Architect. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations a minimum distance of 7 feet or depth of excavation, whichever is greater. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities. 4. Concrete formwork removal. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 8 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. Backfilling of exterior utility trenches shall not be undertaken until geotechnical engineer has received 24-hours notice, until required tests and inspections have been completed, and until as -built location notes have been furnished. Remove uninspected backfill in accordance with requirements of this specification. Use hand-operated, plate-type, vibratory, or other suitable hand tampers in areas not accessible to larger rollers or compactors. Avoid damaging pipes and protective pipe coatings. B. Place backfill material in accordance with Section 306-1.3.2 of the Reference Specifications and achieve at least 90% of the maximum density per ASTM D 1557. The top 12 inches of backfill in the building or paved areas shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density per ASTM D 1557. C. Compaction by ponding or flooding will not be permitted. D. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. E. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. F. Provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit with less than 2'-6" of cover below finish surface of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase p iping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway base. G. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or aggregate base material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. H. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. I. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. J. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. L. Appurtenances: Provide at least 12 inches clear from outer surfaces to the embankment or shoring. Remove rock as specified herein. Remove unstable soil that is incapable of supporting the structure to an over-depth of one foot and refill with gravel or sand to the proper elevation and compact to 95% percent of maximum density. 3.12 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 9 1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface. B. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moist ure-condition or aerate soil and re- compact to required density. C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. 1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use base material or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use base material. 4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 3.13 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to minimum 2 percent above optimum moisture content for cohesive soils and to near optimum for cohesionless soils. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. 3.14 COMPACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for mate rial compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material comp acted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. Keep rollers and other heavy equipment at least 18 inches from footings, foundations, piers and walls of buildings and accessory construction. Use mechanical and hand tampers weighing at least 90 pounds with a maximum face area of 48 inches square to compact backfill within 18 inches of construction and where access is restricted. C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: 1. For general site fills, compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density. 2. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and compact the top 12 inches below subgrade at 95 percent maximum dry density. 3. Under walkways, scarify and compact the top 6 inches below subgrade at 90 percent maximum dry density. 4. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade at 85 percent maximum dry density. 3.15 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 10 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances. 3. All hillside grading or construction of fill slopes shall conform to the minimum standards listed in Chapter 70 of the UBC. 4. Fill slopes shall be keyed and benched into firm, natural ground when the existing slope to receive the fill is 5:1 or steeper (horizontal to vertical). Keys shall be tilted into the slope, shall be a minimum of one equipment width wide and shall be a minimum of three feet deep at the outside edge. 5. If necessary, the Contractor's selected equipment and construction procedure shall be altered, changed or modified in order to meet the specified compaction requirements. Flooding and water jetting is prohibited. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Concrete Walks: Plus or minus 0.05 foot. 3. Pavements: a. Concrete: 0.02 foot minus, with no high spots. 3.16 BASE COURSE A. Under pavements and walks, place base course material on prepared subgrades to pavements. 1. Compact base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent relative compaction in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and ASTM D 4718. 2. Shape base to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 3. When thickness of compacted base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 4. When thickness of compacted base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equ al layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less t han 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.17 DECOMPOSED GRANITE A. Install decomposed granite (DG) areas to depths indicated on plan. B. DG areas shall be treated with “Stabilizer” soil additive at a rate of one pound per ten square feet. C. Mix stabilizer thoroughly throughout total depth of DG with ‘rototiller’ or similar equipment. Grade and smooth surface of DG to desired finish and to the elevations shown. Apply water until moisture penetrates total depth of tilled area. Compact with small riding roller or vibrating plate tamp. 3.18 PAVEMENT REPAIR A. Repair or patch concrete pavement, curbs and gutters as specified in Concrete Paving Section. Do not repair pavement until trench has been backfilled and compacted as herein specified. Remove and dispose of temporary road surface material when permanent pavement is placed. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each s ubgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D 6938, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 – 11 correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 6938. b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. 2. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, perform at least one test of each soil stratum to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Architect. 3. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 4. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face. 5. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in - place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests. B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required. Re-compact and retest until required density is obtained. 3.20 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and re - compact at optimum moisture content to the required density. C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, tr ash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the property. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-1 SECTION 32 13 13 SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING SPECIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Requirements of "General Conditions of the Contract" and of Division 1, "General Requirements," apply to work in this Section with same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to engrave and seal architectural concrete paving as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. B. Work included in this Section: 1. Sandblasted concrete finish. 2. Contact: SHAW & SONS - Christina Palpal-latoc – (949) 642-0660 C. Work related in other Sections: 1. Section 02750 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Adjacent concrete paving. 2. Section 02810 - Irrigation System: Coordination of irrigation sleeve installation. 3. Section 02900 - Landscape Planting: Coordination of plant material placement. 4. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers: Installation of caulking. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Federal, State and local laws and regulations governing this Work are hereby incorporated into and made part of this Section. When this Section calls for certain materials, workmanship, or a level of construction that exceeds the level of Federal, State, or local requirements, provisions of this Section take precedence. B. Contractor comply with all applicable South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) rules 1140, 402, and 403. 1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Specifications and recommended practices of American Concrete Institute (ACI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), and The Uniform Building Code are to be considered part of this Specification. B. Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures – Thirteenth Edition; Portland cement Association. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-2 A. Paving Subcontractor Qualifications: provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing Sandblasted paving similar in scope and complexity to that specified herein and demonstrate successful experience. B. As part of the bid submittal the General Contractor shall submit background information and/or qualifications on his Architectural Concrete Subcontractor. This information shall provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing concrete work similar to size, scope and complexity to that specified herein. A listing of projects shall be provided and shall be reviewed and approved as comparable projects to the specified work by the Owner or Architect prior to award of bid. Failure to provide this information or the submittal of incomplete or inaccurate information shall give cause to reject the entire bid as non-responsive and incomplete. The submittal shall provide the Owner and Architect with evidence of successful experience in sandblasted and stained concrete paving similar to that specified herein and can demonstrate successful experience through past project documentation and references. C. Demonstration of experience: provide a minimum of five (5) projects of installed sandblasted architectural cast-in-place concrete with a reference list of each containing address of installation, contact person and phone number of project’s architect or owner’s representation. Provide two (2) color photos, 8” x 10” size, of each installation listed above representing the installation. Photo #1 shall show the approximate size of the installation. Photo #2 shall be taken approximately 2 to 3 feet from the paving surface. See submittals portion of this section for additional information. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit no later than 10 days after contract award a typed list of products specified in this Section. B. Submit evidence of licensed installer qualifications for experience, demonstration of square footage installed, number of projects, and contact information to verify experience as indicated in Quality Control section of this specification. C. Product data: For each type of product indicated, submit manufacturer’s data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. D. Mix design: Submit concrete mixture proportions and characteristics. Do not begin concrete production until concrete mix designs have been reviewed and approved. Mix designs shall include proportions of all ingredients, including admixtures added at time of batching. E. Samples: One 12”x12” samples representative of the specified paving finish approved by the Landscape Architect . F. Shop drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for reinforcing steel and accessories in accordance with ACI standards. 2. Submit paving jointing and sequencing plan that shows proposed layout of construction, dowel basket and sawcut joints. Clearly delineate the three different joint types and show the layout of paving types as indicated on drawing paving schedule. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-3 A. None allowed unless approved in writing by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 1.8 TESTING A. A testing agency may be designated by Owner or Owner's Authorized Representative. Testing personnel must meet ASTM E329 requirements. 1.9 MOCK-UPS A. Prior to construction, provide (1) 4-foot x 4-foot mockup at location selected by Architect or Landscape Architect. C. Construct mock-up using materials, processes, and techniques required for the work. D. Obtain the Architect and Owner’s acceptance of mockup prior to commencement of the work. E. Remove mock-ups from site upon completion of Work and approval by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Keep work area clean, and in a safe and workmanlike condition so that rubbish, waste and debris do not interfere with work of other trades. 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry and protected location. B. Handle materials according to manufacturer’s printed instructions. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative and contractors performing work related to installation of Contractor’s Work in ample time, so as to allow sufficient time for them to perform their portion of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN A. Finish and color of Sandblasted concrete shall match approved design reference sample and as follows: 1. Sample # TBD a. Fabricator: Shaw & Sons Concrete Contractors, 949-642-0660 2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-4 A. Type I, IA, II, IIA, III, IIIA, IV, and V cements to conform to ASTM C150 B. Use same brand of cement from single source throughout entire project. C. Refer to drawings for cement type specified. 2.3 WASHED CONCRETE SAND A. Clean, hard, and durable washed concrete sand, conforming to ASTM C33. B. Use same sand from single source throughout entire project. 2.4 COARSE AGGREGATE A. Clean, hard, and durable coarse aggregate, conforming to ASTM C33 B. Use same aggregate from single source throughout entire project. 2.5 WATER A. Free from deleterious materials such as oils, acids, and organic matter. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Integral Concrete Coloring Admixture: Refer to drawings for color type and manufacturer. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers a. L.M. Scofield: (800) 800-9900 b. Davis Colors: (323) 269-7311 c. Solomon Colors: (800) 624-0261 d. Increte Systems: (800) 752-4626 e. MasterColor by BASF: (800) 526-1072 B. Air Entrainment Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C260 C. Water Reducing Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C494, Type A. D. Waterproofing Admixtures: Use waterproofing admixture when paving surface is poured within 5’-0” of pool water, splash pads, etc. 2.7 READY MIXED CONCRETE A. Batched mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94 – “Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete.” 2.8 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-5 A. Install Mirafi 500X woven geotextile fabric under base course of all concrete paving except in the City right-of-way conditions per manufacturer’s directions. 2.9 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing Steel: Conforming to ASTM A615, clean and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils. B. Tie Wire: 16-guage plain cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82, clean and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars in place. D. Polypropylene Fiber Reinforcement: 100% virgin multifilament polypropylene fibers, complying with ASTM C 1116 – Type III. 2.10 CONSTRUCTION JOINT DOWELS A. Construct Speed Dowel Construction Joints (CJ) at modules no larger than 20’-0” x 20’-0”. Wire dowel baskets (DB) may be used in lieu of CJs to facilitate larger pour areas. B. Dowel schedule to match rebar schedule with a minimum spacing of 18” o.c. C. 5/8” Glass Fiber reinforced polymer dowel bar. D. Encase 50 percent of each dowel in a Speed Dowel™ plastic sleeve to allow parallel lateral movement of each dowel. Double check fiberglass dowel to Speed Dowel tolerance to ensure snug fit. 2.11 FLY ASH A. ASTM C618 – Type F 2.12 CURING COMPOUND A. Acceptable Products: 1. Admixtures Inc.; Colorfull Clear Curing Compound – (626) 357-3263 2. Shaw & Sons; Craftsmen Specification Cure (949) 642-0660 2.13 SEALER A. Acceptable Products 1. Shaw & Sons; Craftsmen Specification Seal – (949)642-0660 2. Sinak Corporation; HLQ-125 – (619) 231-1771 3. Shaw & Sons; Craftsmen Specification Hydrolyzed Lithium Quartz Sealer – (949) 642- 0660 PART 3 EXECUTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-6 3.1 SUBGRADE A. Subgrade to meet requirements of project’s soils report. B. General Contractor to include waterproofing and drainboard when pouring on structure. C. Ensure that utilities, including irrigation lines are buried and compacted. 3.2 FORMING A. Be responsible for design and engineering of form work as well as its construction. B. Ensure that work conforms to recommended practice for concrete form work (ACI 347), latest edition. C. Do not exceed 20’-0” x 20’-0” in a formed construction area unless speed dowels and dowel baskets are used. D. Ensure that form lumber is new #2 or better grade wood. E. Perform form layout with a digital electronic transit for line layout accuracy. F. Allow forms to remain in place long enough to allow concrete to set properly. Remove forms when appropriate. 3.3 DESIGN OF MIXES AND PROPORTIONING A. Proportioning and mix of cement, aggregate, admixture and water to attain required plasticity and strength in accordance with current edition of ACI Manual of Concrete Practice and PCA “Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures.” B. Concrete mixtures to be designed by an approved commercial testing laboratory, using approved materials to obtain specified minimum compressive strength. C. Concrete Mix Criteria (parameters only, actual mix may vary): 1. Slump: 4-inch, with a 1-inch slump differential between successive batches. Obtain approval from Owner’s Authorized Representative if slump is outside these parameters. 2. Minimum PSI rating at 28 days: 2,500. 3. Water/cement ratio: 0.5-.57 4. Sand: 60% if total mix 5. Pea gravel: 30% of total mix 6. Fly ash: Use only when seeding reactive aggregates such as glass and seashells. 7. Non-chloride accelerators: Do not use corrosive accelerators such as calcium chloride. 8. Concrete delivery: Use of concrete loads exceeding 90 minutes from time of batch plant must be approved by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 9. Ensure that batch plant guarantees single source for supply of cement, sand, and aggregate for the entire project. 3.4 INSTALLATION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-7 A. Installation Procedures 1. Prepare subgrade to a desired grade elevation; 2. Pump or place concrete mix over subgrade; 3. Screed concrete to desired FS elevation; 4. Float the top surface of the screened concrete mix, erasing all float lines; 5. Machine power trowel field panels and hand trowel edges until surface is flat and tight; 6. Apply curing compound and cure concrete for a minimum of 7 days; 7. Engrave surface of concrete to match texture of referee sample, SS #TBD. Engraving will be 1/16 in to 3/32 in deep. The edges of the sandblasted areas will be uniform and crisp. 8. Acid wash to remove free lime and salts and create an acceptable slip resistant finish. Contain acid wash wastewater and pump into containers and haul to a hazardous waste facility for disposal. 9. When surface is dry, apply hydrolyzed silica sealer and stain resistant sealer per manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 JOINTING A. Refer to ACI 302 “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” for work under this section. B. Construction and Contraction Joints: 1. Sawcut construction and contraction joints in location indicated on drawings. 2. Perform jointing with new diamond tip circular saw. 3. Joint width: per drawings, do not exceed 3/16-inch width. 4. Depth of sawcuts: 14/4” depth of slab. 5. Sawcut joints in a straight line with no overcutting (alignment variance shall not deviate more than 1/8” in 10’-0”). 6. Use a hand tool to sawcut up to vertical edges such as wells, steps, curbs, and columns. No cutting into vertical surfaces will be allowed. 3.6 CURING A. After installation, cure concrete for seven (7) days without foot traffic and twenty -eight (28) days without vehicular traffic. 3.7 SEALING A. Acid clean entire surface after initial cure (3-day minimum) and seal surface of paving using hydrolyzed alkali-silica solution. Follow sealer directions when applying this product. B. Seal with an addition penetrating topical coating for stain repellency. Follow sealer directions when applying this product. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space SANDBLASTED CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-8 3.8 MAINTANENACE A. Surfaces exposed to salts, chlorine, and chemicals should be washed daily with potable water. B. Pressure wash at the first sign of calcification or salt build up and reseal with hydrolyzed lithium quartz and a waterproofing sealer. 3.9 PROTECTION A. The General Contractor is responsible for using temporary floor protection throughout the project to safeguard the quality of concrete slabs before and after application of decorative finishes or installations of other materials. 3.10 WARRANTY A. Provide an industry standard one year warranty. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE JOINT SEALANTS 32 13 73 - 1 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-applied joint sealants. 2. Hot-applied joint sealants. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint -sealant manufacturers eight samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required. C. Pavement-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. D. Product certificates. E. Product test reports. F. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the project site. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE JOINT SEALANTS 32 13 73 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type NS. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type SL. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone SL. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL. C. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following : a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. 2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 3406. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; Superseal 444/777. B. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 6690, Types I, II, and III. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Hi-Spec or Sealtight 3405 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE JOINT SEALANTS 32 13 73 - 3 b. Right Pointe; D-3405 Hot Applied Sealant. 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. 2.5 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. C. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space CONCRETE JOINT SEALANTS 32 13 73 - 4 F. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint: 1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. G. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. H. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STABILIZED CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING 32 15 40-1 SECTION 32 15 40 STABILIZED CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes A. Section Includes: Supply and installation of stabilized crushed aggregate paving as indicated in the Contract documents, including: 1. Base Course 2. Crushed Aggregate Paving 3. Organic Binder for Crushed Aggregate 1.2 Related Sections A. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving B. Section 31 23 13 – Finish Grading 1.3 References A. ASTM C136 – Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ASTM D2419 – Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregates. C. Greenbook – Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. D. Ontario Provencial Standard Specification 1010 1.4 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: 1. Manufacturer’s product data sheet for Binder material. 2. Sieve analysis of Crushed Aggregate. 3. 1 quart sample of base course. 4. Base Course gradation indicating that the product meets specifications. 5. 1 quart sample of stabilized crushed aggregate paving. 6. Stabilized crushed aggregate gradation indicating that the product meets specifications. 1.5 Mock-Up A. Install 20 square feet minimum of stabilized crushed aggregate paving including base course. B. Allow Architect to view mock-up before proceeding with rest of stabilized crushed aggregate paving. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STABILIZED CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING 32 15 40-2 C. Mock-up shall remain until work has been completed. D. Approved mock-up may remain as part of completed Work. 1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protect stabilized crushed aggregate mix from contamination. Store under cover. 1.7 Sequencing A. Do not install work specified in this Section prior to acceptance of earth moving. B. Coordinate work specified in this Section with work specified in other Sections to minimize cutting of and operation of heavy equipment over installed stabilized crushed aggregate paving. C. Do not install stabilized crushed aggregate surfacing when subbase is wet at saturated field capacity. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Base Course Materials: 1. Comply with MTO OPSS 1010 – “Material Specification for Aggregates – Granular A, B, M and Select Subgrade Material” specification for Granular A material. B. Crushed Aggregate Materials: 1. Material type shall be as indicated on Plan. 2. Crushed Aggregate Material shall consist of sound, angular, durable particles. 2. Gradation, in accordance with ASTM C136: Sieve Sieve Size (mm) Percent Passing ½” 12.7 100% 3/8” 9.51 90-100% C. Organic Binder: 1. As furnished by Aggregate supplier. 2. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with pro visions of section 01 25 00 4 4.76 50-100% 30 0.595 25-55% 100 0.149 10-25% 200 0.074 5-18% Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STABILIZED CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING 32 15 40-3 3. Mix rate shall be determined by Aggregate Supplier. D Accessories: 1. Water: Free from contaminants that would discolour or be deleterious to stabilized aggregate paving. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine grading and subsoil conditions. Do not proceed until conditions are acceptable. 3.2 Preparation of Subgrade A. Excavate to depth required so that finish grade can be established as noted on plans. B. Compact subgrade to 95% Modified Proctor Density. Excavate soft and unstable areas of subgrade that cannot be compacted to standard noted, fill and compact with approved granular material. 3.3 Base Course A. Place base course material over subgrade to depths and dimensions shown on drawings in maximum (6”) lifts compacted to 95% Modified Proctor Density. 3.4 Pre-blended Stabilized Aggregate Surfacing A. For typical pathways or trails install Stabilized Aggregate Paving to a compacted depth of 3 to 4 inches. B. Prewetted Stabilized Aggregate Paving shall be installed in one lift for pathway, trails or equal application. C. Depending on weather conditions, the time required to allow the material to set -up before it can be compacted varies. Generally, this time period is between 6 and 48 hours. The top layer should be firm and not sticky. Compaction can begin when you can walk on the material without significantly sinking in and material does not feel muddy. If material sticks to the roller during compaction, allow the material to further dry. Do not allow the material to completely dry out. D. Make 4-6 passes using a 1-10 ton double or single static drum roller, or equivalent. Do not use a vibratory compactor or vibratory setting on the compactor. The contractor shall select the proper size roller for the appropriate application. E. After final compaction, the surface shall be true to elevation and shall not vary by more than (1/4”) tested with a straight edge at an y location on the surfaces. Surfaces can either be crowed at a minimum of 2% and/or installed with a cross slope of minimum 1%. F. Compaction testing shall not be conducted until the Stabilized Aggregate Paving has be allowed to thoroughly dry and cure. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STABILIZED CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING 32 15 40-4 3.5 Adjust and Clean A. All paved areas or adjacent surface shall be brushed clean and excess materials shall be removed from the work site and disposed of in an approved dump location. 3.6 Protection A. Do not allow traffic on stabilized crushed aggregate paving after placement or until compacted stabilized crushed aggregate paving has fully cured. This time may vary depending on weather conditions. B. Protect stabilized crushed aggregate paving surface from damage until Project completion. Repair damaged areas to match specified requirements. 3.7 Maintenance & Repairs A. Loose aggregate will appear on the surface over time and is a natural occurrence. If excess material becomes loose, redistribute the material over the surface, water thoroughly and re - compact with a minimum 1-ton drum roller. B. To repair, excavate damaged area and scarify exposed stabilized crushed aggregate paving. Pre- blend replacement crushed aggregate material with Stabilizer at the specified rate. Apply material to the excavated area and compact. Thoroughly water the material and allow the material to cure, but not completely dry out. Re-compact the material, ensuring that the final grade and crown are maintained. Do not use a vibratory compactor. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 1 SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Piping. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Manual valves. 4. Pressure-reducing valves. 5. Automatic control valves. 6. Automatic drain valves. 7. Transition fittings. 8. Dielectric fittings. 9. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 10. Sprinklers. 11. Quick couplers. 12. Drip irrigation specialties. 13. Controllers. 14. Boxes for automatic control valves. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The Work shall conform to the reference standards and specifications of the issues listed below (refer to Section 01 4200 if issue date is not listed), to requirements indicated and specified, to required fire ratings, and to the pertaining regulatory requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The specifications, codes, publications, and standards listed, but referred to hereafter by the basic designation only, form a part of this Section to the extent referenced herein: B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B88-96 Seamless Copper Water Tube. D1785-96b Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. D2241-96b Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series). D2464-96a Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 2 D2564-96a Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. D2855-96 Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints With Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 3300 for procedures. B. Product Data: Before any irrigation system materials are delivered to the job site, submit a complete materials list of all irrigation systems materials or processes proposed to be furnished and installed as part of Work this Section. List each manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item of system materials and equipment, include catalog cuts and technical data, and include manufacturers' recommendations as to the methods of installation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit showing detailed layout and details for irrigation system including, without limitation, the following where differing from or completing the information and requirements shown on the Drawings: 1. Dimensioned layouts and sizes for piping including depths below finish grade, piping grade changes, flow in each line in gallons per minute and quick coupler locations. 2. Dimensioned locations of all valves and controls by types, zones, and control stations for automatic controllers. 3. Dimensioned locations of points of connection to domestic water system, backflow prevention devices, and pressure reducing stations, with complete construction details. 4. Dimensioned layouts for sprinkler heads showing each type, bubbler heads, and drip irrigation emitters; include details of risers. 5. Locations and lengths of required sleeves. 6. Details of dielectric connections between ferrous and non -ferrous pipe. 7. Low voltage control wiring diagrams including conductor color coding. 8. All other system equipment, devices, and features. D. Samples: Submit such Samples as the Owner or Landscape Architect may request. E. Record Drawings: Prepare and submit according to Section 01 7839 except as modified herein. Record accurately on one set of FULL SIZE (same size as contract drawings) Drawings all changes in the Work of this Section constituting departures from the original Contract Drawings and the actual final installed locations of all required components as specified below. Record Drawing information shall be provided as a PDF drawing file. All digital files shall be provided via email, labeled with the project name, file descriptions, and date. 1. Prior to final inspection of the Work, submit Record Drawings plotted onto FULL SIZE bond sheets for review by the Landscape Architect. Revise and resubmit as necessary. 2. Data for Record Drawings shall be collected on a day to day basis during installation of pressure mainline or as required to fully indicate all routing locations and pipe depths. 3. Data for all other irrigation equipment locations shall be collected prior to the final inspection of the Work of this Section. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 3 4. Dimensions from/to permanent points of reference, such as buildings, sidewalks, curbs, etc., shall be shown for each piece of irrigation equipment shown below. a. All irrigation symbols shall be clearly shown matching the irrigation legend for the Drawings. b. All lettering on the Record Drawings shall be minimum 1/8" in size. 5. Information collected for the irrigation system shall consist of equipment manufacturer, model numbers, size, type, and flow rates. 6. Show locations, depths, and the other pertinent information of and for the following items: a. Point of connection (including water P.O.C., backflow devices, master control valves, flow sensors, etc.; indicate manufacturer, model, and size. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure main lines (dimensions shown at 100 feet maximum along the routing). c. Isolation valves (indicate type, manufacturer, model, and size). d. Automatic remote control valves (indicate manufacturer, model, size, and flow rate). e. Quick coupling valves (indicate manufacturer, model, and size). f. Routing of control wires. g. Irrigation controllers (indicate manufacturer, model, and size). h. Related equipment (as may be directed). 7. Record Drawings shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before controller charts are prepared. F. Controller Charts: Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller. Chart shall show the area covered by the particular controller. 1. The chart shall be a reduced-size copy of the actual "Record Drawing". In the event the controller sequence is not legible when the chart drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a readable size. The area and heads in each zone shall be graphically color-coded with a distinguished and unique color film. 2. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of clear plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils in thickness. G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section 01 7823 except as modified herein. 1. One PDF digital copy of operation and maintenance manuals shall be delivered to the Landscape Architect and Owner at least 10 calendar days prior to final inspection. The manuals shall describe the materials installed and the proper operation of the system. 2. Each complete, bound manual shall include the following information: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 4 a. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, duration of the warranty period, equipment list with names and addresses of local manufacturer representatives. b. Operating and maintenance instructions for all irrigation equipment. c. Spare parts lists and related manufacturer information for all equipment. H. Training Evidence: In addition to above manuals, submit written evidence that Owner's maintenance personnel have been given instructions for all system equipment and the correct operation, adjustment, and repair procedures; submit evidence at completion of the Work of this Section that this service has been performed. I. Checklist: The following checklist shall be completed at the end of the Work of this Section and included in the operation and maintenance manuals. Use the format as follows: 1. Materials approvals. 2. Pressure line tests (by whom and date). 3. Record Drawings completed (received by and date). 4. Controller charts completed (received by and date). 5. Operation and maintenance manuals furnished (received by and date). 6. System and equipment operations instructions furnished (received by and date). 7. Manufacturers' warranties (received by and date). 8. Written warranty of irrigation system and materials (received by and date). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: The Irrigation Subcontractor shall have at least one English speaking person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with type of materials and equipment being installed and manufactur er's recommended methods of installation, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detail drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturer of articles used in Work of this Section furnish directions covering points differing or not shown in the Irrigation Drawings or herein. C. Regulatory Requirements 1. Local, municipal, and state laws, rules, and regulations governing or relating to any portion of Work of this Section are incorporated into and made a part of this Section, and their provisions shall be conformed to by this Subcontractor. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to conflict with any of above rules and regulations. However, when this Section and the Irrigation Drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of this Section and the Irrigation Drawings shall take precedence. 2. Secure required licenses and permits including payments of charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits are secured or arrangements made by others affecting the Work of this Section. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 5 D. Materials Quality: All materials supplied for the irrigation system shall be new and free from any defects. All defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use all means required to protect irrigation system materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installation Work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Landscape Architect and Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings under cover until ready to install. Transport plastic pipe on a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external loads. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Construction Drawings: Due to the scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc. which may be required. This Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all the Work of this Section and plan the irrigation installation accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc., as are required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the irrigation system to be installed. The system shall be installed in such manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features. 1. Irrigation system work required on the Drawings by notes or details shall be provided whether or not mentioned herein. When an item is shown on the Drawings but not mentioned herein, or vice versa, it shall be deemed to be as shown and specified in both. The Landscape Architect shall have final authority for clarification. 2. Do not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the Drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences, or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in the design of the system. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect as soon as detected. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any necessary revisions. B. Existing Conditions: Verify and be familiar with the locations, size, and detail of points of connection provided as the source of water, electrical supply, and telephone line connection to the irrigation system. C. Do not trim, prune, or root prune any existing trees without the permission of the City of Azusa Arborist. All excavations under the drip line of existing trees shall be done by hand. D. System Design: Irrigation system design is based on the available static water pressure shown on the Drawings. Verify static water on the project prior to the start of irrigation construction. Should a discrepancy exist, notify the Landscape Architect prior to beginning construction. E. Conflicts: Before cutting into the soil, locate cables, conduits, sewer septic tanks, and other utilities as are commonly found underground and use care not to damage or disturb the improvements. If a conflict exists between such obstacles and the proposed irrigation system, promptly notify the Landscape Architect and Owner for instructions. Protect all existing utilities and features to remain on and adjacent to the working area during construction of the irrigation system and repair, at no extra cost to the Owner, all damage resulting from the construction operations or negligence. Proceed in the same manner if a rock layer or any other such conditions are encountered. F. Sleeves: Coordinate with Contractor for installation of required sleeving as shown on the Drawings. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 6 1.07 WARRANTY A. Conform to Section 017900 and the following. Develop the warranty form shown in Section 017900 to include the special requirements herein. B. The entire irrigation sprinkler system, including all Work done under this Section, shall be warranted against all defects and faults of material and workmanship, including settling of the backfilled areas below grade, for a period of one year. C. Should any problem with the irrigation system be discovered within the warranty period, it shall be corrected by Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner within 10 calendar days of receipt of written notice from the Owner. When nature of the re pairs, as determined by the Owner, are an emergency (i.e., broken pressure line), the Owner may proceed to make repairs at the Contractor's expense. Any and all damages to existing improvement resulting either from faulty materials or workmanship, or from the necessary repairs to correct same, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner by the Contractor, all at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of liability under the warranty. Such warranties shall only supplement the Contractor's warranty. E. Warranty shall be submitted on Contractor's own letterhead. F. The warranty form required in Section 017900 shall be modified as required to include the following: We hereby warranty and guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. We agree to repair or repla ce Work installed by us, together with any adjacent Work which is displaced or damaged by so doing, that proves to be defective in workmanship, material, or operation within a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the Work by the Owner or fro m the Date of Certificate of Substantial Completion, whichever is earlier, with ordinary wear and tear and unusual neglect or abuse excepted. We shall make such repairs or replacements within 10 calendar days following written notice from the Owner. If we fail to comply with the above-mentioned conditions within the stipulated time period, after notification in writing, we, the undersigned, all collectively and separately, hereby authorize the Owner to have said defective Work repaired and/or replaced and made good. We agree to pay to the Owner upon demand all moneys the Owner may expend in making good said defective Work including collection costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. During the maintenance period (refer to Section 017823), Irrigation Subcontractor shall adjust and maintain the irrigation system in a fully operational condition providing complete irrigation coverage to all plantings which require water. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 7 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. In accordance with Section 017700, furnish and deliver as a part of this Section the following items: B. Set of Tools for repairing and replacing drip tubing and components . C. Two keys for each automatic controller. E. Two quick coupler keys with a 1" bronze hose bib, bent nose type with hand wheel and two coupler lid keys. F. One valve box cover key or wrench. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS A. If the Irrigation Subcontractor wishes to propose substitutions for any equipment or materials for those equipment items or materials listed on the Irrigation Drawings or specified herein, a request shall be submitted in accordance with Section 012300. No substitutions will be allowed without prior written approval by the Owner. The request shall include the following: B. A written statement indicating the reason for proposing the substitution. C. Catalog cut sheets, technical data, and performance information for each proposed substitute item. D. The difference in installed price if the item is approved. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Use only new materials of the manufacturer, size and type shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Materials or equipment installed or furnished that do not meet the Landscape Architect's or Owner's standards will be rejected and shall be removed from the site and replaced with proper materials or equipment at no expense to the Owner. 2.03 PIPE A. Pressure Supply Lines: 1. Between the water meter and any backflow prevention devices shall be Type "K" copper. 2. 1-1/2" in diameter and smaller downstream of the backflow prevention unit shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785. 3. 2" in diameter and up to 3" in diameter downstream of backflow prevention unit shall be Class 315 solvent weld PVC. Piping shall conform to ASTM D2241. B. Non-Pressure Lines: Lines 3/4" in diameter and larger downstream of the remote control valve shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785. C. Sleeves Under Paving: Schedule 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785. 2.04 METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Brass Pipe: Shall be 85% red brass, ANSI, IPS Standard 125 pounds, Schedule 40 screwed pipe. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 8 B. Fittings: Medium brass, screwed 125-pound class. C. Copper Pipe and Fittings: Type "K" sweat soldered. 2.05 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe shall be marked continuously with manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, PVC type and grade, National Sanitation Foundation approval, Commercial Standards designation, and date of extrusion. B. Plastic Pipe: Extruded of an improved PVC virgin pipe compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 or ASTM D1785. C. Solvent Weld PVC Fittings: Standard weight Schedule 40, injection molded of an improved virgin PVC fitting compound. Slip PVC fittings shall be the "deep socket" bracketed type. Threaded plastic fittings shall be injection molded. All tees and ells shall be side gated. Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466. D. Threaded Nipples: Standard weight Schedule 80 with molded threads, conforming to ASTM D1785. E. Solvent Cement: All solvent cementing of plastic pipe and fittings shall be a two-step process, using primer and solvent cement applied per manufacturer's recommendations. Cement shall be fluid consistency, not gel-like or ropy. Solvent cementing shall be in conformance with ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855. F. Adapters: When connection is plastic to metal, female adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non-lead base Teflon paste or tape. 2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNIT A. Existing 2.07 VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. Ball valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type shown on the Drawings. 2. Ball valves shall be constructed of a bronze body, stainless steel ball and stem. Ball valves shall have threaded connections. 3. Ball valves shall have a minimum working pressure of not less than 150 PSI and shall conform to AWWA standards. B. Quick Coupler Valves: Shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type shown on the Drawings. Quick coupler valves shall be brass with a wall thickness guaranteed to withstand normal working pressure of 150 PSI without leakage. Valves shall have 1" female threads opening at base, with a two-piece body. Valves shall be operated only with a coupler key, designed for that purpose. Coupler key is inserted into valve and a positive, watertight connection shall be made between the coupler key and valve. C. Automatic Control Valves: Shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type shown on the Drawings, and shall be electrically operated. 2.08 VALVE BOXES Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 9 A. Shall be black material with a black lids. Valve box extensions shall be black and by the same manufacturer as the valve box. Smallest box size shall be used for all applications. Valve boxes and lids shall be NDS Pro-Spec or equal. B. Automatic Remote Control Valve Boxes: Shall be minimum 14” x 19” rectangular. Valve box covers shall be marked "RCV". Valve Box and cover shall be NDS, or equal. C. Splice boxes, Isolation Valve and Quick Coupler Valve Boxes: Shall be a minimum 9” open interior diameter. Valve box covers shall be marked with “PULL BOX”, “VALVE”, or "QC”, respectively. D. Flush Valve and Air Relief Valves for drip irrigation shall be installed in a 6” round box. Box shall be NDS, or equal, with a cover marked “FS” or “AR”, accordingly. 2.09 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Automatic controller and controller enclosure shall be manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the Drawings. 2.10 ELECTRICAL A. Electrical equipment shall be NEMA Type 3, waterproofed for exterior installations. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances. 2.11 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING A. Remote Control Wire: Direct-burial AWG-UF type, size per manufacturer, and in no case smaller than 14 gauge. B. Connections: as noted on plans. C. Ground Wires: White in color. Control wires shall be red (where two or more controllers are used, the control wires shall be a different color for each controller. These colors shall be noted on the "Record Drawings" located on controller door). 2.12 IRRIGATION HEADS AND DRIP TUBING A. Shall be of manufacturer, size, and type, with throw radius, operating pressure, and discharge rate indicated on the Drawings. Irrigation heads and drip tubing shall be used as indicated on the Drawings. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Miscellaneous equipment such as flow sensors, rain sensors, master valves, and drip equipment shall be of the manufacturer, size, type, with radius of throw, operating pressure, and discharge rate indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS A. Inspections: Prior to Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of all other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. Do not proceed with the installation in areas of discrepancy until all discrepancies have been resolved. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 10 C. Grades: Before starting Work, carefully check grades to determine that Work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified material depths with respect to finish grade. Final grades shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before Work of this Section will be allowed to begin. D. Field Measurements: Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all irrigation materials with all other Work. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions prior to proceeding with Work of this Section. E. Utilities: Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by its operations or neglect. F. Existing Trees: All excavations under the dripline or canopy of an exiting tree shall be performed by hand tools only. Refer to Section 015639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION for additional information regarding required tree protections. F. Diagrammatic Intent: Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Size and location of equipment and fixtures are drawn to scale where possible. Provide offsets in piping and changes in equipment locations as necessary to conform to structures and to avoid obstructions or conflicts with other Work at no additional expense to Owner. G. Layout: Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads, valves, backflow preventer, and automatic controller. Layout irrigation system and make minor adjustments required due to differences between the site and the Drawings. Where piping is shown on the Drawings under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, install the piping in the planted areas. H. Water Supply: Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be at the locations shown on the Drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. I. Electrical Service: Connections to electrical supply shall be at the locations shown on the Drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller. Electrical power source to controller locations shall be provided by others. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Excavations shall be straight with vertical sides, even grade, and shall support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on the Drawings to the depths below finished grade and as noted. Where lines occur under paved area, these dimensions shall be considered below subgrade. Root pruning and excavation with the drip line of any existing tree to remain shall be per Temporary Tree and Plant Protection Specifications 01 5639. B. Provide minimum cover over pressure supply lines, control wires, and on-pressure lines as shown in the plans. C. Pipes installed in a common trench shall have minimum space between pipes as shown in the plans. 3.03 BACKFILL A. Backfill material on all lines shall be the same as adjacent soil free of debris, litter, and rocks over 1/2" in diameter. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 11 B. Backfill shall be tamped in 4" layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides for the full width of the trench and the full length of the pipe. Backfill materials shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction, free of voids. Backfill shall be compacted to dry density equal to the adjacent undisturbed soil and shall conform to adjacent grades. C. Flooding in lieu of tamping is not allowed. D. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact backfill. E. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 6" over and under all piping under paved areas. 3.04 PIPING A. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement. B. Cutting or breaking of existing pavement is not permitted. C. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale, burrs, and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification. D. Remove all dented and damaged pipe sections. E. All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 6" from each other and 12" from lines of other trades. F. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other. G. In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommended methods including wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent welds at least 15 minutes setup time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling. H. PVC pipe shall be installed in manner providing for expansion and contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. I. Center load all plastic piping prior to pressure testing. J. All threaded plastic-to-plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon paste. K. For plastic-to-metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope on all threaded plastic-to-metal connections, except where noted otherwise. All plastic -to-metal connections shall be made with plastic male adapters. 3.05 CONTROLLER A. The Landscape Architect shall approve the exact location of the controller prior to installation. The electrical service shall be coordinated with this location. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final electrical hook up to the irrigation controller. C. Irrigation system shall be programmed to operate during periods of minimal use of the design area. 3.06 CONTROL WIRING A. Control wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as the pressure supply lines whenever possible. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 12 B. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together in a bundle at intervals of 10 feet. Bundle shall be secured to the mainline with tape at intervals of 20 feet. C. All connections shall be of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide an 18" service loop at each connection. See plans for more info. D. An expansion loop of 12" shall be provided at each wire connection and/or directional change, and one of 24" shall be provided at each remote control valve. E. A continuous run of wire shall be used between a controller and each remote control valve. Under no circumstances shall splices be used without prior approval. 3.07 VALVES A. Automatic control valves, quick coupler, and gate valves are to be installed in the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Valve shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible. C. Install all valves as indicated in the detail Drawings. D. Valves to be installed in valve boxes shall be installed one valve per box. 3.08 VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible. Location shall be approved by Landscape Architect B. Each valve box shall be installed on foundation of 3/4" gravel backfill, 3 cubic feet minimum. Valve boxes shall be installed with their tops 1/2" above the surface of surrounding finish grade in lawn areas and 2" above finish grade in ground cover areas. 3.09 IRRIGATION HEADS AND DRIP TUBING A. Irrigation heads and drip tubing shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. B. Spacing of heads and drip tubing shall not exceed maximum indicated on the Drawings. C. Riser nipples shall be of the same size as the riser opening in the sprinkler body. D. Drip irrigation fittings shall be as recommended by drip line manufacturer. 3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS A. Existing, protect in place. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the respective detail Drawings or requirements specified, using best standard practices. B. Quick coupler valves shall be set approximately 12" from walks, curbs, header boards, or paved areas where applicable. C. Install devices such as flow sensors, rain sensors, master valves, and drip equipment as indicated on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.12 FLUSHING THE SYSTEM Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 13 A. Prior to installation of irrigation heads and drip tubing, the valves shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the lines and risers. Irrigation heads and drip tubing shall be installed after flushing the system has been completed. 3.13 ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM A. Contractor shall adjust valves, align heads, and check coverage of each system prior to coverage test. If it is determined by the Landscape Architect or Owner that additional adjustments or nozzle changes will be required to provide proper coverage, all necessary changes or adjustments shall be made prior to any planting. The entire system shall be operating properly before any planting operations commence. Automatic control valves are to be adjusted so that the irrigation heads operate at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer. 3.14 TESTING AND OBSERVATION A. Do not allow or cause any Work of this Section to be covered up or enclosed until it has been observed, tested, and approved by the Landscape Architect. B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the Work is ready for testing. C. When the sprinkler system is completed, the Contractor shall perform a coverage test of each system in its entirety to determine if the water coverage for the planted areas is complete and adequate in the presence of the Landscape Architect. D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all Work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the Plans, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the Drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Landscape Architect. This test shall be approved by the Landscape Architect and accomplished prior to starting any planting. E. Final inspection will not commence without Record Drawings as prepared by the Contractor. 3.15 INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall provide safe access at all times for the Landscape Architect to visit and inspect any part of the Work. B. Where requirements specified require Work to be tested by the Contractor, it shall not be covered over until approved by the Landscape Architect. C. Should any Work be covered without testing or approval, if so ordered by Landscape Architect or Owner, it shall be uncovered at the Contractor's expense. D. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum: 1. System and Equipment layout. 2. Pressure test of irrigation main line (4 hours at 125 PSI or 120% of static water pressure, which ever is greater). 3. Coverage test of irrigation system. 4. Final inspection prior to start of maintenance period. 5. Final acceptance. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space IRRIGATION 32 84 00 - 14 E. Site observations and testing will not commence without the Record Drawings as prepared by the Contractor. Record Drawings must be complete and up to date for each site visit. F. Work which fails testing and is not approved shall be re-tested by the Contractor. Hourly rates and expenses of the Landscape Architect and Owner for re-inspection or retesting shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. 3.16 COMPLETION A. At the time of the pre-maintenance period inspection, the Landscape Architect will inspect the irrigation system and, if it is not approved, will prepare a list of items to be completed by the Contractor. At the time of the post-maintenance period or final inspection the Work, will be reinspected and final approval will be in writing by the Landscape Architect. B. The Landscape Architect shall have final authority on all portions of the Work of this Section. C. Any settling of trenches which may occur during the one -year period following acceptance shall be repaired to the Owner's satisfaction by the Contractor without any additional expense to the Owner. Repairs shall include complete restoration of all damage to planting, paving, or other improvements of any kind as a result of the defect and repair Work. 3.17 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. After system has been completed, Contractor shall instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system and shall furnish a complete set of operating and maintenance instructions. 3.18 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL A. Cleaning-up shall be performed as each portion of Work of this Section progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be broomed, and any damage sustained on the Work of others shall be repaired to original conditions. B. Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bury no such waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris will not be permitted. The Con tractor shall remove and dispose of rubbish and debris generated by its Work and workmen at frequent intervals or when ordered to do so by the Landscape Architect or Owner. C. At the time of completion, the entire site shall be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish and debris which shall be disposed of off-site in a legal disposal area. END OF SECTION 32 84 00 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-1 SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Division 01 applies to this Section. Provide Landscape Planting as indicated and specified, complete. B. Work Included: 1. Removal of Existing Plant Material. 2. Protection of Existing Plant Material. 3. Quarry Stone selection. 4. Landscape Finish Grading and Installation of Imported Soil. 5. Gravel Drainage Beds and Soil Separator. 6. Movable Plant Containers (Pots). 7. Installation of Landscape Headers. 8. Installation of Root Barriers. 9. Planting. 10. Plant Supports. 11. Installation of Erosion Control Fabric. 12. Weed and Pest Control. 13. Plant Establishment. C. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing - Section 31 1000. 2. Earthwork - Section 31 2000. 3. Stabilized Decomposed Granite Surfacing– Section 32 1540. 4. Irrigation - Section 32 8400. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The Work shall conform to the reference standards and specifications of the issues listed below (refer to Section 014200 if issue date is not listed), to requirements indicated and specified, to required fire ratings, and to the pertaining regulatory requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The specifications, codes, publications, and standards listed, but referred to hereafter by the basic designation only, form a Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-2 part of this Section to the extent referenced herein: B. Plants: 1. American Standard For Nursery Stock, Published by the American Association of Nurserymen. 2. Standards For Nursery Stock, Published by the California Association of Nurserymen. 3. State of California Department for Food and Agriculture. C. Soils: 1. Standards for Chemical and Mechanical Analysis published by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 2. ASTM 1556 – compacted bulk densities. 3. ASTM D2434 – permeability D. Soil Separator / Engineering Cloth: 1. Standard Test Method for Measuring the Soil-Geotextile System Clogging Potential by the Gradient Ratio. ASTM D5101-96. E. General construction: 1. Standard specifications for Public Works Construction 2. ASTM D448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Intent of This Section: Intent is to describe and specify the materials and methods required for the installation of the landscaping free from defects in materials and workmanship. Notwithstanding the fact that this Section may be deficient in setting forth a complete detailed description of the Work to be performed, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to perform Work of this Section to the Architect’s satisfaction. The Contractor is responsible for all Work specified in this Section unless spe cifically noted as the responsibility of another. In event of discrepancies between Drawings and this Section, notify Architect for clarification. B. General Requirements: The Contractor shall give adequate and required legal notices to utility organizations and governing authorities prior to commencing this Work. Coordinate operations with other trades, utility firms, and other affected public departments to assure continuity of access and service in conformance with applicable requirements of these organizations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01340 for procedures B. Product Data and Certificates: Submit the following: 1. Fertilizers, Mulch, Soil Amendments and all products: Manufacturer's/supplier's printed data Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-3 identifying product names and chemical properties. 2. Herbicide and Insecticide Certificates: Types, chemical properties. C. Laboratory Reports: 1. Imported Topsoil: In addition to the initial sample submittals, furnish reports from licensed Agronomy Laboratory which provide accurate analytical descriptions of the physical and chemical properties relating to agricultural suitability of “grab” samples taken at the place of procurement and samples taken after placement. Furnish three copies of each report. 2. Existing Soils: Submit copies (number and location per plan) of reports of analytical testing by Soil and Plant Laboratory, Inc., (714) 282-8777, which produces accurate descriptions of mechanical and chemical properties relat ing to agricultural suitability, as well as recommendations for soil preparation, and planting. 3. Sand: Submit three copies of reports from a licensed Agronomy Laboratory which produces accurate descriptions of mechanical and chemical properties relating to agricultural suitability. D. Material Samples: Architect and Landscape Architect reserve the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to requirements specified at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Architect. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense. Cost of testing of materials not meeting requirements shall be paid by the Contractor. Obtain the Architect's instructions and submit the following for approval: 1. Imported Top Soil AND Artificial Soil: See Article 1.5. 2. Soil Separator Cloth: Three 1 sq. ft. samples of each type. 3. Erosion Control Fabric: Three 1 sq. ft. samples. 4. Landscape Headers: three (3) 16” long samples with stake bands and three (3) stakes, if applicable. 5. Mulch, Peat, Compost: Three one-quart samples with respective certified analyses. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractor Qualifications: Work of this Section shall be contracted to an experienced landscape contractor holding a State of California C-27 certificate. B. Workers: Contractor and Subcontractor shall employ at all times during the course of the project an adequate force of supervisors, technicians, skilled and unskilled laborers necessary to perform the Work of this Section in a competent manner comparable to the best standards of the local landscape industry. C. Superintendence: Contractor shall sustain on the site during standard hours of operation for the duration of the project an English speaking landscape superintendent capable of taking responsibility and direction. Superintendent and assistants shall be satisfactory to the Owner and Landscape Architect. The Superintendent shall not be changed during the course of the project except with consent of the Owner or unless the landscape superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Landscape Subcontractor and ceases to be in its employ. The landscape superintendent shall represent the Landscape Subcontractor in its absence and all directions given by it shall be as binding as if given by the Subcontractor. D. Source Quality Control and Availability: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-4 1. Plant Material to be Provided by Landscape Subcontractor: a. Within (30) days after notice to proceed the Contractor shall order and obtain written confirmation from nursery suppliers that all plant material is available for the project. Contractor shall be responsible for all material listed on the Drawings unless indicated as "supplied by the Owner". Submit documentation to the Architect within 30 days after award of Subcontract that all plant material is available. Contractor shall be responsible for all material listed on the Drawings. Any and all substitutions of plant material must be requested of the Landscape Architect in writing for approval at least 30 days prior to anticipated date of planting. b. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval of Landscape Architect at place of growth or upon delivery for conformance to specifications. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the Work. Inspection and tagging of plant material by the Landscape Architect is for design intent only and does not constitute the Landscape Architect’s approval of the plant materials in regards to their health and vigor. Health and vigor of the plant material is the sole responsibility of the Landscape Subcontractor. Landscape Architect will inspect 24” box and larger sized plant materials for aesthetic character and appropriate size prior to delivery to site. Submit written request for inspection of plant material at place of growth to the Landscape Architect; the request shall state place of growth, type, size, and quantity of plants to be inspected. The Landscape Architect may refuse to perform inspection at this time if, in the Landscape Architect's judgment, sufficient quantities of plants are not available for inspection. c. Materials found to be objectionable and those not conforming to requirements specified will be rejected and not delivered to the site. All plant materials shall be approved by the Landscape Architect for quality, size, and variety prior to installation . Such approval shall not impair the right of observation and rejection during the progress of the Work for size and condition of root ball, latent defects, diseases, or injuries. Landscape Architect may reject an entire lot of a plant type presented for observation based upon finding defective plants in a representative random sampling. All rejected plant material shall be removed from the site within two working days. d. Special attention shall be given to the native, aquatic, and specialized plant availability. Schedule acquisition of Native Plants to accommodate Fall season planting. Planting of natives shall commence not earlier than November 1st. Contractor shall procure plants that are to be trained and rare plants within 30 days of the Contract date. Contractor shall coordinate contract grow operations with Nurseries if necessary. 2. Imported Top Soil: Supplied by a vendor approved by Landscape Architect. Topsoil shall be blended prior to delivery to site. 3. Imported Artificial Soil: Artificial soil shall be pre-mixed (blended) by supplier prior to delivery to site. Supplier shall mix soil in an environment free of toxins, noxious weed seed, or any other material that would render the mix unsuitable for healthy plant growth. See sub-section 1.04 above for submittals. E. Testing: 1. Testing of Over-structure Planters and Planting Areas for Waterproof Integrity: Landscape Subcontractor shall verify with the General Contractor that over-structure planters and planting areas have been thoroughly waterproofed and tested prior to the installation of gravel and soil within them. Upon approval of the waterproof integrity of the over-structure planters and planting Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-5 areas, the Landscape Subcontractor is responsible for protecting all waterproofing and maintaining protection boards during the Work of this Section. 2. Testing and Analysis of Imported Soils Prior to Delivery: a. Soils Laboratory: The Contractor shall retain the services of a licensed Agronomy Laboratory for the following purposes: i. Individual testing bulk soil mix components and amendments including analyses and reports. ii. Preparation and analysis of laboratory control mixes for imported soils. iii. Recommendations for soil preparation (Soil Management Report), fertilizers and soil amendments. iv. Testing of Import Topsoil Mixes and Artificial Soils to assure conformance to control mixes prior to delivery and during installation. b. Lab Costs: Costs of all sampling, testing, analyses, Laboratory reports, and the recommendations for soil types, soil preparation, amending, and geo-textiles shall be paid for by the Landscape Subcontractor as a part of the Work of this Section. c. Sampling and Testing of Sand, Fir Bark, Peat Moss, and Compost: The Landscape Subcontractor shall furnish three one-quart samples of each of these components. One sample shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect, two samples shall be submitted to the horticultural soil laboratory (one to be held as a control), and one sample shall be retained by the Landscape Subcontractor. Tests shall be made of each component for the following: i. Sand – particle size distribution (USDA sand classification), pH, soluble salts (Ece), sodium absorption ratio (SAR) and soluble Boron. ii. 0 – 1/4” Fir Bark – particle size distribution, pH, Ece, organic percentage, total nitrogen, bulk density, and dilute acid extractable iron. iii. Coarse Grind Nursery Peat Moss - same tests as above plus available nitrogen (NO3– N and NH4 – N, Potassium, phosphorous and soluble sodium. iv. Compost – Same as (3) above. 3. Preparation and Testing of Control Mixes: Prior to delivery, shall be as follows: a. The Landscape Subcontractor shall submit the soil mix components to Soil and Plant Laboratory, Inc. as required by the laboratory to test soil mixes, recommend adjustments and create control mixes. Contractor shall provide Lab with a copy of the planting plans for their reference. b. Imported Soil Mixes: Size of soil samples to be taken and provided shall be as required by testing laboratory. The Horticultural Soil Testing Laboratory shall prepare control mixes for import soil. Soil components, ratios, and installation methods shall be determined by the Horticultural Laboratory and testing of the soil mixes shall include, but not limited to the following: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-6 i. Soil fertility and agricultural suitability, particle size distribution (using USDA sand classification), organic percentage by weight, pH, Ece, SAR, available major and minor nutrients, saturated hydraulic conductivity (USGA), soluble Boron, and water retention (USGA, 1993), available nitrogen (NO3–N and NH4–N, Potassium c. For each imported soil mix type, one grab sample shall be taken at the blending site for: i. each 100 CY for quantities over 100 CY. ii. each 25 CY for quantities between 50 and 100 CY. iii. each 10 CY for quantities between 10 CY and 50 CY. 4. Sand: Submit three copies of reports from Horticultural Laboratory which furnishes accurate analysis: a. Size of samples as required by testing laboratory. b. Chemical Analysis: Agricultural suitability, including sodium, boron, pH, and electrical conductivity. c. Mechanical Analysis: Particle sizes according to USDA classification. Sieve analysis is required. Show percentage by weight of material passing through sieves. 5. Existing Soils: Follow recommendations of the Soil Management Report,or if none existis, s ubmit three copies of test reports from licensed Agronomy Laboratory for samples of existing soils, taken from on-site locations at a minimum of three locations to be determined by Landscape Architect in the field. Provide recommendations for soil preparation and amending, composition of back-fill soil for plant pits, and fertilization program. a. Once rough grading has been completed, and prior to amending of the soil, soil samples shall be collected from planting areas. The contractor shall collect the samples under the direction of the landscape architect. b. Soil samples should be collected from a depth of 8 to 10 inches. Size of soil sample as required by testing laboratory. Do not include the top inch of soil in the sample. Each sample shall be a homogenous mix of a minimum of three sub samples collected from throughout the designated area. The tools used for digging shall be clean and not rusty. Avoid sampling when the soil is too wet. c. The soil samples shall be delivered or mailed to Lab. The samples shall be tested for agricultural suitability to determine soil nutrient values, textural classification and hazards including structural based on chemistry. d. Soil report recommendations shall take precedence over any amendment and fertilizer rates specified in bid documents. The results of the soil testing shall be made available for review by the landscape architect for any modifications to the specified soil preparation prior to the beginning of such work. e. Chemical Analysis: Soil fertility and agricultural suitability, including nitrate nitrogen, ammonia nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium boron, pH, and electrical conductivity. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-7 f. Mechanical Analysis: Particle sizes according to the USDA classification. Include the percentage by weight of organic content. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver fertilizers and chemical additives to the site in the original unopened containers bearing manufacturer’s guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade mark, and conformance to State law. Handling of herbicide and pesticide materials shall be done under the direct supervision of a State of California Licensed Pest Control Advisor or Applicator. 2. The Contractor shall furnish Owner with copies of receipts for all soil amendments specified in or amended by the required soils reports specified. Receipts shall be submittal per Section 013300. 3. Transport and deliver gravel, topsoil, bulk amendments, and mulches, in a manner that complies to all applicable laws and regulations. Take precautions to minimize dust and spills. 4. Deliver all plants provided by Landscape Subcontractor with legible identification labels. a. At least one plant of a type shall be labeled. b. Label trees 15 gallon size and smaller with one label for each 5 trees of a type. Label 15 gallon and smaller shrubs with one label for each 15 shrubs of a type. Label ground cover plants, 1 gallon size, with one label for each 15 and flat materials with one label for each 5 flats of a type. c. State correct plant name and size indicated on plant list. d. Use durable waterproof labels with a water-resistant ink which will remain legible for at least 60 days. 5. The Landscape Subcontractor shall notify the Landscape Architect seven days in advance of delivery of all plant materials and shall submit an itemized list of the plants in each delivery. 6. Protect plant material during delivery to prevent any damage to the plants or their root balls. All plants shall be protected from wind by ventilated tarps during delivery to prevent any desiccation of leaves. a. Specialty hanging plants, staked or trellised plants, or plants with atypical form shall be arranged, supported, and secured during delivery to prevent damage. Keep plant root balls moist during delivery. b. Root balls shall be padded, braced, and supported during delivery to prevent cracking or shifting in their containers. B. Responsibility For Damage To Plants Incurred During Delivery: 1. Plants provided by the Landscape Subcontractor: The Landscape Subcontractor is responsible for assuring that all plants provided by it are received undamaged. C Trucking and Off-Loading: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-8 1. Landscape Subcontractor shall coordinate with Public Agencies and the General Contractor to assure proper and timely passage of all trucking of materials furnished under this Section. 2. Landscape Subcontractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary trucking permits associated with the Work of this Section. 3. Landscape Subcontractor shall obtain trucks of proper size and configuration to adequately deliver material and to negotiate the conditions at the project site without disruption of the project schedule or the Work of others. 4. Off-Loading - Landscape Subcontractor shall be responsible for and provide adequate labor and equipment for the safe off-loading of all material to be provided by it during the course of the project. D. Storage: 1. Coordinate plant and materials storage requirements with the General Contractor and the Owner prior to delivery. Make provisions for an adequate supply of water for plant maintenance at storage site at all times. 2. Security of stored materials - provide for fenced or enclosed lockable storage areas for all materials and equipment necessary for the Work. 3. Storage of Herbicides and Pesticides and other toxic materials shall be in a well ventilated protected and lockable enclosure adhering to guidelines for storage of such materials set by the State of California. No toxic or harmful material shall be lef t unlocked or unprotected after work hours. 4. Store all plant material in shade and protect from weather, animals, the Work of other trades, and any acts of vandalism and theft. Plants shall be stored and secured upright in an orderly manner with adequate space around each to allow for inspection. 5. Specialty hanging plants or plants with atypical form, including plants furnished by Owner, shall be arranged, supported and secured during storage to prevent damage. Provide supports and racks to allow such plants to maintain intended form. Maintain and protect all plant material on project site in a healthy, vigorous condition. 6. Aquatic plants stored over 1 day prior to planting shall be kept continually in a moist condition and in containers appropriate for each plant type. 7. Ground covers and annual color plants in flats, and 4" pots, shall be kept moist on a clean bed free of deleterious materials. 8. General Contractor shall be responsible to safeguard all the non-project trees and shrubs stored in the proximity. 9. Storage areas for artificial soil, imported topsoil, soil amendments, mulch, and other bulk material shall be protected from wind and water erosion and contamination. 10. Stockpiling of Bulk Materials - stockpiling on-site shall be restricted to no more that the needs of a week. Stockpiles of soil, organic amendments, and mulch shall be no higher than 6-feet to prevent anaerobic conditions within the piles. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-9 11. Fertilizers and humectants shall be kept dry. 12. Bulbs shall be kept cool and dry. 13. Store all plants to be furnished by Owner, including plants to be relocated on site, in a safe place on site. Secure plants to prevent vandalism and falling over. E. Handling: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in the handling of all plant materials. Plant materials that are damaged in any way shall be discarded and replaced immediately with undamaged plant materials of like kind at the Contractor’s expense. 1. Specialty plants, such as hanging plants, shall be handled with extraordinary care to prevent any damage. 2. Handling of herbicide and pesticide materials shall be done under the direct supervision of a State of California Licensed Pest Control Advisor or Applicator. 3. Handling of soils -- all soils shall be handled in a manner to prevent contamination, minimize settling or separation of ingredients, and to prevent the production of dust. 4. The General Contractor is responsible for any contamination or damage incurred to the property of the Owner or others from the handling of materials on or for the project. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Conflicts: If conflicts arise between the actual site dimensions of areas or lengths and the Drawings, the Landscape Subcontractor shall immediately after discovery stop work in the area and notify Landscape Architect for resolution. The failure to make such conflicts known to the Landscape Architect prior to work in the area will make the Landscape Subcontractor responsible for the correction of any deficiencies. B. Conditions: Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accord with locally accepted practice. Perform actual planting only when the area of work is not affected by construction conditions which would jeopardize proper installation. C. Dewatering and Temporary Erosion Control: Coordinate with the General Contractor for the dewatering of work areas and the installation of temporary erosion control devices or materials to protect both temporary and permanent slopes within the area of work from excess rain or project water runoff. D. Prevention of Dust: At all times during the course of the Work of this Section take all necessary measures to minimize generation and dispersion of dust including dampening, covering, barricading, etc. E. Removal of Excess Soil: Coordinate with the General Contractor for the disposition of excess soil generated by the Work of this Section. F. Field Verification: Landscape Subcontractor shall verify all dimensions and site conditions before starting Work of this Section. The Owner and the Landscape Architect shall be notified of any discrepancies found prior to the start of this Work in the area of discrepancy. 1.8 SCHEDULING/COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with General Contractor, and Landscape Architect for scheduling of deliveries and installation. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-10 B. Landscape Subcontractor shall be responsible for any coordination with the Landscape Architect, Owner, Laboratories, Suppliers, Vendors, General Contractor and any Subcontractor, required to perform the Work of this Section. All planting required to occur prior to installation of footings, sub -slabs, and/or finish paving shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. C. See installation requirements herein for specific installation scheduling requirements. 1.9 PROTECTION AND SAFETY A. Provide and be responsible for protection of the Work of this Section until completion and final acceptance of the project. Repair or replace all damaged or defective Work to original condition at no additional cost. Repair or replacement costs shall include all costs and repair costs of Work or materials necessary to access the damage. B. Provide such padding, planking, wrapping, impervious sheeting, and other protective materials to prevent contamination, damage, or injury during the course of the project. Any contamination, damage, or injury shall be reported immediately to the Owner and General Contractor. C. Install temporary cordons, warning signs, and/or other protection devices around landscape work whether finished or not to assure the work and materials be free from damage or contamination. D. Protection of Existing Utilities -- coordinate with General Contractor and the Owner to determine the location of existing utilities with the work area prior to any excavating. Any existing utilities found shall be marked and protected from the Work of this Section. E. Provide signage indicating use of Reclaimed water for irrigation per Guidelines in plans. F. Protection and Maintenance of Existing Plant Material: 1. Landscape Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining devices to protect existing shrubs and trees within the project site from damage during the course of the project. 2. Within 10 days of notice to proceed, Landscape Subcontractor shall submit to the General Contractor, Landscape Architect, and Owner a written plant protection plan describing the materials and methods to be used. 3. All existing plants which are to remain shall be fenced with 4’-0” high, bright orange colored, warning barrier fence made of high density polyethylene with minimum breaking load of 750 pounds per foot, such as manufactured by Services and Materials Brand . Yellow 3” x 4 mil barrier tape, with the word “CAUTION” printed in black repeated along the length, shall be securely affixed continuously around the top of the fencing and continuously at 3’-0” from grade. Posts shall be hand driven to a stable vertical condition and located so the line of the fencing is no less that 5’-0” from the base of the plant with a maximum of 6’-0” o.c. spacing. 4. Fenced areas may include one or more plants. Coordinate the location of all fencing with the General Contractor. 5. No fence or cordon installed under this Section shall be removed for any reason without notifying the Landscape Architect. 6. Do not trim, prune, or root prune any existing trees without the permission of the City of Azusa Arborist. All excavations under the drip line of existing trees shall be done by hand. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-11 6. Any damage to existing plant material will be the responsibility of the General Contractor; however, if such damage could have been prevented by protection required above, the Landscape Subcontractor shall be liable for an appropriate portion of the cost of the loss. Cost evaluation of damage and/or loss of trees or other plant material will b e set by the tree evaluation schedule set by the State of California. 7. Take all necessary precautionary measures for the safety of employees and others on the site or those performing any of the Work of this Section. Comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and Local safety laws to prevent accidents or injury on or about the premises where the Work is being performed. 8. Protect and guard all excavations and other work against danger to life, limb, and property in conformance with all applicable Federal, State, County and City codes, laws, or regulations. 1.10 LOCATIONS AND WORKMANSHIP OBSERVATIONS A. The Landscape Architect will observe the state of the Work of this Section at critical stages of the Work. B. At completion of gravel drainage beds prior to installation of soil separators or soil Landscape Subcontractor shall endeavor to complete all drainage beds and make ready for observation in no more than one field trips by the Landscape Architect. C. At completion of the Finish Grading and Soil Preparation, the Landscape Architect will observe the landscape finish grading, soil preparation, and installation prior to installation of seed, sod, or plants. 1. During this observation the Landscape Architect or the appointed Agronomist will review areas where the Landscape Subcontractor is to take samples for analysis of the prepared and imported soil to assure its conformance to the specified requirements and control mixes. 2. Notification of soil preparation approval or disapproval will be given the General Contractor within five working days after the observation visit. 3. Notification of approval is notification to proceed with seeding, sodding, and plant installation. 4. Notification of disapproval requires the Landscape Subcontractor to correct deficiencies in the topsoil and/or the soil amending and/or preparation to render it to conform with the specified requirements. Corrections shall be made prior to seeding, sod ding, or planting. Notify the Landscape Architect in writing when the deficiencies have been corrected in the form of a copy of a soil analysis report prepared by the Horticultural Soil Laboratory. 5. Submittal of all amendment receipts for soil preparation shall be submitted by the contractor prior to approval. D. Landscape Header/Edging Locations: 1. Landscape Subcontractor shall lay out the line of the headers for observation and approval by the Landscape Architect prior to installation. The lay out line shall be indicated by a white chalk or gypsum stripe approximately 1-1/2” wide applied in an even continuous line with red wire stake flags placed at 8 feet o.c. along entire lengths. Straight lines must be laid out using stringline to provide a straight line for chalking. 2. After installation, Landscape Subcontractor shall make minor adjustments in the header line as directed by Landscape Architect on site with no additional cost to the Owner. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-12 3. Location marker stakes, flags, and lines shall be maintained until headers have been installed. E. Locations for Erosion Control Fabric: 1. The Landscape Subcontractor shall lay out the line of the edges of erosion control netting for observation and approval by the Landscape Architect prior to installation. The lay out line shall be indicated by a white chalk or gypsum stripe approximately 1-1/2” wide applied in an even continuous line with yellow wire stake flags placed at corners and at 12 foot o.c. spacing along the entire line lengths. 2. After installation, Landscape Subcontractor shall make minor adjustments in the borders as directed by Landscape Architect on site with no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Location marker stakes, flags, and lines shall be maintained until netting has been installed. F. Plant Material Locations: The Landscape Architect will observe and approve the placement of container plants prior to installation. Location marker stakes, flags, and lines shall be maintained until plants have been installed. 1. Placement of Trees: Two meetings shall be held between the General Contractor, Landscape Subcontractor and Landscape Architect. The first meeting shall be a review of all tree locations prior to irrigation head layout; 3 foot long wooden lath surveyor stakes with tree types and sizes and, when applicable, designated tree numbers lettered in indelible ink upon the upper portion, shall be set driven at each tree location prior to this meeting by the contractor. A second meeting shall take place for final observation and approval of locations prior to planting. 2. Shrubs: The Landscape Subcontractor shall place colored flags at each shrub location prior to review by the Landscape Architect. 3. Ground Cover Beds: Landscape Subcontractor shall lay out the line of division between ground cover types for observation and approval by the Landscape Architect prior to planting. The lay out line shall be indicated by a white chalk or gypsum stripe approximately 1 -1/2” wide applied in an even continuous line with red wire stake flags placed at 8 foot o.c. along entire lengths. G. Vine Anchor Locations: 1. The Landscape Architect will review the locations of vine tie anchors prior to installation. 2. The General Contractor shall place marks on the walls indicating the locations of all vine tie anchors. Nominal 3/4” round marks shall be made by a white or yellow color non-staining chalk. Locations shall be measured from dimensions shown on Drawings or described herein. 3. Thoroughly and completely clean off all location marks from walls immediately after anchors have been installed. Do not mar or discolor or cause a future discoloration the wall or floor surface while cleaning. H. Observation of Work Prior to Commencement of 90-Day Plant Establishment (Maintenance) Period: 1. The Landscape Architect will observe the Work of this Section at the completion of all the construction and installation work. 2. The Landscape Subcontractor shall furnish a written request for observation to the Landscape Architect and the Owner 7 days prior to the anticipated inspection date. A specific date and time Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-13 will be set by mutual agreement. 3. All deficiencies found by this observation shall be corrected and the corrections approved by the Landscape Architect at another Observation Trip. Costs incurred by Landscape Architect for any additional Observation trips necessitated by incomplete cor rections shall be reimbursed by the Landscape Subcontractor. 4. The 90-Day Plant Establishment (Maintenance) Period shall not commence until written notice of approval from the Landscape Architect of both landscape work and irrigation system has been received. The official date of commencement will be that as indicated in the notice. I. Periodic Observation of Maintenance Work During the Plant Establishment (Maintenance) Period: 1. Landscape Architect will visit the site to observe the condition of the Work after 30 calendar days and after 60 calendar days from the commencement of the plant establishment period. 2. All corrections itemized as deficient in initial maintenance observation visit (30 day) shall have been corrected by the second (60 day) visit. 3. All deficiencies observed in the Work of this Section shall be noted and reported to Contractor. Contractor shall correct all deficiencies prior to anticipated date of termination of the 90 Day Plant Establishment (Maintenance) Period. J. Observation Trip at End of 90 Day Plant Establishment (Maintenance) Period: 1. The Landscape Subcontractor shall address a written request to the Landscape Architect and the Owner at least seven days prior to the anticipated termination (completion) date of the 90 Day Plant Establishment (Maintenance) Period. This observation will be made only after the written approval of the Landscape Architect is received. 2. The Landscape Subcontractor shall accompany the Landscape Architect and Owner during the observation of the Work. 3. The Landscape Architect will furnish a written notice of any deficiencies needing correction found during this observation visit. 4. The Landscape Subcontractor shall maintain the Work of this Section until receiving the written notice of approval of completion of the Work. 1.11 WARRANTIES A. Conform to the following requirements. B. Required: Contractor and Landscape Subcontractor shall furnish to the Owner written warranties covering the following: 1. For plant material provided under this Section, warranty that all plant material be healthy, true to name and variety. Further, warranty against improper handling, improper installation, and improper protection and maintenance during plant establishment period for the time periods commencing from the end of the plant establishment period as follows: a. One year for all plant material. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-14 2. For plant material furnished by Owner: Warranty such plant materials as above, including Owner furnished plants, installed by the Landscape Subcontractor under the Work of this Section. 3. Warranties for plant material are not required to cover damage or destruction by acts of God, neglect by the Owner, abuse by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond the Contractor's and/or Landscape Subcontractor's control. This shall not preclude Contractor from taking all reasonable precautions for protecting the Work and materials of the project from damage. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Products Specified by Name: When a material is specified herein by manufacturer’s or supplier’s name and designated by number, type, or model thereof, the specification shall be deemed for the purpose of facilitating a descriptions of the material(s) to be used. If such specification is noted as “no substitution", only the material or product specified shall be used. If, because of unavailability, the Contractor finds it necessary to seek a substitute for special material, Contractor shall submit a pro posed substitution as specified in Section 012500. Accompanying this request shall be a list of suppliers contacted with respective documentation of unavailability. B. Manufactured and/or Processed Items or Materials: Materials shall be installed in accordance with the methods, techniques, and specifications as set forth by each representative manufacturer. All pertinent descriptive and/or instructive literature issued by any of the manufacturers shall be a part of thi s Section. 2.2 IMPORT TOPSOIL FOR LANDSCAPE FINISH GRADING A. Topsoil: A sandy loam soil for general ornamental plantings. 1. Silt plus clay content of screened import soil shall not exceed 25% by weight with a minimum 95% passing the 2.0 millimeter sieve. 2. The sodium adsorption ratio (SAR) shall not exceed 6. 3. The electrical conductivity (ECe) of the saturation extract of this soil shall not exceed 3.0 dS/m per centimeter at 25 degrees centigrade. 4. The boron content shall be no greater than 1 part per million as measured in saturation extract. 5. In order to ensure conformance, samples of the import soil shall be submitted to testing laboratory for analysis prior to, and following, backfilling. 2.3 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS A. #16 Sand: 1. Mechanical analysis of sand shall be as follows: Sieve Size Percent Passing by weight #4 95-100 Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-15 #8 80-100 #16 50-85 #30 25-60 #50 5-30 #100 0-10 #200 0-5 2. Soluble Salts – Maximum 3.0 dS/m at 25EC as determined in saturation extract. 3. Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) - maximum 6.0 at 25EC as determined in saturation extract. 4. Boron -maximum 1 ppm at 25EC as determined in saturation extract. B. Peat Moss: “Lakeland Growers” Nursery Coarse Grind Canadian Spagnum Peat Moss as supplied by Lakeland Peat Moss Ltd., Box 9, Site 9, RR8 Edmonton, Alberta, Canada T5L4H8 (1-800) 661–4151 supplied compressed in 4 cu. ft. unopened bags with Suppliers Name an d contents specified thereon. C. 0-1/4” Fir Bark. 1. Particle Size Distribution: Sieve Size Percent Passing by weight 9.51mm (3/8”) 100 6.35mm (1/4”) 95-100 500 micron No. 3 35 50-30 0-30 2. Soluble Salts – Maximum 3.0 dS /m at 25C as determined in saturation extract. 3. pH - shall be in the range 4.5 - 6.5 as determined in saturation paste. 4. Organic Content - Minimum 92% based on dry weight and determined by ash method. 5. Iron Content - Minimum 0.08% dilute acid soluble Fe on dry weight basis. D. Compost: as supplied by Whittier Fertilizer: 1. Particle Size Distribution: Sieve Size Percent Passing by weight 1/2” Screen 100% 2. Salinity - Maximum 12.0 dS/m at 25EC as determined in saturation extract. 3. Sodium - Maximum 40 meq/1 at 25EC as determined in saturation extract. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-16 E. Peat Moss: “Lakeland Growers” Nursery Coarse Grind Canadian Spagnum Peat Moss as supplied by Lakeland Peat Moss Ltd., Box 9, Site 9, RR8 Edmonton, Alberta, Canada T5L4H8 (1-800) 661–4151 supplied compressed in 4 cu. ft. unopened bags with Suppliers Name and contents specified thereon. F. Dolomite Lime: Kaiser AG–25. G. Nitroform: Manufactured by Nor-Am, NPK 38–0–0, 27% water insoluble nitrogen. H. Soil Conditioner: Tri-C Humate as supplied by TRI-C Enterprises, L.L.C. (1-800) 927-3311. Per Random Sample of Material/Not Guaranteed Analysis: Organic Matter 40.00% Carbon 40.00% Nitrogen 0.05% Phosphoric Acid 0.07% Potash 0.13% Sulfur 0.21% Magnesium 0.18% Calcium 0.32% pH 4.0 Soluble Salts 1.8 Humic Acids (from Leonardite) 40% I. Soil Conditioner B: “Worm Rich” 50% compost, 50% worm castings as supplied by Weed Free Organics, Simi Valley, CA, (805) 520-1150, (800) 854-1244 J. Agricultural Gypsum: Standard commercial brand containing 98% minimum calcium sulfate.. K Soil Sulphur: Agricultural grade sulfur containing 99% minimum sulfur (expressed as elemental). L. Iron Sulfate: 20% Iron (expressed as metallic iron), derived from ferric and ferrous sulfate, 10% sulphur (expressed as elemental). M. Calcium Carbonate: 95% lime as derived from oyster shells. N. Mycorrhizal Inoculant: Tri-C Myco Tabs, as supplied by Tri-C organics (800) 927.3311. 2.4 GRAVEL FOR PLANTER DRAINAGE ROCK A. Washed rounded granitic pea gravel ranging in size from 1/8" to 3/8" diameter, medium to dark gray in color. Submit for Landscape Architect's approval prior to ordering. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-17 2.5 MULCH A. As specified on plan, or Shall be “Fine Mulch” as supplied by Cal Blend Soils, Inc. 1270 Arrow Hwy. #A, Irwindale, CA 91706, 1-800-425-3631. Plan notes take precedence. 2.6 FERTILIZERS A. Planting fertilizer: Pelleted or granular form shall consist of the following percents by weight and shall be mixed by commercial fertilizer suppler: 6% Nitrogen 20% phosphoric acid 20% potash B. Planting Tablets: Shall be Agriform 20-10-5 plus minerals, 21 gram planting tablets distributed by GRACE/SIERRA, (408) 263-8080, applied per manufacturer’s instructions. Tablets shall be the slow- release type with potential acidity of not more than 5% by weight, containin g the following percentages of nutrients by weight: 20% Nitrogen 10% phosphoric acid 5% potash C. Sulfate of Potash: Resolution 0-0-50. D. Single Super-Phosphate: Commercial product containing 18-20% available Phosphoric Pentoxide. 2.7 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC A. Fabric: Shall be 100% Coco Blanket. B. Manufacturer: American Fiber Roll (866) 446-2594 C. Staples for Securing Mat: Steel “U” shaped 8 gauge 8” long x 1” gap, 36” o.c.. 2.8 STEEL HEADERS A. Per plan. 2.9 PLANT MATERIAL: A. General: 1. Plants, other than field dug plants furnished by Owner shall be in accordance with the California State Department of Agriculture regulation for nursery inspections, rules and rating. 2. Plant material shall be true to the botanical and common name and variety as specified in the Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-18 "Annotated Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon and Washington" as published by University of California School of Agriculture or in "The New Royal Horticultural Society Dictionary of Gardening" published by The Stocton Press of the R oyal Horticultural Society. 3. All plants shall have a normal habit of growth unless otherwise specified and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous and free of insect infestations, plant diseases, sunscalds, fresh abrasions of the bark, excessive abrasions, or other objectionable disfigurements. All tree trunks shall be sturdy and of sufficient strength to support top growth without stakes or other supports. 4. Root systems -- plants shall have well "hardened", vigorous, and fibrous root systems which are not root or pot bound. In the event of disagreement as to condition of root system, the root conditions of the plants furnished by the Contractor in contain ers will be determined by removal of earth from the roots of not less than two plants of each species or variety. Where container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than two plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Architect reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will be provided at the expense of the Contractor. B. Plant Size: 1. Plant sizes, unless otherwise specified on the Plant List, shall correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock. Minimum acceptable size of all plants measured before pruning with the branches in normal position, shall conform with the measurements, if any, specified on the Drawings in the list of plants to be furnished. 2. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Architect, but the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, the ball of earth or spread of roots for each plant will be increased proportionately. C. Ground Cover and Annual Color Plants: 1. Plants shall be well-rooted seedlings or divisions with full top growth, free of pests and free of diseases. Plants shall have been grown in flats or pony-packs and remain in the containers until planting. For plants grown in flats, the roots shall be well knitted into the growing medium but not so tight as to prevent plants from easily being separated without overt breakage. Top growth of plants shall be well formed and strong. Overgrown, lank, floppy, or weak plants will not be acceptable. 2. Annual color plants shall be verified as to type with the Landscape Architect prior to ordering. 3. Ground cover and annual color plants shall not be allowed to dry out during the project course. D. Specially Formed Plants: 1. Hanging or Draping Plants: Certain plants will be required to develop procumbent or draping branches. Such plants will be required to be contract grown in the supplying nursery in an elevated situation where branches can develop to hang well below the bottom of the containers. 2. Espaliered Plants: Certain plants will be required to develop on either nursery standard espalier trellises or specially designed trellises. See Plant List and Drawings for specific forms. 3. Offset Vines: Certain vines or vining plants will be required to be trained such that their centers in Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-19 the nursery containers will be offset from the center of the container and the main stems tied to vertical supports affixed to one side of the container. See Drawing details for specific requirements. 4. Plants Requiring Special Trimming and Pruning: To achieve desired forms as shown on the Drawings, certain plants will require special trimming and pruning in the nursery. Landscape Architect will direct and observe the trimming to assure conformance to design intent. E. Non-Conforming Plants: All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and immediately removed from the site of the Work and replaced with new plants at the Contrac tor’s expense. Plants shall be of the species, variety, size and conditions specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. F. Plant Substitution: 1. Under no conditions will there be any substitutions of plants or sizes listed on the Drawings except with the express consent of the Owner and Landscape Architect, and in accordance with Section 016000. 2. Requests for substitutions shall be in writing and submitted to the Landscape Architect no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed for the Work of this Section is accepted. G. Acclimatizing Nursery Grown and Collected Stock: Certain plants as indicated in remarks column of the plant list shall be acclimatized prior to planting by being: 1. grown under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of project or; 2. transported to a holding location with climatic conditions similar to those of the project site. H. Pruning Prior to Delivery: At no time shall trees or plant materials be pruned, trimmed, or topped prior to delivery unless specifically directed by the Landscape Architect. 2.10 SOD A. Per plan. Tiles shall be 2 ft. x 4 ft. Growth media thickness 1/2” ± 1/8”. Broken rolls and torn or uneven ends will not be acceptable. Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Shipping Temperature: Sod shall be refrigerated to the following temperatures prior to shipment; 50 F in Winter, 40F in Summer. Sod shall be kept moist but not wet at all times prior to shipment. Stacked sod or root sides shall be protected from direct sunlight but shall not be covered with any impervious material such as plastic sheeting. Sod shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. 2.11 GUYING AND STAKING MATERIALS A. Wood Tree Stakes: Lodge pole pine, full treated with Copper Napthenate Wood Preservative in strict conformance with Federal Spec. TT-W-572 Type 1 composition B, 2" (min. nominal size) diameter by 10’ long, no split stakes. Wood stakes are not to be used on over-structure planters. B. Stake Ties: 36” flexible vinyl, GPMIrrigation.com, 866 582 9684. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-20 C. Guys 1. Wire Cable Sizes for galvanized wire cable are as follows: a. For trees less than 3” caliber: 1/16” (7 x7) white vinyl coated. b. For trees 3” to less than 6” caliber: 1/8” (7 x 7) white vinyl coated. c. For trees 6” to less than 10” caliber: 3/16” (7 x 7) white vinyl coated aircraft cable. d. For trees with 10” caliber or larger: 5/16” (7x9). 2. Hose Covering: Hose shall be black colored, 5 ply reinforced rubber with a minimum diameter of 1/2” and maximum diameter of 3/4” and of lengths adequate to fully cushion the guys against the tree. 3. Flagging or Signals: 1/2” dia. white PVC pipe covering bottom 1/2 of length of the guy wire. 4. Turnbuckles: Galvanized or dip-painted eye to eye type with the welded eyes of size commensurate with cable strength. 5. Cable Clamps: Galvanized, size as commensurate with cable diameter and strength. 6. Guy Anchors: a. On-Grade Applications: Guy anchors shall be aluminum anchors as manufactured by Duckbill Inc., telephone (800) 325-5360. All connections for the Duckbill Aluminum earth system anchors are to be factory assembled. Note; follow manufacturer’s recommendations for installation of anchors with hand drive rods and power equipment drive rods (where applicable). Sizes are as follows by tree caliber: • Less than 3” Model No. 40 — Db1 • 3” to less than 6” Model No. 68 — Db1 • 6” to less than 10” Model No. 88 — Db1 • 10” or larger Model No. 138 — Dba b. Deadmen Anchors: For certain on-grade and over-structure application, anchors shall be precast concrete, Model No. 4 LC or Model No. 6LC, as manufactured by Duracrete Concrete Products, and supplied by Pierre’s Concrete Products, telephone (818) 443-0970. Locations of trees of designated Models are indicated on drawings construction heart redwood 2” x 4” x 24” long. c. Eye Bolt Anchors: Certain tree guys must be anchored to eye bolts fastened to structure. Guying anchors shall be Hilti HIT C–100 anchor system with 3/4” x 6” stainless steel eye bolt, manufactured by Hilti, Tulsa, OK, (918) 252-6000. ½” stainless steel drop forged eye bolts to fit the SRM-12 anchor, provided by Industrial Bolt and Supply, Ventura, CA, (805) 644-1794. Anchors to receive fasteners shall be ½” stainless steel drop -in anchor, Model #SRM-12, supplied by Industrial Bolt and Supply, Ventura, CA, (805) 644-1794. 2.12 VINE FASTENERS AND TIES Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-21 A. Fasteners in Concrete or Masonry: 1. Masonry anchors to receive fasteners -- Keystone double expansion shield for 1/2” machine bolts. 3/8” stainless steel drop-in anchor, Model #SRM-12 38, supplied by Industrial Bolt and Supply, Ventura, CA, (805) 644-1794 2. Fasteners or Tie Bolt – custom made 1/2" 3/8” dia. stainless steel machine thread bolts with flattened shank heads and drilled with 5/16” holes to receive 1/8” 3/16” threaded cable terminals or turnbuckles per drawing details. Manufactured by Industria l Bolt and Supply, Ventura, CA, (805) 644-1794 B. Fasteners in Wood: Zinc plated screw eyes; O.A. Length 2-5/8”; I.D. eye - 23/32”; Shank length 1-15/32; wire gauge – 2 (0.2625”). Screw eyes shall be fuse coated with paint of a color to be determined by the Landscape Architect prior to placing of order. C. C.B. Vine Support Cables: Cables and assembly parts: shall be the “Cable Rail” System manufactured by Feeney Wire Rope, Inc., Oakland, CA, (800) 888-2418, Internet: www.cablerail.com. 1. Cable 1/8”, 1x19, type 316 stainless steel with clear PVC coating. Cable shall be free of kinks, knots, abrasions and frays. 2. Stainless steel turnbuckles, type G SleekLine Cap End Model 125-SCETB. 3. Threaded terminals: Model 125-TTRH with stainless steel cap nuts. D. Vine Ties: 1. For Bougainvillea, Rosa, and Vitis -- support ties shall be pliable 16 gauge green plastic coated steel wire. 2. For Hedera, Honeysuckle, and other vines -- support ties shall be 8 gauge x 1/2” green vinyl plastic tie tape. 3. Temporary vine ties to secure vines such as Hedera varieties until vines self-cling (adhere) shall be clear plastic “Stik-N-Ty” garden wall ties as manufactured by Dexol. 2.13 SOIL SEPARATOR A. Geotextile Soil Separator types shall be Mirafi 700xg woven filter fabric manufactured by Mirafi Nicolon Group, Norcross, GA (404) 447-6272. 2.14 WATER A. Domestic, potable water from sources on site. 2.15 WEED AND FUNGUS CONTROL MATERIAL A. No material or method shall negatively affect the landscape planting, new or existing, and must conform to Federal, State, and Local regulations. B. Contact herbicide and pre-emergent herbicide shall be as recommended by a licensed Pest Control Advisor and applied by a licensed Pest Control Applicator. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-22 2.16 INSECTICIDES A. As required, provide insecticides and or beneficial insects as recommended by a Licensed Pest Control Advisor to deter harmful insects. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 DISPOSITION OF EXISTING PLANT MATERIAL A. Prior to any grading work of the Grading Section and this Section, the Landscape Subcontractor shall meet with the Landscape Architect and the Contractor on site to identify and flag those existing plants which are to be removed and those which are to remain and be protected. Determination of clearing and grubbing responsibilities covered in other Sections and this Section will occur during this meeting. B. Plants which are to be removed shall be removed completely including the majority of the root mass. Certain plants which are prone to re-sprouting, such as Eucalyptus, Acacia, or Rhus species, shall be chemically treated to kill the roots. All chemical root treatment shall be done under the direction of a Licensed Pest Control Advisor or Certified Arborist. Extreme caution shall be taken to prevent the systemic transfer of herbicides through root connections or soil migration to any adjacent plant that is to remain. In no case shall an herbicide be used which will remain actively residual in the soil for a period longer than 48 hours. C. Salvage Plants - any plant not designated to remain or claimed by the Owner may be salvaged by the Landscape Subcontractor if the salvage operation does not damage adjacent plants or hinder in any way the progress of the Work. Prior to salvage, the Land scape Subcontractor shall verify approval with the Owner. D. All plants designated to be removed shall be removed completely and disposed of off site in a legal manner. 3.2 LANDSCAPE FINISH GRADING A. After rough and finish grading, and clearing and grubbing work, has been done under this or another Section, import and install specified topsoil types to achieve final grades as shown on Civil and Landscape Drawings and specified herein. Prior to filling, the existing soil surfaces shall be scarified thoroughly and moistened. Fill shall be installed in moist 6" lifts and compacted to 85% of maximum density under the observation of the Soils Engineer. Mix imported soil with existing soil at interface to provide a blended, transitional condition. B. Clearing: Prior to finish grading all deleterious material, contaminated soil, trash, rocks over 1" inch diameter, roots, sticks, and other objectionable material shall be removed and disposed of in a legal manner. C. Drainage: Finish grade to ensure proper drainage of the site as determined by Landscape Architect OR Civil Engineer and generally as follows: 1. Planting beds shall be graded so that the final grades after compaction and settling will be 1” below bottom of waterproofing membrane flashing where applicable or 2" below adjacent paved areas, sidewalks, curbs, valve boxes, headers, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., or as indicated on the Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-23 Drawings. 2. Lawn areas shall be graded so that the final grades will be 1 -1/2" below bottom of waterproofing membrane flashing where applicable or 1” below the adjacent paved areas, sidewalks, valve boxes, headers, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc. or as indicated on the Drawings. The minimum slope to drain lawn areas shall be 2% or about 1/4” vertical to 12” horizontal. 3. Surface drainage shall be directed away from all building foundations. 4. Surfaces shall be configured to minimize concentration of water other than at drain receptacles. 5. All erosion channels and scars shall be immediately eliminated during installation phase of the Work by filling with topsoil in the manner described above. 6. All planting beds shall be brought to a smooth even surface conforming to established grades after full settlement has occurred. 3.3 SOIL PREPARATION FOR ON GRADE PLANTING AREAS A. Clearing: Prior to conditioning, the top 2" of all planter areas shall be free of stones, stumps, or other deleterious matter 1” in diameter or larger, and shall be free from all wire, plaster, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to tilling, planting, or maintenance. B. Areas to receive Import Soil: Prior to the installation of import soil, the existing soil shall be tilled to a depth of 9” and lightly re-compacted. C. Conditioning: After finished grades have been established, soil shall be conditioned and fertilized in the following manner. Amendments shall be uniformly spread and cultivated thoroughly by means of mechanical tiller into the top 6" of soil. Areas within the dripline of existing trees are excluded from soil preparation of soil preparations. The following rates of application are to be used for bid basis only. Specific soil preparation recommendations will be made by the soil testing Laboratory. The contractor shall be required to follow these recommendations. Application Rates (per 1,000 square feet): 1. Nitrogen stabilized organic amendment - 2 cu. yds. 2. “Worm Rich” - 1 cu yd. 3. Tri C humate - 60 lbs. 4. Agricultural Gypsum - 100 lbs. 5. Soil sulfur - 20 lbs. D. Tree Roots: In conditions where existing tree roots might be damaged by rototilling operations notify the Landscape Architect for instructions. E. Preparation of Soil for Sodded Lawn Areas: 1. Prepare soil per above with the following exceptions: 2. Amendments shall be as follows: Application Rates (per 1,000 square feet): a. Nitrogen stabilized organic amendment – 3 cu. yds. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-24 b. “Worm Rich” –1 cu. yd. c. Tri-C 6-2-4 - 70 lbs. d. Agricultural Gypsum - 100 lbs. e. Soil sulfur - 20 lbs. 3. After rototilling soil surface shall be lightly rolled with water weighted smooth steel roller and uniformly scarified with stiff tined rake to 1" depth. Area shall be kept moist until installation of sod commences. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS SOIL A. Dispose of any unacceptable or excess soil and debris at an off site location in a legal manner. 3.5 INSPECTIONS PRIOR TO PLANTING: A. Obtain Owner's certification that final grades to (plus or minus) 0.10' have been established prior to commencing planting operations. Provide for inclusion of all amendments, settling, etc. The Landscape Subcontractor shall be responsible for shaping planting areas as indicated on Drawings or as directed by Architect. B. Inspect trees, shrubs and ground covers for injury, insect infestation, disease, and improper pruning. C. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected or plants replaced. 3.6 PLANTING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted practice, as approved by the Landscape Architect. 2. Only as many plants as can be planted and watered on that same day shall be spotted or distributed in any particular area. 3. Containers shall be opened and plants shall be removed in such a manner that the ball of earth surrounding the roots is not broken and they shall be planted and watered as herein specified immediately after removal from the containers. Containers shall not be opened prior to placing the plants in the planting area. 4. Following irrigation system installation, immediate work shall include erosion control measures, hydroseeding, and planting of non-native species. Planting of native species shall occur no earlier than November 1st. No native plant species shall be planted in spring or summer seasons. B. Pre-plant Weed Control for On Grade Planting Areas: 1. If live perennial weeds exist on site at the start of work, apply an appropriate herbicide, as recommended and approved by a State licensed pest control advisor. Herbicide selected must not cause damage to existing trees on site. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-25 2. Clear and remove existing weeds by mowing or grubbing off all plant parts at least 1/4” below the surface of the soil over all areas to be planted. 3. After irrigation system is operational, apply water for five to ten days as needed, to achieve weed germination. Apply herbicide as recommended by advisor and wait for advisor’s recommended period before planting. 4. Maintain site weed free until final acceptance by the Owner utilizing mechanical and chemical treatment. C. Layout of Major Plantings: 1. Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on the ground by the Landscape Subcontractor before any plant pits are dug. All such locations shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. 2. If underground construction or utility line is encountered in the excavation of pits, other locations for planting may be selected by the Landscape Architect. 3. Layout shall be accomplished with flagged grade stakes indicating plant names and specified container size on each stake. 4. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ascertain location and depth of all underground utilities with civic agencies having jurisdiction. 5. In over structure planters it is the Landscape Subcontractor's responsibility to have knowledge of soil depths and utility locations prior to planting to avoid any damage to the soil sep arator, waterproofing membranes, and utilities from plant pit excavations. D. Planting Of Trees And Shrubs On Grade: 1. Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and stacking of all acceptable topsoil encountered within the areas to be excavated for trenches, tree holes, plant pits and planting beds. Root pruning and excavation with the drip line of any existing tree to remain shall be do per Temporary Tree and Plant Protection Specifications 01 5639. 2. Excess soil generated from the planting holes and not used as backfill or in establishing the final grades shall be removed from the site or disposed of as directed. 3. Protect all areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other material to the planting site. 4. When planting in fractured rock areas, excavate plant pits with an electric shovel, fill all such plant pits with water and test for drainage. Those pits showing drainage problems after 12 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Archit ect. Excavated rock shall be removed from site. 5. Fullest growth portion of plants shall be faced towards the prevailing winds at site. 6. Set plants in center of pits with the exception of the following: a. Vine plants to be trained to walls -- plant toward the wall side of the pit allowing for adequate backfill soil to encompass the rootball. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-26 b. Plants intended to cascade over the sides of walls or planters shall be planted toward the side of the plant pit closest to the lip, allowing for adequate backfill soil to encompass the rootball. 7. Landscape Subcontractor shall protect architectural walls and surfaces from damage during plant container handling. Use heavy blankets, tarps or plywood over hardscape areas. Any damage to surfaces caused by Landscape Subcontractor shall be repaired i n an acceptable manner at no cost to the Owner. 8. Depth of pits for 36" size box trees (and larger) shall match depth of root balls. (See detail on Drawings for site specific exceptions) Depth of pits for 24" size box trees shall allow for 8" of amended soil under root balls. Depth of pits for 15 gal lon (and under) size plants shall be 1-1/2 times the depth of root balls. 9. All excavated pits shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces and shall be of a diameter that is twice that of shrub/tree root balls. 10. Set plants plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped firmly around root ball. 11. Amended soil backfill shall consist of: a. 6 parts by volume on-site soil. b. 4 parts by volume organic soil amendment. c. 1 lb. Iron sulfate per cu. yd. of backfill mix. 12. Fertilizer Tablets: a. Tablets shall be included with amended backfill as specified below: One tablet per one gallon container Two tablets per five gallon container Three tablets per 15 gallon container Four tablets per 24" box Five tablets per 30" box Six tablets per 36" box Seven tablets per 42" box Eight tablets per 48" box and larger box sizes. b. Planting tablets shall be set with each plant on the top of the root ball while the plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified by the Landscape Architect. 13. Mycrrorhyzal Inoculant packets: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-27 a. Packets shall be included with amended backfill as specified below: One packet per one gallon container One packet per five gallon container Two packets per 15 gallon container Three packets per 24" box Four packets per 30" box Five packets per 36" box Six packets per 42" box and larger box sizes. 14. All plants which settle deeper than the surrounding grade shall be raised to the correct level. Tops of root balls shall be set level with existing grade; allow for settlement caused by water percolation. 15. Container removal: a. Tap plastic container to loosen rootball from sides and slide plant into pit immediately without damaging rootball. b. Remove bottoms of plant boxes before planting. c. Remove sides of plant boxes without damage to root balls after positioning the trees and partially backfilling. d. Bougainvillea vines shall not be removed from growing containers; instead, the plastic or metal bottom of containers shall be carefully cut away using as much care as possible not to disturb root balls. Plant with remaining portion of containers directly into ground. e. When removing specialty plants from containers, use precautions not to damage plants. Trellises shall be carefully removed at the same time as the plant and kept in the proper attitude with the plant until the plant is permanently secured. Hanging or cascading plants shall be removed from containers only when containers are well off the ground. Branches of hanging, cascading plants shall not be bent when removed and shall be kept off the ground until planted. 16. Basins - after backfilling, an earthen basin shall be constructed around each plant. Each basin shall be of a depth sufficient to hold at least 2" of water. Remove bas ins in turf areas after initial watering and settling in of backfill. 17. Pruning - shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches or as directed by the Landscape Architect. Pruning may not be done prior to the delivery of plants. Cuts over 3/4" in diameter shall be painted with standard tree paint. 18. Staking or guying of all trees shall be completed immediately after planting per installation details. All stakes shall be installed plumb. E. Planting of Ground Covers: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-28 1. Flat grown ground cover plant materials shall remain in flats till planting. 2. Ground covers shall be planted in straight rows and evenly spaced, unless otherwise indicated, spacing as indicated on Drawings. Triangular spacing shall be used unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 3. Immediately sprinkle 10 foot square planted sections to saturate roots. F. Planting of Trees and Shrubs in Over Structure Planters and Planting Areas: 1. Plants to be planted in over-structure planters where planter width and/or spacing between plants is less than 2 times the width of the container size may be planted in over -structure planters as follows: a. Set the plants vertically on compacted level sub -grade and at an elevation such that after settling and compaction of soil mix the tops of root balls shall be ½” higher than adjacent finish grade. b. Remove the nursery container. c. Backfill the artificial soil mix around the root balls keeping them vertical and secure. Install around the root balls artificial soil in 6” lifts and moisten and compact between lifts to attain a minimum 85% compaction. Install fertilizer tablets and mycorrhizal inoculant packets around root balls during backfilling at rates stated in paragraph 3.12.D.13 above. d. Keep the rootballs moist at all times during the planting operation. 2. Plants to be planted in over-structure planters where planter width and/or spacing between plants is more than 2 times the width of the container size may be planted in over -structure planters as follows: a. After artificial soil mix has been installed, excavate for plant pits. Width of pits may be 1.5 times the root ball and the depth a maximum of the depth of the root ball and a minimum such that, anticipating settling, the tops of root balls shall be ½” higher than adjacent finish grade. b. Remove the nursery container. c. Position the root ball in a secure manner such that the main stems are vertical and at the proper elevation. d. Backfill the artificial soil mix around the root balls keeping them vertical and secure. Install artificial soil in 6” lifts and moisten and compact between lifts to attain a minimum compaction of 85%. Install fertilizer tablets and mycorrhizal Inoculant packets around the root balls during backfilling at the rates indicated in paragraph 3.12.D.13 above. G. Sod Planting: 1. Preparing Soil: Remove rocks, weeds, debris from area to be sodded. Rototill soil as noted earlier herein. 2. Grading and Rolling: Carefully smooth all surfaces to be sodded. Roll area to expose soil depressions or surface irregularities. Smooth and regrade. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-29 3. Fertilizing: Spread 16-20-0 resolution turf fertilizer onto the soil evenly at the rate of one pound per 100 square feet of lawn area. Rake in lightly and smooth surface. Sprinkle soil surface to avoid laying sod on bone dry soil. 4. Laying Sod: Length of sod tiles shall be generally perpendicular to the contours. Lay first strip of sod slabs along a straight line. Abut joints tightly; do not overlap edges. On second strip, stagger end-joints much as in laying brick in running bond pattern. Cut edges with a sharp knife to fit curves, indentations, or sprinkler heads. 5. Watering: Do not lay entire lawn to sod before watering. When a conveniently large area has been laid, water lightly to prevent drying. 6. Rolling Sod: After laying all sod, roll lightly to eliminate irregularities and to form good contact between sod and soil. Avoid a very heavy roller or excessive initial watering which may cause roller marks. 7. Irrigation: Water thoroughly the completed lawn surface. Soil shall be moistened at least 8" deep. Repeat sprinkling at regular intervals to keep sod moist at all times until rooted. After turf is established, decrease frequency and increase amount of water per app lication as necessary. 8. Replacement: Replace all dead or dying sod with equal material as directed by the Landscape Architect. H. Mulch Cover: 1. All ground cover, perennial, and annual beds or visibly bare ground shall be dressed with 3" layer of 'Mulch' as specified on plan. Lightly tamp down with a hand tamper a 24” band at the edge of the mulch area. 3.7 TREE SUPPORTS A. Staking: Stake all trees not to be guyed or of the following species: Arbutus unedo; Laurus nobilis, natural; Cotinus coggygria, Olea europea. Unless otherwise indicated in the plant list “remarks” column, all stakes are to be lodgepole wood. 1. Drive stakes vertically at the windward edge of the tree trunk at the edge of the root ball and into the earth at least 12” into the native soil at the bottom of the plant pit. Wood stakes with splits, cracks, or disfigurements are not acceptable and s hall be removed. 2. Tree Ties: Fasten tree to upper end of stake at a point 8” from the top of the stake using rubber hose or cinch ties to protect the trunk as per details. Secure ties to each stake with galvanized 10 lb nails. Any protruding nail point shall be bent over to be flush with side of stake. Hose shall form a loop around the main trunks or stem(s) of the tree. The loop shall be of an inside diameter 2 x the diameter of the trunk to allow movement without binding. B. Guying: 1. Connect guys to main trunk(s) per drawing details at a position at least one half the height of the tree and where the trunk is strong enough to support the canopy against wind forces. 2. Wrap guy and hose protection around tree trunk to form a loop twice the diameter of the trunk at the point of connection taking care not to pinch or girdle. Secure cable with cable clamps. Remove excess cable ends (tags) and adjust connections to prevent chafing of bark. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-30 3. Guys shall be placed to give equal support in all directions. Use from three (3) to five (5) guys per tree. For multi-trunk trees cross guys such that individual trunks lean away from guys and guy anchors. Where necessary to protect an individual tree against wind damage, use more than one guy and/or cross connect limbs with cables and hoses. 4. To each guy install specified signal. 5. Use one (1) turnbuckle per cable. Tighten guys to a condition which will allow movement in the tree trunk(s) without allowing the tree to overturn or the rootball to move. 6. Guying trees planted in Natural Grade on slopes of 3 horiz. to 1 vert. or steeper: a. Drive 3/4" galvanized pipe stakes of sufficient lengths into grade to a depth and at angles that will provide secure anchorage for guys. b. Locate 4 stakes 90 apart. Down hill stakes shall be located at a minimum vertical angle of 30 off the trunk of the tree from the guy position above grade at base of tree. Uphill stakes shall be at a minimum vertical angle of 45 from horizontal. c. Remove sharp burrs and file edges of pipe tops. Provide orange plastic safety caps over pipe tops to prevent injuries. d. Guy cable shall be looped 3 times around the pipe stake and secured with cable clamps. 7. Guying trees planted in Natural Grade on slopes less than 3 horiz. to 1 vert: a. Install specified “Duckbill” aluminum guy anchors in secure earth to depths recommended by manufacturer. Wherever possible position the anchors so the guy will form an angle 45  away from the trunk. In no case shall the angle be less than 60. b. Orient “Duckbill” anchors and connect guys as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 8. Guying trees planted in artificial soil mix: a. Where soil depths exceed 30”, bury 2” x 4” x 24” redwood “deadmen” horizontal and perpendicular to guy at a depth of 24”. b. Where soil depths are between 24” and 30”, bury 2” x 4” x 30” redwood “deadmen” horizontal and perpendicular to guy at a depth of 20”. c. Where soil depths are between 12” and 24”, bury 2” x 4” x 36” redwood “deadmen” horizontal and perpendicular to guy at a depth of 12” taking caution to prevent damage to soil separator. 9. Installing eye-bolt anchors and guying trees in confined planters: a. Install eye-bolt anchors at locations shown on plans and where widths of planters are not sufficient to allow the proper installation of “deadmen” or other buried anchors install split shield anchors in concrete containment walls or curbs. b. Locate anchors 2” below soil level in planters without waterproofing. c. In planters with waterproofing, locate anchors per Architects reglet detail 1-1/2" above Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-31 waterproof flashing recess in a manner to prevent spalling of concrete from edges or jeopardizing the structural integrity of the concrete. d. Mark proposed anchor locations with chalk for approval by Landscape Architect prior to drilling pilot holes. e. After approval drill pilot holes in a clean neat manner without spalling concrete. Drill in a direction in line with the anticipated line of the guy. f. Screw eye-bolts securely to anchors. g. Attach cable thimbles to eyes, loop cables around thimbles and secure with cable ties. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF VINE ANCHORS A. Cable Wire and Bolt System: Where indicated on plant list and/or Drawings, install cable and eye -bolt vine tying grid. A grid shall be installed for every vine planted on grade at the base of a wall whether specifically detailed or not. See Drawings for specific anchor locations and placement. 1. Anchors shall be positioned vertically or horizontally relative to those adjacent. 2. See paragraph 1.12.F. for marking anchor locations for approvals. 3. Screw bolts securely into anchors with holes aligned to cable orientation. 4. Thread terminals through holes in bolt standoffs and thread cable through the bolt standoffs and terminate with cap end turnbuckles. Pass wire through sleeve, loop wire through tiebolt and back through sleeve, and back through sleeve once more. Crimp sleeve. Follow this procedure when connecting wire to turnbuckles or tie bolts. 5. Tighten cable with turnbuckles to attain a taut but not strained condition for each system. B. Wire and Eye-Bolt System: Where indicated on plant list and/or Drawings, install stainless steel wire and eye-bolt vine tying grid. A grid shall be installed for every vine planted on grade at the base of a wall whether specifically detailed or not. See Drawings for specific anchor locations and placement. 1. Anchors shall be positioned vertically or horizontally relative to those adjacent. 2. See paragraph 1.12.F. for marking anchor locations for approvals. 3. Screw bolts securely into anchors with holes aligned to cable orientation. 4. Double loop wire through holes in bolt standoffs and twist tag end around standing wire thread at least 5 times in a neat manner and trim off ends no more that 1/16” from standing wire. Insert wire continuously through stand-off eyes to end of row or column and through the eye of attached turnbuckle, cinch tight, and twist securely as above. Tighten turnbuckles to a taut but not strained condition. C. C.B.Eye Screw System for Wood Trellis: Where indicated on plant list and/or Drawings, install eye screw and cable system to support vines. 1. Mark locations for eye-screws along wood beams with chalk for approval prior to drilling pilot holes. Eye-screws shall be set on string line at 24” o.c. for 12 feet along each beam. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-32 2. After receiving approval for eye-screw standoff locations, drill 3/16” (pilot holes for 1/4” shank eye-bolts). Holes shall be perpendicular to the face of beam. 3. Align eyes perpendicular with beam lengths. 4. Install 1/8”, 1x19, 316 stainless steel cables from cap end turnbuckles through each eye -screw stand off and end with threaded terminals with stainless steel cap nuts. 3.9 CLEAN UP AND DISPOSAL A. Keep all work areas, storage areas, and areas adjacent which have been affected by the work free and clear of all debris and trash cause by the Work of this Section or by the personnel of the Landscape Subcontractor. B. During and upon completion of work described herein specified, remove all debris, unused materials and equipment related to the work of this Section, and leave work in a clean acceptable condition at the end of each day. 3.10 FINAL CLEANUP A. After all planting operations have been completed remove all trash, excess soil, empty liners and rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the soil surface or lawn caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly condi tion throughout the site. The Contractor shall remove trash from site each Friday before leaving site; sweep clean all walkways and paved areas. All pedestrian areas shall be left in a safe condition during non-work hours. 3.11 MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO PLANT ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD A. All plantings shall be maintained in a healthy and vigorous condition from the moment of installation either by regular hand watering or irrigation system, until approval for commencement of the 90 day maintenance period occurs. B. Landscape Architect will establish beginning of the 90 day maintenance period from an observation at a point of substantial or total completion of planting in distinct and separate areas as determined by the Landscape Architect and based on progress of project construction schedule. 3.12 PLANT ESTABLISHMENT (MAINTENANCE) PERIOD A. Commencement of plant establishment (maintenance) period for areas of work of this Section shall begin immediately after the date stipulated in the written notice of approval and authorization to proceed from the Landscape Architect. The period will last for 90 days from the stipulated date or until such time the work is approved in writing by the Landscape Architect. B. The maintenance period may be extended beyond the 90 day period at the Owner’s request under a separate agreement. C. Landscape Subcontractor shall maintain all areas by diligent watering, weeding, cultivating, spraying, mulching, trimming, edging, pruning, and/or any other operations necessary to assure a healthy and viable landscape. D. Landscape Subcontractor shall immediately replace plant materials which, for any reason, die or are Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space PLANTING 32 9300-33 damaged while under its care. Replacement shall be made with plants as indicated or specified for the original planting. E. Damage to planting areas shall be repaired immediately; depressions caused by vehicles, foot traffic and equipment shall be filled with soil, leveled, and replanted. F. All planted areas shall be kept free of debris, and shall be cultivated and weeded at not more than 10 day intervals. At completion of maintenance period, all areas included in the contract shall be clean and free of debris and weeds; all plant materials shall be live, healthy and free of infestation. G. Apply Kellogg's 8-8-4 resolution fertilizer at the rate of 20 pounds per 1,000 square feet area to all container planted areas 40 days after the maintenance period is initiated. H. Any required application of pesticides or herbicides shall be conducted under the auspices of a California State licensed applicator in accordance with all governmental regulations. 3.13 OBSERVATIONS A. In all cases where observations are required, the Landscape Subcontractor shall notify the Landscape Architect and the Owner at least 7 working days in advance of the observation date. B. Observation Schedule: 1. At completion of landscape finish grading. 2. Upon delivery of plant material to site. 3. At time of spotting or locating plant materials 4. At the completion of all work specified in the drawing and specifications, prior to the start of the maintenance period. 5. At the completion of the maintenance period. C. Required: No site visit shall proceed without all items listed in previous Observations Report being either completed or resolved, unless such compliance has been waived by the Owner. Failure to accomplish the punch list tasks from previous visit or to prepare adequately for scheduled inspection shall make the Landscape Subcontractor responsible for reimbursing the Landscape Architect at its current billing rates per hour - plus transportation. No further inspections shall be scheduled until compensato ry charges have been paid and received. END OF SECTION Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 1 SECTION 32 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes drainage systems outside the building. Systems include the following: 1. Storm drainage. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide systems according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Reference Specification: Perform all work in accordance with applicable provisions of "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", latest edition. Unless otherwise noted, mention herein of section numbers refers to sections of the Reference Specification. Where Reference Specification refers to "Agency", substitute the word "Owner". Where Reference Specification refers to "Engineer", substitute the word "Architect". Where Reference Specification is in conflict with these Specifications, these Specifications shall govern. 2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in Reference Specifications do not apply to this Section. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Drainage Piping: System of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of storm drainage. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Non-pressure Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Product data for the following: 1. Pipe and fittings 2. Cleanouts and drains. C. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to storm drainage systems. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 2 B. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to storm drainage systems. Include standards of water and other utilities where appropriate. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of system components and are based on specific manufacturer types indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Section "Substitution Procedures." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle structures according to manufacturer's rigging instructions. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records and/or pothole as necessary to verify existing utility locations. Contact utility locating service for area where Project is located. B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services. 1. Notify Architect not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect's written permission. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate storm drainage system connections to utility company's storm drain. B. Coordinate storm drainage system connections to existing on-site storm drain. C. Coordinate with interior building drainage systems. D. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cleanouts and Drains: a. Josam Co. b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Div., Smith Industries, Inc. c. Wade Div., Tyler Corp. d. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation Div., Zurn Industries, Inc., 2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 3 A. Corrugated-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 760/A 760M, Type I, made from ASTM A 444/A 444M, zinc-coated steel sheet for banded joints. 1. Fittings: Fabricated to types indicated and according to same standards as pipe. 2. Connecting Bands: Standard couplings made for corrugated-steel pipe to form soiltight joints. 3. Protection: Pipe and coupling bands shall receive a bituminous coating in accordance with the Reference Specification, paragraph 207-11.5. 4. Linings: Bituminous or concrete linings shall be applied to the interior of the pipe as specified in paragraph 207-11.5.3 of the Reference Specification. 5. Slotted Pipe: Shall conform to paragraph 207-11.7 of the Reference Specification. B. Corrugated-Aluminum Pipe: ASTM B 745/B 745M, Type I, made from ASTM B 744/B 744M, aluminum- alloy sheet for banded joints. 1. Fittings: Fabricated to types indicated and according to same standards as pipe. 2. Connecting Bands: Standard couplings made for corrugated-aluminum pipe to form soiltight joints. 3. Flared End Sections: Shall be prefabricated galvanized steel. C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints. 1. Primer: ASTM F 656. 2. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. D. Vitrified Clay Piping for Gravity Flow: ASTM C 700 bell-and-spigot piping with ASTM C 425 compression joints. E. Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class as shown. Circular pipe with elliptical reinforcement shall have a readily visible line at least 12 inches long painted or otherwise applied on the inside and outside of the pipe at each end so that when the pipe is laid in the proper position, the line will be at the center of the top of the pipe. Fittings and specials shall conform to the same strength as the pipe. 1. Jointing Materials: Gaskets and pipe ends for rubber gasket joint shall conform to ASTM C 443. Gaskets shall be suitable for use with sewage. a. O-Ring Gasketed bell and spigot, all concrete, with bell cast integrally with pipe, ASTM C 443. b. Tongue and groove, cement mortared with mortar made of one part Type II Portland Cement to two parts sand. F. High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) for gravity flow, smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations. Gasketed integral bell–and-spigot joint meeting the requirements of ASTM F2736. Provide pipe per Paragraph 207-18 of the Reference specification. 2.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined, for non -pressure joints. 1. Sleeves for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. Sleeves for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 3. Sleeves for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert. B. Gasket-Type Pipe Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made to match outside diameter of smaller pipe and inside diameter or hub of adjoining larger pipe, for non -pressure joints. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 4 1. Gaskets for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. Gaskets for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 3. Gaskets for Dissimilar Pipes: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. 2.4 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Structures: Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water- cement ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400), deformed steel. 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. Description: Round, gray-iron housing with round, secured, scoriated, cast-iron cover as detailed on the Drawings. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside caulk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications: 1. Light Duty: In earth or grass, foot-traffic areas. 2. Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas. 3. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Extra Heavy Duty: In roads. B. After installation of cleanout cover and after installation of adjacent paving, if any, covers shall be sandblasted or wire brushed as necessary and painted with bituminous black paint, unless another color is required by the Architect. 2.6 DRAINS A. Area Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, round, gray-iron body with anchor flange and round, secured, cast- iron grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications: 1. Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas. 2. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. B. Cast-Iron Trench Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, 6-inch- (152-mm-) wide top surface, rectangular body with anchor flange or other anchoring device and rectangular, secured grate. Include units of total lengths indicated and number of bottom outlets with inside calk or spigot connections, of sizes indicated. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications: 1. Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas. 2. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. 3. Extra Heavy Duty: In roads. C. Steel Trench Drains: Fabricated from ASTM A 242/A 242M steel plate, to form rectangular body with uniform bottom slope of 2 percent down toward outlet, anchor flange, and grate. Include units of total lengths indicated, bottom outlet of size indicated, outlet strainer, and acid -resistant enamel coating on inside and outside surfaces. Include grate openings with total free area at le ast 2 times the outlet cross-sectional area and with the following features: Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 5 1. Plate Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. Plate Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Overall Width: 7-1/2 inches (190 mm). 4. Overall Width: 12-1/3 inches (313 mm). 5. Grate: 3-by-3/8-inch (76-by-9.5-mm) slots. 6. Grate: 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter openings. 7. Grate: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter openings. 8. Cover: Solid with diamond pattern, where indicated. 9. Weepholes in body and flashing clamping ring for units used with waterproof membrane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in the “Earth Moving” Section. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in the “Earth Moving” Section. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. 1. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.3 DRAINAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, except where watertight or silttight joints are indicated. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. C. Pipe Sizes 4 to 15 Inches (100 to 375 mm): ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. C. Pipe Sizes 4 to 15 Inches (100 to 375 mm): ASTM D 1248, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) bell-and- spigot drainage pipe; gasketed joints. D. Pipe Sizes 15 to 36 Inches (375 to 900 mm): Reinforced-concrete storm drain pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets and gasketed joints; or tongue-in-groove, mortared joints. 3.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where indicated and where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods. 1. Use the following pipe couplings for non-pressure applications: a. Straight-pattern, sleeve type to join piping, of same size, with small difference in outside diameters. b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes. c. Gasket type to join piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's outside diameter and larger piping's inside diameter permits installation. d. Internal-expansion type to join piping with same inside diameter. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 6 3.5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of underground drainage system piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Verify existing elevations prior to extensive excavating and notify Architect of any discrepancies. Contractor shall be liable for any premature construction which must be modified due to unforeseen existing conditions. C. Use fittings for branch connections. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install gravity-flow-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where slope is not indicated. F. Extend drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. G. Install drainage piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent (1:100) and 36-inch (1000-mm) minimum cover, except where otherwise indicated. 3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to the following. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join solvent-cement-joint pipe and fittings with solvent cement according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402. 2. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321. C. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA "Concrete Pipe Handbook." Use the following seals: 1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets or tongue-in-groove with mortar. D. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) drainage pipe: Install in accordance with ASTM D2321. E. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit both systems' materials and dimensions. 3.7 DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install type of drains in locations indicated. Embed drains in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. B. Fasten grates to drains if indicated. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 7 C. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and as indicated. 3.9 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from storm drain pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in pipe. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in a cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete paving with tops flush with surface of paving. 3.10 TAP CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished work conforms as nearly as practical to requirements specified for new work. B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6 -inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete. C. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 3.11 CLOSING ABANDONED DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping that is indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either of the following procedures: 1. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use the following procedure: 1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Backfill to grade according to the Earth Moving Section. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clean interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever work stops. 3. Flush piping between structures, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, to remove collected debris. Azusa City Library Outdoor Learning Space STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 32 41 00 - 8 B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of the Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or cylinder of a size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C. Test new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests, and their inspections by authorities having jurisdiction, with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate reports for each test. 5. Where authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests per UNI- B-6 and the following: a. Exception: Piping and soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924. 6. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 7. Replace leaking piping using new materials and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. END OF SECTION L000 AS NOTED COVER SHEET NOTES & INDEX TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK TO COORDINATE PROJECT 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR BECOMING FAMILIAR MATERIALS THAT ARE DAMAGED DURING CONSTRUCTION. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT (7) DAYS PRIOR OBSERVATION SCHEDULES. WITH ALL UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD UTILITIES, PIPES AND COST INCURRED DUE TO DAMAGE AND REPLACEMENT OF SAID 2. ALL WORK AND PORTIONS OF THE PROJECT SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL 3. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR REPLACEMENT OF ANY EXISTING STRUCTURES. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITIES. APPLICABLE CODES. DAMAGED OR DISTURBED IN ANY WAY. ALL MATERIAL TO BE REUSED OR ON PLAN AND AS AUTHORIZED IN THE FIELD BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. 4. REMOVE PLANT MATERIAL WITHIN PROJECT LIMITS OF DEMOLITION AS SHOWN METHOD OF DISPOSAL WITH OWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. SITE PER CODES AND REGULATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE 3. ALL MATERIALS SPECIFIED TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE DISPOSED OF OFF- THAT PURPOSE. ALL SALVAGED MATERIALS SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY SALVAGED SHALL BE STORED IN AN AREA DESIGNATED BY THE OWNER FOR 5. EXISTING TREES TO REMAIN SHALL BE PROTECTED IN PLACE. CONTACT CITY OF CONTRACTOR TO PAY ALL FEES ASSOCIATED WITH DISPOSAL. RESTORE TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION ANY EXISTING ITEMS THAT ARE IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE OR OF THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY SUCH CONDITIONS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OBJECTS EXIST THAT MAY NOT HAVE BEEN KNOWN DURING DESIGN. SHOWN WHEN IT IS OBVIOUS THAT UNKNOWN OBSTRUCTIONS AND/OR 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT WILLFULLY PROCEED WITH DEMOLITION AS NOTIFICATION. 2. GRADING & DRAINAGE NOTES 4. ALL PROPOSED GRADES ARE TO MEET AND BLEND IN WITH EXISTING 2. ALL WALKWAYS AND PAVED AREAS SHALL HAVE SMOOTH AND 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR 'ROUNDING OFF' ALL SHARP GRADING AT PROJECT LIMIT AND EXISTING PAVING. PRECISE ELEVATIONS RIDGES EXISTING ON SITE WHETHER OR NOT SUCH CONDITIONS ARE INDICATED ON PLANS TO BE VERIFIED IN FIELD TO AS-BUILT CONDITION. 3. ALL AREAS SHALL HAVE POSITIVE DRAINAGE. CONTINUOUS ELEVATION CHANGES. FINAL LOCATION OF ALL PLANT MATERIAL SHALL BE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL. 3. ALL PLANT MATERIAL SHALL BE APPROVED PER SPECIFICATIONS. FREE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATION TO WARRANTY ALL PLANT MUST BE INSPECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND CERTIFIED PEST AND DISEASE FREE OF PESTS OR PLANT DISEASES. PRE-SELECTED OR 'TAGGED' MATERIAL 2. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO FURNISH PLANT MATERIALS IN THE FIELD, AND SHALL CONTACT LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT IF CONFLICTS 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL UTILITY PLANS AND UTILITY LOCATIONS 5. ALL GRADING AND IRRIGATION SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO ELIMINATE WATER 4. PLANT QUANTITIES AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER STANDING OR SPRAYING ON STRUCTURES. ADJUST IRRIGATION AS REQUIRED. LEGEND QUANTITIES, IF THERE IS A CONFLICT. WATER SHALL DRAIN AWAY FROM STRUCTURES. WITH PLAN DRAWINGS EXIST. MATERIALS SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DURATION. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL MULCH PER PLANTING PLANS, THROUGH OUT ALL PLANTED AREAS VICINITY MAP CONSTRUCTION SET 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF PAVING, WALLS, ETC., 3. ALL CURVED WALLS AND WALKS SHALL HAVE SMOOTH, CONTINUOUS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SETTING UP OBSERVATION MEETINGS AND FIELD REVIEWS. MEETINGS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH CURVES AS INDICATED ON PLANS. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS. THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, IN ADVANCE PER THE SPECIFICATIONS. 4. OPERATIONS. ALL PIPING, CONDUIT, SLEEVES, ETC., SHALL BE SET IN SUB-CONTRACTORS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMPLISH ALL CONSTRUCTION 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY COORDINATION WITH PLACE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION ITEMS. CONTRACTORS SHALL NOTIFY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND CIVIL ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY, IF CONFLICTS ARISE OR IF BLENDING GRADES WILL CAUSE KEY PLAN | PHASING PLAN NTS HARDSCAPE PLANL101 HARDSCAPE LAYOUT PLANL102 L111 L201 IRRIGATION PLAN L210 IRRIGATION DETAILS SHEET INDEX INDICATED ON PLANS. 5. ALL PLANTER AREAS SHALL BE FINE GRADED AND SLOPED TO AREA DRAINS. DRAINAGE PROBLEMS. OF THE OWNER. FOR ALL NECESSARY REVISIONS DUE TO FAILURE TO GIVE SUCH UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ATTENTION IS DIRECTED TO THE POSSIBLE EXISTENCE OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES NOT KNOWN OR IN A LOCATION DIFFERERNT FROM THAT WHICH IS SHOWN ON THE PLANS OR IN THE SPECIAL PROVISIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE STEPS TO ASCERTAIN THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL UNDERGROUND FACILITES PRIOR TO DOING WORK THAT MAY DAMAGE SUCH FACILITIES OR INTERFERE WITH THEIR SERVICE. BEFORE EXCAVATING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BY CONTACTING UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT AT 1-(800)-422-4133. L301 PLANTING PLAN HARDSCAPE DETAILS 5.CONTROL JOINTS AND EXPANSION JOINTS NOT INDICATED IN PLANS SHALL BE INCLUDED PER TRADE PRACTICES. FINAL LOCATION TO BE VERIFIED WITH LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. L302 PLANTING PALETTE L310 PLANTING DETAILS PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L211 IRRIGATION DETAILS L112 HARDSCAPE DETAILS L113 DECK FRAMING PLAN L114 HARDSCAPE DETAILS - FENCE 1/16" = 1'-0" N D A L T O N A V E N U E EX I S T I N G P A R K I N G L115 HARDSCAPE DETAILS - FENCE L116 HARDSCAPE DETAILS - FENCE & CABLES L117 HARDSCAPE DETAILS - FOUNTAIN L110 HARDSCAPE DETAILS EXIT GATE w/ PANIC BAR ASSEMBLY - INTERIOR SIDE EXIT GATE w/ PANIC BAR ASSEMBLY - INTERIOR SIDE EROSION CONTROL PLANC5.0 LID PLANC6.0 SITE UTILITY PLANC4.0 FINISH GRADING PLANC3.0 DEMOLITION PLANC2.0 TITLE SHEET & DETAILSC1.0 TS2 TS1 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY - 2 OF 2 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY - 1 OF 2 L000 COVER SHEET, NOTES & INDEX GENERAL NOTES DEMOLITION NOTES CONSTRUCTION NOTES PLANTING & IRRIGATION NOTES DIG ALERT EXISTING EXIT ACCESS PATH OF TRAVEL ACCESS PATH OF TRAVEL VETERAN'S FREEDOM PARK AZUSA TO COORDINATE ROOT PRUNING PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT. 7. SEE IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR PARTS AND LABOR WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. L401 LIGHTING PLAN L410 LIGHTING DETAILS STRUCTURAL DETAILSS3.0 STRUCTURAL DECK FRAMING S2.1 STRUCTURAL PLANS2.0 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTESS0.1 SURVEY LANDSCAPE PLANS CIVIL PLANS STRUCTURAL PLANS ELECTRICAL PLANS ELECTRICAL NOTESE0.1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLANE1.0 ELECTRICAL PHOTOMETRICSE1.0P TITLE 24 COMPLIANCEEN-1 6 1 5 613 614 616 6 1 6 616 615 6 1 3 613 61 3 61 1 6 1 0 614 613 61 4 61 1 61 2 612 6156 1 6 61 6 61 5 61 4 614 61 3 615.5 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L101 3/16" =1'-0" HARDSCAPE PLAN LIBRARY BUILDING 7 2 1 19 15 LAWN EXISTING PARK EXISTING PARK PA PA 14 19 1613 5 5 LEGEND ITEMKEYNOTE DESCRIPTION DETAIL 1 A&B/L110 03 3523 CRAFTSMAN TAN W/ RECYCLED MIRROR | SAMPLE #23-023 | PER SHAW & SONS CONTACT: CAMRAN SAEB (909)261-9905 8 ITEMKEYNOTE DESCRIPTION WATER FEATURE GRAVEL3 B/L111 04 8220STONE WALL SANTA FE SELECT RUBBLE | SIZE: 4" - 9" | HAND SELECTED & PALLETIZED FROM: SOUTHWEST BOULDER & STONE | CONTACT: BRITTANY MARCIK (760)685-5224 6" CMU WALL | DRY STACK MORTAR BED BOULDERS FESTOON SUPPORT CABLES 14 15 9 16 17 18 A/L117 13 1200 -- ---- 20 -- 5 LOW WALL F/L110 32 1313 2 6 D/L110 32 1540 7 C/L110 31 3700, 31 3719 4 8 13 19 PEDESTRIAN GATE STEEL GATE W/ INSET WIRE PANEL | TRIM TO MATCH FENCE | EXITING PANIC HARDWARE AND DEADBOLT |POWDER-COAT FINISH T022-BR189 13 A L114 D L114 C L114 A L111 B L114 C L111 WOOD DECK WESTERN RED CEDAR DECK | 2" X 6" S4S ALL CLEAR HEARTWOOD | 1 8" EASED EDGES STAIN TBD A/L116 05 5000 7 18 SPEC. B L112 A L112 12 13 ENHANCED PAVING DECOMPOSED GRANITE CALIFORNIA GOLD W/ BINDER, BATCH MIXED FROM: SOUTHWEST BOULDER & STONE | CONTACT: BRITTANY MARCIK (760)685-5224 CRAFTSMAN HEAVY WASH FINISH | SAMPLE #23-422 |PER SHAW & SONS CONTACT: CAMRAN SAEB (909)261-9905 BID ALT: INTEGRAL COLOR CONCRETE | COLOR: FAWN (ADMIXTURES, INC.) TOPCAST 50 FINISH DESERT SELECT BOULDERS | TO BE TAGGED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT FROM: SOUTHWEST BOULDER & STONE | CONTACT: BRITTANY MARCIK (760)685-5224 DESERT SELECT BOULDER| TO BE TAGGED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE BOULDER TO BE CORE DRILLED & PRE-CUT | BY: SOUTHWEST BOULDER & STONE CONTACT: RILEY FRITCH 10 WOOD SEATING & STEPS WESTERN RED CEDAR DECK | 2" X 6" S4S ALL CLEAR HEARTWOOD | 1 8" EASED EDGES STAIN TBD11 HANDRAIL @ DECK STEPS STEEL HANDRAIL POWDER-COAT FINISH CARDINAL #T022-BR189 SEMI GLOSS PEARLESCENT OIL BRONZE A/L11212 21 22 23 STEEL HEADER DURARUST A-588 STEEL | SELF-WEATHERING | 3 16" THK X 4" H X 10' L | USE FULL LENGTH FROM: JD RUSSEL CO. | CONTACT: (800)888-74254 3 4" COPPER CANYON GRAVEL | ALT: 3 4" APACHE SUNSET GRAVEL FROM: SOUTHWEST BOULDER & STONE | CONTACT: BRITTANY MARCIK (760)685-5224 CANTILEVERED ACCORDION GATE TALL POST AND CABLE SUPPORT ALUMINUM GATE W/ INSET WIRE PANEL | 1 2" X 1" ALUMINUM TRIM TO MATCH FENCE GATE W/ LOCKSET | POWDER-COAT FINISH T022-BR189 STAINLESS STEEL CABLES AND HARDWARE FOR THE STRING LIGHTS AND THE RETRACTABLE CANOPIES RETRACTABLE CANOPY AWNING FABRIC W/ CABLE SUPPORT | SUNBRELLA SHADE COLLECTION COLOR: NATURAL (SKU:46044-0000)| ALT. COLOR: CREST BIRCH (SKU: 4660-0000) FROM: PASADENA AWNING | CONTACT: DAVID LOPEZ (626)793-6602 STEEL POST W/ EYELET WELDED TO POST| POST POWDERCOAT TO MATCH FENCE 316 GRADE STAINLESS STEEL CABLE - 7 X 19 |1/4" DIAMETER | PER DETAIL EXISTING TREES PROTECT IN PLACE EXISTING PATH PROTECT IN PLACE EXISTING CURB PROTECT IN PLACE EXISTING PARKING LOT PROTECT IN PLACE EXISTING UTILITY PROTECT IN PLACE DETAIL SPEC. A&B/L112 06 1063 06 2013 A/L112 06 1063 06 2013 C/L115 05 5000 -- --24 A/L310NEW TREE LOCATION TREE ROOTBALL SIZE STEEL FENCE STEEL FENCE W/ INSET WIRE PANELS | POWDER-COAT FINISH CARDINAL #T022-BR189 SEMI GLOSS PEARLESCENT OIL BRONZE A/L115 05 5000 -- PUMP VAULT CAST IN PLACE PUMP VAULT WITH PAN-FILL LID; TO ENSURE MATCH, CAST LID CONCRETE WITH ADJACENT PAVING POUR. ENTRY 1 4 3 7 16619 PA PA PA PA PA PA PA 4 6 10 11 1 20 LAWN 20 20 20 23 21 22 PA 24 19 PA 11 14 20 19 20 1 19 21 NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E PA PA PA LAWN C L111 G/L110 32 9300 E/L110 32 9300 A/L117 13 1200 B,C,D,E L116 L115/L116 05 5000 E/L116 9 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 25 TREE PROTECTION FENCING 4' HIGH PLASTIC FENCING PER TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS 01 563925 1717 6156 1 6 61 6 61 5 61 4 614 61 3 615.5 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L102 3/16" =1'-0" HARDSCAPE LAYOUT PLAN 45 ' - 1 3 / 1 6 " NOTES PA PLANTER AREA: INSTALL 3" DEEP MULCH THROUGHOUT ALIGN P.O.B. - POINT OF BEGINNING CL CENTER LINE AMEND SOIL PER NOTES (E)EXISTING 16 ' - 4 " 7 1/2" 3'-11 1/4" 2'-5 7/8" 9'9'-9 15/16"16'-4" 8' - 8 5 / 1 6 " 8' - 8 5 / 1 6 " 5' - 3 " 6' - 1 1 / 2 " 15 " 15'-5 5/16" 7'-2 7/8" 8' - 4 3 / 8 " 1'-2 1/2" 24 " M I N 3' 32 ' - 3 " NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E LIBRARY BUILDING LAWN EXISTING PARK EXISTING PARK PA PA PA ENTRY PA PA PA PA PA PA LAWN PA PA NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E PA PA 3' - 6 " 50 ' - 2 1 / 4 " 70'-4 9/16" 1' - 3 " O. C . TYP CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL 12'-6" CL O.C. 7'-2 7/8" 23'-11 3/4" 2' 4' - 3 " 21 ' - 2 " 6'-4" 19'10'5'-1" 3' 9' - 9 " 1'-8" 3'12'-7"9'10' 2' 6'-8" 21 ' - 3 " 7'-7" 1' - 6 " T Y P 19 ' - 5 " 1' 1' 9'-5 3/8" 5' - 8 1 5 / 1 6 " FACE OF BLDG. 6' - 0 1 5 / 1 6 " 12 ' - 9 " PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L110 AS NOTED HARDSCAPE DETAILS A ENHANCED PAVING 1-1/2" = 1'-0" 3" TYP. 12" MIN PE R E N G I N E E R EQ SECTION 6" M I N . EQ 1 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVING2 FINISH & COLOR PER PLAN #3 REBAR3 SPACING PER ENGINEER 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 COMPACTED BASE5 PER ENGINEER PREPARED SUBGRADE6 PER ENGINEER CONTROL JOINT 3/16" WIDE x 1/4 OF SLAB THICKNESS DEEP SAWCUT 1/4 " RADIUS LEGEND FINISH GRADE 1" BELOW FINISH CONCRETE SURFACE FOR TURF | 2" SHRUB B ENHANCED PAVING ISOLATION JOINTS NTS FLUSH W/ADJACENT HARDSCAPE SECTION 3" 3" 2 1 2 4 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACE PREPARED SUBGRADE 3 BASE COURSE ADJACENT PAVING LEGEND 1 3 4 D DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACE 3" = 1'-0" C BOULDER IN GRADE NTS F LOW WALL 1" = 1'-0" SECTION 1 4 T O 1 2 H 1 2 BOULDER/STONE SELECTED BY OWNER/ARCHITECT FINISHED GRADE / IMPORT TOPSOIL 3 ADJACENT PAVING PER PLAN H 4 EXPANSION JOINT W/ SANDED MASTIC COLOR TO MATCH ADJACENT PAVING AND EXPANSIVE MATERIAL 5 LEGEND COMPACTED MISCELLANEOUS BASE MATERIAL 1 6 4 3 5 6 PREPARED SUBGRADE 2 ISOLATION JOINT AT STRUCTURE EXPANSION JOINT 1 2 3 4 5 JOINT FILLER MATERIAL CONCRETE PAVING PER PLAN SANDED ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT SAW CUT TO MATCH CONTROL JOINT BACKING MATERIAL 2 3 46 4 3 1 6 1 4" RADIUS TOOLED EDGES (NO TROWEL MARKS) 7 ADJACENT STRUCTURE 5 7 1" LEGEND 3" = 1'-0" EDGING PER PLAN 2" MULCH TAMP DOWN BY HAND 12" FROM EDGING. COMPACT SOIL EDGING ADJACENT TO MINIMIZE SETTLING. LAWN AREA SECTION METAL STAKE ON PLANTER SIDE STAKES TO BE 1" BELOW EDGING 1" E STEEL EDGING VA R I E S P E R P L A N 2 4 1 4 SECTION 6" M A X 2% R1/4" 1'-3" 2% 3 2 SHEET APPLIED WATERPROOFING AND PROTECTION BOARD - WHERE REQUIRED LEGEND 3 4 1 15" WIDE CAST IN PLACE WALL PER PLAN CONCRETE FOOTING PER ENGINEER FINISHED GRADE PER GRADING PLAN PLANTER AREA GRAVEL PER PLAN GRAVEL PER PLAN FLUSH W/ DECK FLUSH @ STEEL EDGING STAKE ON PLANTER SIDE 2" SECTION 2" COMPACTED SUBGRADE COMPACTED SUBGRADE ADJACENT DECK 1" G GRAVEL NTS PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L111 AS NOTED HARDSCAPE DETAILS A WOOD DECK | EAST- WEST SECTION 1/2"=1'-0" 1 2 DECK BOARDS PER PLAN LEGEND 2x6 WOOD JOIST @ 24" O.C. MAX. 3 12" DIA. x 18" DEEP CONCRETE FOOTING 1 2 3 4 4 1/4" THICK POWDER-COATED PLATE STEEL FASCIA - HEIGHT VARIES. PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS AND FIELD MEASUREMENTS 5 4x6 WOOD BEAM 6 6 STONE WALL 7 7 BOULDERS (BEYOND) EXISTING TREE EXISTING GRADE 1 8 8 PAVING PER PLAN 6" VA R I E S 36" 615.50 FS615.50 FS FINISHED GRADE SECTION 2 3 5 4" M A X . T Y P . 1-1/2"=1'-0" 613.50 FS 2 DECK CLIP SYSTEM ATTACHMENT HARDWARE LEGEND 3 1/4" THICK POWDER-COATED PLATE STEEL FASCIA - HEIGHT VARIES. MOUNT TO 2x12 WOOD FASCIA. 4 STAINLESS STEEL ALLEN SCREW HARDWARE WITH LOCKING NUT AND WASHER @ 24" MAX OC, RECESSED INTO FASCIA. COLOR TO MATCH DECKING. 1 DECK BOARD PER PLAN 6 12" DIA. x 18" DEEP CONCRETE FOOTING W/ STANLESS STEEL HARDWARE CONNECTION TO JOIST. 7 4x4 WOOD POST, HEIGHT VARIES, REQUIRED WHERE TOP OF FOOTING IS GREATER THAN 8" BELOW TOP OF DECK BOARDS. 8 2x6 WOOD BLOCKING, 36 O.C. MAX. SPACING. 5 4x6 WOOD FRAME 1 3 7" 1' - 8 1 1 / 1 6 " 22 9 4 5 2'-4 1/2" SECTION 10 ADJACENT PAVING PER PLAN 11 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACE PER PLAN 11 9 6x8 WOOD BEAM 2" C WOOD SEATING 2 2x6 DECK BOARDS LEGEND 3 2x6 RAFTER 4 DECK FOOTING 1 DRY STACK STONE GARDEN WALL 5 TYPE S MORTAR 1 VA R I E S P E R P L A N 24" 6 ADJACENT PAVING PER PLAN 7 6" x 8" x 16" CMU PRECISION BLOCK 3 27 8 EXPANSION JOINT 9 ADJACENT FINISHED GRADE 8 6 10 CONCRETE FOOTING 10 9 5 1 2" MAX 4 11 11 CONTINUOUS 3 - #4 REBAR 12 CONTINUOUS #4 REBAR @ TOP & BOTTOM 12 13 13 #4 REBAR @ 16" ON CENTER B STONE WALL1-1/2"=1'-0" PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L112 AS NOTED HARDSCAPE DETAILS A EAST ELEVATION - GATE ENTRY 1-1/2"=1'-0" 615.50 FS 615.00 FS 613.50 FS 2 2x6 WOOD JOIST @ 24" O.C. MAX. LEGEND 3 2x6 WOOD FASCIA 4 2x12 WOOD FASCIA 1 DECK BOARD PER PLAN; HIDDEN CLIP SYSTEM ATTACHMENT TO JOIST BELOW. 6 12" DIA. x 18" DEEP CONCRETE FOOTING W/ STANLESS STEEL HARDWARE 7 4x4 WOOD POST, HEIGHT VARIES, REQUIRED WHERE TOP OF FOOTING IS GREATER THAN 8" BELOW TOP OF DECK 8 STAINLESS STEEL ALLEN SCREW HARDWARE WITH LOCKING NUT AND WASHER @ 24" MAX OC, RECESSED INTO FASCIA. COLOR TO MATCH DECKING. 5 1/4" THICK x (HEIGHT VARIES) PLATE STEEL FASCIA: POWDERCOATED TO MATCH FENCE 9 STRIP LIGHT PER LIGHTING PLAN, CREATE GROOVE IN WOOD AS REQUIRED. 9'-3 1/16" 3' 1' - 6 " 12 7 8 6 2 2 5 8 4 3 5 10 10 ADJACENT PAVING PER PLAN 9 2" 4" M A X . SECTION / ELEVATION 1-1/2"=1'-0"C DECK EDGE 615.50 FS 613.50 FS 2 2x6 WOOD JOIST @ 24" O.C. MAX. LEGEND 3 2x12 WOOD STRINGER SPACED PER FRAMING PLAN L103 4 2x4 WOOD FASCIA 1 DECK BOARD PER PLAN; HIDDEN CLIP SYSTEM ATTACHMENT TO FRAMEWORK. STAINED DARK CONTRASTING STRIPE AT EACH STEP TREAD, 2.25" WIDE, THE FULL WIDTH OF THE STEP, .75" BACK FROM FACE OF TREAD NOSE. 6 12" DIA. x 18" DEEP CONCRETE FOOTING W/ STANLESS STEEL HARDWARE 7 4x4 WOOD POST, HEIGHT VARIES, REQUIRED WHERE TOP OF FOOTING IS GREATER THAN 8" BELOW TOP OF DECK 8 4x6 WOOD BEAM 5 1/4" THICK POWDER-COATED PLATE STEEL FASCIA 9 STAINLESS STEEL ALLEN SCREW HARDWARE WITH LOCKING NUT AND WASHER @ 24" MAX OC, RECESSED INTO FASCIA. COLOR TO MATCH DECKING. 10 1 6" 6" 6" 6" 1'-6"1'-6"1'-6 1/4" 5' MAX SPACING BETWEEN SUPPORTS 2 3 1 7 8 6 2 9 4 1 / 2 " 13 5 10 ADJACENT PAVING PER PLAN 5 11 1-1 2" DIAMETER STEEL HANDRAIL, POWDERCOATED ASSEMBLY. 11 3' 3' 12 12 5 8 "x 1-1/2" STEEL BAR HANDRAIL POST, ROUNDED AT TOP TO MATCH HANDRAIL, W/ INTEGRAL MOUNTING BRACKET AT UPPER POST AND A STRAIGHT STEM FOR INSERTION INTO A CORED HOLE ON THE LOWER POST. POWDERCOAT ENTIRE ASSEMBLY. 1' 1'-6 1/4"1' 36" A B O V E L E A D I N G E D G E O F E A C H T R E A D 1/ 2 " 5 13 STRIP LIGHT PER LIGHTING PLAN, CREATE GROOVE IN WOOD AS REQUIRED. 13 4 HANDRAIL ELEVATION SECTION / ELEVATION 2 2x6 WOOD JOIST @ 24" O.C. MAX. LEGEND 3 HIDDEN CLIP SYSTEM 4 2x WOOD FASCIA 1 2x6 DECK BOARD PER PLAN - EASED EDGE 5 1/4" POWDER-COATED PLATE STEEL FASCIA. HEIGHT VARIES 1 6 R3/4" 5 4 2 3 6 RECESSED FLEX STRIP LIGHT PER PLAN SECTION @ DECK EDGE 1/ 2 " M I N . 1/2" B DECK SECTION 615.5 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L113 3/16" =1'-0" DECK LAYOUT PLAN 1 2 4 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE FOOTING, SPACING PER ENGINEER 2x6 STRINGERS, 12" O.C. MAX. SPACING 3 2x6 FRAMING JOISTS, TREATED DOUGLAS FIR, 24" O.C. MAX. SPACING 4x6 BEAM, TREATED DOUG FIR, MAX SPACING PER ENGINEER LEGEND 5 2x6 DECK BOARDS PER PLAN A DECK LAYOUT PLAN 1/2"=1'-0" 9'12'-6 5/8"3'-0"2'-10 7/16"5'-4 1/8"1'-10 3/8" 3' - 1 0 7 / 1 6 " 4' - 6 " 9' - 8 7 / 8 " 3' - 0 " 5 7 7 8 9 12 10 11 4'-8"4'-8"5'-4"5'-4"5'-5"6'-4" 6 EXISTING TREE - PROTECT IN PLACE 5 6 7 9 STEP VARIES IN HEIGHT W/ ADJACENT PAVING 8 BENCH STEP STONE WALL 10 6" STEP 11 STEEL HANDRAIL 12 RECLINING BENCH DECK LAYOUT PLAN PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L114 AS NOTED HARDSCAPE DETAILS 6' 5 7/8" 4 1 2 FENCE PANEL PER PLAN 4" x 4" STEEL POST 3 PEDESTRIAN GATE 4 QUAD-FOLD ACCORDIAN GATE W/ 6" SQ. POST 5 EXISTING LIBRARY BUILDING 6 QUAD-FOLD ACCORDIAN GATE W/ 6" SQ. POST 7 PEDESTRIAN GATE 8 2 x SOLID PANEL TO MATCH POST 18 5 414 6' 16' 7 3' - 3 " LEGEND SECTION 8'-10 5/16"8'-11 5/16"4'-9"5'-11 1/4" 3 5/16" C WEST ELEVATION - LOOKING FROM PARKING LOT 6' - 7 " 7' - 6 " 1 2 FENCE PANEL PER PLAN 4" x 4" STEEL POST 3 LOW RETAINING WALL 4 EXISTING LIBRARY BUILDING 1' - 6 " 1' - 1 3 / 1 6 " 1' 1 7'-2 7/8"7'-2 13/16"4 1/16" 3 4 LEGEND SECTION 2 6' 8'-2 7/16" 3'-8 3/16" 1 2 FENCE PANEL PER PLAN 4" x 4" STEEL POST 3 LOW RETAINING WALL 4 EXISTING LIBRARY BUILDING 5 RETRACTABLE AWNING 6 EXISTING TREE 1 2 3 6 4 6" 6' - 6 " LEGEND SECTION 5 D EAST ELEVATION 1/4"=1'-0" 1/4"=1'-0" A NORTH ELEVATION 1/4"=1'-0" 6' 9' 9' 1 2 FENCE PANEL PER PLAN 4" x 4" STEEL POST (FENCE HEIGHT) 3 4" x 4" STEEL LIGHT POST (~12' HEIGHT) 4 4" x 4" STEEL POST TO RECEIVE ACCORDIAN GATE 5 PEDESTRIAN GATE 6 QUAD-FOLD ACCORDIAN GATE W/ 6" SQ. POST 7 EXISTING TREE TO REMAIN8 EXISTING SIDEWALK 4 6 1 3 7 9 EXISTING CURB10 CANOPY 88 11 LOW RETAINING WALL PER PLAN 5 2 7 109 12 ' 6' - 3 5 / 8 " 3'-7 1/4" LEGEND SECTION 2" 11 6" 1' - 4 " 8" 2 B SOUTH ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0" PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L115 AS NOTED HARDSCAPE DETAILS A STEEL FENCE 1"=1'-0" 3'-9" 8'-6" 2 2" x 2" STEEL TUBE FRAME LEGEND 3 1/2" x 1/4" STEEL BAR 4 4" x 4" STEEL FENCE POST / LIGHT POST w STEEL PLATE CAP 1 WIRE MESH PANEL: McNICHOLS 2x2 CARBON STEEL SQ. MESH - WELDED - 0.120" WIRE DIAMETER 6 18" DIA. CONCRETE FOOTING, DEPTH PER ENGINEER 5 1" x 2" STEEL BAR CONNECTION TABS 2 6 SECTION / ELEVATION 5 4 3" 2" 3'-9" 4 3 2 4 3 1 2 5 5 PLAN STEEL NOTES 1.MATERIAL SHALL BE HIGH QUALITY COLD-ROLLED STEEL. 2.WELDS SHALL BE HIDDEN OR GROUND SMOOTH. 3.ASSEMBLED STEEL FABRICATIONS SHALL BE POWDERCOATED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. COLOR SHALL BE DETERMINED (BID. ALT. CARDINAL BRAND - TO22-BR189 POLYESTER TGIC SEMI GLOSS PEARLESCENT OIL BRONZE). TOUCH UP ALL FIELD WELDS WITH PRIMER AND MATCHING COLOR EXTERIOR SEMI GLOSS PAINT. 4.CONTRACTOR REQUIRED TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS PER 05 5000. DRAWINGS SHALL INCLUDE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS AS WELL AS ATTACHMENT AND FOOTING DETAILS. 5.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SAMPLE OF A PORTION OF ONE POST THAT SHOWS THE PAINTED FINISH. 1 2%2%3" 2" 4 2 3 6 6 LIGHT POST SECTION @ PILE 4 FENCE POST SECTION @ PILE 4 7 15" WIDE CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE WALL 8 PILE FOOTING PER ENGINEER 8 8 7 7 9 LINE OF ADJACENT FINISHED GRADE PER GRADING PLAN 9 9 2' - 0 3 / 1 6 " ( V A R I E S ) VA R I E S PE R E N G I N E E R PE R E N G I N E E R 10 ' - 3 " ( V A R I E S ) 6' M A X . 13245 4"2"2" 1/2" 1 2 WIRE MESH PANEL PER PLAN LEGEND 2" x 2" STEEL TUBE FRAME 3 1/4" x 1/2" STEEL BAR TRIM 4 4" x 4" STEEL POST 5 1" x 2" x 2" STEEL BAR CONNECTION TABS SECTION 1/ 4 " 2" B STEEL POST AND PANEL CONNECTION - TYPICAL 3"=1'-0" B L115 6' 16' 4 EQ PIECES 2 2" SQ ALUMINUM TUBE GATE LEAF FRAME LEGEND 3 1/2" x 1/4" ALUMINUM BAR 4 4" x 4" STEEL STRIKE POST 1 WIRE MESH PANEL TO MATCH FENCING 6 6" x 6" STEEL GATE POST 5 HEAVY DUTY ALUMINUM HINGES 10 4 FABRICATION NOTES 1.MATERIAL SHALL BE HIGH QUALITY COLD-ROLLED STEEL OR ALUMINUM AS NOTED. 2.WELDS SHALL BE HIDDEN OR GROUND SMOOTH. 3.ASSEMBLED FABRICATIONS SHALL BE POWDER-COATED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. COLOR SHALL BE DETERMINED (BID. ALT. CARDINAL BRAND - TO22-BR189 POLYESTER TGIC SEMI GLOSS PEARLESCENT OIL BRONZE). TOUCH UP ALL FIELD WELDS WITH PRIMER AND MATCHING COLOR EXTERIOR SEMI GLOSS PAINT. 4.CONTRACTOR REQUIRED TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS PER 05 5000. DRAWINGS SHALL INCLUDE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS AS WELL AS ATTACHMENT AND FOOTING DETAILS. 5.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SAMPLE OF A PORTION OF ONE FENCE PANEL AND POST THAT SHOWS THE PAINTED FINISH, WELDS AND CONECTIONS. 7 HEAVY DUTY EXTERIOR LOCK SET ASSEMBLY WITH LEVER LATCH -KEYED BOTH SIDES 8 CANE BOLT 9 ADJACENT FENCE PANEL 23 8 51 4 7 6 9 10 18" DIA. CONCRETE FOOTING, DEPTH PER ENGINEER 2 5 5 6 10 2 5 11 LINE OF ADJACENT FINISHED GRADE PER GRADING PLAN 11 1"=1'-0"C CANTILEVERED ACCORDIAN GATE PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L116 AS NOTED HARDSCAPE DETAILS B TALL POST AND SUPPORT CABLES 1"=1'-0" D SUPPORT CABLE MOUNT DETAIL AT POST 3"=1'-0" A PEDESTRIAN GATE1"=1'-0" 1 2 4 4"x4" STEEL LIGHT POST / FENCE POST: FINISH TO MATCH FENCE. 1 2" STEEL EYELET INSET AND WELDED INTO POST AND POWDERCOATED TO MATCH FENCE 5 3 NICHE MOUNTED LIGHT PER LIGHTING PLAN CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE WALL: 15" WIDE FINISH PER PLAN. 6 SUPPORT CABLE - 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1x19 3 16" CABLE - REFER TO SUPPORT CABLE MOUNT DETAILS. 7 RETRACTABLE CANOPY W/ SLIDING ATTACHMENT TO CABLE SUPPORTS, FIXED AT ONE END. LEGEND FESTOON LIGHTING PER LIGHTING PLANS, ATTACH TO CABLE SUPPORT. 12 ' 2" 4 1 2 3 8 EXPANSION JOINT w/ SANDED MASTIC AND EXPANSION MATERIAL 6 5 VA R I E S P E R P L A N 2 8 10 11 SECTION 6" M A X 2% R1/ 4 " 7 9 PILE FOOTING PER ENGINEER 10 ADJACENT PAVING PER PLAN 11 FINISHED GRADE 9 12 CONDUIT PER PLAN PER GROMMET SPACING 12 4 3 2 1 2 EXPOSED RAFTER TAIL (FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS) 3 DRILLED HOLE W/ EASED EDGES SHOP FABRICATED STEEL BRACKET PRE 05 5000(1 2" x 1-1/4" BAR STOCK), POWDER COAT TO MATCH FENCING LEGEND 4 SWAGGED END LOOP 5 SUPPORT CABLE - 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1x19, 3 16" CABLE 6 STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE SECTION / ELEVATION SECTION 6 1 6 2 5 3 1 6" 3" 3" 6" 1 2 STEEL POST 3 SUPPORT CABLE - 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1x19, 3 16" CABLE EYELET -WELDED TO POST LEGEND 4 2 1 3 5 4 SWAGGED END LOOP 5 SWAGGED TURNBUCKLE 6 1 2" X 3-1/4" GALV. EYELET LAG BOLT 7 EXISTING WOOD RAFTER TAIL 2" 4" 3" ELEVATION SECTION 2 C SUPPORT CABLE MOUNT DETAIL AT LIBRARY BLDG EXPOSED RAFTER TAIL3"=1'-0" 3'-7 1/4" 1 LEGEND 2 2" x 2" STEEL TUBE FRAME 3 1/2" x 1/4" STEEL BAR 4 4" x 4" STEEL POST w STEEL PLATE CAP 1 WIRE MESH PANEL: McNICHOLS 2x2 CARBON STEEL SQ. MESH - WELDED - 0.120" WIRE DIAMETER 6 STEEL PLATE 5 1" x 2" STEEL BAR CONNECTION TABS 2 3 2 5 4 9 7 8 11 6 7 GATE PULL HANDLE - EXTERIOR SIDE Von Duprin 697NL or approved equal Finish: 643e: Aged Bronze 8 DEADBOLT - INTERIOR SIDE Von Duprin #110T - Tumbler, or approved equal Finish: 643e: Aged Bronze 9 PANIC HARDWARE ASSEMBLY - INTERIOR SIDE Von Duprin model# EO99 or approved equal Finish: 643e: Aged Bronze 10 HEAVY DUTY SELF-CLOSING HINGES -PAINT TO MATCH GATE FRAME 11 GATE POST FOOTING PER ENGINEER 10 6' STEEL NOTES 1.MATERIAL SHALL BE HIGH QUALITY COLD-ROLLED STEEL. 2.WELDS SHALL BE HIDDEN OR GROUND SMOOTH. 3.ASSEMBLED STEEL FABRICATIONS SHALL BE POWDERCOATED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. COLOR SHALL BE DETERMINED (BID. ALT. CARDINAL BRAND - TO22-BR189 POLYESTER TGIC SEMI GLOSS PEARLESCENT OIL BRONZE). TOUCH UP ALL FIELD WELDS WITH PRIMER AND MATCHING COLOR EXTERIOR SEMI GLOSS PAINT. 4.CONTRACTOR REQUIRED TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS PER 05 5000. DRAWINGS SHALL INCLUDE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS AS WELL AS ATTACHMENT AND FOOTING DETAILS. 5.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SAMPLE OF A PORTION OF ONE POST THAT SHOWS THE PAINTED FINISH. D L116 1 2 CUSTOM MADE CANOPY PER PLAN w HEAVY DUTY GROMMETS SPACED AT 24" O.C. STAINLESS STEEL DETACHABLE CARABINER OR EQUAL. SMOOTH SURFACE TO ALLOW SLIDING ALONG SUPPORT CABLE* LEGEND 1 8'-10" CABLE TO CABLE 2 3 STAINLESS STEEL SUPPORT CABLE *CONTRACTOR / SHALL FURNISH LIGHTWEIGHT (ALUMINUM OR EQ) ROD WITH APPROPRIATE SHAPED HOOK END AND HEIGHT TO REACH THE CANOPY AT APPROX. 12 ' ABOVE GRADE. SUBMIT PRODUCT FOR APPROVAL BY OWNER.1 1 1 2 4 4 X 4 STEEL LIGHT POST 4 3 3 1 4 PERSPECTIVE E RETRACTABLE CANOPY 1"=1'-0" PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L117 AS NOTED HARDSCAPE DETAILS 1"=1'-0"A WATER FEATURE 1 BOULDER - SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. SET IN MORTAR BED. DECORATIVE GRAVEL - PER PLAN2 3 MONOLITHIC CONCRETE FOUNTAIN BASIN W/ INTEGRAL WATERPROOFING, XYPEX OR EQUAL. #3 BAR AT 18" O.C. NOZZLE: 1 2" COPPER PIPE4 LEGEND 18 " A B O V E W A T E R L I N E 8 19 7 SECTION 1 2" MINI BRASS BALL VALVE5 1023 6 COMPOSITE GRATING: 1 2" THICK, W/ HOLE FOR NOZZLE RISER, 1 4" MAX OPENINGS 1/2" PVC ELECTRICAL CONDUIT TO JBOX: PAINT ABOVE GRADE TO MATCH FENCE 7 8 JUNCTION BOX - POWDERCOATED STEEL TO MATCH FENCE. INSTALL 1-GANG GFIC OUTLET FOUNTAIN PUMP - LITTLE GIANT PONY PUMP9 WATER TREATMENT - UV STABILIZER10 61 4 3" 1 1 / 2 " 12 20 16 15 17 13 16 15 17 11 SPRING CHECK VALVE CAST IN PLACE VAULT WITH PAN-FILL LID. CONCRETE TO MATCH ADJACENT CONCRETE PAVING. 12 13 OVERFLOW DRAIN -1" PVC SCH 40 TO STORM DRAIN FEATURE PIPE IN STONE - 1 2" BRONZE THREADED NIPPLE, LENGTH AS REQUIRED 14 FEATURE RETURN LINE - 1 2" PVC SCH 4015 5 79 11 10 16 BASIN RETURN LINE - 3 4" PVC SCH 40 FOUNTAIN SUCTION LINE - 1-1/2" PVC SCH 4017 18 1-1/2" FLOOR DRAIN - ROMAN FOUNTAINS #RFD-150 ADJACENT FENCE - PER PLAN19 ADJACENT PAVING w/ ISO. JOINT20 21 3 4" PVC SCH 40 WATER FILL LINE PER L20121 2'-8 7/8" 6"1'-8 7/8" 7 11 13 3'-9 1/16" 6156 1 6 61 6 61 5 61 4 614 61 3 615.5 1 EXISTING ZONE 8: RELOCATE ONE HEAD TO THIS LOCATION. EXISTING ZONE 29: RELOCATE TWO HEADS TO THESE LOCATIONS. EXISTING ZONE 11 - RELOCATED TO THIS LOCATION: PGP ROTORS, EXISTING LAWN EXISTING ZONE 10: RESTRICT HEAD TO 90° PATTERN TO AVOID NEW PATHWAY BATT. OP. ZONE: ADJUST ROTOR PATTERN TO AVOID NEW CONCSTRUCTION 5'-5" EXISTING ZONE 10: PROTECT IN PLACE (TYP) 30 PSI 1520 1"13.43 A1 40 PSI 395 1"5.04 A3 2 2 2 3 30 PSI 900 1"7.95 A230 FOUNTAIN A4 ROUTE 3 4" pvc SCH 40 WATER FILL LINE TO FOUNTAIN BASIN BACKFLOW PREVENTER PROTECT IN PLACE IRRIGATION MATERIAL LEGEND DESCRIPTION MAKE MODEL/SIZESYMBOL DETAIL NOTES QUICK COUPLING VALVE RAINBIRD 44RC E / L210 LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIRED LATERAL LINE SEE SPEC 3/4" OR AS NOTED LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIRED SLEEVE SEE SPEC 2X LINE SIZE, 3" MIN.B / L210 LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIRED EXISTING IRRIGATION PRESSURE SUPPLY FOR PARK IRRIGATION CONNECT TO EXISTING PARK IRRIGATION PRESSURE SUPPLY LINE DOWNSTREAM OF EXISTING BACKFLOW PREVENTER AT THIS LOCATION. MARK IN FIELD FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO EXCAVATION. 1 PLAN NOTES: CONTROLLER: EXISTING POP-UP SPRINKLER - MP ROTATOR HUNTER I / L210 COVERAGE TEST REQUIRED SEE SPECPRESSURE SUPPLY LINE 3/4" OR AS NOTED A / L210 LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIRED RAINBIRD XFS-09-12 H / L210 .9 GPH @ 12" OC; 1.53 GPM / 100' LATERAL LINE (SEE ABOVE) FLUSH VALVE NETAFIM TLSOV F / L210 PVC TO DRIP CONNECTION SEE DETAIL SEE DETAIL G / L210 LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIRED ISOLATION VALVE NIBCO T580-70, LINE SIZE LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIREDC / L210 FIELD VERIFY A / L210 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE RAINBIRD LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIREDD / L210XCZ-100-PRB-LC FIELD VERIFY VERIFY SIZE & TYPE EXISTINGEXISTING DESCRIPTION MAKE MODEL/SIZESYMBOL DETAIL NOTES SQUARE FOOTAGE VALVE TAGS: 30 PSI 0.50 1"15 A1 OPERATING PRESSURE VALVE SIZE FLOW RATE (GPM) PIPE SIZE: 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 2" 13 - 22 23 - 30 8 - 12 UP TO 7 30 - 50 PIPE SIZE:FLOW (gpm): 1-1/4" ZONE NUMBER DRIPLINE: INSTALL LINES AT 12" OC THROUGHOUT PLANTER PROS-06-PRS30 BODY w/ NOZZLE, QUANTITY, SIZE/PATTERN AS REQUIRED FOR HEAD TO HEAD COVERAGE THROUGHOUT PLANTER AREA LAYOUT APPROVAL REQUIRED ONE PER PLANTER AREAEXISTING NEW IRRIGATION VALVE CONTROL WIRES PER SPECIFICATIONS A / L210 PROVIDE 2 - 4" SLEEVES AT THIS LOCATION2 PROVIDE 1 - 2" CONDUIT AT THIS LOCATION FOR VALVE CONTROL WIRES. INSTALL CONDUIT SEEP INTO CONTROLLER CABINET. 3 REPLACE w/ NEW CALSENSE CS300-32-S1.J / L210 SAME LOCATION AS EXISTING INCLUDE CS-GR W/ 10 YR CELLULAR DATA PLAN HYDROZONE: LOW HYDROZONE LEGEND HYDROZONE: HIGH 1440 sf NEW ON SURFACE DRIP IRRIGATION 30 sf FOUNTAIN EXISTING LANDSCAPE ADJUST IRRIGATION AS REQUIRED PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L201 3/16" =1'-0" IRRIGATION PLAN LIBRARY BUILDING EXISTING PARK EXISTING PARK EXISTING PARK PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA LAWN PA PA NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E PA PA PA LAWN PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L210 AS NOTED IRRIGATION DETAILS NTSG--J IRRIGATION CONTROLLER PEDESTAL H A PIPE INSTALLATION B SLEEVE INSTALLATION I POP-UP SPRINKLER C ISOLATION VALVE NTSNTS NTS NTS NTS NTS E QUICK COUPLE VALVE D REMOTE CONTROL VALVE F DRIP LINE FLUSH VALVENTS NTS NTS NTS 3" TO 6" IN SIZE 1/2" TO 2-1/2" IN SIZE 12"18" SECTION VIEW - N.T.S. UNDISTURBED SOIL SPECIFICATIONS FINISH GRADE DIMENSION A B C 4" 24"4" CLEAN COMPACTED BACKFILL LATERAL LINES, SEE SPECS. CONTROL WIRES, SEE SPECS. PRESSURE MAINLINE, SEE CCCC B A C SENSOR WIRE IN CONDUIT. IN 3" MIN. SCH 40 SLEEVE 1/2" TO 4" IN SIZE SECTION VIEW - N.T.S. DIMENSION D A 18" B C 12"12" D DD UNDISTURBED SOIL TWICE THE DIAMETER PVC SLEEVES TO BE IN SCH 40 SLEEVE DETAIL ALSO FOR PIPE OF THE PIPE. INSTALLED IN ROCK SOIL. PRESSURE MAINLINE D 4" C B EXISTING SOIL IN SCH 40 SLEEVE CONTROL WIRES LATERAL LINES TO THE DENSITY OF SAND BACKFILL COMPACTED PAVING LANDSCAPE FABRIC BRICK SUPPORTS 3/4" ROCK BRASS NIPPLE PRESSURE SUPPLY LINE FINISHED GRADE IN SHRUB AREAS BRASS UNION DEPTH AS PER SPECS. PVC MALE ADAPTER FLOW INSTALL AT RIGHT ANGLE TO HARDSCAPE EDGE, INSTALL VALVE OFF-CENTER IN BOX. BOX TO BE INSTALLED AS TO ALLOW FOR PROPER OPERATION OF BALL VALVE INSTALL 10" HDPE PIPE VALVE BOX EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE PROPER VALVE INSTALLATION AT MAIN LINE DEPTH. SECTION VIEW - N.T.S. B VALVE BOX PER SPECIFICATIONS FINISHED GRADE IN TURF AREAS BALL VALVE, PER LEGEND 2" 4" MIN. 2" MIN. FINISHED GRADE IN TURF AREAS - 1" BELOW LID. FINISHED GRADE IN SHRUB AREAS CONNECTION AS SHOWN, KEY MUST CLEAR VALVE BOX COVER, USE STAINLESS BOLT NUT AND WASHER. QUICK COUPLER VALVE HEAT BRAND "QCV" ONTO LID. SEE LEGEND FOR SPEC. QUICK COUPLER KEY WITH MALE HOSE BIB PLASTIC ROUND VALVE BOX WITH BOLT DOWN BRICK SUPPORTS DURA PRE-ASSEMBLED SWING JOINT WITH ONE PIECE BRASS MIPT NIPPLE LANDSCAPE FABRIC 3/4" ROCK, 2 CUBIC FT. MOD. # 1-A1912 MAINLINE, SEE SPECS. USE TEFLON TAPE ON ALL THREADED FITTINGS TYPICAL. NOTE: SECTION VIEW - N.T.S. 2" 4" MIN. AND 90 DEGREE THD. ELL 6" LONG BETWEEN TEE PVC SCH 80 THD NIPPLE COMMON WIRE MAINLINE RESTING ON PEA GRAVEL REMOTE CONTROL VALVE PVC SCH 80 THD FOUR CORNERS RED BRICK AT CONTROL VALVE W/ UNION LINE SIZED MANUAL 4" LONG (TYP.) PVC SCH 80 THD FINISHED GRADE BOLT DOWN COVER PLASTIC VALVE BOX W/ NIPPLE 2" MIN. P USE 2 - 45 DEGREE PVC PEA GRAVEL, MIN 6" DEPTH PILOT / COMMON WIRES PIPE TO PROPER DEPTH SCH 40 ELLS TO TAKE W/ REDUCER BUSHING PVC SCH 40 COUPLING PLASTIC WYE STRAINER NIPPLE - 4" LONG PVC SCH 80 T.O.E. WITH SEQUENCE NUMBER VINYL VALVE I.D. TAG 24" EXPANSION LOOP WIRE CONNECTORS W/ P B11 1" 4" FINISH GRADE LINE FLUSHING VALVE PER PLAN VALVE BOX SEE SPECS BRICK SUPPORTS (THREE) 3/4" GRAVEL SUMP (1 CUBIC FOOT) DRIPLINE PER PLAN LATERAL LINE #TL075FTEE (INS x INS x 3/4 FPT) SCH. 80 PVC TEE MIPT x MIPT x 6" LENGTH KBI 3/4" FLEXIBLE NIPPLE SxSxT, LINE SIZE BY 3/4" #FR-0750-6 LENGTH AS REQUIRED 3/4" SCH 80 T.O.E. NIPPLE NETAFIM COMBO TEE FINISHED GRADE TYPICAL BOTH SIDES DRIP TUBING 12 " 4" SCH. 80 PVC THREADED COUPLING FIPT x FIPT 4" RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION: TO INSURE EVEN PARALLEL AND LEVEL TUBING ROWS IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE SOIL LEVEL IN THE PLANTER AREAS BE BROUGHT TO 4" BELOW FINISHED GRADE AND PROPERLY COMPACTED AS PER THE LANDSCAPED DRAWINGS PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE TUBING. INSTALL TUBING AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND SECURE TO GRADE USING WIRE HOOP STAKES AT 5 FEET ON CENTER SPACING. MINIMUM BENDING RADIUS IS 7". BEND DRIP TO AVOID 90 DEGREE FITTING WHERE-EVER POSSIBLE. BACKFILL FINAL 4" OF SOIL OVER THE TUBING AFTER OBSERVATION AND APPROVAL BY THE OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE. AMMENDED SOIL* BRING SOIL LEVEL TO 4" BELOW FINISHED GRADE PRIOR TO DRIP TUBING INSTALLATION AMENDED SOIL* INSTALLED AFTER TUBING INSTALLATION * PER PLANS, DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS DRIP TUBING ROW SPACING SPACING PER PLAN. MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM HARDSCAPE SHALL BE HALF THE ROW SPACING WIRE STAKE RAINBIRD TDS-050 W/ BEND FINISHED GRADE PVC TO DRIP LINE CONNECTION DRIP LINE PLACEMENT L -- AND GROUND COVERS AREAS FINISHED GRADE IN TURF AREAS INSTALL SPRINKLER HEAD FLUSH WITH SEE LEGEND FOR SPECIFICATION POP-UP SPRINKLER HEAD, SPRAY OR ROTOR ABOVE FINISHED GRADE IN SHRUB INSTALL SPRINKLER HEAD 1/2" LATERAL LINE, SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE AND DEPTH REQUIRED SIZE AS PER SPRINKLER OUTLET LAY LENGTH TO BE 6" MINIMUM MIPT INLET AND MIPT OUTLET PVC TYPE, WITH O-RINGED JOINTS, LATERAL x SPRINKLER INLET SIZE SCH 40 PVC SxSxT TEE FITTING UNDISTURBED SOIL PRE-ASSEMBLED TRIPLE SWING JOINT, LANDSCAPE AREA WITHOUT OVERSPRAY ONTO PAVING, FENCES, WALLS OR BUILDINGS. INSTALL SPRINKLER HEADS PLUMB. ADJUST SPRAYS OR NOZZLE STREAM TO COVER INSTALL SPRINKLER HEADS 6" FROM PAVING EDGE IN GROUND COVER AREAS. INSTALL SPRINKLER HEADS 4" FROM PAVING EDGE IN TURF AREAS. 1/2" NOTE: PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L211 AS NOTED IRRIGATION DETAILS A SOIL MANGEMENT REPORT B MODEL WATER EFFICIENT LANDSCAPE ORDINANCE WORKSHEET PLANT MATERIAL LEGEND BOTANICAL NAME COMMON NAME SIZE | FORMSYMBOL LEUCADENDRON 'SAFARI SUNSET'SAFARI CONEBUSH 15 GAL LOW1 GREVILLEA 'MASON'S HYBRID'MASON'S GREVILLEA 5 GAL LOW8 *CERCIS OCCIDENTALIS WESTERN REDBUD 24" BOX - MULTI LOW3 DECIDUOUS BOTANICAL NAME COMMON NAME SIZE | FORMSYMBOL FOLAIGE 5 GAL LOW4 SPR - FALL 3' X 3'LEONOTIS LEONURIS LION'S TAIL QTYQTY WUCOLS 4WUCOLS 4 INTERESTINTEREST MAT. SIZE MAT. SIZE 10' X 8' YEAR RND 4' X 4' 3' X 4' MUHLENBERGIA CAPILLARIS PINK CLOUD 5 GAL LOW29 FALL - WINTER 3' X 3' 1 GAL LOW93LOMANDRA CONFERTIFOLIA HIGHLIGHT OLIVE MAT RUSH FOLIAGE 18" (*) CALIFORNIA NATIVE SPECIES 5 GAL LOW7 YEAR RND 3' X 3'WINNIFRED GILMAN SAGE*SALVIA CLEVLANDIA SOD --LAWN TO MATCH EXISTING LAWN - ARBUTUS MARINA STRAWBERRY TREE 36" BOX - MULTI LOW2 EVERGREEN 15' X 15' *CERCIDIUM X 'DESERT MUSEUM'DESERT MUSEUM PALO VERDE 36" BOX - MULTI LOW1 DECIDUOUS 18' X 15' 5 GAL LOW8ACACIA COGNATA 'COUSIN ITT'COUSIN ITT ACACIA FOLIAGE GOLDEN SPIRIT SMOKE TREE 2' X 3' COTINUS 'GLODEN SPIRIT'24" BOX - MULTI MOD1 SUM - FALL 8' X 8' *CEANOTHUS GRISEUS 5 GAL LOW12 WINTER- SPR 2' X 8' 15 GAL LOW32SILVERBERRY HEDGE 5' X 5' 5 GAL LOW54 YEAR RND 3' X 3'YUCCA COLOR GUARDYUCCA FILAMENTOSA COLOR GUARD *JUNCUS PATENS COMMON RUSH 1 GAL LOW40 YEAR RND 1' X 2' *MUHLENBERGIA RIGENS DEER GRASS 5 GAL LOW7 FOLIAGE 4' X 4' *CEANOTHUS 'RAY HARTMAN'STAKED FORM (HEDGE)15 GAL LOW5 SPR - SUM 2' X 3' VAR. HORIZONTALIS YANKEE POINT CALIFORNIA LILAC 5 GAL LOW SPRING 18" X 4'*SALVIA 'BEE'S BLISS'BEE'S BLISS SAGE 4 MULCH | ALL PLANTERS | 3" FINE COVER MULCH| WHITTIER FERTILIZER 562-699-3461 DISTICTIS 'RIVERS'15 GAL MODROYAL TRUMPET VINE 2 VINE 16' X 16' DIANELLA 'LITTLE REV'LITTLE REV FLAX LILY 1 GAL LOW132 SPRING 18" LOW5 GAL 6 YEAR RND 1' X 8'DWARF COYOTE BUSH 1 GAL LOW47 SPR - WINTER 18" X 30"*PENSTEMON HETERPHYLLUS 'MARGARITA BOP'MARGARITA BOP PENSTEMON *BACCHARIS PILULARIS 'PIGEON POINT' *ERIOGONUM GIGANTEUM 5 GAL VERY LOW3 SPR - FALL 3' X 5'SAINT CATHERINE'S LACE ELAEAGNUS PUNGENS 'GLENN ST. MARY' LEUCADENDRON 'EBONY'EBONY CONEBUSH 15 GAL LOW5 FOLAIGE 3' X 4' BRUGMANSIA 'FROSTY PINK'FROSTY PINK ANGEL'S TRUMPET 24" BOX - MULTI LOW1 EVERGREEN 15' X 15' 5 GAL LOW45 FOLIAGE 18" X 3'LOW COAST ROSEMARYWESTRINGIA FRUTICOSA MUNDI 'OLIVE GREEN' 'WINNIFRED GILMAN' PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L301 3/16" =1'-0" PLANTING PLAN LAWN LIBRARY BUILDING EXISTING PARK LAWN EXISTING PARK ENTRY LAWN NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L302 NA PLANTING PALETTE TREES ARBUTUS MARINA | STRAWBERRY TREE SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS LEONOTIS LEONURIS | LION'S TAIL LEUCADENDRON EBONY BRUGMANSIA 'FROSTY PINK' | FROSTY PINK ANGEL'S TRUMPET ACACIA COGNATA | COUSIN ITT ACACIA ELAEAGNUS PUNGENS 'GLENN ST. MARY' | SILVERBERRY COTINUS COGGYGRIA | SMOKE TREE BACCHARIS PILULARIS 'PIGEON POINT' | DWARF COYOTE BRUSH CEANOTHUS 'RAY HARTMAN'CEANOTHUS GRISEUS VAR. HORIZONTALIS | YANKEE POINT GREVILLEA MASON'S HYBRID | MASON'S HYBRID MUHLENBERGIA CAPILLARIS | PINK CLOUD LOMANDRA CONFERTIFOLIA 'OLIVE GREEN' | MATT RUSH DIANELLA REVOLUTA 'LITTLE REV' - LITTLE REV FLAX LILY PENSTEMON HETEROPHYLLUS | MARGARITA BOP YUCCA COLOR GUARD CERCIDIUM X 'DESERT MUSEUM' | DESERT MUSEUM PALO VERDE CERCIS OCCIDENTALIS | WESTERN REDBUD SALVIA CLEVELANDII | WINIFRED GILMAN SAGE DISTICTIS 'RIVERS' | ROYAL TRUMPET VINE ERIOGONUM GIGANTEUM | ST. CATHERINE'S LACE JUNCUS PATENS | COMMON RUSH LEUCADENDRON SAFARI SUNSET MUHLENBERGIA RIGENS | DEER GRASS SALVIA 'BEE'S BLISS' | BEE'S BLISS SAGE WESTRINGIA FRUTICOSA MUNDI | LOW COAST ROSEMARY A TREE PLANTING NTS 6" 24 " - 3 0 " 6" FERTILIZER TABLETS BACKFILL SOIL LOCATE BASE OF TRUNK @ ELEV. ABOVE LINE OF EXIST. GRADE TREE TIE SCARIFY SIDES & BOTTOM OF PLANT PIT PREVAILING WIND PLACE PARALLEL WITH TREE STAKE PER SPECIFICATIONS TREE TIE PER SPECIFICATIONS. LINE OF EXIST. GRADE ELEV. LEVEL W/ EXTENSION LOCATE BASE OF TRUNK @ PLANT PIT BELOW 6' 6" BERM FOR WATER BASIN PLAN SECTION MYCORRHIZAL TABLETS ROOT BALL ROOTBALL TREE STAKE - PLACE PARALLEL WITH PREVAILING WIND BERM FOR WATER BASIN - BUILD AT EDGE OF ROOTBALL 2x ROOT BALL SHRUB FINISHED GRADE ROOT BALL BACKFILL FERTILIZER TABLET(S) MYCORRHIZAL PACKETS SHRUB TEMPORARY BERM ROOT BALL 3" HEIGHT X 7" WIDE BERM PLANT PIT BELOW EQ.EQ. SECTION PLAN SCARIFY SIDES & BOTTOM OF PLANT PIT. BOTTOM SHALL BE ALIGN OUTER EDGE OF BERM WITH EDGE OF PLANT PIT ALIGN INNER EDGE OF BERM WITH EDGE OF ROOTBALL AS SHOWN PER SPECIFICATIONS TAMPED TO PREVENT SETTLEMENT B SHRUB, GROUNCOVER, VINE PLANTING NTS O . C . S P A C I N G P E R L E G E N D O.C . S P A C I N G P E R L E G E N D O.C. SPACING PER LEGEND 1 2 t h e o n c e n t e r s p a c i n g EDGE OF ADJACENT HARDSCAPE SHRUB OR GROUND COVER CUTTINGS, FLATS, LINERS, 1 GAL., 5 GAL. PLAN O.C. SPACING PER LEGEND O. C . S P A C I N G P E R L E G E N D 1/ 2 O . C . S P A C I N G P E R L E G E N D C PLANT SPACING NTS PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L310 AS NOTED PLANTING DETAILS 6156 1 6 61 6 61 5 61 4 614 61 3 615.5 T-1 T-4 T-2 T-3 DESCRIPTION CHARACTERSYMBOL QTY ACCENT UPLIGHT - 2 SPJ LIGHTING | MR UNIVERSE | PVD BRONZE (PVDBZ) | 2W | STD FLOOD | 3000K | HEX LOUVER | STAKE MOUNT11 ACCENT WASH LIGHT 9 TREE UPLIGHT SPJ LIGHITNG | ALPHA | PVD BRONZE | 8W (PVDBZ) | STD FLOOD | 3000K | HEX LOUVER | STAKE MOUNT 9 SPJ LIGHITNG | SUPER NOVA | PVD BRONZE (PVDBZ) | 3W | WIDE FLOOD | 3000K | HEX LOUVER | STAKE MOUNT 6 LIGHTING LEGEND TRANSFORMER 22W 9W 27W 48W SPJ LIGHTING | PINNER |PVD BRONZE (PVDBZ) |1W | WIDE FLOOD | 3000K | HEX LOUVER | STAKE MOUNT PATH LIGHT 13 78W NOTES TRANSFORMER 1 SPJ | LUTRON/CONTROL4 COMPATIBLE | PHOTO CELL SENSOR |DIMMER | 300W-120V 12-15V1 TRANSFORMER 2 SPJ | LUTRON/CONTROL4 COMPATIBLE | PHOTOCELL SENSOR | DIMMER | 300W-120V 12-15V1 TRANSFORMER 3 LUTRON/CONTROL4 COMPATIBLE | PHOTOCELL SENSOR | DIMMER | COMPATIBLE W/ SPJ-MUL-21T-1 T-1 T-1 T-1 T-2 ACCENT UPLIGHT - 1 SPJ LIGHITNG | SPJ-SGR | PVD BRONZE (PVDBZ) | 6W | 3000K | RECESS MOUNT BOLLARD 10 100WT-2SPJ LIGHITNG | SPJ-34LR | PVD BRONZE (PVDBZ) | 10W | 3000K | DIRECT BURIAL UNDERWATER LIGHT 1 6WT-3SPJ LIGHITNG | SPJ-34LR | PVD BRONZE (PVDBZ) | 6W | 3000K | RECESS MOUNT REFERENCE A/L410 B/L410 C/L410 D/L410 E/L410 F/L410 G/L410 FLEX STRIP LIGHT 145 LF 1.22W/FTT-4SPJ LIGHITNG | DIODELED NEON BLAZE H/L410 T-1 T-2 T-3 T-4 EQUIPMENT LEGEND TRANSFORMER 4 LUTRON/CONTROL4 COMPATIBLE | PHOTOCELL SENSOR | DIMMER | COMPATIBLE W/ DIODELED NEON BLAZE1 2-GANG OUTLET HUBBELL DOUBLE GANG VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL MOUNT GRAY EXPANDABLE OUTDOOR GRAY | ML2500G7 SINGLE GANG OUTLET 3 JUNCTION BOX 1 LOCATION TO BE CONFIRMED BY LANDSCAEP ARCHITECT GENERAL NOTES 1.SPJLIGHTING | CONTACT CHRIS GONZALES | (213) 216-2190 2.SUBMIT ALL EQUIPMENT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCUREMENT AND INSTALLATION. 3.SEE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER'S PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, INCLUDING PHOTOMETRIC CALCULATIONS.FESTOON LIGHTING 375 LF 120 VOLT / DIMMER & SWITCH L116HOMETOWN EVOLUTION | E26 COMMERCIAL STRING LIGHT SET S14 LED FILAMENT BULBS CONNECT TO SUPPORT WITH STAINLESS STEEL 1" CHAIN SHACKLE SCREW PIN @ 16" OC HUBBELL SINGLE GANG VERTICAL MOUNT GRAY EXPANDABLE OUTDOOR GRAY | ML500G DESCRIPTION TYPESYMBOL QTY ELECTRICAL CONDUIT PER PLAN NOT APPLICABLE PER ELEC.CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE PER ELECTRICAL PLANS. VISIBLE, ABOVE GRADE PORTIONS OF CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT SURFACE. PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L401 3/16" =1'-0" LIGHTING PLAN LIBRARY BUILDING LAWN EXISTING PARK EXISTING PARK ENTRY LAWN NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E LAWN PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AK MPR DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 RENEWAL DATE DATE SIGNATURE 03|31|2024 A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9 11|15|2023 A. Korn A M Y K O R N N O. 6 6 0 9L I CEN S E D L A N D S CA PE A R C H I T E C T S T A TE OF CA L I F O R N I A OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE L410 AS NOTED LIGHTING DETAILS A TREE UPLIGHT B ACCENT UPLIGHT - 1 C ACCENT UPLIGHT - 2 D ACCENT WASHLIGHT E PATH LIGHT F BOLLARD LIGHT G UNDERWATER LIGHT H FLEX STRIP LIGHT BASE MOUNT CORD 30 ft Cord PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL BDG DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER D A V I D LEE S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IA CIV I L NO. C70897 EXP. 06/30/2025 PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE ABBREVIATIONS: 1.THESE PLANS HAVE BEEN PREPARE TO ADHERE TO THE 2022 LOS ANGELES COUNTY BUILDING CODE. 2.CONSTRUCT OFF SITE WORK TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CITY OF AZUSA. SECURE AND PAY FOR REQUIRED CONSTRUCTION PERMITS. 3.CONSTRUCT STRAIGHT GRADES BETWEEN ELEVATIONS SHOWN ON PLAN UNLESS INTERRUPTED BY A GRADE CHANGE LINE. ANY DEVIATION FROM THE GRADING PLAN MUST HAVE PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. 4.GRADE LAWN, TURF, PLANTING AND AGRICULTURAL AREA 1 ½" BELOW DESIGN GRADES INDICATED. 5.ADJUST TO DESIGN GRADE TOP OF EXISTING VALVE BOXES WITHIN AREAS TO BE REGRADED. 6.MAINTAIN A RECORD OF LOCATION OF UTILITY MARKERS ON THE AS-BUILT PLAN AND REINSTALL THEM AFTER PAVING. REPLACE BENT OR UNUSABLE MARKERS. FOR ALL UTILITY LINES DISCOVERED WITHIN THE WORK AREA, INSTALL BRASS UTILITY MARKERS INDICATING DIRECTIONS OF LINES AT ALL CHANGES IN DIRECTIONS AFTER PAVING. INFORM THE SURVEYOR TO LOCATE AND RECORD ACTUAL LOCATIONS. 7.UNCLOG, CLEAN AND FLUSH THE WORK AREA DRAINAGE SYSTEM AFTER PAVING AND IMMEDIATELY BEFORE A RAIN FORECAST. 8.ALL EXCAVATIONS, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION SHALL BE CONTINUOUSLY INSPECTED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. 9.LIMITS OF SITE - REVIEW ENTIRE SET FOR SCOPES OF WORK BEYOND LIMITS OF SITE, INCLUDING CONSTRUCTION AND PHASING/STAGING. COORDINATE WITH OWNER REPRESENTATIVE FOR SCOPES OF WORK THAT OCCURS OUTSIDE LIMITS OF SITE GENERAL NOTES: SCALE: N.T.S.VICINITY MAP INDEX: SHEET NO.SHEET TITLE C1.0 TITLE SHEET AND DETAILS C2.0 SITE DEMOLITION PLAN C3.0 FINISH GRADING PLAN C4.0 SITE UTILITIES PLAN C5.0 EROSION CONTROL PLAN C6.0 LID PLAN N PROJECT SITE ABV ABOVE AC ASPHALT CONCRETE ADDL ADDITIONAL AFSR AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER AGG AGGREGATE APPROX APPROXIMATE ARCH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS BC BEGIN CURVE BCR BEGIN CURB END BLW BELOW BLDG BUILDING BM BENCH MARK BOE BOTTOM OF EXCAVATION BOS BOTTOM OF STEP BW BACK OF WALK C CUT CA CABLE CAB CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE CATV CABLE TELEVISION CB CATCH BASIN CF CURB FACE C&G CURB AND GUTTER CIP CAST IRON PIPE CL CENTERLINE, CHAIN LINK CLR CLEAR CMP CORRUGATED METAL PIPE CO CLEAN OUT, COUNTRY CONC CONCRETE CONN CONNECTION, CONNECT CONST CONSTRUCTION CONT CONTINUATION COR CORNER CSP CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE CY CUBIC YARDS D DEPTH DET DETAIL DIA DIAMETER DIP DUCTILE IRON PIPE DS DOWNSPOUT DW DOMESTIC WATER DWG(S)DRAWING(S) DWY DRIVEWAY E EAST EX.EXISTING EA EACH ESMT EASEMENT EX END CURVE ECR END CURB RETURN EG EDGE OF GUTTER ELEV ELEVATION ELEC ELECTRICAL ELY EASTERLY EP EDGE OF PAVEMENT EQ EQUAL EW EACH WAY F FILL FF FINISH FLOOR FG FINISH GRADE FH FIRE HYDRANT FL FLOW LINE FP FINISH PAD FS FINISH SURFACE FT FOOTING FUT FUTURE FW FIREWATER G GAS GA GAUGE GALV GALVANIZED GB GRADE BREAK H HIGH, HEIGHT HORIZ HORIZONTAL HP HIGH POINT HPFL HIGH POINT FLOW LINE INV INVERT ELEVATION INT INTERSECTION INV INVERT IRR IRRIGATION L LENGTH LADWP LOS ANGELES DEPT. OF WATER AND POWER LF LINEAR FOOT MAX MAXIMUM MB MAP BOOK MC MIDDLE OF CURVE MIN MINIMUM MISC MISCELLANEOUS MOD MODIFIED N NORTH NA NOT APPLICABLE NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NLY NORTHERLY NO NUMBER, NORTH NTS NOT TO SCALE Ø DIAMETER OC ON CENTER OPNG OPENING PA PLANTING AREA PCC PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE POINT OF COMPOUND CURVE PD PLANTER DRAIN PERF PERFORATED PKG PARKING PM PARCEL MAP POC POINT OF CURVE POINT OF CONNECTION PIV POST INDICATOR VALVE PRC POINT OF REVERSE CURVE PROD PRODUCT LINE PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PT POINT PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PVMT PAVEMENT POT PATH OF TRAVEL R RIDGE LINE, RADIUS, RATE RAD RADIAL REINF REINFORCED RET RETAINING REQD REQUIRED REV REVISED, REVISION ROW RIGHT OF WAY S SLOPE, SEWER, SOUTH SD STORM DRAIN SDWK SIDEWALK SHT SHEET SIM SIMILAR SL STREET LIGHT SLY SOUTHERLY SO SOUTH SPEC SPECIFICATION SS SANITARY SEWER STA STATION STD STANDARD STL STEEL SYMM SYMMETRICAL T TANGENT TAD TOP OF AREA DRAIN TC TOP OF CURB TCB TOP OF CATCH BASIN TELE TELEPHONE, TELECOMMUNICATIONS TEMP TEMPORARY TF TOP OF FENCE TFTG TOP OF FOOTING TG TOP OF GRATE TH TOP OF HEADER THK THICK TMH TOP OF MANHOLE TMS TOP OF MOW STRIP TR TRACT TOS TOP OF STEP TTD TOP OF TRENCH DRAIN TW TOP OF WALL TYP TYPICAL VAR VARIABLE VCP VITRIFIED CLAP PIPE VERT VERTICAL W WATER, WIDTH, WEST W/WITH WLY WESTERLY WM WATER METER XING CROSSING 2ISOLATION JOINT JOINT FILLER SANDED MASTIC SEALER PER LANDSCAPE PLANS 1/4" 1/ 2 " 1/4" RADIUS SEE SPECIFICATION FOR TYPE OF JOINT SEALANT AND JOINT FILLER. 1CONCRETE PAVEMENT C1.0 N.T.S. AND TITLE SHEET DETAILS 3CONSTRUCTION JOINT NOTES: 1.USE SMOOTH BARS FOR DOWELS COATED TO PREVENT BOND, OR GREASE ONE END PRIOR TO SECOND POUR. 2.CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL ONLY BE LOCATED WHERE A CONTRACTION OR OTHER JOINT WOULD OTHERWISE HAVE BEEN REQUIRED. 3.SEE PLAN FOR THICKNESS, T. 4.FOR CONTRACTION (CONTROL) JOINTS, SEE ARCH. PLANS. 5.PROVIDE ADEQUATE SUPPORT FOR DOWELS TO ENSURE THEY REMAIN LEVEL WITH FINISH SURFACE. 6.STOP SLAB REINFORCING AT CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. T/ 2 T/ 2 T PREVENT BOND 1/2" DIA. SMOOTH DOWEL BAR 18" LONG @ 24" O.C. - ONE SIDE LUBRICATED SANDED MASTIC SEALANT PER LANDSCAPE PLANS PER LANSCAPE PLAN 1/4" RAD. OR SAWED FIRST POUR SECOND POUR 1-1/4" MIN. 4UTILITY IN TRENCH BACKFILL WITH NATIVE OR IMPORTED MATERIAL PER GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FINISH GRADE PIPE ZONE CONSOLIDATED WET FILL SAND CLASSIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D2487 PIPELINE NOMINAL PIPE DIAMETER (INCHES) NARROW TRENCH WIDTH (INCHES) 4 8 18 24 6 18 NATIVE SOIL CONCRETE PAVEMENT #4 REINFORCING BARS AT 16" O.C. EACH WAY REFER TO CONSTRUCTION JOINT DETAIL 3 HEREON 8" 8"2" C L E A R 1" 6" 4" RECOMPACTED SUBGRADETHICKEN EDGE ADJACENT TO PLANTER AREAS 8PERFORATED PIPE 7AREA DRAIN UNPAVED AREA 5CLEANOUT 4" DIA. UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON PLAN 4-IN DIA STD. 45° WYE INVERT ELEVATION PER UTILITIES PLAN 12 "H= 2 4 " U N L E S S O T H E R W I S E NO T E D O N P L A N 2" M I N . NOTE: CONCRETE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE MINIMUMS. 4" ZURN CLEANOUT - SATIN NICKEL BRONZE 4" 6" CONCRETE COLLAR OR ENCASEMENT ALL-AROUND STOPPER OR EXTENSION PAVED AREA STD. 45° WYE PAVEMENT AREA UNPAVED/PLANTER AREA 4" DIA. UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON PLAN INVERT ELEVATION PER UTILITIES PLAN STOPPER OR EXTENSION H= 1 2 " M I N . ZURN FD2210-PV4 SATIN NICKEL BRONZE FINISH TOP OF AREA DRAIN ELEV. PER PLAN 4" ROUND ATRIUM GRATE NDS. MODEL #78. OR EQUAL LATERAL SECTION FINISH SURFACE PER PLAN WATERPROOFING GEOMEMBRANE LINER ON ALL VERTICAL SIDES NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE MIRAFI 140N OR EQUAL NATIVE SOIL PER GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOOT PLATE OBSERVATION WELL PANELLA TYPE CLEANOUT WITH LOCKING MECHANISM 6" PERFORATED PVC PIPE. SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION. LEVEL BOTTOM ACROSS TRENCH 2. 0 0 ' 4" PERFORATED PVC PIPE INVERT PER PLAN TYP. FOR (3) COMPACTED FILL WATERPROOFING GEOMEMBRANE LINER ON TOP TOP OF TRENCH ELEV. NOTES: 1.SUBBASE MATERIAL SHOULD BE SPREAD IN 6" LIFTS AND COMPACTED WITH A STATIC ROLLER. AT LEAST FOUR PASSES SHOULD BE MADE WITH A MINIMUM SINGLE-OR DUAL-SMOOTH 10-TON STEEL DRUM ROLLER OR A 13,500 LB REVERSIBLE PLATE COMPACTOR. WASHED NO.2 STONE OR APPROVED EQUAL 30-40% VOID RATIO LONGITUDINAL SECTION WATER[ROOFING GEOMEMBRANE ON ALL VERTICAL SIDES NATIVE SOIL PER GEOTECHNICAL 4" PERFORATED PVC PIPE INVERT AND SIZE PER PLAN TYP. FOR (3) COMPACTED FILL WASHED NO.2 STONE OR APPROVED EQUAL 30-40% VOID RATIO NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE MIRAFI 140N OR EQUAL TOP OF TRENCH 4" SOLID PVC PIPE FROM SEDIMENT BASIN 1.5% SLOPE1.5% SLOPE 0% SLOPE 0% SLOPE WATERPROOFING GEOMEMBRANE LINER ON TOP FINISH SURFACE PER PLAN 6" MI N . 12 " TY P . MIRAFI 140N OR EQUAL ALL AROUND 4" PERFORATED PIPE INVERT PER PLAN TURF AREA 1 CU.FT./FT. 1 2" DRAIN ROCK NOTE: SEE LANDSCAPE PLANS FOR CONCRETE COLOR AND FINISH 9SEDIMENT BASIN PLAN SECTION OUTLET PIPE SEE PLAN PER PLAN CLEAR OPENING 6" TYP. PE R P L A N CL E A R O P E N I N G 6" TY P . PER PLAN CLEAR OPENING 6" TYP. 36 " M A X . SE E P L A N 6" 12 " (T Y P . ) PIPE INVERT PER PLAN #4 BARS @ 12" E.W. (TYP.) NOTES: 1."CLEAR OPENING" AS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER 2.ALL STEELS PARTS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION AND WELDING, AND BEFORE ASSEMBLY. 3.FRAME AND COVER SHALL BE SIMILAR TO ALHAMBRA FOUNDRY CO. OR SIMILAR. 4.GRATE OPENINGS WHEN LOCATED IN HARDSCAPE SHALL NOT EXCEED 1 2" CLEAR. 5.COVER SHALL BE BOLTED DOWN. CATCH BASIN BOTTOM ELEVATION PER PLAN DRAIN HOLES. AVOID REBAR 5 - 1 2" HOLES AT BOTTOM OF CATCH BASIN FOR DRAINAGE INLET PIPE SEE PLAN SOLID OR PAN FILL COVER AS THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER OF THE PROJECT, I HAVE REVIEWED THE LOW IMPACT DEVELOPMENT (LID) STANDARDS MANUAL BY COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS, AND HAVE PROPOSED THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE PERMANENT BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPs) APPLICABLE TO EFFECTIVELY MINIMIZE THE NEGATIVE IMPACTS OF THE PROJECT'S STORMWATER RUNOFF. THE ELECTED BMPs WILL BE INSTALLED PER APPROVED PLANS AND AS RECOMMENDED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER AS APPLICABLE. AS THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF RECORD, I HAVE SELECTED APPROPRIATE BMPs TO EFFECTIVELY MINIMIZE THE NEGATIVE IMPACTS OF THIS PROJECT'S CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ON STORM WATER QUALITY. THE PROJECT OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ARE AWARE THAT THE SELECTED BMPs MUST BE INSTALLED, MONITORED, AND MAINTAINED TO ENSURE THEIR EFFECTIVENESS. THE BMPs NOT SELECTED FOR IMPLEMENTATION ARE REDUNDANT OR DEEMED NOT APPLICABLE TO THE PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY." ___________________________________________ NAME OF SIGNER SIGNATURE OF SIGNER DATE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT PREPARED FOR THIS PROJECT WAS PREPARED BY GEOCONCEPTS, INC., PROJECT NO. 23-03333, DATED AUGUST 8, 2023. GEOTECHNICAL REPORT DETAILS: AS THE PROJECT OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT OF THE OWNER, I HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THE LOS ANGELES COUNTY BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES ("BMPS") THAT ARE STATED IN THE CITY'S GENERAL GRADING NOTES UNDER THE SECTION TITLED TEMPORARY EARTH AND STORMWATER PROTECTIVE MEASURES. I UNDERSTAND THAT THESE REQUIREMENTS ARE NECESSARY TO CONTROL STORM WATER POLLUTION FROM SEDIMENTS, EROSION, AND CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, AND I CERTIFY THAT I WILL COMPLY WITH THESE REQUIREMENTS. AS THE PROJECT OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT OF THE OWNER, I HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THE REQUIREMENTS TO CONTROL STORM WATER POLLUTION FROM SEDIMENTS, EROSION, AND CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, AND I CERTIFY THAT I WILL COMPLY WITH THESE REQUIREMENTS. I, OR MY REPRESENTATIVE, CONTRACTOR, DEVELOPER, OR ENGINEER WILL MAKE CERTAIN THAT ALL BMP SHOWN ON THIS PLAN WILL BE FULLY IMPLEMENTED, AND ALL EROSION CONTROL DEVICES WILL BE KEPT CLEAN AND FUNCTIONING. PERIODIC INSPECTIONS OF THE BMPS WILL BE CONDUCTED AND A CURRENT LOG, SPECIFYING THE EXACT NATURE OF THE INSPECTION AND ANY REMEDIAL MEASURES WILL BE KEPT AT THE CONSTRUCTION SITE AT ALL TIMES AND WILL BE AVAILABLE FOR THE REVIEW BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. AS THE PROJECT OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT OF THE OWNER, "I CERTIFY THAT THIS DOCUMENT AND ALL ATTACHMENTS WERE PREPARED UNDER MY DIRECTION OR SUPERVISION IN ACCORDANCE WITH A SYSTEM DESIGNED TO ASSURE THAT QUALIFIED PERSONNEL PROPERLY GATHER AND EVALUATE THE INFORMATION SUBMITTED. BASED ON MY INQUIRY OF THE PERSON OR PERSONS WHO MANAGE THE SYSTEM OR THOSE PERSONS DIRECTLY RESPONSIBLE FOR GATHERING THE INFORMATION, TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF, THE INFORMATION SUBMITTED IS TRUE, ACCURATE, AND COMPLETE. I AM AWARE THAT SUBMITTING FALSE AND/OR INACCURATE INFORMATION, FAILING TO UPDATE THE LOCAL SWPPP TO REFLECT CURRENT CONDITIONS, OR FAILING TO PROPERLY AND/OR ADEQUATELY IMPLEMENT THE LOCAL SWPPP MAY RESULT IN REVOCATION OF GRADING AND/OR OTHER PERMITS OR OTHER SANCTIONS PROVIDED BY LAW." ___________________________________________ NAME OF SIGNER SIGNATURE OF SIGNER DATE 6INFILTRATION TRENCH LEGENDS: DEMOLITION LIMITS CONCRETE REMOVAL DEMOLITION NOTES: PROTECT IN PLACE. REMOVE EXISTING TREE. REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT. REMOVE EXISTING LANDSCAPING EXCEPT AS NOTED. TREE ROOT SYSTEMS TO BE PROTECTED DURING THE DURATION OF THE PROJECT. 1 2 3 4 5 NOTES: 1.CLEAR AND GRUB OUT ALL VEGETATION WITHIN LIMIT OF WORK. EXISTING TREE ROOT SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROTECTED IN PLACE. CONTACT CITY TO COORDINATE ROOT PRUNING. 2.CONTRACTOR SHALL CONDUCT PRE-DEMOLITION WALK WITH ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER TO REVIEW PROTECTIONS, REMOVALS AND MODIFICATIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF DEMOLITION WORK. 3.REMOVAL OF EXISTING IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT WITH THE AREA IS REQUIRED. REFER TO IRRIGATION PLAN FOR MORE INFORMATION. LANSCAPE REMOVAL PROPERTY LINE LIMIT OF DEMOLITION LIMIT OF DEMOLITION LIMIT OF DEMOLITION LIMIT OF DEMOLITION 11 2 3 4 1LANDSCAPE 1TREE 1MEMORIAL PLAQUE 1TREE NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E ℄ EX.BUILDING 55 1TREE 1TREE 1TREE 1TREE 1TREE PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL BDG DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER D A V I D LEE S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IA CIV I L NO. C70897 EXP. 06/30/2025 PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE C2.0 1"=10' PLAN DEMOLITION CONCRETE PAVEMENT (790)EXISTING CONTOUR FLOW LINE RIDGE LINE GRADE CHANGE SPOT ELEVATION EXISTING SPOT ELEVATION 150.30 FS (150.30) FS RR LEGENDS: CONSTRUCTION NOTES CONSTRUCT FENCE POST FOUNDATION WITH CONCRETE CURB. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONSTRUCT PLANTER DRAIN. REFER TO DETAIL 7 ON SHEET C1.0. STORMWATER INFILTRATION TRENCH LIMIT. REFER TO NOTE 4 ON SHEET C4.0. CONSTRUCT SURFACE AREA DRAIN PER DETAIL 7 ON SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PER DETAIL 1 ON SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACE PER LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS. CONSTRUCT ALUMINUM GATE PER LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR FENCE POST FOUNDATION. CONSTRUCT STEEL FENCE PER LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR FENCE POST FOUNDATION. EXISTING TURF AND LANDSCAPING TO REMAIN. REPLANT AS NEEDED. CONSTRUCT SEDIMENT BASIN PER DETAIL 9 ON SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT PARKWAY DRAIN INLET PER SPPWC 151-3. S=12". REFER TO SITE UTILITY PLAN. CONSTRUCT RAISED WOOD DECK PER LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR FOUNDATIONS. CONSTRUCT PEDESTRIAN ACCESS GATE PER LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 AREA DRAIN DECOMPOSED GRANITE QUANTITIES HEREON ARE FOR PLAN CHECK PURPOSES ONLY. SITE CUT: SITE FILL: EARTHWORK QUANTITIES: OVERALL EXPORT: OVER-EX & RECOMPACTION: CY CY CY CY GRADING LIMIT GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.ADD 600' TO ALL ELEVATIONS TO OBTAIN PROPER DATUM. PROPOSED CATCH BASIN R PROPERTY LINE NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E ℄ EX.BUILDING FF=(13.61) LIMIT OF WORK 5 3 9 EX.CONC PVMT PA 6 13 8 7 78 8 8 5 5 EX.CONC PVMT PA PA PA PA PA PA (16.92)EP JOIN (16.89)EP JOIN PA 4.9% 1.8% 4.9%1.2% 4.5% 3. 5 % 1. 6 % (12.63)BW JOIN (12.55)BW JOIN 13.65 FS=HP 13.57 FS=HP13.46 FS 13.50 FS 13.54 EP 13.72 EP 13.53 EP 13.71 FS=HP 13.76 FS=HP 14.12 FS15.50 FS 16.51 FS=TW 16.66 EP 1.0% R R R 1 1 1 15.50 TW (13.6)FG 17.00 TW (15.9)FG (15.9) FG EXISTING PARKING EXISTING PARK 16.62 EP (14.3) FG (14.9)FG 15.50 TW 15.00 TW 14.50 TW 15.00 TW 15.50 TW 14.50 TW 15.50 TW 16.00 TW 17.00 TW 17.00 TW 14.00 FS 15.00 FS 1.7% 1. 4 % 1. 5 % 13.40 TG 13.68 FS 1.2 % 11 14.44 FG 14.51 FG 13.56 FS 13.50 FS 13.50 FS17.00 TW (15.0)FG 13.67 FS 13.61 FS 13.64 FS 13.64 FS 13.65 FS 4 15.50 FS (14.5) FG 15.50 TW 14.28 FS 14.70 FS 16.50 FS 17.00 TW (16.4)FG 1. 7 % 1.1% 14.41 FG 14.36 FS 14.33 FG 14.28 FS (14.2) FG 14.22 FS 14.33 FG 14.44 FG 14.55 FG 14.70 FS 16.63 EP=TW 16.61 FS 15.45 FS 17.00 TW (16.1)FG 15.50 TW 14.18 FS (15.3)FG 16.00 TW 13.68 FS 13.84 FS 1. 0 % 15.50 FS 1014.50 TCB 2 13.45 TAD 413.43 TAD 4 13.43 TAD 2 13.40 TAD 213.89 TAD 12 4 13.45 TAD 2.2% 13 EX.TREE 9 9 9 PA PA PA 9 (1 . 3 % ) 2.2% 8 8 5 5 JO I N 4.9% 13 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL BDG DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N EER D A V I D LEE S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IA CIV I L NO. C70897 EXP. 06/30/2025 PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE C3.0 1"=10' GRADING FINISH PLAN 1 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: CONSTRUCT UTILITY IN TRENCH PER DETAIL 4 ON SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT CLEANOUT PER DETAIL 7 ON SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT AREA DRAIN PER CORRESPONDING FINISH GRADING PLAN. CONSTRUCT INFILTRATION TRENCH PER DETAIL 6 ON SHEET C1.0 CONSTRUCT SEDIMENT BASIN PER DETAIL 9 ON SHEET C1.0. TRANSITION FROM SOLID PIPE TO PERFORATED PIPE. CONSTRUCT PERFORATED SUBDRAIN PIPE PER DETAIL 8 ON SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT PARKWAY DRAIN AND INLET PER SPPWC 151-3. S=12". 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LEGEND: EXISTING WATER PROPOSED WATER PROPOSED STORM DRAIN (W) (SD) SD AREA DRAIN CATCH BASIN / CURB DRAIN INLET SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD PROPERTY LINE EX.BUILDING NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E ℄ 3"X12" RECT. DRAIN S=0.5% EX.CONC GUTTER 12.40 INV 4"12.71 INV 4" 12.96 INV 4" 12.80 INV 4" 12.60 INV 4" 13.10 INV 4" 13.52 INV 4" 3 4 11 11 11 11 EX.CONC PVMT 12.60 INV 4"3 12.35 INV 4"3 112.35 INV 4" 12.51 INV 4" OUT 5 12.35 INV 4" IN 12.05 INV 4" IN 5 5 12.00 INV 4" OUT5 1012.18 INV 3"X12" (12.18)FL 1 4"SD S=0.5% 1 4"SD S=0.5% 312.35 INV 4" 12.50 INV 4"3 312.35 INV 4" 14"SD S=0.5% 1 4"SD S=0.5% 10 . 1 6 ' 47.26' OBSERVATION WELL 1 4"SD S=0.5% 6 11.85 INV.4" 12.30 INV 4" SD-IN 12.27 INV 3"X12" SD-OUT PARKWAY INLET 7 72 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: AZUSA LIBRARY THE CITY OF AK MPR DATE:09-08-2023 NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SET TITLE: DESIGN DEVELOPMENT AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N EER D A V I D LEE S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IA CIV I L NO. C70897 EXP. 06/30/2025 PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M C4.0 1"=10' PLAN SITE UTILITY 2 9-15-2023 6156 1 6 61 6 61 5 61 4 614 61 3 615.5 PROPERTY LINECONTRACTOR'S STAGING AND STORAGE AREA SE8 SE8 NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E ℄ EX.BUILDING SE10 SE10 SE10 SE10 SE10 SE10 SE10 SE10 SE10 SE10 SE1 SE1 SE1 SE1 SE8 SE8 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL BDG DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER D A V I D LEE S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IA CIV I L NO. C70897 EXP. 06/30/2025 PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE 9" ± LEGEND: SANDBAG DETAIL-1 NO SCALESE8 SE8 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL BDG DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER D A V I D LEE S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IA CIV I L NO. C70897 EXP. 06/30/2025 PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CIVIL ENGINEER/ARCHITECTS SIGNATURE DATE EROSION CONTROL GENERAL NOTES: 1.IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CALL EVAN FERNANDEZ AT XXX-XXX-XXX (24-HR CONTACT). 2.A STANDBY CREW FOR EMERGENCY WORK SHALL BE AVAILABLE AT ALL TIMES DURING THE RAINY SEASON (NOVEMBER 1 TO APRIL 15). NECESSARY MATERIALS SHALL BE AVAILABLE ONSITE AND STOCKPILED AT CONVENIENT LOCATIONS TO FACILITATE RAPID CONSTRUCTION OF EMERGENCY DEVICES WHEN RAIN IS IMMINENT. 3.EROSION CONTROL DEVICES SHOWN ON THIS PLAN MAY BE REMOVED IF THE GRADING HAS PROGRESSED TO THE POINT WHERE THEY ARE NO LONGER REQUIRED. FOR FURTHER BMP IMPLEMENTATION DURATION, REFER TO PROVIDED SWPPP REPORT, SECTION 300.4. 4.GRADED AREAS ADJACENT TO FILL SLOPES LOCATED AT THE SITE PERIMETER MUST DRAIN AWAY FROM THE TOP OF SLOPE AT THE CONCLUSION OF EACH WORKING DAY. ALL LOOSE SOILS AND DEBRIS THAT MAY CREATE A POTENTIAL HAZARD TO OFF-SITE PROPERTY SHALL BE STABILIZED OR REMOVED FROM THE SITE ON A DAILY BASIS. 5.ALL SILT AND DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM ALL DEVICES WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER EACH RAINSTORM AND BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. 6.A GUARD SHALL BE POSTED ON THE SITE WHENEVER THE DEPTH OF WATER IN ANY DEVICE EXCEEDS TWO FEET. THE DEVICE SHALL BE DRAINED OR PUMPED DRY WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER EACH RAINSTORM. PUMPING AND DRAINING OF ALL BASINS AND DRAINAGE DEVICES MUST COMPLY WITH THE APPROPRIATE BMP FOR DEWATERING OPERATIONS. 7.THE PLACEMENT OF ADDITIONAL DEVICES TO REDUCE EROSION DAMAGE AND CONTAIN POLLUTANTS WITHIN THE SITE IS LEFT TO THE DISCRETION OF THE CONTRACTOR. ADDITIONAL DEVICES AS NEEDED SHALL BE INSTALLED TO RETAIN SEDIMENTS AND OTHER POLLUTANTS ON SITE. 8.DESILTING BASINS MAY NOT BE REMOVED OR MADE INOPERABLE BETWEEN NOVEMBER 1 AND APRIL 15 OF THE FOLLOWING YEAR, UNLESS THE GRADING HAS PROGRESSED TO WHERE THEY ARE NO LONGER REQUIRED. 9.STORM WATER POLLUTION AND EROSION CONTROL DEVICES ARE TO BE MODIFIED, AS NEEDED, AS THE PROJECT PROGRESSES. THE DESIGN AND PLACEMENT OF THESE DEVICES IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 10.EVERY EFFORT SHOULD BE MADE TO ELIMINATE THE DISCHARGE OF NONSTORM WATER FROM THE PROJECT SITES AT ALL TIMES. 11.ERODED SEDIMENTS AND OTHER POLLUTANTS MUST BE RETAINED ONSITE AND MAY NOT BE TRANSPORTED FROM THE SITE VIA SHEET FLOW, SWALES, AREA DRAINS, NATURAL DRAINAGE COURSES OR WIND. 12.STOCKPILES OF EARTH AND OTHER POLLUTANTS MUST BE RETAINED ONSITE AND MAY NOT BE TRANSPORTED FROM THE SITE BY THE FORCES OF WIND AND WATER. 13.FUELS, OILS, SOLVENTS AND OTHER TOXIC MATERIALS MUST BE STORED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THEIR LISTING AND ARE NOT TO CONTAMINATE THE SOILS AND SURFACE WATERS. ALL APPROVED STORAGE CONTAINERS ARE TO BE PROTECTED FROM THE WEATHER. SPILLS MUST BE CLEANED UP IMMEDIATELY AND DISPOSED OF IN A PROPER MANNER. SPILLS MAY NOT BE WASHED INTO THE DRAINAGE SYSTEM. 14.EXCESS OR WASTE CONCRETE MAY NOT BE WASHED INTO THE PUBLIC WAY OR ANY OTHER DRAINAGE SYSTEM. PROVISIONS SHALL BE MADE TO RETAIN CONCRETE WASTES ONSITE UNTIL THEY CAN BE DISPOSED OF AS SOLID WASTE. 15.THE CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE TO INSPECT THAT ALL EROSION CONTROL DEVICE BMP's ARE INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING PROPERLY IF THERE IS A 40% CHANCE OF 0.25 INCHES OR GREATER OF PREDICTED PRECIPITATION, AND AFTER ACTUAL PRECIPITATION. A CONSTRUCTION SITE INSPECTION CHECKLIST AND INSPECTION LOG SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE PROJECT SITE AT ALL TIMES AND AVAILABLE FOR REVIEW BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL (COPIES OF THE SELF INSPECTION CHECK LIST AND INSPECTION LOGS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST). 16.TRASH AND CONSTRUCTION-RELATED SOLID WASTES MUST BE DEPOSITED INTO A COVERED RECEPTACLE TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION OR RAINWATER AND DISPERSAL BY WIND. 17.SEDIMENTS AND OTHER MATERIALS MAY NOT BE TRACKED FROM THE SITE BY VEHICULAR TRAFFIC. THE CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE ROADWAYS MUST BE STABILIZED TO INHIBIT SEDIMENTS FROM BEING DEPOSITED INTO THE PUBLIC WAY. ACCIDENTAL DEPOSITIONS MUST BE SWEPT UP IMMEDIATELY AND MAY NOT BE WASHED DOWN BY RAIN OR OTHER MEANS. 18.ANY SLOPES WITH DISTURBED SOILS OR DENUDED OF VEGETATION MUST BE STABILIZED TO INHIBIT EROSION BY WIND AND WATER. 19.THE FOLLOWING BMP's FROM THE "CALIFORNIA STORM WATER BMP CONSTRUCTION HANDBOOK" - 2009, MUST BE IMPLEMENTED FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES AS APPLICABLE. BMP's FROM THE "CALIFORNIA STORM WATER BMP HANDBOOK" - JANUARY 2003 MAY BE USED IF DETAIL IS INDICATED. 20.AS THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF RECORD, I HAVE SELECTED APPROPRIATE BMPs TO EFFECTIVELY MINIMIZE THE NEGATIVE IMPACTS OF THE PROJECT'S CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ON STORM WATER QUALITY. THE PROJECT OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ARE AWARE THAT THE SELECTED BMPs MUST BE INSTALLED, MONITORED, AND THE MAINTAINED TO ENSURE THEIR EFFECTIVENESS. THE BMPs NOT SELECTED FOR IMPLEMENTATION ARE REDUNDANT OR DEEMED NOT APPLICABLE TO THE PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. 21.PROVIDE INLET CONTROL MEASURES FOR ALL EXISTING AND PROPOSED STORM DRAIN INLETS. GRAVEL BAGS (D1 PROTECTTION TYPE 3) SHALL BE USED AS SPECIFIED PER SWPPP FOR INLET PROTECTION MEASURES. C5.0 1"=10' CONTROL EROSION PLAN CONTRACTOR'S STAGING AND STORAGE AREA SE8 CONTRACTOR'S STAGING/STORAGE AREA. INCLUDE: WM-1 MATERIAL DELIVERY AND STORAGE, WM-2 MATERIAL USE, WM-3 STOCKPILE MANAGEMENT, WM-4 SPILL PREVENTION, WM-5 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT, WM-6 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT, WM-8 CONCRETE WASTE MANAGEMENT AND WM-9 SANITARY/SEPTIC WASTE MANAGEMENT SANDBAG ENTIRE PERIMETER OF STAGING/STORAGE AREA. 03-21-2023 EROSION CONTROL EC1 - SCHEDULING EC2 -PRESERVATION OF EXISTING VEGETATION EC3 - HYDRAULIC MULCH EC4 - HYDROSEEDING EC5 - SOIL BINDERS EC6 - STRAW MULCH EC7 - GEOTEXTILES & MATS EC8 - WOOD MULCHING EC9 - EARTH DIKES AND DRAINAGE SWALES EC10 - VELOCITY DISSIPATION DEVICES EC11 - SLOPES DRAINS EC12 - STREAMBANK STABILIZATION EC13 - RESERVED EC14 - COMPOST BLANKETS EC15 -SOIL PREPARATION/ROUGHENING EC16 - NON-VEGETATED STABILIZATION TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL SE1 - SILT FENCE SE2 -SEDIMENT BASIN SE3 - SEDIMENT TRAP SE4 - CHECK DAM SE5 - FIBER ROLLS SE6 - GRAVEL BAG BERM SE7 - STREET SWEEPING AND VACUUMING SE8 - SANDBAG BARRIER SE9 - STRAW BALE BARRIER SE10 - STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION SE11 - ACTIVE TREATMENT SYSTEMS SE12 - TEMPORARY SILT DIKE SE13 - COMPOST SOCKS & BERMS SE14 - BIOFILTER BAGS WIND EROSION CONTROL WE1 - WIND EROSION CONTROL EQUIPMENT TRACKING CONTROL TC1 - STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRACE/EXIT TC2 -STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ROADWAY TC3 - ENTRANCE/OUTLET TIRE WASH TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL NS1 - WATER CONSERVATION PRACTICES NS2 -DEWATERING OPERATIONS NS3 - PAVING AND GRINDING OPERATIONS NS4 - TEMPORARY STREAM CROSSING NS5 - CLEAR WATER DISVERSION NS6 - ILLICIT CONNECTION/DISCHARGE NS7 - POTABLE WATER/IRRIGATION NS8 - VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT CLEANING NS9 - VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT FUELING NS10 - VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE NS11 - PILE DRIVING OPERATIONS NS12 - CONCRETE CURING NS13 - CONCRETE FINISHING NS14 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT USE NS15 - DEMOLITION ADJACENT TO WATER NS16 - TEMPORARY BATCH PLANTS WATER MANAGEMENT & MATERIAL POLLUTION CONTROL WM1 - MATERIAL DELIVERY WM2 -MATERIAL USE WM3 - STOCKPILE MANAGEMENT WM4 - SPILL PREVENTION AND CONTROL WM5 - SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT WM6 - HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT WM7 - CONTAMINATION SOIL MANAGEMENT WM8 - CONCRETE WASTE MANAGEMENT WM9 - SANITARY/SEPTIC WASTE MANAGEMENT WM10 -LIQUID WASTE MANAGEMENT CONTRUCTION BMPs: NO R T H D A L T O N A V E N U E ℄ PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL BDG DATE:12-11-2023 SET TITLE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N EER D A V I D LEE S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IA CIV I L NO. C70897 EXP. 06/30/2025 PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE C6.0 1"=10' LID PLAN SUB-AREA I.D. SUB AREA BOUNDARY INFILTRATION BMP LEGEND: NO. GENERAL LID NOTES: 1.ANY CHANGES (SIZE, TYPE, LOCATION)TO APPROVED STORMWATER BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICE(S) (BMPS) MUST OBTAIN WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE LOS ANGELES DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS, BUREAU OF SANITATION PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF BMP(S). LID BMP SUMMARY TABLE SUB AREA I.D. TOTAL AREA (SF) BMP TYPE BMP AREA (SF) PERCENT ACCOMODATED BMP VOLUME (CF) 1 INFILTRATION10,253 470 375 100% TOTAL INFILTRATION10,253 470 375 100% MITIGATED VOLUME (CF) 375 3751 III. TESTING AND INSPECTION I. GENERAL II. QUALITY CONTROL A.ALL NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND THE 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE WITH LOCAL AMENDMENTS. B.THESE GENERAL NOTES SUPERSEDE THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS, IN CASE OF CONFLICT BETWEEN THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, CONTACT THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. C.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME SOLE AND COMPLETE RESPONSIBILITY FOR JOB SITE CONDITIONS DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING THE SAFETY OF ALL PERSONS AND PROPERTY, AND THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL APPLY CONTINUOUSLY AND NOT BE LIMITED TO NORMAL WORKING HOURS. D.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MEANS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION AND THEY SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL STATE AND FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. E.THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS REPRESENT THE FINISHED STRUCTURE. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, THEY DO NOT INDICATE THE METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MEASURES NECESSARY TO PROTECT THE STRUCTURE, WORKMEN OR OTHER PERSONS DURING CONSTRUCTION. SUCH MEASURES SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO, BRACING, SHORING FOR CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT, SHORING FOR THE BUILDING, SHORING FOR EARTH BANKS, FORMS, SCAFFOLDING, PLANKING AND SAFETY NETS. CONTRACTOR, AT HIS OWN EXPENSE, SHALL ENGAGE PROPERLY QUALIFIED PERSONS TO DETERMINE WHERE AND HOW TEMPORARY PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES SHALL BE USED AND INSPECTION OF SAME IN THE FIELD. OBSERVATION VISITS BY THE ARCHITECT OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SHALL NOT INCLUDE INSPECTION OF THE ABOVE ITEMS AND DO NOT IN ANY WAY RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF HIS RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE ABOVE. F.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO STARTING WORK AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. G.DRAWING DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FINISH, JOINT CENTERLINE OR COLUMN GRID CENTERLINE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. H.ALL OMISSIONS AND CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF THE WORKING DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK SO INVOLVED. I.DO NOT USE SCALED DIMENSIONS, USE WRITTEN DIMENSIONS. WHERE NO DIMENSION IS PROVIDED CONSULT THE ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION BEFORE PROCEEDING. J.PIPES, DUCTS, SLEEVES, CHASES, ETC. SHALL NOT BE PLACED IN SLABS, BEAMS, OR WALLS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OR NOTED. STRUCTURAL MEMBER SHALL NOT BE CUT FOR PIPES, DUCTS, OR OTHER ITEMS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE STRUCTURAL PLANS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN PRIOR APPROVAL FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ADDITIONAL PIPES, DUCTS, OR OTHER ITEMS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS. K.SEE DRAWINGS OTHER THAN STRUCTURAL FOR; FLOOR FINISHES AND LOCATIONS; FLOOR SLAB DEPRESSIONS; WALL AND FLOOR OPENINGS REQUIRED FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL FEATURES; SITE PAVING, WALKS, RAMPS, STAIRS, CURBS, ETC. L.HOLES AND OPENINGS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS AND ROOFS FOR DUCTS, PIPING AND VENTILATION SHALL BE COORDINATED BY THE CONTRACTOR WHO SHALL VERIFY SIZES AND LOCATION OF SUCH HOLES OR OPENINGS WITH THE MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND THESE SUB-CONTRACTORS. M.WHERE CERTAIN FEATURES ARE NOT FULLY SHOWN OR CALLED FOR ON THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS, THEIR CONSTRUCTION SHALL MATCH SIMILAR CONDITIONS THAT ARE CALLED FOR OR SHOWN ELSEWHERE ON THE PLANS. N.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING NECESSARY LICENSES AND PERMITS. AND SHALL CONFORM TO ALL STATE AND LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING THE WORK . O.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE BEGINNING WORK AND SHALL PROTECT UTILITIES REMAINING IN SERVICE DURING CONSTRUCTION. P.ALL EXISTING FINISHES, STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AND ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AFFECTED BY CONSTRUCTION ARE TO BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. Q.REFER TO DRAWINGS BY OTHERS FOR INFORMATION NOT SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. R.SPECIAL NOTES: 1.WORK NOT PARTICULARLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED SHALL BE SAME AS SIMILAR PARTS THAT ARE SHOWN OR SPECIFIED, OR AS DIRECTED. WHERE DRAWINGS SHOW PORTIONS OF THE WORK DETAILED AND OTHER AREAS OUTLINED ONLY, THE DETAILED PARTS SHALL ALSO APPLY TO ALL OTHER LIKE PORTIONS OF THE WORK. 2.EXCEPT WHERE CONDITIONS ARE SPECIFICALLY DETAILED, NOTES AND DETAILS LABELED "TYPICAL" SHALL APPLY TO ALL SIMILAR WORK NOT SPECIFICALLY REFERENCED. S.PRIOR TO ALL CORING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IDENTIFY EXISTING REINFORCING LOCATIONS BY PACHHOMETER, PROBING, CHIPPING, ETC. TO AVOID DAMAGE EXISTING REINFORCING. T.IF ADVERSE SOIL CONDITIONS ARE ENCOUNTERED, A SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT MAY BE REQUIRED. A.THE FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL WORK REQUIRES SPECIAL INSPECTION. INSPECTIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CBC SECTION 108 AND CHAPTER 17 BY A LADBS APPROVED SPECIAL INSPECTOR RETAINED BY THE OWNER. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENTS AND NON-STRUCTURAL WORK. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. B.A PARTIAL LISTING OF REQUIRED STRUCTURAL SUBMITTALS FOLLOWS. 1.MANUFACTURER'S DATA FOR ANCHORS, INSERTS, GROUT AND ADHESIVE. A.OWNER'S TESTING AGENCY SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TESTS AND SUBMIT APPROPRIATE REPORTS TO THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER AND BUILDING DEPARTMENT. 1.CONCRETE TESTING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CBC SECTION 1903A.1, 1913A AND ACI 318. MAKE AND CURE A MINIMUM OF (3) SPECIMEN CYLINDERS ACCORDING TO ASTM C31 AT A FREQUENCY FOR EACH CLASS OF CONCRETE PLACED EACH DAY OF NOT LESS THAN ONCE PER DAY, NOR LESS THAN ONCE FOR EACH 150 CUBIC YARDS, NOR LESS THAN ONCE FOR EACH 5,000 SQ. FT. 2.RETAIN ONE CYLINDER FOR SEVEN-DAY TEST AND MINIMUM TWO FOR THE 28 DAY TEST. TEST FOR SPECIFIED STRENGTH AND ANY EARLY STRENGTHS FOR POST TENSIONED CONCRETE ACCORDING TO ASTM C39. 3.PERFORM NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING FOR ALL COMPLETE PENETRATION AND PARTIAL PENETRATION JOINT FIELD WELDS. SEE "STEEL MOMENT CONNECTION NOTES" IN SECTION IV, C, 13 FOR ADDITIONAL TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. B.SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL SUBM IT REGU LAR INSPECTION REPORTS PER C.B.C. SECTION 1704A.2. 1.CONTINUOUS SPECIAL INSPECTION BY A REGISTERED DEPUTY INSPECTOR IS REQUIRED FOR CONCRETE STRENGTH f'c > 2,500 PSI. 1.FOOTING EXCAVATION PER CBC SECTION 1705A.6 AND TABLE 1705.6. 2.SOIL COMPACTION PER CBC SECTION 1705A.6 AND TABLE 1705.6. 3.PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING STEEL, METAL EMBEDS & ANCHOR BOLTS PER TABLE 1705.3. 4.STEEL CONSTRUCTION PER QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS OF AISC 360. IV. FOUNDATIONS A.FOUNDATION DESIGN IS BASED ON "PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING INVESTIGATION, PROPOSED PUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE, 729 DALTON AVE, AZUSA, CALIFORNIA, AUGUST 8, 2023 V. STRUCTURAL MATERIALS 1.CEMENT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C-150, SEE NOTE "5" BELOW FOR CEMENT TYPE REQUIRED BASED ON CONCRETE USE. FLY ASH NOT ALLOWED. 2.AGGREGATES SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C-33 FOR STRUCTURAL NORMAL-WEIGHT CONCRETE (1" MAXIMUM SIZE). 3.READY-MIX CONCRETE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C-94. 4.CONCRETE DESIGN MIXES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH C.B.C. SEC. 1905 AND SHALL BE SIGNED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER, LICENSED IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, AND HIRED BY CONTRACTOR. 5.ALL CONCRETE SHALL SATISFY BOTH THE MINIMUM STRENGTH REQUIREMENT AND MAXIMUM WATER-CEMENT RATIO BY WEIGHT AS FOLLOWS ASTM A706, GRADE 60 . . . . . . . . . ALL WELDED REBAR SLAB (#11 OR SMALLER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEAMS AND GIRDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLUMN REINFORCING (INCLUDING COLUMN TIES) . . . . . . CONCRETE FORMED EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER . . . CONCRETE DEPOSITED AGAINST EARTH . . . . . . . . . . . . ASTM A615, GRADE 60 . . . . . . . . . ALL REBAR U.N.O. ASTM A706, GRADE 60 . . . . . . . . . ALL SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME REBAR 3" 2" 112" 112" 3 4" 1.BAR REINFORCEMENT SHALL CONFORM TO: 2.WELDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO AWS D1.4. 3.REINFORCING DETAILING, BENDING AND PLACING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CRSI "MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE" LATEST EDITION. 4.LAPS AT BAR SPLICES SHALL BE: PER DRAWING "S-1.2" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5.VERTICAL BARS IN WALLS SHALL BE ACCURATELY POSITIONED AT THE CENTER OF WALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DETAILS, & SHALL BE TIED IN POSITION AT TOP AND BOTTOM AND AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 192 BAR DIA. 6.MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS U.N.O.: 7.ALL REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHOR BOLTS, DOWELS, AND INSERTS SHALL BE WELL SECURED IN POSITION PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE OR GROUT. 8.UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN DETAILS, FURNISH #3 SPACER TIES AT APPROXIMATELY 2'-6" ON CENTER IN ALL BEAMS AND FOOTINGS TO SECURE REINFORCING STEEL IN PLACE. B. REINFORCING STEEL A. REINFORCED CONCRETE 4,000 PSI 0.50FOUNDATION AND CURB CONCRETE USE MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS F'c MAXIMUM WATER CEMENT RATIO BY WEIGHT CEMENT TYPE II / V 6.ADMIXTURES MAY BE USED WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. 7.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOLDS, GROOVES, REVEALS, SCUPPERS, ORNAMENTS, CLIPS OR TEXTURES REQUIRED TO BE CAST INTO CONCRETE AND LOCATIONS AND EXTENTS OF DEPRESSIONS, CURBS AND RAMPS. 8.PROJECTING CORNERS OF SLABS, BEAMS, WALLS, COLUMNS, PILE CAPS, ETC. SHALL BE FORMED WITH 34" CHAMFERS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CONCRETE FORM TOLERANCES SHALL BE WITHIN ACI STANDARDS. 9.ALL REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHOR BOLTS, DOWELS AND OTHER INSERTS SHALL BE SECURED IN POSITION AND INSPECTED BY THE LOCAL BUILDING DEPARTMENT INSPECTOR PRIOR TO THE POURING OF ANY CONCRETE. 10.LOCATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS NOT SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE APPROVED PRIOR TO PLACING REINFORCING STEEL. SLUMP 4" PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL DL DATE: SET TITLE: PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M AI REE N I G N E L ANOISSEFORPDERETSI G E R ACFOETAT S L I F O NRTCUR T S LAR NO. S5881 EXP. 6-30-25 C.LE E U DIVAD LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 12-11-2023 S0.1 N.T.S. STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES 1.STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS: 2.STRUCTURAL STEEL MAIN MEMBERS SHALL HAVE CONNECTION BOLTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A325-ST UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3.MACHINE BOLTS (M.B.) AND ANCHOR BOLTS (A.B.) WHERE INDICATED SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-307 GRADE A OR A-36 U.N.O. 4.ALL WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST EDITIONS OF THE AISC "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS" AND "CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES WITH THE EXCEPTION TO THE LATTER IN SECTIONS "3.1" AND "3.2" WHERE REFERENCES TO STRUCTURAL "DESIGN DRAWINGS" SHOULD BE REVISED TO REFERENCE "STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS" THEREBY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND CIVIL DRAWINGS. 5.WELDING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE BY THE SHIELDED METAL ARC (SMAW). FLUX CORED ARC (FCAW) OR OTHER APPROVED PROCESS PER AWS D1.1 USING APPROVED E70XXX ELECTRODES OR ELECTRODE-FLUX COMBINATIONS CAPABLE OF DEPOSITING WELD METAL WITH A MAXIMUM DIFFUSIBLE HYDROGEN CONTENT OF 8 MILLILITERS (ml) PER 100 GRAMS (H8) OF WELD METAL. 6.ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL FABRICATION SHALL BE DONE IN A LICENSED SHOP APPROVED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT AND ALL WELDING SHALL BE DONE BY CERTIFIED WELDERS. 7.UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL METAL CONTACT EDGES SHALL RECEIVE MINIMUM SIZE FILLET WELDS PER AISC TABLE J2.4 8.ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL EXPOSED TO EARTH SHALL HAVE 6" MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER. 9.WELDED SHEAR STUD CONNECTORS SHALL BE AWS D1.1 "TYPE B" HEADED STUDS MANUFACTURED FROM ASTM A108, GRADE 1015 OR 1020, COLD FINISHED CARBON STEEL. SPECIFIED STUD DIMENSIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE LATEST AWS D1.1. 10.STRUCTURAL STEEL INDICATED AS ARCHITECTURAL EXPOSED (AESS) SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 10 OF THE LATEST AISC "CODE OF PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES". 11.SHOP WELDS SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A LADBS LICENSED FABRICATOR'S SHOP. 12.FIELD WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY WELDERS CERTIFIED BY THE LADBS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL. CONTINUOUS INSPECTION BY A DEPUTY INSPECTOR IS REQUIRED. 13.STEEL FABRICATION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A LADBS LICENSED FABRICATOR. C. STRUCTURAL STEEL ASTM SPEC.STEEL WF SHAPES MISC. SHAPES PLATES PLATES HSS PIPES DESCRIPTION TYPICAL U.N.O. ANGLES, CHANNELS, WT 1/4" AND THICKER LESS THAN 1/4" THICK HOLLOW STRUCTURAL STEEL TYPICAL U.N.O. A992 A36 A572 A36 A500, GR. "B" A53, GR. "B" MIN. Fy 5O KSI 36 KSI 5O KSI 36 KSI 46 KSI 35 KSI VII. DESIGN BASIS B.VERTICAL LIVE LOADS: DECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L = 100 PSF A.CODE: CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), 2022 EDITION. SITE COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .N 34.1348143°W 117.9054019 ° SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . I = 1.0 MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATIONS . . . . S S =1.685 S 1 = 0.64 SITE CLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENTS . . . . . . . S DS =1.123 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY . . . . . . . . . . . D OCCUPANCY CATEGORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . II C.LATERAL LOADS: 2.WIND: ASCE 7-16 BASIC WIND SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Qs = 115 MPH EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C DIRECTIONALITY FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kd = 0.85 WIND IMPORTANCE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . I = 1.0 TOPOGRAPHIC FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K ZT = 1.0 1.SEISMIC: FOOTNOTES: 6. DOUBLE STUDS, FACE NAIL 18. BUILT-UP CORNER STUDS 8. BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS OR RAFTERS TO TOP PLATE 9. RIM JOIST TO TOP PLATE, TOENAIL 7. DOUBLED TOP PLATES, TYP. FACE NAIL DOUBLE TOP PLATES, LAP SPLICE 10. TOP PLATES, LAPS AND INTERSECTIONS, FACE NAIL 11. CONTINUOUS HEADER, TWO PIECES 12. CEILING JOISTS TO PLATE, TOENAIL 13. CONTINUOUS HEADER TO STUD, TOENAIL 14. CEILING JOISTS, LAPS OVER PARTITIONS, FACE NAIL 15. CEILING JOISTS TO PARALLEL RAFTERS, FACE NAIL 16. JOISTS OR RAFTERS AT ALL BEARINGS, TOENAILS EA. SIDE 17. 1" BRACE TO EA. STUD AND PLATE, FACE NAIL 2. BRIDGING TO JOIST, TOENAIL EA. END 1. JOISTS TO SILL OR GIRDER 3. SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING, TYP. FACE NAIL 4. TOP PLATE TO STUD, END NAIL 5. STUD TO SOLE PLATE CONNECTION 3-8d 2-8d 2-10d (2) B. BLOCKING BETWEEN STUDS, EA. END 2-10d TOENAILS OR 2-16d 16d @ 16"o.c. or 10d @ 8"o.c. SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING AT BRACED WALL 3-16d @ 16"o.c. OR 4-10d @ 16'o.c. 2-16d or 3-10d 16d @ 24"o.c. OR 10d @ 8"o.c. 16d @ 16"o.c. OR 10d @ 12"o.c. 2-16d OR 3-10d NAILING (1) 3-8d TOE NAILS 8d @ 6"o.c. 16d @ 16"o.c. ALONG EA. EDGE 3-8d 4-8d 3-16d 3-16d 2-10d OR 3-8d 2-8d 16d @ 24"o.c. OR 10d @ 16"o.c. 8-16d OR 12-10d (1)COMMON OR BOX NAILS MAY BE USED EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE STATED. (2) NAILS DRIVEN PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN SHALL BE USED IN-LIEU OF TOENAILS WHERE POSSIBLE. VI. WOOD CONNECTION NAILING SCHEDULE A. BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS OR RAFTERS TO JOISTS OR RAFTERS - TOENAILS EA. SIDE, EA. END 19. ROOF RAFTER TO 2x RIDGE BEAM 2-16d TOENAIL 2-16d FACE NAIL D. STRUCTURAL WOOD 3xPLATES 2 - 20d END NAILS 2xPLATES 2 - 16d END NAILS 1.ALL WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE DOUGLAS FIR (DF) OR LARCH GRADE MARKED BY A RECOGNIZED GRADING AGENCY (WCLA, WWPA, OR WCLIB) AND MOISTURE CONTENT OF ALL LUMBERS SHALL NOT EXCEED 19%. 2.WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS SHALL BE APA PERFORMANCE RATED PANELS CONFORMING TO U.S. PRODUCT STANDARD PSI-83 AND SHALL BE GRADE MARKED BY APA. 3.WOOD GRADES (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE): (A) HORIZONTAL MEMBERS:JOISTS AND RAFTERS . . . . . . . . . . GRADE #1 BEAMS AND STRINGERS . . . . . . . . . GRADE #1 HEADERS AND LEDGERS . . . . . . . . . GRADE #1 (B) VERTICAL MEMBERS:2x4 WALL STUDS . . . . . . . . . . . . GRADE #2 2x6 AND LARGER WALL STUDS . . . . . GRADE #2 4x4 AND LARGER POSTS . . . . . . . . GRADE #1 4.CUTTING, NOTCHING OR DRILLING OF BEAMS OR JOISTS IS PERMITTED ONLY AS DETAILED OR APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 5.NAILING SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST CBC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 6.ALL NAILS SHALL BE STANDARD COMMON NAILS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 7.ALL BOLTS FOR WOOD CONNECTIONS SHALL BE A307, GRADE A. 8.ALL SILLS OR PLATES RESTING ON, OR ANY LUMBER IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH, CONCRETE OR MASONRY SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED DOUGLAS FIR. BOLTS SHALL BE PLACED 9" FROM THE END OF A BOARD OR FROM A NOTCH AND SPACED AT INTERVALS NOTED. 9.ALL BOLTS IN WOOD SHALL BE A307 STANDARD BOLTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL BOLT HEADS AND NUTS BEARING ON WOOD SHALL HAVE PLATE WASHERS PER SCHEDULE ON 6/S150, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. BOLT HOLES SHALL BE DRILLED 1 32 " TO 1 16 " DIAMETER LARGER THAN NOMINAL BOLT DIAMETER. 10.FRAMING HARDWARE SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY "SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC." OR APPROVED EQUAL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND ICC REPORTS. ALL BOLTS IN HOLDOWN ANCHORS SHALL BE TORQUED PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. 11.PROVIDE DOUBLE JOISTS UNDER ALL PARALLEL PARTITIONS. 12.PROVIDE BLOCKING OR BRIDGING PER LATEST EDITION OF THE C.B.C. 13.ANCHOR BOLTS IN CONTACT WITH PRESSURE TREATED SILL PLATES SHALL BE OF HOT-DIPPED ZINC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL, STAINLESS STEEL, SILICON BRONZE OR COPPER. 14.LAG SCREWS SHALL BE TURNED, NOT DRIVEN, INTO PRE-DRILLED HOLES OF 23 THE SHANK DIAMETER. 15.JOISTS AND RAFTERS FRAMING FROM OPPOSITE SIDES OF BEAMS OR WALLS SHALL HAVE A LAP OF 4" OR MORE AND BE SPLICED WITH 4-16d NAILS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 16.PARALLAM PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER (PSL), MICROLLAM LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER (LVL) AND TIMBERSTRAND LAMINATED STRAND LUMBER (LSL) SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY "WEYERHAEUSER" (ICC ESR-1387, LARR 25202) OR APPROVED EQUAL. PARALLAM BEAMS SHALL BE DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH WITH 2.0E GRADE. PARALLAM COLUMNS SHALL BE DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH WITH 1.8E GRADE. PROVIDE CAMBER WHERE SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS. ALL STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY A LICENSED FABRICATOR. 17.TIE DOWN SYSTEM SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY "SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC." (ICC ESR-2320, LARR 25643). 18.SEISMIC TIES SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY "SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC." (ICC ESR-2613, LARR 25718). 19. HOLD-DOWNS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY "SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC." (IAPMO ER-143, LARR 25828). 20. PROVIDE LEAD HOLE 40% - 70% OF THREADED SHANK DIAMETER AND OF FULL DIAMETER FOR SMOOTH SHANK PORTION. 21.HOLD-DOWN CONNECTOR BOLTS INTO WOOD FRAMING REQUIRE APPROVED PLATE WASHERS; AND HOLD-DOWNS SHALL BE FINGER TIGHT AND 12 WRENCH TURN JUST PRIOR TO COVERING WALL FRAMING. CONNECTOR BOLTS INTO WOOD FRAMING REQUIRE STEEL PLATE WASHERS ON POST ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF ANCHORAGE DEVICE/ PLATE SIZE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 0.299 INCH BY 3 INCHES BY 3 INCHES. 22.ROOF DIAPHRAGM NAILING TO BE INSPECTED BEFORE COVERING. FACE GRAIN OF PLYWOOD SHALL BE PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS. FLOOR SHALL HAVE TONGUE-AND-GROOVE OR BLOCKED PANEL EDGES. PLYWOOD SPANS SHALL CONFORM WITH CBC TABLE 2304.7. 23.ALL DIAPHRAGM AND SHEAR WALL NAILING UTILIZE COMMON NAILS OR GALVANIZED BOX. 15 S3.0 TYP. 1 S2.1 18"∅ CONC. FDN., TYP. 13 S3.0 TYP.CONT. 24" WIDE CONC. CURB FDN, TYP. CONT. 15" WIDE CONC. CURB PER LANDSCAPE DWG., TYP. STONE WALL PER LANDSCAPE DWG., TYP. PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL DL DATE: SET TITLE: PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M AI REE N I G N E L ANOISSEFORPDERETSI G E R ACFOETAT S L I F O NRTCUR T S LAR NO. S5881 EXP. 6-30-25 C.LE E U DIVAD LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 12-11-2023 S2.0 1/4" = 1'-0" STRUCTURAL PLAN N 1STRUCTURAL PLAN CONT. P.T. 4x6 (LOWER) 6'-0" MAX. SPACING, TYP. 3'-0" MAX. CANTILEVER, TYP. 6'-0" MAX. SPACING, TYP. 2x12 STRINGER @ 24" O.C. MAX., TYP. 2x12 STRINGER @ 24" O.C. MAX., TYP. P.T. 2x6 @ 24" (LOW), TYP. U.N.O. 6'-0" MAX. SPACING, TYP. 3'-0" MAX. CANTILEVER, TYP. 3' - 6 " M A X . SP A C I N G , T Y P . 5 S2.1 TYP.6 S2.1TYP. 12" WIDE x 18" DEEP CONC. FDN. 12" WIDE x 18" DEEP CONC. FDN. 2x 6 ( P . T . ) @ 2 4 " O . C . MA X . CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) 2x 6 ( P . T . ) @ 2 4 " O . C . MA X . 2x 6 ( P . T . ) @ 2 4 " O . C . MA X . CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) 4x4 (P.T.) POST, TYP. 12"∅ x 18" DEEP CONC. FDN., TYP. CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) 2x 6 ( P . T . ) @ 2 4 " O . C . MA X . 2x 6 ( P . T . ) @ 2 4 " O . C . MA X . 2x 6 ( P . T . ) @ 2 4 " O . C . MA X . PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL DL DATE: SET TITLE: PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M AI REE N I G N E L ANOISSEFORPDERETSI G E R ACFOETAT S L I F O NRTCUR T S LAR NO. S5881 EXP. 6-30-25 C.LE E U DIVAD LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 12-11-2023 S2.1 1/2" = 1'-0" DECK FRMG. & FDN. PLAN N 1DECK FRAMING AND FOUNDATION PLAN 'D2' - FINISHED BEND DIAMETER FOR STANDARD HOOKS. 'D1' - FINISHED BEND DIAMETER FOR STIRRUP AND TIE HOOKS. 'd' - BAR DIAMETER HOOK LENGTH HOOK LENGTH D1 OR D2 D1 OR D2 HOOK LENGTH STIRRUP & TIE HOOKSBAR SIZE STANDARD HOOK LENGTHS MAIN REINF. 9090 135 BAR SIZE 112"214" 212"33 4" 10"5" 414" 412" 6" 12" 14"7" 6"12" 14"9" #3 #4 #5 #6, #7, #8 #9, #10, #11 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 6" 8" 16" 19" 22" 24" 4" 412" 8" 1012" 12" 13" 4" 412" 6" 16"1012" 8" 6.d 8.d 6.d FINISHED BEND DIAMETERS 2"3" D1 D2 - 180 90° BEND 135° BEND 180° BEND NOTES: SLOPE 1:12 MAX. TYP. U.N.O. CONCRETE STRENGTH NOMINAL BAR SIZE TOP BARS OTHER BARS TOP BARS OTHER BARS TOP BARS OTHER BARS TOP REINF. BOTT. REINF. 112" OR 112" CLR L 12.d L L L 12.d 12" MIN. #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 2'-4" 3'-1" 3'-11" 4'-8" 6'-9" 7'-9" 8'-9" 9'-8" 10'-8"8'-2" 7'-5" 6'-9" 6'-0" 5'-3" 3'-7" 3'-0" 2'-5" 1'-10"2'-0" 2'-8" 3'-4" 4'-0" 5'-11" 6'-9" 7'-7" 8'-5" 9'-3"7'-1" 6'-6" 5'-10" 5'-2" 4'-6" 3'-1" 2'-7" 2'-1" 1'-7"1'-11" 2'-7" 3'-2" 3'-10" 5'-4" 6'-2" 7'-0" 7'-10" 8'-8"6'-8" 6'-0" 5'-5" 4'-10" 4'-2" 2'-11" 2'-6" 2'-0" 1'-6" 2.d MIN. REINFORCEMENT LAP SPLICE LENGTH "Ls" 1.LAP SPLICE LENGTHS PER SCHEDULE SHALL BE FACTORED AS SPECIFIED WHERE THE CONDITIONS LISTED IN THE FOLLOWING NOTES '3', '4' AND '5' APPLY. 2.TOP BARS ARE HORIZONTAL BARS WITH MORE THAN 12 INCHES OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW. 3.WHERE CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN BARS IS LESS THAN 2 BAR DIAMETERS AND/OR THE CLEAR COVER IS LESS THAN ONE BAR DIAMETER, THE LAP SPLICE SHALL BE INCREASED 50%. 4.WHERE CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN BARS IS AT LEAST 4 BAR DIAMETERS AND CLEAR COVER IS AT LEAST 2 BAR DIAMETERS, THE LAP SPLICE MAY BE REDUCED TO 60%. 5.WHERE LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE CONCRETE IS USED, INCREASE LAP SPLICE BY 30%. 6.SPLICES OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT IN WALLS SHALL BE STAGGERED. 7.SPLICES IN WALLS CONTAINING TWO CURTAINS OF REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE STAGGERED. 'd' F'c = 5000 PSIF'c = 4000 PSIF'c = 3000 PSI 112" CLR WALL OR SLAB SPLICE DETAIL BEAM SPLICE DETAIL D1 OR D2 NOTES: TOP BARS OTHER BARS TOP BARS OTHER BARS TOP BARS OTHER BARS NOMINAL BAR SIZE CONCRETE STRENGTH FACE OF CONCRETE Ld Lhb h #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 19" 22" 1'-10" 2'-5" 3'-0" 3'-7" 5'-3" 6'-0" 6'-8" 7'-6" 1'-5" 1'-10" 2'-4" 3'-9" 4'-0" 4'-7" 5'-2" 6'-9" 7" 9" 11" 1'-1" 1'-3" 1'-5" 1'-7" 1'-10" 1'-7" 2'-1" 2'-7" 3'-1" 4'-6" 5'-2" 5'-10" 6'-7" 1'-3" 1'-7" 2'-0" 2'-5" 3'-6" 4'-0" 4'-6" 5'-1" 6" 8" 10" 11" 1'-1" 1'-3" 1'-5" 1'-7" 1'-5" 1'-11" 2'-4" 2'-10" 4'-1" 4'-8" 5'-3" 5'-11" 1'-1" 1'-5" 1'-10" 2'-2" 3'-2" 3'-7" 4'-0" 4'-6" 6" 7" 9" 10" 1'-0" 1'-2" 1'-3" 1'-5" F'c = 3000 PSI F'c = 4000 PSI F'c = 5000 PSI h REINFORCEMENT DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS 1.TOP BARS ARE HORIZONTAL BARS WITH MORE THAN 12 INCHES OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW. STRAIGHT BAR 90° HOOK Ld Ld Ld Lhb Lhb Lhb 18"∅ MIN. 5' - 0 " M I N . 7' - 0 " M A X . , SE E L A N S D C A P E D W G . CONC. FOUNDATION GATE/FENCE POST, HSS4x4x3/8 @ 16'-6" MAX. SPACING PER LANDSCAPE DWG. 4-#4 VERTICAL REINF. W/ EQUAL SPACING 3" CL R . #4 SPIRAL REINF. W/ MAX. 6" PITCH UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL ALL AROUND FOUNDATION 2% MIN. SLOPE DOWN, TYP. 18"∅ MIN. 5' - 0 " M I N . CONC. FOUNDATION GATE/FENCE (7'-0" MAX. HEIGHT) POST W/ FESTOON LIGHTING SUPPORT, HSS4x4x3/8 @ 9'-0" MAX. SPACING PER LANDSCAPE DWG. 4-#4 VERTICAL REINF. W/ EQUAL SPACING 3" CL R . 3" CLR., TYP. #4 SPIRAL REINF. W/ MAX. 6" PITCH UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL ALL AROUND FOUNDATION 12 ' - 0 " M A X . , SE E L A N S D C A P E D W G . 3' - 0 " M I N . 3" CLR., TYP. 3' - 0 " M I N . 6" M I N . 2' - 0 " M A X . , S E E LA N D S C A P E D W G . CONT. CONC. CURB PER PLAN AND LANDSCAPE DWG. CONT. 2-#4 @ 12" MAX. SPACING, TYP. TERMINATE W/ 90° STD. HOOK AND EXTEND MIN. Ld BEYOND EDGE OF STEP IN CURB WHERE OCCURS PER LANDSCAPE DWG. 1'-3" BENT #4 ( ) W. 90° STD. HOOK @12" O.C. AT EA. SIDE OF WALL CONC. FOUNDATION, TYP. 4-#4 VERTICAL REINF. W/ EQUAL SPACING, TYP. #4 SPIRAL REINF. W/ MAX. 6" PITCH, TYP. UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL ALL AROUND FOUNDATION 12"∅ MIN., TYP. 18 " M I N . EM B E D . , T Y P DECKING PER LANDSCAPE DWG. 2x6 (P.T.) PER PLAN W/ GALVANIZED SIMPSON LUS HANGER AT EACH END, TYP. GALVANIZED SIMPSON BCS POST CAP, TYP. GALVANIZED SIMPSON PB POST PASE, TYP. 4x4 POST (P.T.), TYP. DECKING PER LANDSCAPE DWG. 2x6 (P.T.) PER PLAN W/ GALVANIZED SIMPSON LUS HANGER AT EACH END, TYP. GALVANIZED SIMPSON BCS POST CAP, TYP. GALVANIZED SIMPSON PB POST PASE, TYP. 4x4 POST (P.T.), TYP. CONC. FOUNDATION, TYP. 4-#4 VERTICAL REINF. W/ EQUAL SPACING, TYP. #4 SPIRAL REINF. W/ MAX. 6" PITCH, TYP. UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL ALL AROUND FOUNDATION 12"∅ MIN., TYP. 18 " M I N . EM B E D . , T Y P CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) PER PLAN CONT. 4x6 (P.T.) PER PLAN CONT. 3-#4 CONT. CONC. CURB FDN. PER PLAN MIN. 2'-0" MI N . 1' - 0 " MA X . 1' - 0 " PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: DL DL DATE: SET TITLE: PH : 3 1 0 4 6 4 8 4 0 4 19 8 3 W E S T 1 9 0 T H S T R E E T , S U I T E 2 0 0 TO R R A N C E , C A 9 0 5 0 4 WW W . B R E E N D E S I G N . C O M AI REE N I G N E L ANOISSEFORPDERETSI G E R ACFOETAT S L I F O NRTCUR T S LAR NO. S5881 EXP. 6-30-25 C.LE E U DIVAD LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 12-11-2023 S3.0 N.T.S. STRUCTURAL 1TYP. CONC. REBAR HOOKS 2TYP. CONCRETE REBAR OFFSETS AND LAP SPLICES 3TYP. CONC. REBAR DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS DETAILS 5DETAIL 6DETAIL 13TYP. ISOLATED FENCE/GATE POST FOUNDATION 15TYP. FENCE POST FOUNDATION W/ CONT. CONC. CURB PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: SEE QA/QC STAMP SEE QA/QC STAMP DATE:12-11-2023 NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SET TITLE: PROJECT NO.:231-23-002C R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER DE S M O N D MAH O N Y S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IAELECTRICAL NO. E20642 EXP. 03-21-24 COPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUPCOPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUP LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WWW.BREENDESIGN.COM 3825 DEL AMO BOULEVARD PH: 310 464 8404 TORRANCE, CA 90503 DRAWN BY AA DESIGNED BY SG, AA CHECKED BY SG APPROVED BY DM PD F C r e a t e d o n : 12 / 1 1 / 2 3 a t 12 : 5 4 P M b y GR E G D U M D U M Fi l e n a m e : H: \ P R O J E C T S \ 2 3 1 K O R N R A N D O L P H \ 2 3 - 0 0 2 C - A Z U S A P U B L I C L I B R A R Y \ 0 1 - C A D \ E L E C T R I C A L \ E - 0 . 1 E L E C T R I C A L G E N E R A L N O T E S , S Y M B O L S L E G E N D & S H E E T I N D E X . D W G PL O T T E D P A P E R S I Z E ( D R A W I N G H A S B E E N S C A L E D I F D I F F E R E N T ) : AR C H E X P A N D E 1 ( 3 0 . 0 0 X 4 2 . 0 0 I N C H E S ) PL O T S C A L E : 1: 1 PL O T S T Y L E : BR E E N D E S I G N G R O U P . S T B LA S T S A V E D B Y : GD U M D U M E-0.1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LEGEND & SHEET INDEX NONE ELECTRICAL SHEET INDEX SHEET NO.SHEET TITLE CURRENT ISSUE E-0.1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS LEGEND & SHEET INDEX 50% CD PROGRESS E-1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 50% CD PROGRESS E-1.0P ELECTRICAL SITE PHOTOMETRIC PLAN 50% CD PROGRESS EN-1 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS - SHEET ONE 50% CD PROGRESS 1.THE DRAWINGS DESCRIBE THE SYSTEMS. FURNISH ALL MATERIAL AND DO ALL WORK REQUIRED AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NEW MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED TO PRODUCE A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH 2022 EDITION OF THE CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (BASED ON 2020 NEC). 2.CODES AND PERMITS: ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATION, ETC., SHALL CONFORM TO 2022 CITY CODES INCLUDING CALIFORNIA TITLE 24. CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING PARTS OF TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR): TITLE 24, PART 2, CCR (2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE) TITLE 24, PART 3, CCR (2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE) TITLE 24, PART 4, CCR (2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE) TITLE 24, PART 5, CCR (2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE) TITLE 24, PART 9, CCR (2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE) CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS & INSPECTIONS. 3.PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL MATERIALS IN CONFORMANCE WITH 2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (BASED ON 2020 NEC) WITH THE LOCAL CITY AMENDMENTS, ORDINANCES AND LOCAL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE INSPECTING AUTHORITY AND THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 4.FOR PURPOSES OF CLEARNESS AND LEGIBILITY, THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ARE ESSENTIALLY DIAGRAMMATIC. THE SIZE AND LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN TO SCALE WHEREVER POSSIBLE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS. 5.THE SYMBOLS DESIGNATING CONDUIT SIZES AND QUANTITIES OF BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING DO NOT INCLUDE THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR REQUIRED. INSTALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IN ALL CONDUITS, SIZE PER CEC 250.122 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE GREEN. 6.BEFORE SUBMITTING BID, BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ACTUAL EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE BUILDING. THE INTENT OF THE WORK IS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND DESCRIBED HEREINAFTER. BY THE ACT OF SUBMITTING A BID PROPOSAL FOR WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE DEEMED TO HAVE MADE SUCH A STUDY AND EXAMINATION AND TO ACCEPT ALL CONDITIONS PRESENT AT THE SITE. NO REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL PAYMENT SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS VALID, DUE TO FAILURE TO ALLOW FOR CONDITIONS WHICH MAY EXIST. 7.REFER TO ALL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, EXACT EQUIPMENT LOCATION, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS AND MAKE ALL FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED. 8.LOCATIONS OF CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE SHOWN ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT LOCATION, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 9.CONTRACTOR'S BID SHALL BE BASED ON ALL WORK SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL PREMIUM TIME COSTS REQUIRED SHALL BE INCLUDED IN HIS BID. IF CONTRACTOR PROPOSES TO SUBSTITUTE FOR EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED, HE SHALL SUBMIT HIS REQUEST FOR CONSIDERATION TO THE OWNER AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE BID, IN WRITING. ALL SUBSTITUTIONS MUST BE REVIEWED BY THE ENGINEER. SUCH REVIEW SHALL NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM COMPLYING WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE FOR ANY CHANGES RESULTING FROM HIS PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS WHICH MAY AFFECT OTHER PARTS OF HIS OWN WORK OR THE WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTORS. 10.CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE SUITABLE TO CONDUCT CONSTRUCTION WORK. 11.REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION OF ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES, SMOKE DETECTORS AND FIRE ALARM DEVICES. 12.ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW AND SHALL BEAR THE UNDERWRITERS LABEL (UL) AND BE INSTALLED IN THE MANNER FOR WHICH THEY ARE DESIGNED AND APPROVED. 13.ANY SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED MATERIALS REQUIRE WRITTEN NOTIFICATION BY THE CONTRACTOR AND FORMAL APPROVAL BY OWNER REPRESENTATIVE AND/OR THE ENGINEER. 14.SEAL ALL NEW CONDUIT PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS, CEILINGS, FLOORS, ETC., TO MAINTAIN EXISTING FIRE RATING CONDITIONS. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE RATED ENCLOSURES FOR ALL EQUIPMENT PENETRATING INTO FIRE RATED ENVELOPES, SPACES, ETC. 15.WHENEVER CONDUITS PENETRATE A PERIMETER WALL, IT IS TO BE SEALED IN AN APPROVED MANNER. 16.PROVIDE AN ENCLOSURE OF EQUAL FIRE RESISTANT RATING AROUND ALL FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN OR PENETRATING THROUGH FIRE RATED SEPARATIONS. 17.OUTLET BOXES AND PANELS INSTALLED IN FIRE RATED WALLS AND CEILINGS SHALL NOT EXCEED 100 SQUARE INCHES FOR ANY 100 SQUARE FEET OF WALL OR CEILING AREA. INDIVIDUAL OUTLET BOXES OR FIXTURES SHALL BE STEEL AND NOT GREATER THAN 16 SQUARE INCHES. 18.ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS SHALL BE THROUGH ROOF CURB. 19.ISOLATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR INSULATION SHALL BE GREEN WITH A YELLOW STRIPE. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE GREEN. 20.ALL DEVICES INSTALLED OUTSIDE OR SUBJECT TO WATER SPRAY SHALL BE APPROVED FOR WET LOCATION. ALL DEVICES SUBJECT TO VAPORS, STEAM AND MOISTURE SHALL BE APPROVED FOR DAMP LOCATION. FOR WALL MOUNTED OUTLETS EXACT LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS, REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS IF PROVIDED. 21.INSTALL "GFCI" GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLES WITHIN 6 FEET OF A SINK OR ANY AREA SUBJECT TO WATER SPRAY. 22.INSTALL "GFCI" GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLES WITH WEATHERPROOF COVER ON ROOF WITHIN 25 FEET OF "HVAC" EQUIPMENT, MOUNT RECEPTACLE ON UNISTRUT SUPPORT. 23.SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SHALL BE 20 AMP SPECIFICATION GRADE (HUBBELL #5362 AND #1221 OR EQUAL). SPECIAL RECEPTACLES SHALL MATCH EQUIPMENT SERVED. 24.GENERAL DUPLEX CONVENIENCE OUTLETS SHALL BE WHITE COLOR FACEPLATE. 25.DUPLEX CONVENIENCE WITH ISOLATED GROUND TYPE SHALL BE WHITE WITH ORANGE TRIANGLE MARKING. 26.RECEPTACLES ON EMERGENCY POWER SHALL BE COLOR RED. 27.RECEPTACLE COVER PLATES SHALL BE LABELED WITH A LABEL MAKER SHOWING PANEL NAME AND CIRCUIT NUMBER. 28.ALL RESIDENTIAL GRADE GRADE EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES PROVIDED AND INSTALLED SHALL BE ENERGY STAR LABELED IF ENERGY STAR IS APPLICABLE TO THAT EQUIPMENT. 29.ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED COMPLETE WITH ALL NECESSARY HARDWARE, FITTINGS LAMPS AND BALLAST. BALLASTS HARMONICS MAY NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION ALLOWABLE BY THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL UTILITY COMPANY LAMPS SHALL HAVE A CRI RATING OF 80 OR HIGHER. BALLASTS AND FIXTURES SHALL BE C.E.C. CERTIFIED. 30.PROVIDE SUPPORT FOR ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TO COMPLY WITH THE SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENT CALIFORNIA BUILDING AND ELECTRICAL CODES AND LOCAL AUTHORITIES. 31.PROVIDE PENDANT MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURES WITH STEMS OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO CLEAR PIPING AND VENTILATING DUCTS. COORDINATE LOCATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES WITH DUCTS, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS AND LIGHTING FIXTURES. 32.FUSES FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SHALL BE PER NAMEPLATE RATING OF EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED.MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS FOR FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS SHALL BE SQUARE 'D' WITH OVERLOAD PROTECTION. PROVIDE OVERLOAD PROTECTION IN EACH PHASE FOR THREE PHASE MOTORS. 33.PROVIDE NAMEPLATES FOR ALL PANELBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, DISCONNECTS TRANSFORMERS, MOTOR STARTERS, TERMINAL CABINETS AND ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED BY NAME ON DRAWINGS. 34.BUILDING SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING SYSTEM NOT EXCEED EARTH RESISTANCE OF 25 OHMS. 35.PROVIDE ALL ROUGH-IN WORK AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS REQUIRED TO ALL EQUIPMENT. VERIFY EXACT POINT OF CONNECTION AND TYPE OF RECEPTACLES REQUIRED WITH RESPECTIVE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. 36.IN ADDITION TO JUNCTION BOXES INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, INSTALL JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES FOR CABLE SPLICES, CABLE PULLING AND CONNECTIONS NECESSARY FOR THE INSTALLATION OF A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM. JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. LABEL JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES WITH APPROPRIATE DESIGNATION, MAXIMUM (3) 90° BENDS. 37.INSTALLATION OF 600 VOLTS CONDUCTORS, SHALL BE CONTINUOUS BETWEEN OUTLETS OR JUNCTION BOXES. MAKE SPLICES IN OUTLET BOXES, PULLBOXES, GUTTERS AND/OR PANELBOARD. DO NOT SPLICE PANELBOARD FEEDERS. 38.MAIN FEEDER CONDUITS SHALL BE RIGID METAL CONDUITS/ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. STEEL FLEXIBLE CONDUITS FOR SHORT EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS, EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS SUBJECT TO VIBRATIONS AND EQUIPMENT LOCATED OUTSIDE OR SUBJECT TO WATER SPRAY MAKE CONNECTIONS WITH LIQUID-TIGHT CONDUIT AND WEATHERPROOF COMPONENTS, LENGTH IS LIMITED TO SIX FEET, PROVIDE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SIZE PER 2022 CEC TABLE 250-122. 39.PAINT ALL NEW EXPOSED ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS, CABINETS, ENCLOSURES AND FITTINGS TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISHES. EXPOSED CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS CLOSED AS POSSIBLE TO THE CEILING. 40.CONDUIT STUBBED-OUTS AND CONDUIT STUBBED-UPS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH BUSHING ON ENDS. 41.PROVIDE PULL STRING IN EMPTY CONDUITS INSTALLED AS PART OF THIS PROJECT. 42.UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED PROVIDE COPPER CONDUCTORS, MINIMUM SIZE #12 AWG. PROVIDE SOLID CONDUCTORS #10 AWG AND SMALLER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROVIDE STRANDED CONDUCTORS #8 AWG AND LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. USE CONDUCTORS WITH THHN/THWN 600 VOLTS INSULATION FOR SIZES #6 AWG AND SMALLER, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CONDUCTORS #4 AWG AND LARGER SHALL BE THHW INSULATION, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 43.DELIVER ALL CONDUCTORS TO THE JOB SITE IN ORIGINAL UNBROKEN CARTON OR REEL, PROPERLY TAGGED WITH U.L. LABEL, SIZE, MANUFACTURER'S TRADE NAME AND THE DATE MANUFACTURED. 44.IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO MAINTAIN WORK AREA CLEAR OF DEBRIS ON DAILY BASIS DURING CONSTRUCTION. 45.ALL UTILITIES HOOKUPS REQUIRED DURING OFF HOURS WILL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. 46.NO PIPING, DUCTS OR EQUIPMENT FOREIGN TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE LOCATED WITHIN DEDICATED WORKING SPACE OF EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING THE DEDICATED SPACE BETWEEN THE TOP OF EQUIPMENT TO THE STRUCTURAL CEILING ABOVE. ALL FOREIGN INSTALLATION WITHIN THE SPACE (I.E. FIRE SPRINKLER, ETC) SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CEC 2022 110.26(E)(1)(c) THROUGH 110.26 (E)(1)(d). 47.IDENTIFY DATA & COMMUNICATION PULL ROPE OR CABLE AT BOTH ENDS DESIGNATING OPPOSITE TERMINATIONS. 48.USE PLASTIC COATED SELF-STICKING MARKERS SUCH AS THOMAS & BETTS E-Z CODE FOR IDENTIFICATION OF CONDUCTORS AND METAL EDGE BANDED PAPER TAGS ON PULL ROPES. 49.PROVIDE A TYPE WRITTEN PANELBOARD DIRECTORY. 50.FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE DESIGN BUILD. DEFERRED APPROVAL. 51.ALL RECEPTACLES SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH GROUND PLUG UP. 52.ELECTRICAL OUTLETS WITHIN THE ACCESSIBLE UNITS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS: A.ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLE OUTLETS ON BRANCH CIRCUITS OF 30 AMPERES OR LESS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM RECEPTACLES SHALL BE LOCATED NO MORE THAN 48 INCHES MEASURED FROM THE TOP OF THE RECEPTACLE OUTLET BOX NOR LESS THAN 15 INCHES MEASURED FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE RECEPTACLE OUTLET BOX TO THE LEVEL OF THE FINISHED FLOOR OR WORKING PLATFORM. B.IF THE REACH IS OVER A PHYSICAL BARRIER OR AN OBSTRUCTION (FOR EXAMPLE, A KITCHEN BASE CABINET), RECEPTACLES SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THE REACH RANGES SPECIFIED IN SECTION 1138A.3. PHYSICAL BARRIERS AND OBSTRUCTIONS SHALL NOT EXTEND MORE THAN 25 INCHES FROM THE WALL BENEATH THE RECEPTACLE. C.RECEPTACLE OUTLETS THAT DO NOT SATISFY THESE SPECIFICATIONS ARE ACCEPTABLE PROVIDED THAT COMPARABLE RECEPTACLE OUTLETS, THAT PERFORM THE SAME FUNCTIONS, ARE PROVIDED WITHIN THE SAME AREA AND ARE ACCESSIBLE. D.RECEPTACLE OUTLETS INSTALLED AS PART OF PERMANENTLY INSTALLED BASEBOARD HEATERS ARE EXEMPT. E.REQUIRED RECEPTACLE OUTLETS SHALL BE PERMITTED IN FLOORS WHEN ADJACENT TO SLIDING PANELS OR WALLS. F.BASEBOARD ELECTRICAL OUTLETS USED IN RELOCATABLE PARTITIONS, WINDOW WALLS OR OTHER ELECTRICAL CONVENIENCE FLOOR OUTLETS ARE NOT SUBJECT TO MINIMUM HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS. 53.CONTROLS OR SWITCHES WITHIN THE ACCESSIBLE UNITS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS: A.CONTROLS OR SWITCHES INTENDED TO BE USED BY THE OCCUPANT OF THE ROOM OR AREA TO CONTROL LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE OUTLETS, APPLIANCES, ALARMS OR COOLING, HEATING AND VENTILATING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LOCATED NO MORE THAN 48 INCHES MEASURED FROM THE TOP OF THE OUTLET BOX NOR LESS THAN 15 INCHES MEASURED FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE OUTLET BOX TO THE LEVEL OF THE FINISHED FLOOR OR WORKING PLATFORM. B.IF THE REACH IS OVER A PHYSICAL BARRIER OR AN OBSTRUCTION FOR EXAMPLE, A KITCHEN BASE CABINET), SWITCHES AND CONTROLS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THE REACH RANGES SPECIFIED IN SECTION 1138A.3. PHYSICAL BARRIERS OR OBSTRUCTIONS SHALL NOT EXTEND MORE THAN 25 INCHES FROM THE WALL BENEATH A SWITCH OR CONTROL. C.SWITCHES AND CONTROLS THAT DO NOT SATISFY THESE SPECIFICATIONS ARE ACCEPTABLE PROVIDED THAT COMPARABLE CONTROLS OR OUTLETS, THAT PERFORM THE SAME FUNCTIONS, ARE PROVIDED WITHIN THE SAME AREA AND ARE ACCESSIBLE. 54.AT ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS AND APARTMENT UNIT LOAD CENTER (MULTI-CIRCUITS INSTALLATIONS) CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE BREAKERS TIE CUP ON ALL MULTI-BRANCH CIRCUITS USE IN A COMMON HOMERUN CONDUIT RACEWAY INSTALLATION PER CEC 210.4. 55.ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED, LISTED, OR CERTIFIED BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY ACCREDITED BY THE UNITED STATES OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY HEALTH ADMINISTRATION. 56.ELEVATOR INSTALLATIONS AND OPERATIONS IN HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS SHALL COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 30 OF THE BUILDING CODE. 57.MC CABLES SHALL BE INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ARTICLE 330 OF THE N.E.C. 58.ALL 120-VOLT, SINGLE PHASE, 15- AND 20 AMPERE BRANCH CIRCUITS SUPPLYING OUTLETS INSTALLED IN DWELLING UNIT FAMILY ROOMS, DINING ROOMS, LIVING ROOMS, PARLORS, LIBRARIES, DENS, BEDROOMS, SUNROOMS, RECREATION ROOMS, CLOSETS, HALLWAYS, OR SIMILAR ROOMS OR AREAS SHALL BE PROTECTED BY A LISTED ARC-FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER, COMBINATION-TYPE, INSTALLED TO PROVIDE PROTECTION OF THE BRANCH CIRCUIT. 59.ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES INSTALLED OUTDOOR SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF AND IN NEMA ENCLOSURE. 60.ALL 120 VOLT, 15 AND 20 AMPERE RECEPTACLES IN DWELLING UNITS SHALL BE LISTED TAMPER-RESISTANT RECEPTACLES PER CEC 406.12. 61.PROVIDE ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGNS PER 2022 C.B.C. (MAXIMUM SPACING IS 100 FT AND VISIBLE FROM ALL AREAS). 62.PROVIDE WEATHERPROOF GFCI OUTLET AT EACH BALCONY ON A DEDICATED CIRCUIT. 63.EACH OUTLET IN THE BATHROOM AND TWO SMALL APPLIANCE CIRCUIT IN THE KITCHEN COUNTER SHALL BE GFCI TYPE. 64.SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS: A.CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS OF ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES TO BE PROVIDED IN THE PROJECT FOR ENGINEER'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL. SELECTED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MARKED-UP IN THE CUT SHEETS INDICATING THE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS/REQUIREMENT (I.E. VOLTAGE, AMPS, FLA, HP) AND ALL OTHER OPTIONS. B.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A WRITTEN STATEMENT THAT HE/SHE HAS READ AND UNDERSTAND THE DOCUMENTS BEING SUBMITTED. 65.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ANTICIPATE THE NORMAL SHRINKAGE OF THE WOOD FRAMING BOTH DURING CONSTRUCTION AND FOR A PERIOD OF TIME THEREAFTER. IN ORDER TO PREVENT DAMAGE DUE TO SUCH SHRINKAGE, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES SHALL BE TAKEN DURING INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING LINES, GAS LINES AND OTHER ELEMENTS WHICH WOULD BE ADVERSELY AFFECTED BY SHRINKAGE. A.RAFTERS, JOISTS AND PLATES SHALL BE "S" DRY MATERIAL THROUGHOUT. B.PROVIDE SWING JOISTS ON BRANCHES CONNECTING TO RISERS. C.VALVES CONNECTING TO RISERS SHALL BE OF COPPER TUBING INSTALLED SO AS TO PERMIT MOVEMENT OF THE STRUCTURE. D.WHERE PLASTER, DRYWALL OR TILE IS INSTALLED AROUND HORIZONTAL PIPING PROVIDE FOR MOVEMENT BY PROVIDING CLEAR SPACE TO PIPE LINES TO PERMIT DOWNWARD MOVEMENT OF STRUCTURE. E.VENTS SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH DOUBLE FLASHING WHICH WILL PERMIT MOVEMENT WITHOUT COMPROMISING WATER TIGHTNESS OF INSTALLATION. F.PROVIDE HORIZONTAL SCREEDS IN STUCCO AT ELEVATION OF TOP OF FLOOR JOISTS AT SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH FLOORS. 66.AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT. A.MARKING. SERVICE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LEGIBLY MARKED IN THE FIELD WITH MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT. THE FIELD MARKINGS SHALL INCLUDE THE DATE THE FAULT CURRENT CALCULATION WAS PERFORMED ND BE OF SUFFICIENT DURABILITY TO WITHSTAND THE ENVIRONMENT INVOLVED. B.MODIFICATIONS. WHEN MODIFICATIONS TO THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OCCUR, THAT AFFECT THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE SERVICE, THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT SHALL BE VERIFIED OR RECALCULATED AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE THE SERVICE EQUIPMENT INTERRUPTING RATINGS ARE SUFFICIENT FOR THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE LINE TERMINALS OF THE EQUIPMENT. THE REQUIRED FIELD MARKINGS IN A. ABOVE SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO REFLECT THE NEW LEVEL OF MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT. PROVIDE FAULT CURRENT CALCULATIONS THAT SHOW UTILITY CONTRIBUTION AND SHOW ON DRAWINGS FIELD MARKINGS. 67.SERVICE CONDUCTORS SUPPLYING A BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE SHALL NOT PASS THROUGH THE INTERIOR OF ANOTHER BUILDING OR STRUCTURE. THE SEPARATELY METERES AREAS SHALL NOT FEED OTHER SEPARATELY METERES AREAS. 68.ALL INTERIOR UNDERGROUND CONDUITS SHALL BE UNDER THE SLAB. 69.COMMON GROUNDING ELECTRODE. WHERE AN AC SYSTEM IS CONNECTED TO A GROUNDING ELECTRODE IN OR AT A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE, THE SAME ELECTRODE SHALL BE USED TO GROUND CONDUCTOR ENCLOSURES AND EQUIPMENT IN OR ON THE BUILDING OR STRUCTURE. WHERE SEPARATE SERVICES, FEEDERS, OR BRANCH CIRCUITS SUPPLY A BUILDING AND ARE REQUIRED TO BE CONNECTED TO A GROUNDING ELECTRODE(S), THE SAME GROUNDING ELECTRODE(S) SHALL BE USED. TWO OR MORE GROUNDING ELECTRODES THAT ARE BONDED TOGETHER SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS A SINGLE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM IN THIS SENSE. 70.ALL UTILITY CONDUCTORS INCLUDING ELECTRICAL SERVICE, TELEPHONE SERVICE, AND CABLE TELEVISION MUST BE PLACED UNDERGROUND FROM THEIR POINT OF ORIGIN AT THE UTILITY POLE TO THE SERVICES METER OR TERMINATION POINT AT THE STRUCTURE. 71.ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS SWITCHBOARDS, PANEL BOARDS, INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS, METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES, AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, THAT ARE LIKELY TO REQUIRE EXAMINATION, ADJUSTMENT, SERVICING, OR MAINTENANCE WHILE ENERGIZED SHALL BE FIELD MARKED TO WARN QUALIFIED PERSONS OF POTENTIAL ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARDS. THE MARKING SHALL BE LOCATED SO AS TO BE CLEARLY VISIBLE TO QUALIFIED PERSONS BEFORE EXAMINATION, ADJUSTMENT, SERVICING, OR MAINTENANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT. 72.NOT REQUIRED FOR SINGLE-UNIT RESIDENTIAL DWELLINGS, DUPLEXES, OR TOWNHOMES WITHOUT SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS. FIRE ALARM DEVICES AND DETAILS SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL PLANS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. SUBMIT A SEPARATE DRAWING PACKAGE FOR FIRE ALARM REVIEW AND APPROVAL. 73.ALL GARAGE EXIT SIGNS SHALL HAVE AN EXTENSION ROD FROM CEILING TO AVOID LINE OF SIGHT OBSTACLES FROM OTHER TRADES. 74.TESTING AND ADJUSTING. TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEMS SHALL BE REQUIRED FOR NEW BUILDINGS LESS THAN 10,000 SQUARE FEET OR NEW SYSTEMS TO SERVE AN ADDITION OR ALTERATION SUBJECT TO SECTION 303.1 PER CGBSC 5.410.4. A.DEVELOP A WRITTEN PLAN OF PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND ADJUSTING SYSTEMS. SYSTEMS TO BE INCLUDED FOR TESTING AND ADJUSTING SHALL INCLUDE, AS APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT PER CGBSC 5.410.4.2. B.PERFORM TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS ON EACH SYSTEM PER CGBSC 5.410.4.3. C.AFTER COMPLETION OF TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING, PROVIDE A FINAL REPORT OF TESTING SIGNED BY THE INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBLE FOR PERFORMING THESE SERVICES PER CGBSC 5.410.4.4. D.PROVIDE THE BUILDING OWNER OR REPRESENTATIVE WITH DETAILED OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND COPIES OF GUARANTIES/WARRANTIES FOR EACH SYSTEM. O & M INSTRUCTIONS SHALL BE CONSISTENT WITH OSHA REQUIREMENTS IN CCR, TITLE 8, SECTION 5142, AND OTHER RELATED REGULATIONS PER CGBSC 5.410.4.5. E.INCLUDE A COPY OF ALL INSPECTION VERIFICATIONS AND REPORTS REQUIRED BY THE ENFORCING AGENCY PER CGBSC 5.410.4.5.1. GENERAL NOTES 1.OUTDOOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND INSTALLED TO COMPLY WITH ALL OF THE FOLLOWING: a.THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS IN CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE FOR LIGHTING ZONES 1-4. b.BACKLIGHT, UPLIGHT AND GLARE (BUG) RATINGS AS DEFINED IN IESNA TM-15-11 c.ALLOWABLE BUG RATINGS NOT EXCEEDED THOSE SHOWN IN ON TABLE 5.106.8 2.A SEPARATE ELECTRICAL PLAN CHECK IS REQUIRED TO VERIFY THE RACEWAY METHOD(S), WIRING SCHEMATICS AND ELECTRICAL CALCULATIONS FOR THE ELECTRICAL CHARGING SYSTEM. THE RACEWAY SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THE TRADE SIZE 1. 3.THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT CAPACITY TO SIMULTANEOUSLY CHARGE ALL ELECTRIC VEHICLES AT THEIR FULL RATED AMPERAGE. 4.THE SERVICE PANEL OR SUBPANEL(S) SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT CAPACITY TO ACCOMMODATE THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF DEDICATED BRANCH CIRCUIT(S) FOR THE FUTURE INSTALLATION OF THE EVSE. NON-RESIDENTIAL GREEN BUILDING CODE NOTES ACOUSTIC NOTES 1.THERE SHALL BE NO CONTACT BETWEEN ANY SERVICE PENETRATING THE GYPSUM BOARD AND THE GYPSUM BOARD. A GAP SHALL BE MAINTAIN AND SEALED. THIS INCLUDES ALL SERVICES (INCLUDING ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING). THE SEALANT SHALL BE NON-HARDENING. 2.THERE SHALL BE NO CONTACT BETWEEN ANY PENETRATIONS, LIGHT CANS, DUCT RUNS, EXHAUSTS, ETC. AND THE CEILING (ANY LAYER OF MATERIAL). GYPSUM BOARD RECESSED BOXES SHALL NOT BE IN CONTACT WITH CEILING GYPSUM BOARD. GYPSUM BOARD ENCLOSURES SHALL BE INSTALLED FOR EACH ITEM INDIVIDUALLY (E.G. MULTIPLE LIGHTS CANS CANNOT BE IN THE SAME GYPSUM BOARD ENCLOSURE). 3.ELECTRICAL BOXES SHALL BE OFFSET AS REQUIRED IN THE CODE IN DEMISING CONSTRUCTION. 4.ELECTRICAL BOX PADS SHALL BE INSTALLED BEHIND ALL ELECTRICAL BOXES IN DEMISING WALL, CORRIDOR WALL AND FLOOR CEILING ASSEMBLIES. ELECTRICAL BOX PADS SHALL COMPLETELY WRAP THE ELECTRICAL BOXES AND EXTEND TO THE BACK OF THE STRUCTURE OF BUILDING MATERIAL. 5.IN A DEMISING WALL CONDITION, CONDUIT (AND ALL OTHER SERVICES INCLUDING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING) SHALL BE RUN ON THE STUD SIDE SERVED. 6.IN DEMISING WALL, NO SERVICE, WIRE OR CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED INTO THE AIR SPACE BETWEEN THE STUDS. 7.CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FLEXIBLE CONDUIT. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION GROUNDED TYPE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20A NEMA 5-20R, WALL MOUNTED. GROUNDED TYPE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (HALF SWITCH), WALL MOUNTED. GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTED TYPE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, WALL MOUNTED. 20A GFCI WEATHER PROOF RECEPTACLE MOUNTED ON ROOF CEILING MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX, 4S TYPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. TOGGLE SWITCH, +4'-0" SUFFIX ON SWITCH SYMBOLS SHALL INDICATE THE FOLLOWING: NO SUFFIX = SINGLE POLE 2 = 2 POLE 3 = 3 WAY K = KEY OPERATED R = SPOT MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCH P = WITH PILOT LIGHT a,b,c,d, ETC. INDICATES FIXTURE CONTROLLED WALL MOUNTED AUTOMATIC LIGHT MOTION SENSOR ("a,b" WHEN SHOWN INDICATE DUAL SWITCH) - SWITCH WITH PUSH ON AND AUTO OFF AS MFR. BY WATTSTOPPER OR EQUAL. WALL MOUNTED AUTOMATIC HUMIDITY MOTION SENSOR ("x AND H" WHEN SHOWN INDICATE INDIVIDUAL SWITCH AND HUMIDITY RESPECTIVELY) - SWITCH WITH PUSH ON AND AUTO OFF AS MFR. BY WATTSTOPPER OR EQUAL. CEILING MOUNTED AUTOMATIC LIGHT MOTION SENSOR - AUTO ON AND OFF AS MFR. BY WATTSTOPPER OR EQUAL. CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY MOTION SENSOR WITH DIMMING CAPABILITY SWITCH AS MFR. LUTRON OR EQUAL. CEILING MOUNTED SWITCH. 30A,2P OR 60A,2P MOTOR RATED TOGGLE TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCH TO BE MOUNTED ON HVAC/PLUMBING EQUIPMENT. FLEXIBLE CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT. SURFACE MOUNTED CABINET OR EQUIPMENT AS NOTED. FLUSH MOUNTED CABINET OR EQUIPMENT AS NOTED. SURFACE MOUNTED BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD. FLUSH MOUNTED BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD. SWITCHBOARD, DISTRIBUTION BOARD. TELEPHONE PLYWOOD BACKBOARD SIZE AS INDICATED ON PLANS. CONDUIT RUN IN OR BELOW FLOOR SLAB OR UNDERGROUND - 3 4"C. MINIMUM. CONDUIT RUN CONCEALED IN WALL OR ABOVE FINISHED CEILING - 1 2"C. CONDUIT RUN EXPOSED. WIRE SIZE OTHER THAN #12, #10 OR #8 IS NOTED ON EACH CONDUIT RUN WITH SIZE OF CONDUIT (I.E. 3#6 - 1"C.) SEE GENERAL NOTE #42. EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM BRANCH CIRCUITRY CONDUIT RUN. #10 HASH MARKS INDICATES THE QUANTITY OF CONDUCTORS REQUIRED. NO HASH MARKS INDICATES 2 #12 AWG. CONDUCTORS LARGER THAN SIZE #12 AWG ARE INDICATED NEXT TO HASH MARKS. INDICATE HOMERUN TO DESIGNATED PANEL BOARD, SWITCH GEAR, OR SIGNAL CABINET WHEN SHOWN INDICATE THE FOLLOWING: BRANCH CIRCUIT NUMBERS HOUSE PANEL OR DISTRIBUTION PANEL INDICATES REFERENCE TO PANELBOARD 'P1A'. ELECTRICAL FEEDER DESIGNATION. EXHAUST FAN. REFERENCE NOTE DESIGNATION. METERING AND TEST BLOCKS AS REQUIRED BY THE UTILITY SERVING AGENCY. CIRCUIT BREAKER. GROUND. MOTOR (NUMBER INSIDE SYMBOL DESIGNATES HP OF MOTOR). NOTE: FOR ADDITIONAL SYSTEM SYMBOLS AND WIRING LEGEND REFER TO SITE PLANS AND RISER DIAGRAMS. GFC I WP J Sa a x H DIM S Sm #10#10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #8 #8#8 2#12, 1/2"C 3#12, 1/2"C 2#10, 1/2"C 3#10, 1/2"C 2#8, 3/4"C 4#12, 1/2"C 5#12, 3/4"C 4#10, 1/2"C 5#10, 3/4"C 3#8, 3/4"C 6#12, 3/4"C 7#12, 3/4"C 6#10, 3/4"C 7#10, 1"C 4#8, 1"C E HA-1,3,5 HA HA 1 M 1 1.THE SCOPE OF WORK IS LIMITED TO DESIGN LIGHTING, OUTLET LOCATION, WIRING AND CONDUITS. SCOPE OF WORK TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBR SYMBOL @ AT A AMPERES A.F.F.ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR APPARATUS INDICATES SWITCHGEARS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, TRANSFORMERS, ETC. BKBD BACKBOARD CB CIRCUIT BREAKER CEC CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION CKT CIRCUIT C.O.CONDUIT ONLY Ø PHASE OR DIAMETER DN DOWN EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ELEC ELECTRIC OR ELECTRICAL EM.EMERGENCY EQUIP.EQUIPMENT EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (KW RATING AS SHOWN) EXIST.EXISTING FA FIRE ALARM FDR. FEEDER, INDICATES CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS FLA FULL LOAD AMPERES FLUOR.FLUORESCENT GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER AFCI AFCI FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GND GROUND HORIZ.HORIZONTAL HP HORSEPOWER HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING IND.INDICATED INT.INTERIOR JB JUNCTION BOX KVA KILOVOLT AMPERES KW KILOWATT KWH KILOWATT HOUR LCL LONG CONTINUOUS LOAD LOC.LOCATION LTG LIGHTING MECH MECHANICAL MFR.MANUFACTURER MH MOUNTING HEIGHT MIN MINIMUM MTD MOUNTED MTG MOUNTING NA NOT APPLICABLE NF NON FUSIBLE N.L.NIGHT LIGHT N.T.S.NOT TO SCALE PA PUBLIC ADDRESS PB PULLBOX PNL PANEL PROVIDE INDICATED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL PWR.POWER REC. OR RECEPT.RECEPTACLE REQ'D REQUIRED RM ROOM SCHED.SCHEDULE SPKR SPEAKER SQ.FT./SF SQUARE FEET STD.STANDARD SW.SWITCH SWBD SWITCHBOARD SYS.SYSTEM TEL TELEPHONE TRANSF.TRANSFORMER TTB TELEPHONE TERMINAL BACKBOARD TYP.TYPICAL U.O.N.UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED V VOLT VA VOLT AMPERES VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (HP RATED PER MOTOR SIZE) VD VOLTAGE DROP VERT.VERTICAL W WATTS OR WIRE OR WIDE WP WEATHERPROOF 40 41 20 VACATED BFP E RISR AC U N I T613.50I BOX PED TS S S S616.23UP E CAB CO N C G U T T E R EP B G STRU RAMP CO N C C U R B CO N C C U R B WA L K RET WALL UTILITY PAD MEMORIAL PLAQUE AD A PA D PED XING BUTTON GFCI GFCI GFCI GFCI 3 3 1 1 WP GFCI 1 WP WP WP WP EA EA EA EA EA EA EB EB EB EB EB EB EB EB EB EC EC EC EC EC EC EC EC EC ECEC ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED ED EF EF EE EE EE EE EE EE EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EG EH EH EH EH EHEH EH EI T3 GFCI 3 WP GFCI 1 WP GFCI 1 WP T4 T1 T2 GFCI 3 WP GFCI 1 WP 66666 4 4 4 4 4 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 666666 4 4 4 6 6 8 4 4 4 4 44 66 4 200W 6W 200W 200W 6 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 55 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 EI 4 EI 4 EI 4 GENERAL NOTES ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED, LISTED OR CERTIFIED BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY ACCREDITED BY THE UNITED STATES OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY HEALTH ADMINISTRATION. ALL HOME RUNS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE COMBINED WITH LARGER CONDUIT UNLESS SHOWN. EACH SERVICES DISCONNECT SHALL BE PERMANENTLY MARKED TO IDENTIFY IT AS A SERVICE DISCONNECT. 1 2 3 N PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: SEE QA/QC STAMP SEE QA/QC STAMP DATE:12-11-2023 NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SET TITLE: PROJECT NO.:231-23-002C R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER DE S M O N D MAH O N Y S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IAELECTRICAL NO. E20642 EXP. 03-21-24 COPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUPCOPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUP LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WWW.BREENDESIGN.COM 3825 DEL AMO BOULEVARD PH: 310 464 8404 TORRANCE, CA 90503 DRAWN BY AA DESIGNED BY SG,AA CHECKED BY SG APPROVED BY DM PD F C r e a t e d o n : 12 / 1 1 / 2 3 a t 12 : 5 6 P M b y GR E G D U M D U M Fi l e n a m e : H: \ P R O J E C T S \ 2 3 1 K O R N R A N D O L P H \ 2 3 - 0 0 2 C - A Z U S A P U B L I C L I B R A R Y \ 0 1 - C A D \ E L E C T R I C A L \ E - 1 . 0 E L E C T R I C A L S I T E L I G H T I N G P L A N . D W G PL O T T E D P A P E R S I Z E ( D R A W I N G H A S B E E N S C A L E D I F D I F F E R E N T ) : AR C H E X P A N D E 1 ( 3 0 . 0 0 X 4 2 . 0 0 I N C H E S ) PL O T S C A L E : 1: 1 PL O T S T Y L E : BR E E N D E S I G N G R O U P . S T B LA S T S A V E D B Y : GD U M D U M E-1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 3/16" = 1'-0"PP-1 6 --1080 20/11OUTDOOR ELECTRICAL CONVENIENCE OUTLET 900-5220/1 -EXISTING ELECTRICAL LOAD -4 -720 20/13OUTDOOR ELECTRICAL CONVENIENCE OUTLET 10635-420/1 -TRANSFORMER T1 (150W) 7 --189 20/15TRANSFORMER T4 (200W)17823-620/1 -TRANSFORMER T2 (200W) -----7SPARE 1001-820/1 -TRANSFORMER T3 (100W) -----9SPARE 1881-1020/1 -OUTDOOR LIGHTINGS ~VOLTS -AMPS @WATTS OR C=oA=o TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD:124014.43461 926 VA2535 VA MTG. BUSSING ENTER CAB'T. AT MAIN BKR: FEEDER LOCATION WIRE PHASE VOLTS EXISTING PANEL "PP" 125A 3 1 120/240 LOCATION VOLT AMPS REC MIS CIR BKR A Coo oo CA BKR CIR MIS REC OR VOLT AMPS LOCATION LTG LCLLCL OR LTG T/ C C O N T R O L L E V E L RE M A R K \ N O T E S - b c a d (N) (E) (N) (N) (N) RE M A R K \ N O T E S T/ C C O N T R O L L E V E L e - - - - (N) - (N) (N) LCL: FDL: 1650 VA x 125% = 2063 VA 3874 VA OR 16.1 AMPS VA HACR = HACR TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER AFCI = ARC FAULT INTERRUPTING TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKERL/O = PROVIDE LOCK-OFF DEVICE ON CIRCUIT BREAKER GFCI = GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER - PER CEC 220.82 LOAD CALCULATION ALL PANEL BOARD BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS THE FOLLOWING SHALL APPLY:ON ALL MULTI-WIRED HOMERUN CIRCUIT BREAKERS (REFER TO PLANS TO DETERMINE 2 AND/OR 3 HOMERUNS), CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD INSTALL ON ALL MULTI-USE CIRCUIT BREAKERS APPROVED HANDLE TIE (PER CEC 210.4(B))H AIC100 A (E) = EXISTING ELECTRICAL LOADS (N) = NEW ELECTRICAL LOADS -----11SPARE ---1220/1 -SPACE ---- SCALE:13/16" = 1'-0"ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 2LIGHTING FIXTURE AND PANEL SCHEDULE 3EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE PEDESTAL ELEVATION FRONT VIEW 4ELECTRICAL SERVICE PEDESTAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM PP-3 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE SYMBOL MOUNTING LAMP DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER EA STAKE MOUNTED 8W, 12V-15V TREE UPLIGHT SPJ LIGHTING: ALPHA-PVDBZ-8W-3000K-STD FLOOD-HEX LOUVER EB STAKE MOUNTED 3W, 8V-15V ACCENT UPLIGHT - 1 SPJ LIGHTING: SUPER NOVA-PVDBZ-3W-3000K-WIDE FLOOD-HEX LOUVER EC STAKE MOUNTED 2W, 8V-15V ACCENT UPLIGHT - 2 SPJ LIGHTING: MR UNIVERSE-PVDBZ-2W-3000K-STD FLOOD-HEX LOUVER ED STAKE MOUNTED 1W, 12V ACCENT WASH LIGHT SPJ LIGHTING: PINNER-PVDBZ-1W-3000K-WIDE FLOOD-HEX LOUVER EE RECESSED MOUNTED 6W, 12V PATH LIGHT SPJ LIGHTING: SPJ-SGR-PVDBZ-6W-3000K EF DIRECT BURIAL 10W, 12V BOLLARD SPJ LIGHTING: SPJ-34LR-PVDBZ-10W-3000K EG RECESSED MOUNTED 6W, 12V UNDER WATER LIGHT SPJ LIGHTING: SPJ-34LR-PVDBZ-6W-3000K EH STRIP 1.22W/FT, 12V FLEX STRIP LIGHT SPJ LIGHTING: DIODELED NEON BLAZE EI STRING 1W/BULB 120V FESTOON LIGHTING HOMETOWN EVOLUTION: E26 COMMERCIAL STRING LIGHT SET S14 LED FILAMENT BULBS HIGH VOLTAGE LINES EXISTING UTILITY TRANSFORMER MM 100A 2P N G EXISTING GROUND (E) 20A, 2P ELECTRICAL SERVICE PEDESTAL 120/240V, 1Ø, 3W. 100A/2P CIRCUIT BREAKER MAIN PPEXISTING EXISTING POWER COMPANY SERVICE UNDERGROUND (N) 20A, 2P (N) 20A, 2P NEW POWER LOAD EXISTING ELECTRICAL LOAD NEW POWER LOAD 12 5 A , 1 2 0 / 2 4 0 V , 1 Ø , 3 W B R A C E F O R SPARE SPACE PP EXISTING PEDESTAL PANEL EXISTING UTILITY POLE EXISTING UTILITY TRANSFORMER POLE EXISTING UNDERGROUND FEEDER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 (N) 20A, 2P NEW LIGHTING LOAD (N) 20A, 2P NEW LIGHTING LOAD PP-5 PP-8 PP-8 PP-4 (N) 20A, 2P NEW POWER LOAD (N) 20A, 2P NEW LIGHTING LOAD (N) 20A, 2P NEW LIGHTING LOAD EXISTING ELECTRICAL PEDESTAL CABINET UTILITY LANDING LUG COMPARTMENT LOAD CONDUIT SPARE SPARE REFERENCE NOTES PROVIDE ASTRONOMICAL TIMECLOCK TO CONTROL ALL OUTDOOR LIGHTING. 1 1 (TYP.) 40 41 20 VACATED BFP E RISR AC U N I T613.50I BOX PED TS S S S616.23UP E CAB CO N C G U T T E R EP B G STRU RAMP CO N C C U R B CO N C C U R B WA L K RET WALL UTILITY PAD MEMORIAL PLAQUE AD A PA D PED XING BUTTON EF EF EE EE EE EE EE EE EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EH EH EH EH EHEH EH EIEIEIEI 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 1.1 2.7 1.2 2.6 2.2 0.9 1.7 2.6 1.7 0.7 1.8 2.5 2.6 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 1.7 0.7 0.5 0.6 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.2 1.6 4.1 2.9 5.5 4.9 2.7 4.5 4.9 4.7 2.1 4.8 3.7 3.6 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.8 6.4 3.2 4.7 3.1 4.7 3.1 4.7 3.1 4.6 2.6 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.7 2.0 4.4 3.2 4.1 4.0 3.2 4.5 3.0 4.8 2.7 4.4 0.9 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 1.7 1.1 1.6 1.1 1.6 1.1 1.6 1.1 1.6 0.9 0.0 0.0 0.2 1.8 3.0 4.6 3.6 4.4 4.3 3.6 4.9 3.1 4.8 2.7 4.3 0.6 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.6 2.1 4.6 5.0 6.4 6.2 5.7 7.2 5.4 6.5 3.2 4.4 0.6 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 1.8 4.6 4.2 5.6 5.8 5.5 7.2 6.0 8.9 5.3 4.7 0.7 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.4 2.0 4.8 3.4 4.3 4.2 3.6 5.4 3.6 7.5 7.2 5.4 0.7 0.1 0.7 0.9 0.7 0.7 2.5 5.2 3.5 4.1 3.8 3.3 5.5 3.2 6.3 7.2 5.8 0.7 0.1 1.0 1.5 1.4 1.3 3.2 5.6 3.5 4.1 3.9 3.3 4.6 2.8 5.8 6.4 6.3 0.8 0.1 0.6 0.8 1.6 1.8 2.9 5.5 5.1 3.9 4.3 4.8 4.2 3.5 5.0 5.8 5.7 0.8 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.4 4.0 7.4 2.8 4.4 6.9 2.4 5.0 2.9 7.7 5.2 0.8 6.2 4.5 4.9 0.5 2.6 2.0 2.1 0.3 N PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: SEE QA/QC STAMP SEE QA/QC STAMP DATE:12-11-2023 NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SET TITLE: PROJECT NO.:231-23-002C R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER DE S M O N D MA H O N Y S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IAELECTRICAL NO. E20642 EXP. 03-21-24 COPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUPCOPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUP LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WWW.BREENDESIGN.COM 3825 DEL AMO BOULEVARD PH: 310 464 8404 TORRANCE, CA 90503 DRAWN BY AA DESIGNED BY SG,AA CHECKED BY SG APPROVED BY DM PD F C r e a t e d o n : 12 / 1 1 / 2 3 a t 12 : 5 4 P M b y GR E G D U M D U M Fi l e n a m e : H: \ P R O J E C T S \ 2 3 1 K O R N R A N D O L P H \ 2 3 - 0 0 2 C - A Z U S A P U B L I C L I B R A R Y \ 0 1 - C A D \ E L E C T R I C A L \ E - 1 . 0 P E L E C T R I C A L S I T E P H O T O M E T R I C P L A N . D W G PL O T T E D P A P E R S I Z E ( D R A W I N G H A S B E E N S C A L E D I F D I F F E R E N T ) : AR C H E X P A N D E 1 ( 3 0 . 0 0 X 4 2 . 0 0 I N C H E S ) PL O T S C A L E : 1: 1 PL O T S T Y L E : BR E E N D E S I G N G R O U P . S T B LA S T S A V E D B Y : GD U M D U M E-1.0P ELECTRICAL SITE PHOTOMETRIC PLAN 3/16" = 1'-0" LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE SYMBOL TYPE QUANTITY TOTAL LUM. WATTS NO. LAMPS MANUFACTURER MOUNTING HEIGHT EE 6 6W, 12V 1 SPJ LIGHTING RECESSED MOUNTED @ MH=9' EF 10 10W, 12V 10 SPJ LIGHTING POLE MOUNTED @ MH=10' EH 7 1.22W/FT, 12V 7 SPJ LIGHTING STRIP LIGHT MOUNTED @ MH=9' EI 200 1W/BULB, 120V 200 HOMETOWN EVOLUTION STRIP LIGHT MOUNTED @ MH=9' PHOTOMETRIC CALCULATION SUMMARY LABEL CALC. TYPE UNITS AVG.MAX.MIN.AVG./MIN.MAX./MIN. SITE PLAN ILLUMINANCE FC 2.66 8.9 0.0 N.A N.A NORTH WALKWAY ILLUMINANCE FC 1.75 2.6 0.3 5.83 8.67 SOUTH WALKWAY ILLUMINANCE FC 1.34 1.7 0.9 1.49 1.89 PROJECT TITLE SHEET TITLE CHECKED: DRAWN BY: REVISIONS SCALE: SHEET N0. STAMP: SEE QA/QC STAMP SEE QA/QC STAMP DATE:12-11-2023 NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SET TITLE: PROJECT NO.:231-23-002C R E G ISTER E D P R O F E SSION A L E N G I N E ER DE S M O N D MAHO N Y S T A TEOF C A L I F O R N IAELECTRICAL NO. E20642 EXP. 03-21-24 COPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUPCOPYRIGHT ©2023 BREEN DESIGN GROUP LIBRARY AZUSA CITY AZUSA, CALIFORNIA 729 NORTH DALTON AVENUE 91702 OUTDOOR LEARNING SPACE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WWW.BREENDESIGN.COM 3825 DEL AMO BOULEVARD PH: 310 464 8404 TORRANCE, CA 90503 DRAWN BY - DESIGNED BY - CHECKED BY - APPROVED BY DM PD F C r e a t e d o n : 12 / 1 1 / 2 3 a t 12 : 5 4 P M b y GR E G D U M D U M Fi l e n a m e : H: \ P R O J E C T S \ 2 3 1 K O R N R A N D O L P H \ 2 3 - 0 0 2 C - A Z U S A P U B L I C L I B R A R Y \ 0 1 - C A D \ E L E C T R I C A L \ E N - 1 T I T L E 2 4 C O M P L I A N C E F O R M S - S H E E T O N E . D W G PL O T T E D P A P E R S I Z E ( D R A W I N G H A S B E E N S C A L E D I F D I F F E R E N T ) : AR C H E X P A N D E 1 ( 3 0 . 0 0 X 4 2 . 0 0 I N C H E S ) PL O T S C A L E : 1: 1 PL O T S T Y L E : BR E E N D E S I G N G R O U P . S T B LA S T S A V E D B Y : JM E N O R EN-1 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS - SHEET ONE NONE